MY22_MB_OM_NoMMS_w

Your Operator's Manual
Vehicle document walle

wallett in the
the vehicle
vehicle
Here you can nd information on operation, service work and the guarantee for your
vehicle in printed form.
Sprinter
Operating Instructions
Sprinter Operating Instructions
É9075849508MËÍ
9075849508
Order no. T907 0332 13 Part no. 907 584 95 08 Edition A-2022
Mercedes-Benz
Co-driv
Co-dr iver's
er's airbag war
warning
ning Publication details
details
Internet
Inter net
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles
and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the
following websites:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com
https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team
Documentation team
© Daimler VANS USA, LLC
© Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla-

ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from
Mercedes‑Benz AG.
Vehicle manufactur
manufacturer
er
Mercedes‑Benz AG
Mercedesstraße 120
70372 Stuttgart
Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada Germany
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co- Vehicle dealers

driver airbag is enabled Daimler VANS
VANS USA,
USA, LLC
LLC
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the
co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver Sandy Springs, GA 30328
airbag during an accident. https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint http://www.mbsprinterusa.com
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT Customer Assistance Center:
AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur. 1-877-762-8267
Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, ON M4G 4C9
https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Customer Relations Department:
1-800-387-0100
Daimler VANS USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz Can-
ada, Inc. are Daimler AG enterprises.
Canada only: "Authorized Sprinter Dealer" is
de ned as an authorized Mercedes-Benz Sprinter
Dealer.
As at 04.12.20
Welcome to to the
the wor
world
ld of Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz
Before you rst drive o , read these Operating
Instructions carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehi-
cle life, follow the instructions and warning notices
in these Operating Instructions. Disregarding them
may result in damage to the vehicle or environ-
ment or in personal injury.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to observe the
instructions is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
The standard equipment and product description
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol-
lowing factors:
R Model
R Order
R National version
R Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce

changes in:
R Design
R Equipment
R Technical features
Therefore, the description may di er from your

vehicle in some cases.
The following documents are integral parts of the
vehicle:
R Printed Operating Instructions
R Maintenance Booklet
R Equipment-dependent supplements
Always keep these documents in the vehicle. If you

sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to
the new owner.
Daimler VANS USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
9075849508
9075849508
2 Contents
Electrical step ............................................ 59

Symbols ....................................................... 4 Side window .............................................. 60
Anti-the prevention .................................. 63
At a glance ................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................ 6 Seats and stowstowag agee ..................................... 66
Instrument cluster ........................................ 8 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi-
Overhead control panel .............................. 11 tion ............................................................ 66
Door control panel ..................................... 16 Seats ......................................................... 66
Emergencies and breakdowns .................... 18 Steering wheel ........................................... 78
Stowage areas ........................................... 78
General
Gener al notes
notes ............................................ 20 Information about the bottle holder ............ 79
Environmental protection ........................... 20 Cup holders ............................................... 79
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts .................... 20 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 80
Notes about attachments, add-on Sockets ...................................................... 80
equipment, installations and conver- Installing or removing the oor mats ........... 81
sions .......................................................... 21
Operating Instructions ................................ 22 Light and vision .......................................... 83
Service and vehicle operation ..................... 22 Exterior lighting .......................................... 83
Operating safety ......................................... 23 Adjusting the interior lighting ...................... 86
Declarations of conformity and notes on Changing bulbs .......................................... 88
driving in di erent countries ....................... 24 Windshield wipers ...................................... 93
Diagnostics connection .............................. 25 Mirrors ....................................................... 95
Notes on changes to the engine output ...... 26
Quali ed specialist workshop ..................... 26
Vehicle registration .................................... 26 Climate control
Climate control .......................................... 97
Correct use of the vehicle .......................... 27 Overview of climate control systems ........... 97
Multi-purpose vehicle ................................. 27 Operating climate control systems ............. 98
Notes for persons with electronic medi- Operating air vents ................................... 101
cal aids ...................................................... 27 Auxiliary heating ....................................... 102
Information on problems with your vehi- Operating cargo compartment ventila-
cle ............................................................. 27 tion .......................................................... 104
"Reporting safety defects" .......................... 27
Limited Warranty ........................................ 28
QR codes for rescue card ........................... 28 Driving and parking
Driving parking .................................. 105
Data storage .............................................. 28 Driving ..................................................... 105
Copyright ................................................... 32 Battery main switch ................................. 117
Automatic transmission ............................ 118
All-wheel drive .......................................... 121
Occupant safety
safety ......................................... 33 Electronic level control ............................. 123
Restraint system ........................................ 33 Refueling .................................................. 127
Seat belts .................................................. 34 Parking .................................................... 134
Airbags ...................................................... 37 Driving and driving safety systems ............ 138
Automatic measures a er an accident ........ 39 Work mode .............................................. 157
Safely transporting children in the vehi- Trailer operation ....................................... 158
cle ............................................................. 39
Notes on pets in the vehicle ....................... 46
Instrument
Instr ument Display
Display and on-board
on-board com-
puter
puter ........................................................ 164
Opening and closing ................................... 47 Overview of Instrument Display ................ 164
SmartKey ................................................... 47 Overview of the buttons on the steering
Doors ........................................................ 49 wheel ....................................................... 165
Sliding door ............................................... 52 Operating the on-board computer ............ 165
Electric sliding door .................................... 53 Overview of what is shown on the multi-
Rear-end doors .......................................... 56 function display ........................................ 166
Partition sliding door .................................. 58
Contents 3
Setting the instrument lighting .................. 166 Vehicle identi cation plate, vehicle iden-
Menus and submenus .............................. 167 ti cation number (VIN) and engine num-
ber ........................................................... 237
Operating uids and capacities ................ 239
Mercedes me ........................................... 170
Mercedes Vehicle data ............................................. 247
Mercedes me calls ................................... 170 Trailer hitch .............................................. 248
Mercedes me connect ............................. 171 Cargo tie-down points and carrier sys-
tems ........................................................ 252
Transpor
ansporting
ting ............................................. 173
Notes on loading guidelines ...................... 173 Displayy messages
Displa messages and war warning
ning and indi-
Load distribution ...................................... 174 cator lamps
cator lamps .............................................. 254
Securing loads ......................................... 174 Display messages ..................................... 254
Carrier systems ........................................ 176 Indicator and warning lamps ..................... 274
Placing a load on the wheel arch .............. 176
Indexx ....................................................... 284

Inde
Maintenance and care
Maintenance care .............................. 178
ASSYST PLUS service interval display ....... 178
Engine compartment ................................ 178
Cleaning and care .................................... 186
Breakdown
Breakdo wn assistance
assistance .............................. 192
Emergency ............................................... 192
Emergency Call System ............................ 192
Flat tire .................................................... 193
Battery ..................................................... 194
Towing or tow-starting .............................. 200
Electrical fuses ......................................... 204
Vehicle tool kit ......................................... 205
Hydraulic jack .......................................... 206
Wheels and tires tires ...................................... 208

Information on noise or unusual driving
characteristics ......................................... 208
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels
and tires .................................................. 208
Information on driving with summer
tires ......................................................... 208
Information on M+S tires .......................... 209
Notes on snow chains .............................. 209
Tire pressure ............................................ 210
Loading the vehicle .................................. 216
Tire labeling ............................................. 219
Information on de nitions (tires and
loading) .................................................... 222
Changing a wheel ..................................... 223
Spare wheel ............................................. 231
Tec
echnical
hnical data
data .......................................... 236
Notes on the technical data ...................... 236
On-board electronics ................................ 236
4 Symbols
In these Operating Instructions, you will nd the

following symbols:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Danger due to not observing the
warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards
that may endanger your health or life, or the
health or life of others.
# Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIRONMENTAL AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe environ-
mental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behavior or envi-
ronmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to

observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks
which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or

further information that could be helpful to
you.
# Instructions
(/ Further information on a topic
page)
Display Display in the multifunction display/
media display
4 Highest menu level to be selected in the
multimedia system
5 Corresponding submenus to be selected
in the multimedia system
* Indicates a cause
6 At a glance – Cockpit
1 Combination switch H Opens and closes the electric → 53

→ sliding door
Turn signals 84
I Hazard warning light → 84
High beam → 84
J Vehicles with KEYLESS START: → 106
Windshield wipers → 93
key slot
Rear window wiper → 94 K
USB port → 78
2 Steering wheel buttons → 165 L
Start/stop button → 106
3 DIRECT SELECT lever → 118 M
Right-hand switch panel
4 Inside rearview mirror → 96
Activates/deactivates all-wheel → 122
5 Overhead control panel → 86 drive
6 Device installation frame, e.g. Engages/disengages LOW → 123
for mounting a tachograph or RANGE
the switch clock for the station- →
Activates/deactivates DSR 146
ary heater
Raises/lowers the vehicle level → 124
7 Sun visor
Activates/deactivates power
8 Device installation frame
take-o
9 Front passenger storage com- →
Activates/deactivates working 157
partment or tachograph housing
speed control (ADR)
A Front passenger window li er → 60
Activates/deactivates cargo → 104
B Central locking system → 50 compartment ventilation
C Storage compartment cover → 205 Activates/deactivates the bea-
con
D Cup holders
N Steering wheel gearshi pad- → 120
E Climate control system → 97 dles
F 12 V socket → 80 O Opens the hood → 178
G 230 V socket P Le -hand switch panel
At a glance – Cockpit 7
Sets the working speed (ADR) → 158 S Seat heating → 77

Q Light switch Central locking system → 50
Headlamp range adjuster T Driver's window li er → 60
R Adjusts the driver's seat → 68
8 At a glance – Instrument cluster
Instrument display (color dis- D # Electrical malfunction → 282

play) →
E Coolant temperature indicator 282
1 Speedometer → 164 and ? coolant too hot
2 ÷ ESP® → 275 F ! Electric parking brake → 275
→ (yellow)
3 · Distance warning 281
G 6 Restraint system → 33
4 ü Seat belt not fastened → 281
H K High beam → 84
5 #! Turn signal lights → 84
I L Low beam → 83
6 Multifunction display → 275
J T Parking lamps → 83
7 h Tire pressure loss warning → 275
lamp K Fuel level indicator and Ë → 282
→ fuel reserve with fuel ller cap
8 ; Check Engine 282
location indicator
9 % Preglow and malfunction →
L N Fog light 83
in preglow system
M R Rear fog light → 83
A Tachometer → 164
N J Brakes (yellow) → 275
B F and ! (USA) or ! → 275
(Canada) Parking brake applied O ! ABS malfunction → 275
(red) →
P å ESP® deactivated 275
C $ and J (USA) or J → 275
(Canada) Brakes (red)
At a glance – Instrument cluster 9
Instrument display (black and e (white) Lane Keeping → 155

white display) with steering Assist active and ready to issue
wheel buttons warnings and e (red) Lane
1 Speedometer → 164 Keeping Assist issuing a warn-
ing
2 ÷ ESP® → 275
7 ; Check Engine → 282
3 · Distance warning → 281 8
% Preglow and malfunction
4 ü Seat belt not fastened → 281 in preglow system
5 #! Turn signal lights → 84 9 Tachometer
6 Display of indicator and warning A F and ! (USA) or ! → 275
lamps (Canada) Parking brake applied
(red)
1 At least one door is not
completely closed B $ and J (USA) or J → 275
→ (Canada) Brakes (red)
h Tire pressure loss 275
C 6 Reserve fuel → 282
Ð Electric power steering → 281
malfunction D DEF supply low → 129
# Electrical malfunction → 282 E + LOW RANGE active → 123
G SOS emergency call sys- F ! Electric parking brake → 275
tem (Mercedes-Benz emergency (yellow)
call system) G Multifunction display → 275
æ Active Brake Assist → 144 H 6 Restraint system → 33
switched o
I K High beam → 84
é ATTENTION ASSIST → 153
switched o J L Low beam → 83
· Lane Keeping Assist inac- → 157 K T Parking lamps → 83
tive L N Fog light → 83
_ Highbeam Assist → 85
M R Rear fog light → 83
10 At a glance – Instrument cluster
N J Brakes (yellow) → 275

O ! ABS malfunction → 275
På ESP® deactivated → 275
At a glance – Overhead control panel 11
Version 1 of the overhead control panel

1 Sun visors 7 w Switches the rear interior
lighting on/o
2 Breakdown assistance call but-
ton (Mercedes PRO connect/ 8 p Switches the right-hand
Mercedes me connect) reading light on/o
3 Ì Activates/deactivates → 64 9 ËSwitches the tow-away → 64
interior motion sensor alarm on/o
Activates/deactivates the bus A Glasses compartment
interior lighting
B G SOS emergency call sys-
4 p Switches the le -hand tem
reading light on/o
C ATA indicator lamp
5 | Switches automatic light
control on/o
6 c Switches the front interior
lighting on/o
12 At a glance – Overhead control panel

1 Sun visors 5 w Switches the rear interior
lighting on/o
2 p Switches the le -hand
reading light on/o 6 p Switches the right-hand
reading light on/o
control on/o
4 c Switches the front interior
lighting on/o

1 Sun visors 3 c Switches the front interior → 64
lighting on/o
control on/o 4 w Switches the rear interior
lighting on/o
14 At a glance – Overhead control panel

1 Sun visors
2 Switches the interior lighting
on/o
Overhead control panel for vehicles with bus equipment

1 Sun visors 6 c Switches the front interior
lighting on/o
2 F Breakdown assistance
call button 7 w Switches the rear interior → 86
lighting on/o
3 i Activates/deactivates the → 86
bus function 8 p Switches the right-hand
reading light on/o
4 p Switches the le -hand
reading light on/o 9 Switches reading lights in the → 86
passenger compartment on/o
5 | Switches automatic light → 86
control on/o A Glasses compartment
16 At a glance – Door control panel
Door control panel of vehicles with electrically adjustable seat

1 To adjust the outside mirrors → 95 5 To operate the memory function → 71
2 To unlock/lock the central lock- → 50 6 To open a door → 50
ing system →
7 To open/close the right-hand 60
3 To switch seat heating on/o → 77 side window
4 To adjust the front seats elec- → 69 8 To open/close the le -hand → 60
tronically side window
At a glance – Door control panel 17
Door control panel of vehicles without electrically adjustable seat

1 To adjust the outside mirrors → 95 5 To open/close the right-hand → 60
→ side window
2 To switch seat heating on/o 77
6 To open/close the le -hand → 60
3 To unlock/lock the central lock- → 50
side window
ing system
4 To open a door → 50
18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
5 Hazard warning lights → 84

1 Checking and topping up oper- → 239
ating uids 6 QR code for accessing the res- → 28
→ cue card
Starting assistance 195
7 To disconnect the starter bat- → 197
2 Buttons for the SOS emergency → 193
tery
call system and roadside assis-
tance 8 Fuel ller ap with instruction → 127
→ labels for tire pressure, fuel type
3 Warning lamp 192
and QR code for accessing the
Safety vest → 192 rescue card
First-aid kit (so sided) → 192 9 Flat tire → 193
4 Vehicles with rear-wheel drive: → 206
hydraulic jack and tire-change
tool kit
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 19
A Spare wheel (example) → 231

20 General notes
Envir
Environment
onmental
al protection
protection Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz Genuine Par
Parts
ts
+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIRONMENTAL AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental + ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and damage due to not using recycled recondi-
personal driving style tioned components
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly Mercedes‑Benz AG o ers recycled recondi-
related to the vehicle's operation. tioned components and parts with the same
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally quality as new parts. The same entitlement
responsible manner to help protect the envi- from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new
ronment. Please observe the following recom- parts.
mendations on operating conditions and per- # Use recycled reconditioned components
sonal driving style. and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG.
Operating
Oper ating conditions:
# Make sure that the tire pressures are * NOTE The e ectiveness of the restraint
always correct. systems can be impaired by installing
# Do not transport any unnecessary weight
accessory parts, performing repairs or
welding operations
(e.g. a roof rack which is no longer
required). Airbags, Emergency Tensioning Devices as well
# Observe the service intervals. as control units and sensors for the restraint
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- systems can be installed in the following areas
ute to environmental protection. of the vehicle:
# Always have maintenance work carried R Door frames
out at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Roof frames
R Doors
Per
ersonal
sonal driving
driving sty
style:
le:
# Do not depress the accelerator pedal
R Door pillars
when starting the engine. R Door sills
# Do not warm up the engine while station- R Seats
ary. R Cockpit
# Drive carefully and maintain a su cient R Instrument cluster
distance to other vehicles. R Center console
# Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking. # Do not install any accessories such as
# Shi gears in good time and use each
audio systems in these areas.
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine # Do not perform repairs or welding opera-
speed. tions.
# Switch o the engine when in stationary # Have accessory parts installed at a quali-
tra c for a prolonged time. ed specialist workshop.
# Drive in a fuel-e cient manner. Pay
If you use parts, tires, wheels or safety-relevant
attention to the ECO display for a fuel- accessories which have not been approved by
e cient driving style. Mercedes-Benz , the operating safety of the vehi-
cle may be jeopardized. Safety-relevant systems,
Environment
Envir onmental
al issues and recommendations
recommendations e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use
It is recommended to re-use and recycle substan- Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts or parts of equal
ces instead of immediately disposing of them. quality. Use only tires, wheels and accessories that
The relevant environmental guidelines and regula- are approved for your vehicle model.
tions serve to protect the environment and should Mercedes-Benz tests original parts, conversion
be followed carefully. parts and accessory parts that have been
approved for your vehicle model for reliability,
safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market
General notes 21
research, we are unable to assess other parts. We & WARNING Risk of accident and injury in
therefore accept no responsibility for the use of the event of improper conversions or
such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they changes to the vehicle
have been o cially approved or independently
approved by a testing center. Conversions or changes to the vehicle can pre-
vent systems or components from functioning
In some other countries, certain parts are only o -
properly and/or jeopardize the vehicle's
cially approved for installation or modi cation if
operational safety.
they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-
Benz Genuine Parts satisfy these requirements. # Always have conversions or changes to
Make sure that all parts are suitable for your vehi- the vehicle carried out at a quali ed
cle. workshop.
Always specify the vehicle identi cation number
If you intend to make changes to your vehicle,
(VIN) and the engine number when ordering
Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (/ page 237).
contact the dealer. They will give you all the infor-
mation you need. There may be a charge for this
Notes about attac
attachments,
hments, add-on equipment,
equipment, service.
installations and conver
installations conversions
sions If body manufacturers and dealers make modi ca-
tions that a ect the nal inspection of the engine,
Notes on body/equipment
Notes body/equipment mounting directiv
directives
es vehicle or equipment, they must accept sole
For safety reasons, have add-on equipment pro- responsibility for the vehicle. This also applies to
duced and installed in accordance with the valid marking and documenting the vehicle parts a ec-
Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directed by the changes that they make.
tives. These body/equipment mounting directives
You are responsible for ensuring and providing evi-
ensure that the chassis and add-on equipment
form one unit and that the greatest possible level dence that the following conditions are met:
of operational and driving safety is achieved. R The vehicle complies with all relevant stand-
Both vehicle manufacturers and body manufactur- ards and regulations that are a ected by the
ers must always ensure that the products they modi cation.
manufacture come into circulation only in a safe R The modi ed vehicle still meets the vehicle
state and do not pose any risks to people. Other- safety standards and emissions laws and regu-
wise, there may be consequences under civil, crim- lations.
inal or public law. All manufacturers are responsi- R The modi cation does not impair the safety of
ble for the products that they have manufactured. the vehicle.
Manufacturers of attachments, add-on equipment,
installations and conversions must guarantee com- Mercedes-Benz is not responsible for the nal
pliance with Directive 2001/95/EC on general inspection, product liability or warranty claims
product safety. resulting from modi cation. This applies to the fol-
Mercedes-Benz recommends the following proce- lowing points:
dure for safety reasons: R The modi ed components or systems
R Do not make any other changes to the vehicle. R The resultant violation of emissions laws and
R Obtain approval from the dealer named on the regulations or vehicle safety standards
inside title page in the event of deviations from R All consequences resulting from the modi ed,
the approved body/equipment mounting direc- less safe or even faulty vehicle
tives.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility as nal
Acceptance tests performed by public test bodies manufacturer or for the resultant product liability.
or o cial approvals do not rule out safety risks.
Notes on the
the radiat
radiator
or
Observe the information about Mercedes-Benz Even seemingly minor changes to the vehicle, such
Genuine Parts (/ page 20). as attaching a radiator grille in winter, are not per-
% You can obtain further information at a quali- mitted. Do not cover the radiator. Do not use any
ed specialist workshop. thermal mats, insect protection covers etc.
22 General notes
Otherwise, the values of the vehicle's diagnostic Service

Ser vice and vehicle
vehicle operation
operation
system will be distorted. Some of these values are
prescribed by law and must be correct at all times. Warr
arranty
anty
Notes on the
the cargo
cargo compar
compartment
tment oor The Limited Warranty for your vehicle is in accord-
The factory equips the vehicle with a wooden or ance with the warranty terms and conditions in the
plastic cargo compartment oor; this is an integral Service and Warranty Information booklet.
part of the vehicle structure. If you have the cargo Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace
compartment oor removed, the vehicle body may and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance
be damaged. Load securing will then be impaired with the terms of the following warranty terms and
and the maximum loading capacity of the tie-down conditions:
points will no longer be guaranteed. Therefore, do R New Vehicle Limited Warranty
not have the cargo compartment oor removed.
R Exhaust System Warranty
Notes on the
Notes the partition
par tition R Emission Systems Warranty
Without a partition, vehicles that are approved as
R California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts,
commercial vehicles (N1, N2) do not ful ll
ISO 27956, which describes the equipment for New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Ver-
properly securing a load in delivery vehicles. If the mont Emission Control System Warranty
vehicle is used to transport goods, retro tting the R State Warranty Enforcement Laws ("Lemon
partition is strongly recommended, as properly Laws")
securing the load in vehicles without a partition will
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by
always be a complex operation.
the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories Warran-
ties.
Operating Instr
Operating Instructions
uctions These are available at any authorized Mercedes-
These Operating Instructions describe all models, Benz Center.
as well as standard and optional equipment of your % Should you lose your Service and Warranty
vehicle that was available at the time of going to Information booklet, have an authorized
press. Country-speci c di erences are possible. Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with ment. The new Service and Warranty Informa-
all functions described. This is also the case for tion booklet will be posted to you.
systems and functions relevant to safety. There-
fore, the equipment on your vehicle may di er
Vehicle operation
operation outside the
the USA
USA or Canada
from that in the descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement documentation When you are traveling abroad with your vehicle,
for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems in observe the following points:
your vehicle. R service points or replacement parts may not
Should you have any questions concerning equip- be available immediately.
ment and operation, consult an authorized R unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic con-
Mercedes-Benz Center. verter may not be available. Leaded fuel can
The Operating Instructions and Maintenance Book- cause damage to the catalytic converter.
let are important documents and should be kept in R the fuel may have a considerably lower octane
the vehicle. number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine
damage.
Note on vehicles
Note vehicles which
which are
are equipped
equipped byby body man-
ufactur
uf acturers
ers Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available in
Always observe the body manufacturer's Operating Europe through the European Delivery Program.
Instructions. You could otherwise fail to recognize For more information, please consult an authorized
dangers. Mercedes-Benz Center, or write to one of the fol-
lowing addresses:
In the
the USA:
USA:
Daimler VANS USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
General notes 23

Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Maintenance infor
information
mation
Operating
Oper ating safety
safety
Your customer service advisor will record every
service for you in the Service and Warranty Infor- & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal-
mation booklet.
functions or system failures
To avoid malfunctions or system failures:
Infor
Information
mation on Roadside
Roadside Assistance
Assistance
# Always have the prescribed service and
Roadside Assistance o ers technical help in the maintenance work as well any required
event of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free repairs carried out at a quali ed special-
Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our ist workshop.
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-877-762-8267 (USA) & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) incorrect modi cations on electronic com-
You can nd further information in the Roadside ponent parts
Assistance brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis- Modi cation of electronic components, their
tance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet so ware or wiring could impair their function
(Canada). You will nd both in the vehicle docu- and/or the function of other networked com-
ment wallet. ponent parts or safety-relevant systems.
This can endanger the operating safety of the
Infor
Information
mation on changing
changing address
address or owner
owner vehicle.
# Never tamper with the wiring and elec-
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Noti cation of Address Change" in the tronic component parts or their so ware.
Service and Warranty Information booklet or sim- # You should have all work on electrical
ply call the Customer Assistance Center (USA) at and electronic components carried out
the hotline number 1-877-762-8267 or Customer at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This way, if
necessary, we can reach you in a timely fashion. Observe the "Vehicle electronics" section in "Tech-
nical data".
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire
literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the & WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle,
materials on hot parts of the exhaust sys-
please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used
tem
Car" in the Service and Warranty Information book-
let or call the Customer Assistance Center (USA) Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
at the hotline number 1-877-762-8267 or Cus- twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. hot parts of the exhaust system.
# When driving on unpaved roads or o -
Possible danger
danger due to
to substances
substances hazardous
hazardous to road, regularly check the vehicle under-
health side.
# Remove trapped plants or other amma-
In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the ble material, in particular.
following detachable label has been added to each
vehicle sold in California:
24 General notes
# If there is damage, consult a quali ed Radio equipment

equipment approv
approval
al number 920508B
specialist workshop immediately. Country Radio equipment
Radio equipment approv
approval
al infor
informa-
ma-
tion
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving
Ukraine
too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle
underbody or suspension components
In the following situations, in particular, there is
a risk of damage to the vehicle: Supplier number: 16833352
R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road
Radio operating
operating permit
permit for
for wireless
wireless central
central locking
locking
R The vehicle is driven too fast over an obsta-
cle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pothole Radio equipment
equipment approv
approval
al numbers
numbers 920510A
R A heavy object strikes the underbody or Country Radio equipment
approval
al infor
informa-
ma-
suspension components tion
In situations such as these, damage to the Indonesia 60598/SDPPI/2019
body, underbody, suspension components,
Supplier number: 16833352
wheels or tires may not be visible. Components
damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, Radio frequency: 433.47 -
in the case of an accident, may no longer 434.37 MHz
absorb the resulting force as intended.
Pakistan Approved by PTA
If the underbody paneling is damaged, amma-
TAC No. 9.287/2020
ble materials such as leaves, grass or twigs
can collect between the underbody and the
underbody paneling. These materials may
ignite if they come into contact with hot parts
of the exhaust system. Serbia И005 20
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a quali ed specialist
workshop.
or
# If driving safety is impaired while continu- Vietnam C0290181218AF04A2
ing your journey, pull over and stop the Supplier number: 16833352
vehicle immediately, while paying atten-
tion to road and tra c conditions, and Radio frequency: 433.47 -
contact a quali ed specialist workshop. 434.37 MHz
Declarations of confor
Declarations conformity
mity and notes
notes on driving
driving
in di erent
erent countr
countries
ies
Radio operating
operating permits
permits for
for the
the roof
roof antenna
antenna
Radio equipment
equipment approv
approval
al number 920508A
Country Radio
R adio equipment
equipment approval
approval infor
informa-
ma-
tion
Ukraine
Supplier number: 16833352

General notes 25
Radio operating
operating permit
permit for
for head unit interference, and (2) These devices must accept
any interference, including interference that may
Radio equipment
equipment approv
approval
al numbers
numbers for
for Connect 5 cause undesired operation of the device".
Country Radio equipment
approval
al infor
informa-
ma- USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devices
tion (Model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): This
Device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules."
Indonesia 61671/SDPPI/2019/7163
The name and address of the responsible party is:
peiker acustic GmbH
Max-Planck-Str. 28-32
61381 Friedrichsdorf
Dilarang melakukan perubahan Germany
spesi kasi yang dapat menimbul-
kan gangguan sik dan/atau elek-
tromagnetik terhadap lingkungan Diagnostics
Diagnos tics connection
sekitarnya
The diagnostics connection is a technical interface
in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the con-
text of repair and maintenance work or for reading
out vehicle data by a specialist workshop. Diagnos-
tic devices should therefore only be connected by
a quali ed specialist workshop.
Radio operating
operating permit
permit of transmitt
transmitter
er key
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con-
Radio equipment
equipment approv
approval
al number DC12B and necting devices to the diagnostics connec-
DC12K tion
Country Radio equipment
approval
al infor
informa-
ma- If you connect devices to the diagnostics con-
tion nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle
systems and operating safety may be impaired.
Serbia DC12B: И005 20 20 # For safety reasons, we recommend that
P1620124700 you only use and connect products
DC12K: И005 20 P1620124800 approved by your authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects

vehicle installed
installed radio
radio components
components in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road safety
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply of the vehicle.
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
to the following two conditions: 1) These devices so that they cannot get into the driver's
may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These footwell.
devices must accept any interference received, # Always install the oor mats securely and
including interference that may cause undesired as prescribed in order to ensure that
operation.Changes or modi cations not expressly there is always su cient room for the
approved by the party responsible for compliance pedals.
could void the user’s authority to operate the # Do not use loose oor mats and do not
equipment."
place oor mats on top of one another.
Kanada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
ply with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause
26 General notes
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devi- loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and other
ces connected to the diagnostics connec- warranty entitlements.
tion If you sell the vehicle, inform the buyer of any alter-
ations to the vehicle's engine output. This may
Using devices at the diagnostics connection constitute a punishable o ense under national leg-
drains the battery. islation.
# Check the charge level of the battery.
# If the charge level is low, charge the bat-

tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis- Quali ed specialis
specialistt work
workshop
shop
tance. A quali ed specialist workshop has the necessary
special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly
carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This
particularly applies to work relevant to safety.
Always have the following work on the vehicle car-
ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop:
R Safety-relevant works
R Service and maintenance work
R Repair work
R Modi cations as well as installations and con-
versions
R Work on electronic components
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
The connection and use of another device on the

diagnostics connection can have the following Vehicle regis
registr
tration
ation
e ects: Mercedes-Benz may ask its service center to carry
R Malfunctions in the vehicle system
out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The
quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a
R Permanent damage to vehicle components result of the inspection.
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle
regarding this. checks if it Mercedes-Benz has your registration
In addition, connecting equipment to the diagnos- data.
tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring In the following cases your vehicle may not be reg-
information being reset, for example. This may lead istered to you yet:
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of R you did not purchase your vehicle at an author-
the next emissions inspection during the main ised specialist dealer.
inspection.
R your vehicle has not yet been inspected at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on chang
changes
es to
to the
the engine output It is advisable to register your vehicle with an
Output increases can: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
R Change the emission values. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about
R Lead to malfunctions. any change in address or vehicle ownership.
R Result in consequential damage. You can do this, for example, at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The operating safety of the engine is not guaran-
teed in all situations.
Any tampering with the engine management in
order to increase the engine output will lead to the
General notes 27
Correct use of the

Correct the vvehicle
ehicle For this reason, the following can occur in isolated
cases, depending on the aids used:
If you remove warning stickers, others may fail to
recognize the dangers. Leave warning stickers in R Medical aids malfunctioning
position. R Adverse health e ects
Observe the following information in particular Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac-
when operating the vehicle: turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the
R Safety notes in these Operating Instructions device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is
R Technical data for the vehicle continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility
of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG
R Tra c rules and regulations
recommends using only a few electrical vehicle
R Laws pertaining to motor vehicles and safety systems and/or maintaining an appropriate dis-
standards tance from the components.
Only have repairs and maintenance work in the
Multi-purpose
Multi-pur pose vehicle
vehicle area of the following components carried out by a
quali ed specialist workshop:
& WARNING Risk of accident when the cen- R Vehicle components carrying live voltage
ter of gravity is too high R Transmission antenna
The vehicle may start to skid and rollover in the R Multimedia system and sound system
event of sudden steering maneuvers and/or
when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a
road conditions. quali ed specialist workshop.
# Always adapt your speed and driving
style to the vehicle's driving characteris- Infor
Inf ormation
mation on problems
problems with
with your
your vehicle
vehicle
tics and to the prevailing road and
weather conditions. If you should experience a problem with your vehi-
cle, particularly one that you believe may a ect its
Utility vehicles have a signi cantly higher rollover safe operation, we urge you to contact an author-
rate than other types of vehicles. ized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the problem diagnosed and recti ed.
Unsafe operation of the vehicle can result in an
accident or rollover, as well as serious or even fatal If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction,
injuries. please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter again or write to one of the following
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signi - addresses.
cantly more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. In the
the USA:
USA:
You and all vehicle occupants should always wear Daimler VANS USA, LLC
seat belts. Customer Assistance Center
Notes for
for persons
persons with
with electronic
electronic medical aids Sandy Springs, GA 30328
Despite careful development, Mercedes-Benz AG In Canada:
cannot completely rule out the interaction of vehi- Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
cle systems with electronic medical aids such as Customer Relations Department
cardiac pacemakers.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
In addition, there are components built into the
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of
your vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par
with permanent magnets. These elds can be "Repor
"Reporting
ting safe
safety
ty defects"
defects"
found, for example, in the area around the multi-
media and sound system or also in the seating USA
US A only:
area, depending on the vehicle equipment. The following text is published as required of man-
ufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal
28 General notes
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Limited

Limited Warr
Warranty
anty
Tra c and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which * NOTE
NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, violation of these operating instructions.
you should immediately inform the National High-
way Tra c Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation
tion to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. of these operating instructions.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open Such damage is not covered by either the Limi-
an investigation, and if it nds that a safety defect ted Warranty or the new or used-vehicle war-
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall ranty.
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot # Observe the instructions in these operat-
become involved in individual problems between ing instructions on proper operation of
you, your dealer, or Mercedes\-Benz USA, LLC. your vehicle as well as regarding possible
Für Übersetzung: To contact NHTSA, you may call vehicle damage.
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to
https://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- QR codes for
for rescue
rescue card
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, The QR code stickers are a xed to the B-pillar on
DC 20590, USA. the driver's and co-driver's side. In the event of an
You can nd more information on vehicle safety at: accident, emergency services can use the QR
https://www.safercar.gov code to quickly determine the corresponding res-
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card
Canada only: contains, in compact form, the most important
The following text is published as required of man- information about your vehicle e.g. the routing of
ufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor electric cables.
Vehicle Safety Regulations. Further information can be obtained at https://
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform Transport Canada
in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. Dataa stor
Dat storage
age
If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it Dataa processing
Dat processing in the
the vehicle
vehicle
may open an investigation, and if it nds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may Electronic control
Electronic control units
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Electronic control units are installed in your vehi-
Transport Canada cannot become involved in indi- cle. Control units process data which, for example,
vidual problems between you, your dealer, or they receive from vehicle sensors, generate them-
Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. selves or exchange between themselves. Some
control units are required for the safe operation of
To contact Transport Canada, you may call the
your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such
Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free
as driver assistance systems, while others enable
in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in
comfort or infotainment functions.
the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; may
also go to the following websites for more informa- The following provides you with general informa-
tion: tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Addi-
tional information regarding exactly which data in
R English: www.tc.gc.ca/recalls
your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted
R French: www.tc.gc.ca/rappels to third parties, and for what purpose, can be
found in the information directly related to the
functional characteristics in question in their
respective operating instructions. This information
is also available online and, depending on the vehi-
cle equipment, digitally.
General notes 29
Per
ersonal
sonal data Depending on the technical equipment, the follow-
Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle iden- ing data are stored:
ti cation number. Depending on the country, this R Operating status of system components, such
vehicle identi cation number can be used by, for as ll levels, tire pressure or battery status
example, governmental authorities to determine
R Malfunctions or faults in important system
the identity of the owner. There are other possibili-
ties for using data collected from the vehicle to components, such as lights or brakes
identify the owner or driver, such as the license R System reactions in special driving situations,
plate number. such as airbag deployment or the intervention
Therefore, data generated or processed by control of stability control systems
units may be attributable to a person or, under cer- R Information on events in which the vehicle is
tain conditions, become attributable to a person. damaged
Depending on which vehicle data are available, it
In certain cases, it may be required to store data
may be possible to make inferences about, for
that would have otherwise been temporary. This
example, your driving behavior, your location, your
may be the case if the vehicle has detected a mal-
route or your use patterns.
function, for example.
Legal
Leg al req
requir
uirements
ements reg
regar
arding
ding the
the disclosure
disclosure of If you use services, such as repair services and
data maintenance work, stored operational data as well
If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in as the vehicle identi cation number can be read
individual cases, legally obliged to provide govern- out and used. They can be read out by service net-
mental entities, upon request and to the extent work employees, such as workshops and manufac-
required, data stored by the manufacturer. For turers or third parties, such as breakdown serv-
example, this may be the case during the investiga- ices. The same is true in the case of warranty
tion of a criminal o ense. claims and quality assurance measures.
Governmental entities are themselves, in individual In general, the readout is performed via the legally
cases and within the applicable legal framework, prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in
authorized to read out data from the vehicle. In the the vehicle. The operational data that are read out
case of an accident, information that can help with document technical states of the vehicle or of indi-
an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the vidual components and assist in the diagnosis of
airbag control unit, for example. malfunctions, compliance with warranty obliga-
tions and quality improvement. To that end, these
Operational
Oper ational data
data in the
the vehicle
vehicle
data, in particular information about component
This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle,
loads, technical events, malfunctions and other
which have been processed by control units.
malfunctions may be transmitted along with the
This includes the following data, for example: vehicle identi cation number to the manufacturer.
R Vehicle status information such as the speed, In addition, the manufacturer is subject to product
longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also
number of wheel revolutions or the fastened uses operational data from the vehicle, for exam-
seat belts display ple, for recalls. These data can also be used to
R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain
examine the customer's warranty and guarantee
claims.
sensor or distance sensor
Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be reset
Generally, these are volatile data and will not be by a service outlet or at your request as part of
stored beyond the period of operation but will only repair or maintenance work.
be processed within the vehicle itself. Control
units, vehicle keys for example, o en contain data Convenience
Conv enience and infot
infotainment
ainment functions
memories. Their use permits the temporary or per- You can store convenience settings and individual
manent documentation of technical information settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at
about the vehicle's operating state, component any time.
loads, maintenance requirements and technical
events or malfunctions.
30 General notes
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes any, depends on the speci c app and the operat-
the following settings, for example: ing system of your smartphone.
R Seat and steering wheel positions
R Suspension and climate control settings Online services
ser vices
R Individual settings, such as interior lighting Wirireless
eless netw
networ
orkk connection
Depending on the selected equipment, you can If your vehicle has a wireless network connection,
import data into vehicle infotainment functions data can be exchanged between your vehicle and
yourself. other systems. The wireless network connection is
made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes and receiver or by a mobile end device that you
the following data, for example: have brought into the vehicle, for example, a
R Multimedia data, such as music, lms or pho- smartphone. Online functions can be used via this
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia wireless network connection. This includes online
system services and applications/apps provided to you by
R Address book data for use in an integrated the manufacturer or by other providers.
hands-free system or an integrated navigation Manufacturer's
Manufactur er's own
own services
ser vices
system Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the
R Entered navigation destinations individual functions are described by the manufac-
R Data on the use of Internet services turer in a suitable place, for example, in the Oper-
ating Instructions or on the manufacturer's web-
These data for convenience and infotainment func- site, where the relevant data protection informa-
tions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they tion is also given. Personal identi cation data may
may be located on a device which you have con- be used to provide online services. Data is
nected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manu-
ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these facturer's designated IT systems. Any personal
data yourself, you can delete them at any time. data which are collected, processed and used,
This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third other than for the provision of services, is done so
parties only at your request. This applies, in partic- exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is
ular, when you use online services in accordance the case, for example, for a legally prescribed
with the settings that you have selected. emergency call system, a contractual agreement
or when consent has been given.
Smartphone
Smar tphone integr
integration
ation (e.g. Android
Android Aut
Autoo or
You can have services and functions, some of
Apple CarPlay®) which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva-
If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you can ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and
connect your smartphone or another mobile end services, such as an emergency call system.
device to the vehicle. You can then control them by
means of the control elements integrated in the Ser vices of thir
Services thirdd parties
par ties
vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound can If you use online services from other providers
be output via the multimedia system. Simultane- (third parties), these services are the responsibility
ously, speci c items of information are transferred of the provider in question and subject to that pro-
to your smartphone. Depending on the type of vider's data protection conditions and terms of
integration, this includes position data, day/night use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no
mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more in uence on the content exchanged.
information, please consult the vehicle Operating For this reason, when services are provided by
Instructions/infotainment system. third parties, please ask the service provider in
This integration allows the use of selected smart- question for information about the type, extent and
phone apps, such as navigation or music player purpose of the collection and use of personal data.
apps. There is no additional interaction between
the smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active Onboard Logic Unit
Onboard Unit (OLU)
(OLU)
access to vehicle data. The type of additional data The Onboard Logic Unit (OLU) is available to com-
processing is determined by the provider of the mercial customers.
app being used. Which settings you can make, if It contains control units, including antennas for
connection via wireless networks, that permit the
General notes 31
exchange of data between your vehicle and other The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
systems. The control units can be used in conjunc- data as:
tion with service provided by a third party. Under R How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
certain circumstances, these services may alter ating;
the basic con guration of the vehicle and could
a ect the performance of certain vehicle func- R Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
tions. belts were buckled/fastened;
For further information about speci c services, R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
read the operating instructions of the third-party accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
provider. For further information about the R How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Onboard Logic Unit, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
If you, yourself, do not own and are not responsi- injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
ble for the vehicle, you may not know the current your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
status of the Onboard Logic Unit. For further infor- occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
mation concerning the services which are cur- normal driving conditions and no personal data
rently active, including any data which may be (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
being processed as de ned by the GDPR, please recorded. However, other parties such as law
contact the person responsible for the vehicle. enforcement could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
Dataa protection
Dat protection rights
rights acquired during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to
Depending on your country or the equipment and
read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special
range of functions of your vehicle as well as the
equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle
services you use and the services on o er, you are
manufacturer, other parties that have the special
entitled to di erent data protection rights. Further
equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the
information on data protection and your data pro-
information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR.
tection rights can either be found on the manufac-
turer's website or you will receive this information EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters
as part of the various services and service o ers. as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident
There, you will also nd the contact information for claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data
the manufacturer and its data protection o cer. Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from
the EDR is commercially available, Daimler Vans
At a workshop, for example, with the support of a
USA, LLC ("DVUSA") expressly disclaims any and
specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data
all liability arising from the extraction of this infor-
read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
DVUSA will not share EDR data with others without
Event
Event Data
Data Recor
Recorders
ders the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle
USA
US A only:
only: is leased, without the consent of the lessee.
Exceptions to this representation include respon-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
ses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal,
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
state or local government; in connection with or
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
arising out of litigation involving DVUSA or its sub-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
sidiaries and a liates; or, as required by law.
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint
designed to record data related to vehicle dynam- System Module. Tampering with, altering, modify-
ics and safety systems for a short period of time, ing or removing the EDR component may result in
typically 30 seconds or less. a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and
other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that con-
ict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This
means that in the event of such con ict, the fed-
eral regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17
states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
32 General notes
Copyr
Copyright
ight
Infor
Information
mation on free
free and open-source
open-source so ware
ware
Information on license for free and open-source
so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the
data storage medium in your vehicle document
wallet and with updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource.
Infor
Information
mation on regist
register
ered
ed trademarks
trademarks
R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
R DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trade-
marks of Daimler AG.
R HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen-
tex Corporation.
R iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R Burmester® is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R Microso ® and Windows Media® are regis-
tered trademarks of Microso Corporation.
R SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
R HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
Occupant safety 33
Res
estr
traint
aint system
system Limitations of the
Limitations the protection
protection provided
provided by
by the
the
res
estr
traint
aint system
system
Protection
Protection provided
provided by
by the
the res
restr
traint
aint system
system
The restraint system includes the following compo- & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
nents: modi cations to the restraint system
R Seat belt system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected
R Airbags as intended if alterations are made to the
restraint system.
R Child restraint system
# Never alter the parts of the restraint sys-
R Child seat securing systems
tem.
The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle # Never tamper with the wiring or any elec-
occupants from coming into contact with parts of tronic component parts or their so ware.
the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In
the event of an accident, the restraint system can If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accommo-
also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu- date a person with disabilities, contact a
pants are subjected. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for details.
Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can pro- USA only: contact our Customer Assistance Center
vide the intended level of protection. Depending on at 1‑877‑762‑8267.
the detected accident situation, seat belt tension-
ers and/or airbags supplement the protection
o ered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt ten- Res
estr
traint
aint system
system functionality
sioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per-
accident. formed, during which the 6 restraint system
Vehicles with a co-driver bench seat: the seat belt warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a
tensioner on the co-driver seat is triggered few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The com-
whether or not the seat belt tongue is engaged in ponents of the restraint system are then func-
the seat belt buckle. tional.
In order for the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant Res
estr
traint
aint system
system malfunction
must observe the following information:
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system
R Fasten seat belts correctly. in the following cases:
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does
back against the seat backrest. not light up when the vehicle is switched on.
R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi- R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
ble. up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
R Always secure persons under 5 (1.50 m) tall
in an additional restraint system suitable for & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
this vehicle. tions in the restraint system
However, no system available today can completely Components in the restraint system may be
eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident activated unintentionally or not deploy as plan-
situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag ned in an accident.
generally do not protect against objects penetrat- # Have the restraint system checked and
ing the vehicle from the outside. It is also not pos- repaired immediately at a quali ed spe-
sible to completely rule out the risk of injury cialist workshop.
caused by the airbag deploying.
34 Occupant safety
Function of the
the res
restr
traint
aint system
system in an accident # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
How the restraint system works is determined by quali ed specialist workshop as soon as
the severity of the impact detected and the type of possible.
accident anticipated:
For your safety and that of your passengers, it is
R frontal impact recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a
R rear impact quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident.
R side impact Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt
tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.
R overturning or rollover
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air-
The activation thresholds for the components of bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small
the restraint system are determined based on the amount of powder may also be released:
evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari- R the bang will not generally a ect your hearing.
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the R in general, the powder released is not hazard-
components of the restraint system should take ous to health but may cause short-term breath-
place in good time at the start of the collision. ing di culties to persons su ering from
asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
a er a collision has occurred cannot play a deci- Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide immediately or open the window in order to
an indication of airbag deployment. prevent breathing di culties.
The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without Airbags and pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners con-
an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only tain perchlorate material, which may require spe-
parts which are relatively easily deformed are cial handling or environmental protection meas-
a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not ures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal
high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even must be observed. In California see https://
though the vehicle su ers only minor deformation. dtsc.ca.gov/. You can use the search function to
If very rigid vehicle parts, such as longitudinal nd information on perchlorate, for example.
members, are hit, the vehicle deceleration may be
high enough for this to happen.
Depending on the detected deployment situation, Seat belts
the components of the restraint system can be Protection
Protection provided
provided by
by the
the seat belt
activated or deployed independently of each other: Always fasten your seat belt correctly before start-
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear ing a journey. Only a seat belt which is worn cor-
impact, side impact1), overturning, rollover rectly can provide the intended level of protection.
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal
impact & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
R Side airbag: side impact
R Window airbag: side impact, overturning, roll-
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function.
over, frontal impact
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
1) Only when the vehicle is tted with a side airbag
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
or window airbag. event of an accident or when braking or chang-
ing direction suddenly.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
components
have their seat belts fastened correctly
The air bag parts are hot a er an air bag has and are sitting properly.
been deployed.
# Do not touch the air bag parts. Always observe the instructions about the correct
driver's seat position and adjusting the seat
(/ page 66).
Occupant safety 35
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide Limitations of the
Limitations the protection
protection provided
provided by
by the
the seat
the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- belt
pant must observe the following information:
R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an
tightly and snugly across the body. incorrect seat position
R The seat belt must be routed across the center The seat belt does not o er the intended level
of the shoulder and as low down across the of protection if you have not moved the seat
hips as possible. backrest to an almost vertical position.
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should In particular, you could slip beneath the seat-
not touch your neck nor be routed under your belt and become injured.
arm or behind your back. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter your journey.
coat. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible in an almost vertical position and that
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul- the shoulder belt is routed across the
der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt center of your shoulder.
across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular care & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
with this. additional restraint systems are not used
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- for persons with a smaller stature
ted, abrasive or fragile objects. Persons under 5 (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear
R Only one person should use each seat belt at the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi-
any one time. Infants and children must never tional restraint system.
travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. # Always secure persons under 5
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys-
seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's tem.
occupants. Always observe the instructions for
loading the vehicle when securing objects, lug- & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
gage or loads (/ page 173). damaged or modi ed seat belts
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are Seat belts cannot provide protection in the fol-
ever placed between a person and the seat. lowing situations:
The seat belts on the following seats are equipped R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
with a special seat belt retractor: ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R Co-driver seat R The seat belt buckle is damaged or
R Rear seats extremely dirty
R Modi cations have been made to the
Activate or deactivate the special seat belt retrac- Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt
tor of the seat belt (/ page 42). anchorage or seat belt retractor
If children are traveling in the vehicle, always
observe the instructions and safety notes on "Chil- Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
dren in the vehicle" (/ page 40). an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Modi ed Emergency Tensioning Devices could
accidentally trigger or fail to function as inten-
ded.
# Never modify the seat belt system, for
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,
36 Occupant safety
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt

anchorage and seat belt retractor.
# Make sure that the seat belts are undam-
aged, not worn and clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked
immediately a er an accident at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts which have been approved for

your vehicle by the sales organization named on
the inside front cover.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from

deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
ing Devices
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corre-
that have been deployed are no longer opera- sponding seat.
tional and are unable to perform their intended
# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and
protective function.
slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired posi-
# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
tion.
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi-
# Let go of the seat belt outlet release and
ately replaced at a quali ed specialist
workshop. ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into posi-
tion.
For your safety and that of your passengers, it is % Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can
recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a provide the intended level of protection.
quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. Observe the notes on fastening the seatbelt
(/ page 34).
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat
belt * NOTE
NOTE Deployment of components of the
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it restraint system when the front passenger
may become trapped in the door or in the seat seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buck-
mechanism. led
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is When the front passenger seat is unoccupied
fully retracted. and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is
engaged in the seat belt buckle, components
of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa-
Fast
astening
ening and adjusting
adjusting seat belts rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device.
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat
# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be
pulled out any further.
% Observe the notes on stowage areas
(/ page 173).
Information on installing a child restraint sys-
tem and on children traveling in the vehicle
can be found in the "Children in the vehicle"
section (/ page 41).
Occupant safety 37
Releasing the
the seat belt Possible protection of each airbag:
# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle R Driver's airbag, co-driver airbag: head and rib-
and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt cage
tongue. R Window curtain airbag: head
R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis
Function of the
the seat belt war
warning
ning system
system for
for driv
driver
er
and co-driv
co-driver
er & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-
driver airbag is enabled
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument
Display reminds you that all vehicle occupants If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the
must fasten their seat belts correctly. co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver
airbag during an accident.
The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
seconds each time the vehicle is switched on. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
A warning tone may also sound. AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
A er the vehicle is started, the seat belt warning CHILD can occur.
goes out as soon as the driver's and the co-driver
seat belts are fastened. When installing a child restraint system on the co-
While driving, the seat belt warning lights up in the driver seat, observe the vehicle-speci c informa-
following cases: tion (/ page 44). Also be sure to observe the
notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child
R If the vehicle's speed is higher than 15 mph
restraint systems on the co-driver seat.
(25 km/h) and the driver's or co-driver's seat
belt is not fastened
R If the driver or co-driver unfasten their seat belt
Protection
Protection provided
provided by
by the
the airbags
during the journey Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
may supplement the protection o ered by a cor-
rectly fastened seat belt.
Airbags
Over
Overvie
view
w of airbags & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an
incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot perform its intended protec-
tive function.
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the
following:
R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to ensure
that the lap belt never lies across the abdo-
men.
1 Driver's airbag R Adopt the correct seat position and keep
2 Window curtain airbag as far away as possible from the airbags.
3 Co-driver airbag R Observe the following information.
4 Side airbag
# Always make sure that there are no
An airbag's installation location is identi ed by the objects between the airbag and vehicle
AIRBAG label. occupant.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
38 Occupant safety
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of Limitations

Limit ations of the
the prot
protection
ection provided
provided by
by airbags
an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the
following information in particular: & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca-
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat tions to the cover of an airbag
correctly; both the driver's and co-driver seat If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x
should be moved as far back as possible. objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
When doing so, always observe the information no longer function correctly.
on the correct driver's seat position # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
(/ page 66). do not a x objects to it.
R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully An airbag's installation location is identi ed by the
deployed. AIRBAG label (/ page 37).
R Always lean against the seat backrest when
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards
the use of unsuitable seat covers
or against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the air- Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags can-
bags. not protect vehicle occupants as intended.
R Always keep your feet on the oor. Do not put # Only use seat covers that have been
your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet approved for your vehicle by the sales
may otherwise be in the deployment area of organization named on the inside front
the airbag. cover.
R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe
the additional notes (/ page 40). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
R Always stow and secure objects correctly. tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air- due to modi cations or incorrect work per-
bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occu- formed on the doors or door trim, or if the
pant must always make sure of the following in doors are damaged.
particular:
# Never modify the doors or parts of the
R There are no people, animals or objects doors.
between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. # Always have work on the doors or door
R There are no objects between the seat, door trim carried out at a quali ed specialist
and door pillar (B-pillar). workshop.
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile airbag
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup hold-
A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protec-
ers, attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
tion.
ment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on
# Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed
the door, on the side window or on the side
trim. specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retaining straps must be routed or Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an airbag. Always comply with the
accessory manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable
places for installation.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
Occupant safety 39
Aut
utomatic
omatic measures
measures a er an accident To improve protection for children younger than 12
years old or under 5 (1.50 m) in height,
Depending on the type and severity of the acci-
Mercedes-Benz recommends you always observe
dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment,
the following notes:
the following measures can be implemented, for
R Always secure the child in a child restraint sys-
example:
tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
R Automatic braking (post-collision brake)
R The child restraint system must be appropriate
R Activating the hazard warning lights
to the age, weight and size of the child.
R Triggering an automatic emergency call R The vehicle seat must be suitable for installing
(/ page 192) a child restraint system.
R Switching o the engine
Accident statistics show that children secured on
To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition o the rear seats are generally safer than children
and switch it back on (/ page 106). Depend- secured on the front seats. For this reason
ing on the type and severity of the accident, it Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a
may possible that the vehicle can no longer be child restraint system on a rear seat.
started.
R switching o the fuel supply The gener
generic
ic ter
termm child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
R Unlocking the vehicle doors The generic term child restraint system is used in
this set of Operating Instructions. A child restraint
R Lowering the front side windows
system is, for example:
R Switching on the interior lighting
R a baby car seat
Function of the
the post-collision
post-collision brake
brake R a rearward-facing child seat
Depending on the accident situation, the post-col- R a forward-facing child seat
lision brake can minimize the severity of a further
collision or even avoid it. R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guides
If an accident has been detected, the post-collision
brake can implement automatic braking. When the The child restraint system must be appropriate to
vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric park- the age, weight and size of the child.
ing brake is automatically applied.
Observee laws
Observ laws and regulations
regulations
The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking Always observe the legal requirements when using
the following actions: a child restraint system in the vehicle.
R Braking more strongly than automatic braking
Observee standar
Observ standards
ds for
for child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force All child restraint systems must meet the following
standards:
R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
Safel
Safelyy transpor
transporting
ting childr
children
en in the
the vehicle
vehicle 213 and 225
Alway
Alwayss observe
observe when childr
children
en are
are trav
traveling
eling in the
the R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
vehicle and 210.2
% Always observe the safety notes relevant to Con rmation that the child restraint system com-
the situation. In doing so, you will be able to plies with the standards can be found on an
identify possible risks and avoid dangers when instruction label on the child restraint system. This
children are traveling in the vehicle con rmation can also be found in the installation
(/ page 40). instructions that are included with the child
restraint system.
Be diligent
diligent
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child
in the child restraint system may have serious con-
sequences. Always be diligent and secure a child
carefully before each journey.
40 Occupant safety
Detecting
Detecting risk
risks,
s, avoiding
avoiding danger
danger # Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on the
Securing systems
Securing systems for
for child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems in the
the
sitting surface of the seat.
vehicle
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions)
Only use the following securing systems for child under or behind the child restraint sys-
restraint systems: tem.
R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings # Use child restraint systems only with the
R The seat belt system of the vehicle original cover designed for them.
R The Top Tether anchorages # Always replace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
tem is preferred.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehi-
unsecured child restraint systems in the
cle can reduce the risk of installing the child
vehicle
restraint system incorrectly.
When securing a child with the integrated seat belt If the child restraint system is incorrectly
of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, installed or not secured, it can come loose.
always comply with the permissible gross weight The child restraint system could be ung
for the child and child restraint system around and hit vehicle occupants.
(/ page 42). # Always install child restraint systems cor-
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve rectly, even when not in use.
proper seat belt positioning for children over # Always comply with the child restraint
40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height system manufacturer's installation
where a three-point seat belt can be fastened instructions.
properly without a booster seat.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a child booster seat R Always observe the child restraint system man-
with a backrest and seat belt guides. ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions as well as the vehicle-speci c informa-
Adv
dvant
antag
agee of a rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys- tion:
tem
- Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child
restraint system on the rear seat
in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint sys-
(/ page 42).
tem. In this case, the child sits in the opposite
direction to the direction of travel and faces back- - Securing the child restraint system with the
wards. seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 44).
Babies and small children have comparatively - Securing the child restraint system with the
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and seat belt on the co-driver's seat
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervi- (/ page 44). Observe the speci c
cal spine during an accident can be reduced in a instructions for the rearward-facing and
rearward-facing child restraint system. forward-facing child restraint systems
(/ page 44).
Alwayss secure
Alway secure a child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system correctly
correctly
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to rior and on the child restraint system.
incorrect installation of the child restraint R Also secure Top Tether if present.
system
Do not
not modify the
the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
The child can then not be protected or
restrained as intended. & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca-
# Be sure to comply with the manufactur- tions to the child restraint system
er's installation instructions for the child The child restraint system can no longer func-
restraint system and its correct use. tion properly. This poses an increased risk of
injury.
Occupant safety 41
# Never modify a child restraint system. Observee when stopping

Observ stopping or parking
parking
# Only a x accessories which have been & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
specially approved for this child restraint to children le unattended in the vehicle
system by the child restraint system's
manufacturer. If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could, in particular:
Only use child
Only child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems which
which are
are in R open doors, thereby endangering other
proper
pr oper wor
working
king condition persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint sys- R operate vehicle equipment and become
tems trapped, for example.
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys- In addition, the children could also set the
tems that have been subjected to stress in an vehicle in motion, for example by:
accident may not be able to perform their R releasing the parking brake.
intended protective function.
R changing the transmission position.
It may be the case that the child cannot be
R starting the vehicle.
properly restrained.
# Always immediately replace child # Never leave children unattended in the
restraint systems that have been dam- vehicle.
aged or involved in an accident. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
# Have the securing systems for the child SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
restraint systems checked at a quali ed # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
specialist workshop before installing a of children.
child restraint system again.
Avoid direct
direct sunlight Overvie
Over view
w of suitable
suitable seats in the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for instal-
instal-
ling a child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child
seat is exposed to direct sunlight Le /right
/right rear seat
If the child restraint system is exposed to Preferred securing system:
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up ® ISOFIX child seat anchor (/ page 42)
excessively.
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
Children could su er burns from these parts, (/ page 43)
particularly the metallic parts of the child
restraint system. Alternative securing system:
# Always make sure that the child restraint 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
# Cover the child restraint system with a
Co-driv
Co-dr iver
er seat
blanket, for example. Securing system:
# If the child restraint system has been 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it. Center
Center rear
rear seat
# Never leave children unattended in the Securing system:
vehicle. 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 43)
42 Occupant safety
Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating the
the special seat belt Installing a LATC
Installing LATCH-type
H-type (ISOFIX) child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys-
retr
retract
actor
or of the
the seat belt tem on the
the rear
rear seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat Installing a LATC

Installing LATCH-type
H-type (ISOFIX) child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys-
tem on the
the rear
rear seat
belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in
motion
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is permissible gross mass of the child and
in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated child restraint system together is excee-
and the child restraint system is no longer cor- ded.
rectly secured. The seat belt is drawn in
slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be imme- Too much load may be placed on the LATCH-
diately closed again. type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the
child may not be restrained correctly in the
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accord-
event of an accident, for example.
ance with the tra c conditions. # If the child and the child restraint system
# Activate the special seal belt retractor
together weigh more than the permissi-
again and correctly secure the child ble gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use
restraint system. a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
tem with which the child is secured with
Req
equir
uirements
ements the vehicle seat belt.
When activated, the special seat belt retractor
# Also secure the child restraint system
ensures that the seat belts of the co-driver seat
and rear seats do not slacken once the child with the Top Tether belt, if available.
restraint system is secured.
Always comply with the information about the
The seat belts on the following seats are equipped mass of the child restraint system:
with a special seat belt retractor:
R in the manufacturer's installation and operat-
R Co-driver seat ing instructions for the child restraint system
R Rear seats used
R on a label on the child restraint system, if avail-
Installing
Inst alling a child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
able
# When installing a child restraint system, always
observe the manufacturer's installation and Check regularly that the permissible gross mass of
operating instructions for the child restraint the child plus the child restraint system is not
system used, as well as the notes in these exceeded.
Operating Instructions. When you install a child restraint system, observe
# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt the following:
outlet. O Always observe the correct use and suitability
# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt of the seats for attaching a child restraint sys-
buckle. tem.
Activ
ctivating
ating the
the special seat belt retr
retract
actor
or O Always observe the manufacturer's installa-
tion and operating instructions for the child
# Extend the seat belt fully and then allow the
restraint system used.
inertia reel to retract the belt.
When the special seat belt retractor is activa- O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
ted, you should hear a ratcheting sound. the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
# Push the child restraint system down until the
seat belt is tight. ® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system, also observe the following:
Deactivating the
Deactivating the special seat belt retr
retract
actor
or
O When using a GroupGroup 0/0+ baby
baby car seat and
# Press the release button of the seat belt
a Group
Group I rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys-
buckle.
tem on a rear
rear seat:
seat: adjust the rear seat
# Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to
the seat belt outlet.
Occupant safety 43
and/or the front seat so that the seat does Securing

Secur ing Top
Top Tether
Tether
not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a Group
Group I forw
forwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child & WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect
res
estr
traint
aint system:
system: the backrest of the child attachment of the Top Tether belt
restraint system must, as far as possible, lie If you attach the Top Tether belt incorrectly,
at against the backrest of the seat. the child restraint system is not properly
O For certain child restraint systems in weight secured and therefore cannot protect as inten-
Group II or III, there may be restrictions on the ded.
maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible # Attach the Top Tether hook only to the
contact with the roof. intended Top Tether anchorage.
O Do not put the child restraint system under
strain between the roof and the sitting surface ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped
and/or install it facing the wrong direction. with a Top Tether belt:
O Do not put the child restraint system under The risk of injury can be reduced by Top
strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an addi-
restraints as appropriate. tional connection between the child
restraint system attached with LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets

Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH- Top Tether anchorages 1 are located on the back
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged of the rear bench seat on the bench seat legs.
correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the cen-

ter seat during installation of the child
restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped.
# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system to both mounting brackets 1 in the
vehicle. # If necessary, move the head restraint upwards
(/ page 76).
# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Comply with the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
44 Occupant safety
# Guide Top Tether belt 3 under the head O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
restraint between the two head restraint bars. the front seat. If necessary, move the front
# Hook Top Tether hook 2 into Top Tether seat slightly forwards.
anchorage 1 without twisting. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped
# Tension Top Tether belt 3. Comply with the with a special seat belt retractor:
child restraint system manufacturer's installa- R Co-driver seat
tion instructions.
R Rear seats
# If necessary, slide the head restraint down-
wards (/ page 76). Make sure that you do When activated, the special seat belt retractor
not interfere with the correct routing of Top ensures that the seat belts of the co-driver seat
Tether belt 3. and rear seats do not slacken once the child
restraint system is secured (/ page 42).
# Install the child restraint system.
Securing
Secur ing the
the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat
The entire base of the child restraint system
belt
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
Securing
Secur ing the
the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat rear seat.
belt on the
the rear
rear seat # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
tem, observe the following: the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system.
O Always observe the manufacturer's installa-
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-
tion and operating instructions for the child wards and downwards from the seat belt out-
restraint system used. let.
O When using a categor
categoryy 0/0+ baby
baby car seat
and a categor
categoryy I rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child Notes on rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
res
estr
traint
aint system
system on a rear
rear seat:
seat: adjust the The co-driver airbag cannot be disabled. Always
front seat so that the seat does not touch the install a rearward-facing child restraint system on
child restraint system. a suitable rear seat, but never on the co-driver
seat. Observe the manufacturer's installation and
O When using a categor
categoryy I forw
forwarard-f
d-facing
acing child
child
operating instructions for the child restraint sys-
res
estr
traint
aint system:
system: remove the head restraint
tem used.
from the respective seat, if possible.
A er the child restraint system has been Notes on child
Notes child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems on the
the co-driv
co-driver
er
removed, replace the head restraint immedi- seat
ately and adjust all head restraints correctly. Accident statistics show that children secured on
O The backrest of the forward-facing child the rear seats are safer than children secured on
restraint system must, as far as possible, be the front seats. For this reason Mercedes-Benz
resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. strongly advises that you install a child restraint
system on a rear seat.
O For certain child restraint systems in weight
category II or III, there may be restrictions on Securing the
Securing the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible belt on the
the co-driv
co-driver
er seat
contact with the roof. When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys-
O The child restraint system must not be put tem on the co-driver seat, always observe the fol-
under strain between the roof and the seat lowing:
cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
cushion inclination accordingly.
co-driver seat (/ page 44).
O The child restraint system must not be put
O Observe the child restraint system manufac-
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
turer's installation and operating instructions.
head restraints as appropriate.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
Occupant safety 45
resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver Child safety

safety locks
seat.
Activ
ctivating
deactivating child
child safety
safety locks
locks for
for the
the
O For certain child restraint systems in weight sliding doors
category II or III, there may be restrictions on
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
contact with the roof. to children le unattended in the vehicle
O The child restraint system must not be put
If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle,
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong they could, in particular:
direction. R open doors, thereby endangering other
O The child restraint system must not be put persons or road users.
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
head restraints as appropriate. R operate vehicle equipment and become
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or trapped, for example.
behind the child restraint system.
In addition, the children could also set the
The seat belt on the co-driver side is equipped with vehicle in motion, for example by:
a special seat belt retractor. R releasing the parking brake.
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor R changing the transmission position.
ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once
the child seat is secured (/ page 42).
# Set the co-driver seat as far back as possible # Never leave children unattended in the
and move the seat into the highest position vehicle.
possible. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
ment. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
# Set the seat cushion inclination in such a way of children.
that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the
highest position and the back of the seat cush- & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
ion is in the lowest position. to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical posi-
If people, particularly children, are exposed to
tion possible. extreme temperatures over an extended period
# Install the child restraint system. of time, there is a risk of serious injury or dan-
The entire base of the child restraint system ger to life.
must always rest on the sitting surface of the # Never leave persons, children in particu-
co-driver seat. lar, unattended in the vehicle.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the to children le unattended in the vehicle
child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
wards and downwards from the seat belt out- could, in particular:
let. R Open doors, thereby endangering other
# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the persons or road users
co-driver seat as appropriate. R Get out and be struck by oncoming tra c
R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
# Always activate the child safety locks
installed if children are traveling in the
vehicle.
46 Occupant safety
# Never leave children unattended in the An animal may:

vehicle. R Activate vehicle equipment and become
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the trapped, for example
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. R Switch systems on or o and endanger
other road users
The following doors have child safety locks:
R Sliding doors Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
The child safety locks on the doors secure each the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
door separately. The doors can no longer be den steering and braking maneuvers and injure
opened from the inside (exception: electric sliding vehicle occupants in the process.
door). When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat-
be opened from the outside. tended.
If the electric sliding door is secured, only the slid- # Always correctly secure animals while
ing door controls in the rear compartment are driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car-
deactivated. The electric sliding door can be rier.
opened at any time using the switch in the center
console.
Example: sliding door child safety lock

# Slide child safety lock bolt 1 to position 2
(activate) or 3 (deactivate).
# Make sure that the child safety locks are work-
ing properly.
Notes on pets
pets in the
the vehicle
vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due

to animals le unsecured or unattended in
the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended
or unsecured, they could possibly press but-
tons or switches.
Opening and closing 47
SmartKey
Smar tKey In addition, the children could also set the
Notes on radio
radio connections of the
the key vehicle in motion, for example by:
R releasing the parking brake.
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury to persons R changing the transmission position.
with medical devices due to electromag-
netic radiation when using the start/stop
button # Never leave children unattended in the
Persons with medical devices, e.g. pacemakers vehicle.
or de brillators: # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
There is a radio connection between the key SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
and the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
The function of a medical device can be of children.
impaired.
# Before operating the vehicle, consult * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by
your doctor or the manufacturer of the magnetic elds
medical device about any possible # Keep the SmartKey away from strong
e ects from such systems. magnetic elds.
Detection rang
Detection rangee of the
the KEYLESS-STAR
KEYLESS-STARTT function
antenna
antenna
1 Position of the key holder when the detection

range of the antenna is reduced
1 To lock
Over
Overvie
view
w of SmartKe
Smar tKeyy functions
2 Battery check lamp
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due 3 To unlock
to children le unattended in the vehicle 4 To unlock the cargo compartment (sliding
doors and rear-end doors)/to unlock and
If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, open/close the electric sliding doors
5 Emergency key
R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. The SmartKey's factory setting enables you to cen-
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. trally lock and unlock the following components:
R The driver's door and co-driver door
R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example. R The sliding doors
R The rear-end doors
% If you do not open the vehicle within approx-

imately 40 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle
will lock again and anti-the protection will be
armed again.
48 Opening and closing
Do not keep the SmartKey together with electronic Remo

emoving
ving and inserting
inser ting the
the emergency
emergency key
devices or metallic objects. This can a ect the
SmartKey's functionality. Remo
emoving
ving
% If the indicator lamp does not light up when
you press the % or & button, the bat-
tery is discharged.
Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 48).
Changing the
the unlocking
unlocking settings
settings
The SmartKey has the following adjustable unlock-
ing functions:
R unlock centrally # Press release button 2.
R unlock the driver's door (vehicles without parti- Emergency key 1 is pushed slightly out.
tion or with cab) # Pull emergency key 1 out completely.
R unlock the driver's door and co-driver's door
(vehicles with partition) Inser ting
Inserting
# Press release button 2.
# To switch
switch betw
between
een settings:
settings: press and hold the
% and & buttons at the same time for # Slide emergency key 1 in completely until it
approximately six seconds until the indicator engages.
lamp ashes twice.
# To unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle centrall
centrallyy when the
the Replacing the
the key
key battery
battery
unlocking
unlocking function is selected
selected for
for the
the driv
driver's
er's
door or the
the driv
driver's
er's and co-driv
co-driver's
er's door:
door: press & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to swal-
the % button a second time. lowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
Reducing the
the energy
energy consumption
consumption of the
the SmartKey
Smar tKey ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe
If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an internal burns to occur within two hours.
extended period, you may deactivate the KEYLESS There is a risk of fatal injury.
START function of the SmartKey. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
# To deactivat
deactivate:
e: press the & button on the dren.
SmartKey twice in quick succession. # If the cap and/or the battery compart-
The battery check lamp on the SmartKey lights ment does not close securely, do not use
up twice quickly and once for longer. the SmartKey any longer and keep out of
# To activat
activate:
e: press any button on the SmartKey. the reach of children.
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
When starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
attention immediately.
slot in the shi console, the SmartKey functions
are activated automatically.
+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIR ONMENTAL
AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is

illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
# # Use the emergency key to unlock and lock the

vehicle (/ page 48).
# Have the SmartKey checked at a quali ed spe-
Dispose of batteries in an cialist workshop.
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a quali ed You have
have lost
lost a SmartKey
Smar tKey
specialist workshop or to a collection # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a quali ed
point for used batteries. specialist workshop.
# If necessary, have the mechanical locks
Req
equir
uirements
ements replaced.
R A CR 2032 3 V cell battery
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

battery replaced by a quali ed specialist work- Doors
shop. Unloc
nlocking
king and opening the
the door from
from inside
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 48).
Example image
# Press release button 2 down fully and slide
cover 1 forward.
# Remove battery compartment 3 and remove # To unlock
unlock and open the
the front
front door:
door: pull door
the discharged battery. handle 2.
Safety pin 1 pops up when the door is
# Insert the new battery into battery compart-
unlocked.
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in
the battery compartment and on the battery.
# Insert battery compartment 3.
# Replace cover 1 so that it engages.
# Slide the emergency key in completely until it
engages (/ page 48).
Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the SmartKey
Smar tKey
You cannot
cannot lock
lock or unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle any
any more
Possible causes:
R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
R There is interference from a powerful source of
radio waves.
R The SmartKey is faulty. The % symbol indicates that the rear door is
unlocked.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and
replace it if necessary (/ page 48).
# To unlock
unlock and open thethe rear
rear door:
door: pull opening
lever 1 and open the rear door.
When the door unlocks, latch 2 moves
forward.
The % symbol is visible.
# To close: pull the rear door closed by the door
handle.
# To lock:
lock: slide latch 2 back.
The & symbol is visible.
Centrall
Centr allyy locking
locking and unlocking
unlocking the
the door from
from the
the
inside

to children le unattended in the vehicle Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically
adjustable front seats)
persons or road users.
trapped, for example.
vehicle in motion, for example by:
# Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. Central locking buttons (vehicles with manually
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the adjustable front seats)
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # To unlock:
unlock: with the doors closed, press button
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach 1.
of children. # To lock:
lock: with the doors closed, press button
2.
& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the automatic
automatic locking
locking
If people, particularly children, are exposed to mechanism
mec hanism
extreme temperatures over an extended period
of time, there is a risk of serious injury or dan- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
ger to life. R The power supply or the ignition is switched
# Never leave persons, children in particu- on.
lar, unattended in the vehicle. R The doors are closed.
You can use the central locking buttons to cen- When the automatic locking mechanism is activa-
trally lock and unlock the entire vehicle from the ted and the vehicle is traveling at a speed above
inside. 9 mph (15 km/h), the vehicle is locked automati-
cally.
The central locking buttons are located in the driv-
er's and co-driver's doors.
Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically # To unlock:

unlock: turn the emergency key counter-
adjustable front seats) clockwise to position 1.
# To lock:
lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to
position 1.
% Right-hand driv
drivee vehicles:
vehicles: turn the emergency
key in the opposite direction for each case.
Using the
the grab
grab handles when getting
getting int
intoo and out
of the
the vehicle
vehicle
& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive

strain on the grab handle
If you apply your full body weight to the grab
handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may
be damaged or become loose from its anchor-
age.
Central locking buttons (vehicles with manually # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the
adjustable front seats) seating position or to assist in getting in
and out of the seat.
R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer or is being tow-started or push-star-
The entrances on buses are equipped with grab
ted, there is a risk of being locked out when
handles and steps. The grab handles to enter and
the function is activated.
exit the vehicle are at the front door and the sliding
# To activat
activate:
e: press and hold button 2 until you door.
hear a tone. % To avoid risks:
# To deactivat
deactivate:
e: press and hold button 1 until R When getting into and out of the vehicle,
you hear a tone. only use the grab handles and steps. Only
they are designed for such a load.
Unloc
nlocking
king and locking
locking the
the driv
driver's
er's door with
with the
the R Keep steps and entry sills free from dirt,
emergency key
emergency e.g. mud, clay, snow and ice.
% If you want to lock the vehicle completely with
the emergency key, press the button for the
locking mechanism from inside rst with the
driver's door open. Then lock the driver's door
with the emergency key.
Getting into and out of the vehicle (example: slid-

ing door)
# When getting into and out of the vehicle, use
grab handles 1 and steps.
% The grab handles on the sliding door are there
to help people enter and exit the vehicle and
can hold up to a maximum of 176 lbs (80 kg).
Do not use the grab handle on the sliding door
to secure a load (lashing down). Do not secure
any objects to the easy entry and exit aids.
Sliding door
Opening and closing the
the sliding door
% Your vehicle may be equipped with a long slid-
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
ing door with an intermediate catch. You can
to an open sliding door which is not
also lock the sliding door in place around half-
engaged in place
way when opening and closing. If you do this,
On an incline, the sliding door can move by the door does not have to be opened fully
itself. when getting into or out of the vehicle. The
This can cause you or other people to become sliding door is not fully engaged when in the
trapped. intermediate catch.
# Always make sure that the open sliding Unloc
nlocking
king
door is engaged. To do so, open the slid- # Pull safety pin 3 upwards manually or use the
ing door to the stop. central locking button to unlock the sliding
door (/ page 50).
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
to sliding door opening towards the rear Opening
When you open the sliding door, the sliding
# Press button 1 in and pull door handle 2.
door could hit other people as it moves # Push back the sliding door using door handle
towards the rear of the vehicle. 2 fully until it engages.
# Only open the sliding door when tra c # Check the sliding door catch.
conditions permit.
Closing
# Press button 1 in and pull door handle 2.
# Slide the sliding door rmly forwards by handle Opening/closing the

the electric
electric sliding door with
with tthe
he
2 until it closes. button
button
Locking
Locking & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
# Push safety pin 3 downwards manually or use to sliding door opening towards the rear
the central locking button to lock the sliding
door (/ page 50). When you open the sliding door, the sliding
door could hit other people as it moves
towards the rear of the vehicle.
Notes on electrical
electrical closing assist # Only open the sliding door when tra c
If your vehicle is equipped with an electrical clos- conditions permit.

ing assist, you will require less force to close the
sliding door. & WARNING Risk of injury despite the object
detection function
Electric
Electr ic sliding door The object detection function does not react to
so , light and thin objects, such as ngers. The
Function of the
the electric
electric sliding door object detection function cannot prevent
Your vehicle can be equipped with an electric slid- someone from becoming trapped in these sit-
ing door on the le and/or right-hand side. uations.
You can operate the electric sliding door in the fol- # When opening and closing the electric
lowing ways: sliding door, make sure that no parts of

the body are within the operating range
R by pressing the sliding door buttons on the
of the sliding door.
center console
# If someone becomes trapped, press the
R by pressing the sliding door button on the door
button again to stop the sliding door.
sill (B-pillar)
R using the door handle (inside or outside) Object detection:
detection:
R using the key If an object obstructs the sliding door as it is clos-
ing, the sliding door will be stopped. Object detec-
If the electric sliding door is obstructed while
tion is only an aid. It is not a substitute you having
opening, it moves a few centimeters in the oppo-
to pay attention.
site direction and stops.
If the sliding door is obstructed during the closing
procedure, it opens fully again.
If the electric motor of the sliding door is in danger
of overheating, e.g. due to frequent opening and
closing within a short period, the sliding door
opens fully. The sliding door is then locked in
place. The sliding door is operational again a er
approximately 30 seconds.
If there has been a malfunction or if the battery
has been disconnected, you can use the release
catch to disconnect the sliding door from the elec-
tric motor. Then you can open or close the door
manually (/ page 55).
1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right

side of the vehicle
When you close the door using button 1 or

2, you will additionally hear two warning sig-
nals.
The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or
2 will ash and button 3 will ash.
When the sliding door is completely closed, the
indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2
will go out.
# To stop
stop automatic
automatic operation:
operation: brie y press but-
On vehicles with a partition, button 3 is loca- ton 1 or 2.
ted on the partition next to the doorway at the The sliding door stops moving.
level of the inside door handle. # To lock:
lock: push locking pin 3 downwards man-
ually or use the central locking button to lock
the sliding door (/ page 50).
% When you stop automatic operation upon
opening the door, the door closes when you
press the button again.
% In unfavorable operating conditions, e.g. frost
or ice, or if the vehicle is very dirty, you can
press and hold the corresponding button. The
electric sliding door moves with increased
force. Observe that, in such circumstances,
the object detection function is less sensitive.
To stop the movement, release the button.
Opening/closing the
the electric
with the
the
key
When the sliding door is locked, it can only be
opened from the inside by manually unlocking # To unlock:
unlock: brie y press the 5 or 4 but-
locking pin 4. ton on the key.
# To open: press and hold the 5 or 4 but-
# To unlock:
unlock: pull locking pin 4 upwards man- ton on the key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
ually or use the central locking button to You will hear two acoustic signals and the slid-
unlock the sliding door (/ page 50). ing door will open automatically.
# To open: brie y press button 1, 2 or button # To close: press and hold the 5 or 4 but-
3. ton on the key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The sliding door opens automatically. You will hear two acoustic signals and the slid-
When you open the door using button 1 or ing door will close automatically.
2, you will additionally hear two warning sig- # To interr
interrup
uptt automatic
operation: brie y press
nals. the 5 or 4 button on the key.
The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or The sliding door stops moving.
2 will ash and button 3 will ash. % When you stop automatic operation upon
When the sliding door is completely open, the opening the door, the door closes when you
indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 press the button again.
will light up.
# To close: brie y press button 1, 2 or button
3.
The sliding door closes automatically.
Opening/closing the
the electric
with the
the # Open or close the sliding door with the outside
door handle or inside door handle.
Establishing
Est ablishing the
the connection betw
between
een sliding door
and electric
electric motor
motor
# Insert the emergency key into opening 1 of
disconnect switch 2 in the "MAN" position.
# Turn the emergency key 180° counter-clock-
wise.
The "AUTO" position is set.
# Adjust the sliding door (/ page 56).
If there has been a malfunction or if the battery

has been disconnected, you can use disconnect
switch 2 to disconnect the sliding door from the
electric motor. Then you can open or close the
door manually.
# To unlock:
unlock: pull locking pin 2 upwards man-
ually or use the central locking button to
unlock the sliding door (/ page 50).
# Press button 1 or pull outside door handle
3.
The sliding door opens or closes.
# Press button 1 again or pull outside door
handle 3.
The sliding door stops moving.
Unloc
nlocking
king the
the electric
electric sliding door manually
Disconnecting the
the sliding door from
from the
the electric
electric
motor
mot or
# Insert the emergency key into opening 1 of Cover in sliding door trim
disconnect switch 2 in the "AUTO" position. # Vehicles with
with sliding door trim:
trim: fold the cover
# Turn the emergency key 180° clockwise. The of disconnect switch 2 up.
"MAN" position is set. The disconnect switch is accessible.
# To disconnect the
the sliding door from
from the
the elec-
tric motor
tric motor:: turn disconnect switch 2 180°
clockwise.
The "MAN" position is set.
Unloc
nlocking
king
# Pull safety pin 3 upwards manually or use the
central locking button to unlock the sliding
door (/ page 50).
# Press button 1.
Sliding door button on the door sill (B-pillar)
# Open or close the sliding door with the outside
or inside door handle. You must reset the sliding door if there has been a
malfunction or a voltage supply interruption.
Establishing the
Establishing the connection betw
between
een sliding door
# If the sliding door is open: press button 1 on
and electric
electric motor
motor
the center console or sliding door button 3
# Turn disconnect switch 2 180° counter-
on the door sill (B-pillar) and hold until the door
clockwise. is closed.
The "AUTO" position is set.
or
# Adjust the sliding door (/ page 56).
# Close the sliding door with the door handle
# If it is not possible to rectify the malfunction,
(/ page 55).
visit a quali ed specialist workshop. # Then brie y press button 1 on the center
console or sliding door button 3 on the door
Rese
esetting
tting the
the electric
electric sliding door sill (B-pillar) once, or pull the door handle
(/ page 55) to completely open the sliding
door.
The sliding door is operational.
Rear
ear-end
-end doors
the rear
rear-end
-end doors
doors from
from out-
side
& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear-

end door swinging open
When you open a rear-end door, the following
can occur:
R You or another person can be injured.
R A person may be struck by oncoming traf-
Sliding door button on the center console fic.
Sliding door button on the center console
1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right This is particularly the case if you open the
side of the vehicle rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in
an uncontrolled manner.
Even rear-end doors which are properly closed
can swing open when the vehicle parked is on
an incline or it is windy.
# Only open a rear-end door when the traf-
fic conditions and surroundings permit.
# Always make sure that the rear-end
doors are properly closed.
* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due

# Swing the rear-end door to the side until it
to objects obstructing their range of move- engages.
ment Opening the
the rear
rear-end
-end doors
doors fully
When the rear-end doors are opened, any # Open the a rear-end door outwards beyond the
objects obstructing the range of movement of rst detent (90°).
the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as # Open the rear-end door fully.
the vehicle. The rear-end door will stay in the stop position.
# Make sure that there is su cient clear-
ance when opening the rear-end doors. Closing the
the rear
rear-end
-end doors
doors from
from outside
# Close the le rear-end door rmly from out-
Opening the
the right
right rear
rear-end
-end door side.
# Close the right rear-end door rmly from out-
side.
Opening rear
rear-end
-end doors
doors with
with door retainer
retainer more
than 90°
& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear-

end door swinging open
When you open a rear-end door, the following
can occur:
R You or another person can be injured.
fic.
This is particularly the case if you open the
# Pull handle 1.
rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in
# Swing the rear-end door to the side until it an uncontrolled manner.
engages. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed
Opening the
the le rear
ear-end
-end door can swing open when the vehicle parked is on
an incline or it is windy.
# Only open a rear-end door when the traf-
fic conditions and surroundings permit.
# Always make sure that the rear-end
doors are properly closed.
* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due

to objects obstructing their range of move-
ment
When the rear-end doors are opened, any
objects obstructing the range of movement of
the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as
the vehicle.
ance when opening the rear-end doors.
# Make sure that the right rear-end door is open
and engaged.
# Pull release handle 1 in the direction of the
arrow.
the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as

the vehicle.
ance when opening the rear-end doors.
# Open the rear-end door to about 45°.

# Pull and hold the door retainer in the direction
of the arrow.
# Open the rear door more than 90°, so that the
door retainer cannot engage.
# Release the door retainer and open the rear- The % symbol indicates that the rear-end door
end door fully. is unlocked.
# To unlock:
unlock: slide latch 2 to the le .
The % symbol is visible.
Opening/closing the
the rear
rear-end
-end doors
doors from
from the
the
# To open: pull opening lever 1 and open the
inside
rear-end door.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear- # Swing the rear-end door to the side until it
end door swinging open engages.
When you open a rear-end door, the following # To close: make sure that the le rear-end door
can occur: is closed.

R You or another person can be injured. # Pull the right rear-end door rmly to by the

door handle.
# To lock:
lock: slide latch 2 to the right
fic.
The & symbol is visible.
This is particularly the case if you open the
rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in
an uncontrolled manner. Par
artition
tition sliding door
Even rear-end doors which are properly closed Opening and closing the
the partition
par tition sliding door
can swing open when the vehicle parked is on
an incline or it is windy. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
# Only open a rear-end door when the traf- partition sliding door is not engaged
fic conditions and surroundings permit. The partition sliding door may move on its own
# Always make sure that the rear-end while the vehicle is in motion.
doors are properly closed. This can cause you or other people to become
trapped.
* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due # Before every journey, close the partition
to objects obstructing their range of move- sliding door and ensure that it is
ment engaged.
When the rear-end doors are opened, any
objects obstructing the range of movement of
Electrical
Electr ical step
step
Function of the
the electrical
electrical step
step
Partition from the cab
Your vehicle's sliding door may be equipped with

an electrical step.
Electrical step 1 automatically extends when the
sliding door opens, and retracts a er the sliding
door closes. Electrical step 1 is equipped with
obstacle detection at the front. If the step meets
an obstacle while extending, it stops. Once you
have removed the obstacle, you must rst close
the sliding door then re-open it so that the step
extends completely.
If the electrical step prevents loading, you can
block it via obstacle detection when the sliding
door opens. The electrical step then remains
Partition from the cargo compartment retracted and a fork-li truck or other li ing vehicle
can move closer to the cargo compartment.
# To open: turn the key to the le 3 from the
cab or push the lever to the right 3 from the % The display shows the Step Not Extended
cargo compartment. See Operator's Manual message or the step
The sliding door is unlocked. not extended malfunction message.
When the ignition is switched o , a warning
# Push the sliding door as far as it will go to the tone will sound if obstacle detection is
right 2 from the cab or to the le 1 from blocked. The tone lasts for two minutes.
the cargo compartment. When the ignition is switched on, the warning
# To close: push the sliding door to the le 1 tone will sound continuously.
from the cab or to the right 2 from the cargo Vehicles with
with an Instr
Instrument
ument Display
Display (color display):
display):
compartment until it engages. if the display shows the Step Not Retracted See
You can lock the sliding door from the cab with Operator's Manual message or Step Not Exten-
the key. ded See Operator's Manual message and a warn-
ing tone sounds, electrical step 1 is malfunction-
ing (/ page 274).
If electrical step 1 is malfunctioning, the step
may not extend or retract, or do so only partially.
A er a malfunction occurs, you must retract and
lock electrical step 1 manually in order to con-
tinue your journey (/ page 60). Before passen-
gers exit the vehicle, inform them that electrical

step 1 may be missing.
Releasing the
the electrical
electrical step
step in an emergency
emergency
(manual retr
retraction)
action)
# Fold bars 1 into the step's housing.

# Slide the step into its housing.
% When securing the step for the rst time, you
must puncture a foil with the spring cotters.
# On both sides, insert spring cotters 1 through

If the electrical step does not automatically retract, the housing's holes and into the step as far as
you must manually retract the step and lock it in they will go.
order to continue driving. The step has been secured in its housing.
# On the underside of step 2 on both bars 1
remove the spring cotters 3 from the pin.
Side window
# Remove the washers 4 and detach both bars.
the side windows
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open-

ing a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body
could be drawn in or become trapped between
the side window and window frame.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window.
# If someone is trapped, release the button # To open complet

completely
ely:: brie y press button 1 or
immediately or pull it in order to close 2 beyond the point of resistance.
the side window again. Automatic operation will start.
# To close complet
completely
ely:: brie y pull button 1 or
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when 2 beyond the point of resistance.
closing a side window Automatic operation will start.
When closing a side window, body parts could # To interr
interrup
uptt automatic
operation: brie y press
be trapped in the closing area in the process. or pull button 1 or 2 again.
# When closing, make sure that no body % If an object blocks a side window during the
parts are in the closing area. automatic closing process, the side window
will open again automatically. The automatic
# If someone is trapped, release the button
reversing function is only an aid and is not a
immediately or press the button in order substitute for your attentiveness.
to reopen the side window.
% If automatic operation of the side window does
not work, there is no anti-entrapment function.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
children operate the side windows Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function of the
the side windows
Children could become trapped if they operate If an object blocks a side window during the clos-
the side windows, particularly when unatten- ing process, the side window will open again auto-
ded. matically. The automatic reversing function is only
an aid and is not a substitute for your attentive-
# Activate the child safety lock for the rear
ness.
passenger compartment side windows.
# During the closing process, make sure that no
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
body parts are in the closing area.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
vehicle. despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function will not react:
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers
R over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing
path
R during resetting
R when the side window is closed again man-
ually immediately a er automatic reversing
The reversing function cannot prevent some-
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
tions.
# During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing
area.
# To open manually
manually:: press and hold button 1 or # If someone becomes trapped, press the
2. W button to open the side window
# To close manually:
manually: pull and hold button 1 or again.
2.
The windows in the front doors can also be oper-

ated automatically.
Ventilating the
the vehicle
vehicle befor
beforee star
starting
ting a journey
journey Adjus
djusting
ting the
the side windows
(convenience opening)
(convenience
The side windows must be readjusted a er a mal-
function or a voltage supply interruption.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open-
# Switch on the power supply (/ page 105).
ing a side window
# Push both buttons on the power window and
When opening a side window, parts of the body
could be drawn in or become trapped between hold for approximately one second a er the
the side window and window frame. side window has closed.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window. Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the side windows
# Release the button immediately if some-
A side window
window cannot
cannot be closed and you
you cannot
body becomes trapped. see the
the cause
# Check to see if there are any objects in the
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driv-
ing. window guide.
The "convenience opening" function can only be
operated using the key. The key must be in close & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
proximity to the driver's or co-driver door. fatally injured if reversing protection is not
activated
# Press and hold the % button on the key.
If you close a side window again immediately
The following functions are performed: a er it has been blocked, the side window will
R The vehicle is unlocked close with increased or maximum force. The
R The side windows are opened reversing function is then not active and body
parts may become trapped.
# To interr
interrup
uptt convenience
convenience opening: release the
% button. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
# To stop the closing process, release the
Closing the
the side window
windowss from
from the
the outside (conve-
(conve-
button or press the button again to
nience closing)
reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not
If a side window is obstructed during closing and
paying attention during convenience clos- reopens again slightly, you can proceed as follows:
ing
# Immediately a er the window is obstructed,
When the convenience closing feature is oper- pull the corresponding button again until the
ating, parts of the body could become trapped side window has closed, and hold the button
in the closing area of the side windows. for an additional second.
# When the convenience closing feature is The side window will be closed with increased
operating, monitor the entire closing force.
process and make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens
slightly, you can proceed as follows:
# Press and hold the & button on the key. # Repeat the previous step.
The following functions are performed: The side window will be closed without the
automatic reversing function.
R the vehicle is locked
R the side windows are closed The side windows
windows cannot
cannot be opened or closed
# To interr
interrup
uptt convenience
convenience closing: release the using the
the convenience
convenience opening feature
feature
& button. Possible cause:
R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and
replace it if necessary (/ page 48).
Anti-the
Anti-t he prev
prevention
ention ATA is automatically deactivated in the following
situations:
Function of the
the immobilizer
R A er unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being R A er pressing the start/stop button with the
started without the correct key.
SmartKey inside the vehicle.
The immobilizer is automatically activated when
the ignition is switched o , and deactivated when Arming/disar
Ar ming/disarming
ming ATA
ATA (Anti-t
(Anti-the
he Alar
Alarmm system)
system)
the ignition is switched on. If the
the alarm
alarm system
system is armed,
armed, a visual and audible
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with alarm is trigg
alarm trigger
ered
ed in the
the follo
following
wing situations:
you and lock the vehicle. If the key is le inside the R A door is opened
vehicle, anyone can start the engine. R The hood is opened
% In the event the engine does not start despite
the vehicle's starter battery having su cient % The alarm will not be deactivated, even if you
charge, the immobilizer is defective. Contact a immediately close the open door that has trig-
quali ed specialist workshop or call gered it, for example.
1-800-367-6372 (in the USA) or Switching
Switching on
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (Anti-
(Anti-The
The Alar
Alarmm system)
system)
Function of ATA
ATA (Anti-t
(Anti-the
he Alar
Alarmm system)
system)
If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
R a side door is opened
R the rear-end door is opened
R the hood is opened
# Close all the doors.
R the interior motion sensor is triggered
(/ page 64)
# Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control
R the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 64)
panel ashes.
ATA is automatically armed a er approximately Switching o
Switching
ve seconds in the following situation:
# Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
R a er the vehicle has been locked with the Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control
SmartKey panel goes out.
% The vehicle locks again automatically if you do
not open a door within 40 seconds a er
unlocking the vehicle.
Stopping the
the alarm
# Press the % or & button on the Smart-
Key.
or
# Press the Start/Stop button with the SmartKey
When the ATA system is armed, indicator lamp 1 inside the vehicle.
ashes in the overhead control panel. The alarm stops.
Function of the
the tow-awa
tow -awayy alarm Deactivate the tow-away alarm when locking your
vehicle in the following situations:
Function of the
the tow-awa
tow -awayy alarm
R when loading and/or transporting the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the incli-
nation of the vehicle changes when the tow-away on a ferry or car transporter, for example
alarm is activated. This can be the case if the vehi- R when parking the vehicle on a movable sur-
cle is raised on one side, for example. face, such as a split-level garage
This will prevent false alarms.
Arming/disar
Ar ming/disarming
ming the
the tow-awa
tow -awayy alarm
Arming/disar
Ar ming/disarming
ming Inter
Interior
ior motion
motion sensor
# Lock the vehicle with the key. Function
The tow-away alarm is automatically armed If the activated the interior motion sensor detects
a er about 40 seconds: motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acoustic
# Open the vehicle with the key. alarm is triggered. This can happen if someone
The tow-away alarm is deactivated. reaches into the vehicle interior, for example.
The tow-away alarm is only armed when the follow-
ing components are closed: Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the inter
interior
ior motion
motion sensor
R the driver's door and the front-passenger door
Activ
ctivating
ating
R the side doors
# Close the side windows.
R the rear-end doors
# Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or
Deactivating
Deactivating coat hangers) is hanging on the inside rearview
mirror or on the grab handles on the headliner.
# Lock the vehicle with the key.
The interior motion sensor is activated a er
approximately 30 seconds.
The interior motion sensor is only activated when
the following components are closed:
R the driver's door and the co-driver door
R the side doors
R the rear-end doors
Deactivating
Deactivating
# Unlock the vehicle with the key.
The interior motion sensor automatically
switches o .
# Switch o the power supply (/ page 105).
# Press button 1.
When the button is released, indicator lamp 2
in the button lights up for approximately
ve seconds.
The tow-away alarm is deactivated.
The tow-away alarm remains deactivated until you
lock the vehicle again.
Deactivating
Deactivating
# Switch o the power supply (/ page 105).

# Press button 1.
When the button is released, indicator lamp 2
in the button lights up for about ve seconds.
The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
The interior motion sensor remains deactivated
until you lock the vehicle again.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor when locking
your vehicle in the following situations:
R if there are people or animals remaining inside
R if the side windows remain open
R when transporting the vehicle on a ferry or car
transporter, for example
66 Seats and stowage
Notes on the
the correct
correct driv
driver's
er's seat position R You have a good overview of the tra c condi-
tions.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is and passes across the center of your shoulder
in motion and across your hips in the pelvic area.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular: Seats
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front seats mechanicall
mechanicallyy (without
(without
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror Seat Comfor
Comfortt Pack
Packagage)
e)
while the vehicle is in motion
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
cle is in motion seats are adjusted by children
# Before starting the engine: In particular, Children could become trapped if they adjust
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, the seats, particularly when unattended.
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
your seat belt. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
vehicle.

adjusting the seat
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no
one has any part of their body within the
sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil-

dren in the vehicle".
Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driv-
3, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 1: er's seat not being engaged
R You are sitting as far away from the driver's air- The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while
bag as possible. driving.
R You are sitting in an upright position. This could cause you to lose control of the
R Your thighs are gently supported by the seat vehicle.
cushion. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can engaged before starting the vehicle.
reach the pedals easily.
R The back of your head is supported at eye level
by the middle part of the head restraint
R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
R You can move your legs without any restric-
tions.
R You can see all of the instrument displays well.
Seats and stowage 67
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is incorrect seat position
in motion
The seat belt does not o er the intended level
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- of protection if you have not moved the seat
lowing situations in particular: backrest to an almost vertical position.
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head In particular, you could slip beneath the seat-
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror belt and become injured.
while the vehicle is in motion # Adjust the seat properly before beginning
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- your journey.
cle is in motion # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
# Before starting the engine: In particular, in an almost vertical position and that
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, the shoulder belt is routed across the
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten center of your shoulder.
your seat belt.
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the the seats back
seat height is adjusted carelessly The seats may be damaged by objects when
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or moving the seats back.
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and # When moving the seats back, make sure
thereby injured. that there are no objects in the footwell,
Children in particular could accidentally press under or behind the seats.
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and
become trapped.
# While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head

restraints not being installed or being
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints 1 Seat fore-and-a position
installed. 2 Seat height
# Before driving o , make sure for every 3 Seat backrest inclination
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat for
ore-and-a
e-and-a position: li
head at about eye level. lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
position. Ensure that the seat is engaged.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front # To set
set the
the seat height:
height: keep on pressing or
and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to pulling lever 2 until the required seat height
set the height and inclination of the head restraints has been reached.
to the correct position. # To adjust
adjust the
the seat backr
backresestt inclination: rotate
Using the head restraint fore-and-a adjustment, handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until
adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the desired position has been reached.
the back of the head as possible.
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front seats mechanicall
mechanicallyy (with
(with Seat & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
Comfortt Pack
Comfor Packag
age)
e) seat height is adjusted carelessly
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
seats are adjusted by children other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured.
Children could become trapped if they adjust
Children in particular could accidentally press
the seats, particularly when unattended.
become trapped.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
vehicle. under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
adjusting the seat & WARNING Risk of injury due to head
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle restraints not being installed or being
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the adjusted incorrectly
seat guide rail. If head restraints have not been installed or
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
one has any part of their body within the increased risk of injury in the head and neck
sweep of the seat. area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- # Always drive with the head restraints
dren in the vehicle". installed.
# Before driving o , make sure for every
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driv-
er's seat not being engaged vehicle occupant that the center of the
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while head at about eye level.
driving.
This could cause you to lose control of the Do not interchange the head restraints of the front
vehicle. and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to
# Always make sure that the driver's seat is
set the height and inclination of the head restraints
to the correct position.
engaged before starting the vehicle.
Using the head restraint fore-and-a adjustment,
adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
the back of the head as possible.
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- incorrect seat position
lowing situations in particular: The seat belt does not o er the intended level
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head of protection if you have not moved the seat
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror backrest to an almost vertical position.
while the vehicle is in motion In particular, you could slip beneath the seat-
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- belt and become injured.
cle is in motion # Adjust the seat properly before beginning
# Before starting the engine: In particular, your journey.

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten in an almost vertical position and that
your seat belt. the shoulder belt is routed across the
center of your shoulder.

# Using handwheel 6, set the body weight
the seats back (88 lbs (40 kg) to 265 lbs (120 kg)) so that the
seat suspension works optimally. If you set a
The seats may be damaged by objects when higher weight, the seat suspension will become
moving the seats back. rmer. The seat will then not vibrate as much.
# When moving the seats back, make sure If the seat vibrates o en and signi cantly, you
that there are no objects in the footwell, can engage it in the lower area.
under or behind the seats. # To engag
engagee vibration
vibration limiting: turn lever 7
upwards.
The next time the seat vibrates, it will engage.
# To release
release vibration
vibration limiting: turn lever 7 to
the right.
The seat can vibrate.
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front seat electrically
electrically
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the

seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
Example image of comfort suspension seat
vehicle.
1 Seat cushion length
2 Seat backrest inclination The seats can be adjusted while the ignition is o .
3 Seat height
4 Seat cushion inclination & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
5 Seat fore-and-a position adjusting the seats
6 Seat suspension When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
7 Vibration limiting occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat cushion length:
length: li lever 1 # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no
and slide the front part of the seat cushion for- one has any body parts in the sweep of
wards or backwards. the seat.
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat backr
backresestt inclination: rotate
handwheel 2 forwards and backwards until Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil-
the desired position has been reached. dren in the vehicle".
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat height:
height: pull or push lever 3
until the desired position has been reached. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driv-
er's seat not being engaged
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat cushion inclination: rotate
handwheel 4 forwards and backwards until If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
the desired position has been reached. move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion.
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat for
ore-and-a
e-and-a position: li
lever 5 and slide the seat into the desired This could cause you to lose control of the
position. vehicle.
# Always make sure that the driver's seat is
# Ensure that the seat is engaged.
engaged before starting the vehicle.
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat suspension: take your
weight o the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the Using the head restraint fore-and-a adjustment,
vehicle settings while the vehicle is in adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to
motion the back of the head as possible.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
lowing situations: incorrect seat position
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head The seat belt does not o er the intended level
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror of protection if you have not moved the seat
while the vehicle is in motion backrest to an almost vertical position.
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- When braking or in the event of an accident,
cle is in motion you could slide underneath the seat belt and
# Before starting the engine: adjust the sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam-
driver's seat, the head restraint, the ple.
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten # Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your seat belt. your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the in an almost vertical position and that
seat height is adjusted carelessly the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul-
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or der.
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the seats back
become trapped. The seats may be damaged by objects when
# While moving the seats, make sure that moving the seats back.
hands or other body parts do not get # When moving the seats back, make sure
under the lever assembly of the seat that there are no objects in the footwell,
adjustment system. under or behind the seats.

restraints which are not installed or are
If head restraints are not installed or are adjus-
ted incorrectly, the head restraints cannot pro-
vide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the head
and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident
or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
# Before driving o , make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head at about eye level. 1 Seat backrest inclination
2 Seat height
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front 3 Seat cushion inclination
and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to 4 Seat fore-and-a position
to the correct position. # Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 71).
Setting
Setting 4-way
4-way lumbar support & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the mem-
ory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they activate
the memory function, particularly when unat-
tended.
vehicle.
key with you and lock the vehicle.
The memory function can be used when the igni-

tion is switched o .
Stor
oring
ing seat settings
settings
Seat settings for up to three people can be stored
and called up using the memory function. You can
1 Higher adjust the seat and the backrest.
2 Weaker
3 Lower
4 Stronger
# Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the backrest
curvature individually to your spine.
Operating
Oper ating the
the memory
memor y function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem-

ory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of the
vehicle as a result of the adjustments being
made.
# Adjust the seat into the desired position.
# Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station-
# Press memory button M together with one of
ary. the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
stored.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when
# To call up: press and hold the relevant preset
adjusting the seat with the memory func-
position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front seat is
tion
in the stored position.
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped. Rotating the
the front
front seats
# During the adjustment process of the
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
memory function, make sure that no one due to the driver's seat and front
has any body parts in the sweep of the passenger seat not being engaged
seat.
# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi-
In this situation, the restraint systems cannot
perform their intended protective function.
ately release the memory function posi-
tion button.
The adjustment process is stopped.
# Engage the driver's seat‑ and front # To rotat

rotatee the
the seat: push lever 1 towards the
passenger seat in the direction of travel door and rotate the seat slightly inwards.
before starting the engine. The turning device will be unlocked.
# Release lever 1 again.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- # Rotate the seat outwards or inwards into the
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is required position.
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- Folding the
the co-driv
co-driver
er bench
bench seat cushion forw
forwar
ards
ds
lowing situations in particular: and backw
backwarards
ds
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: In particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
# To fold
fold the
the seat cushion forw
forwar
ards:
ds: li the seat
cushion out of front anchorage 1.
# Pull the seat cushion out of rear anchorage 2
and move it slightly forwards.
# Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion
upwards.
% You can stow individual objects in the stowage
space beneath the co-driver bench seat.
# To fold
fold the
the seat cushion backw
backwar
ards:
ds: fold the
You can rotate the driver's and front passenger rear edge of the seat cushion downwards.
seats by 50° and 180°. The seats engage both in # Slide the seat cushion under the seat backrest
and opposite to the direction of travel as well as at
into rear anchorage 2.
50° towards the exit.
# Ensure that the parking brake is applied and
# Push the front seat cushion downwards until it
engages in front anchorage 1.
the brake lever is down as far as it will go
(/ page 135).
# When rotating the seat, open the respective Folding the
the folding
folding seat up or down
down
front door in order to avoid scraping against
the door trim. & WARNING Risk of injury when using the
# Adjust the steering wheel in such a way that
folding seat due to inserted key
there is su cient clearance to rotate and When the key is in the lock of the partition slid-
adjust the driver's seat (/ page 78). ing door, it can come into contact with the per-
# Slide the front passenger seat forward before son on the folding seat.
rotating it (/ page 66).
# Always remove the key from the partition tabs must not be visible on the release
sliding door before a person sits on the handle.
folding seat. # If the red indicator tabs are visible on the
release handle, re-engage the rear bench
seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury when installing

and removing the rear bench seat
When you install or remove the rear bench
seat, body parts such as feet may become
trapped when the rear bench seat is tipped.
# When installing and removing the rear
bench seat, ensure that there are no
body parts between the rear bench seat
and the oor.
* NOTE Damage to the rear bench seat roll-

ers due to misuse
# Remove key 1 from the partition sliding door.
If the rear bench seat is used improperly or
# Press the push button on catch 2 and fold removed incorrectly, the rear bench seat roll-
seat cushion 3 up or down. ers may be damaged.
# Release push button on catch 2 when seat # If the rear bench seat is in the seat shell,
cushion 3 reaches its end position. do not pull it towards the rear-end door.
# Move seat cushion 3 until it has locked. The Roll the rear seat only beside the seat
push button on catch 2 must be completely shells.
ush with the seat frame. # Do not roll or use the rear bench seat as
a means of transport when removed.
Installing
Inst alling and remo
removing
ving the
the rear
rear bench
bench seat
Installation position of thr
Installation three-per
ee-person
son and four
four-per-
-per-
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect son rear
rear bench
bench seat with
with str
strut
ut
installation of the rear bench seat The three-person rear bench seat is available with
or without a strut. The four-person rear bench seat
If the rear seat is unsuitable, the seat belts is available only with a strut.
may not perform their intended protective The strut is located on the back of the rear bench
function. seat.
# Install the rear seat bench as described
Install the three-person rear bench seat with strut
and only in the direction of travel. only in the third row of seats (above the rear axle).
# Installation of the rear bench seat in a Install the four-person rear bench seat only on the
face-to-face position is not permitted. last row of seats.
# Use only rear bench seats that have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench

seat is not locked in place
If the rear seat is not stable, it may tip over
during a journey.
# Before setting o , ensure that the rear
bench seat is engaged. The red indicator
Remo
emoving
ving the
the rear
rear bench
bench seat
Vehicles with four rows of seats

1 First row of seats
2 Second row of seats
3 Third row of seats: three-person rear bench
seat with strut
4 Fourth row of seats: four-person rear bench
seat with strut Perform these tasks carefully with the assistance
# Install the three-person rear bench seat on the of a second person.
third row of seats 3. # To remov
removee the
the cover
coverss of the
the seat shells: push
# Install the four-person rear bench seat on the retaining clip 1 in the direction of the arrow
fourth row of seats 4. and detach cover 2 by pushing it up and back
at an angle.
Vehicles with three rows of seats

1 First row of seats
2 Second row of seats
3 Third row of seats: four-person rear bench
seat with strut
# Install the four-person rear bench seat on the # Push release handle 2 for the bench seat all
third row of seats 3. the way down and hold it there. At the same
time, tilt the bench seat backwards slightly
using the release handle and pull it slightly
backwards.
# Let go of the release handle.
The locks on the bench seat legs will be
unlocked and red indicator tabs 3 on the
housing of release handle 2 will be visible.
# Hold the unlocked bench seat by grab han-
dles 1 and pull backwards slightly.
# Tilt bench seat 1 backwards and pull it out of # To attac

attachh the
the cover
coverss of the
the seat shells: hold
the seat shells. cover 3 such that retaining lug 1 is pointing
towards rear seat anchorage 2.
% If the bench seat cannot be pulled out of the
seat shells, the bench seat may be wedged in # Insert cover 3 into rear seat anchorage 2 by
the seat anchorage. This can happen if the pushing it downwards at an angle and then clip
bench seat is tilted too far backwards. it to the seat shell.
If the seat cannot be pulled out of the seat shells, # A er removing the rear bench seats, ensure
proceed as follows: that the rear bench seats stand rmly and can-
# Tilt the bench seat forwards without engaging
not tip over when in storage.
it. Please note that the metallic seat support in the
# Pull the bench seat backwards again using vehicle oor will heat up during a journey if the
release handle 2. rear seating has been removed.
# Tilt the bench seat slightly backwards and pull Installing
Inst alling the
the rear
rear bench
bench seat
it out of the seat shells.
# To remove or store the bench seat, place it
next to the seat shells and roll it towards the
rear-end doors.
or
# Li the bench seat out from the side to store
it.
% It may be necessary for the bench seats in
front or behind to be removed.
Warning notice on the rear bench seat

Secure engagement of the rear bench seat is guar-
anteed only if the seat anchorages are kept clean
and free of objects.
% In vehicles registered as passenger vehicles,
observe the maximum permitted number of
seats.
# Remove the covers of the seat shells as descri- Adjus

djusting
ting the
the seat backr
backres
estt of the
the rear
rear bench
bench seat
bed under "Removing the rear bench seat".
# Ensure that there are no objects in the seat
anchorages and seat shells.
# Position the bench seat behind the installation
position.
# Hold the bench seat by the grab handles and
tilt it backwards.
# Roll the bench seat forwards on the level plas-
tic carriers.
# Ensure that the rear legs of the bench seat are
engaged.
% If a partition is installed: the rear bench seat

must not come into contact with the partition
at any time.
# Move the seat backrest to the desired position.
Head res
restr
traints
aints
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the head res
restr
traint
aint mechanically
mechanically

ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
# Tilt the bench seat forwards rmly until the You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
locks on the front legs of the bench seat lowing situations in particular:
engage audibly.
The locks on the front legs of the bench seat
will now be locked and the red indicator tabs restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
on the housing of release handle 1 should no while the vehicle is in motion
longer be visible. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
% If the red indicator tabs on the release handle
housing are visible, the bench seat is not cor- # Before starting the engine: In particular,
rectly engaged. adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
If the bench seat is not correctly engaged, you can
your seat belt.
rectify this situation as follows:
# Unlock the bench seat again and tilt it for-
wards rmly until the locks on the bench seat
front legs engage audibly. restraints not being installed or being
# Attach the covers of the seat shells as descri-
bed under "Removing the rear bench seat". If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
# Before driving o , make sure for every viewed in the direction of travel until it
vehicle occupant that the center of the engages.
head at about eye level. Switching
Switching the
the seat heating on and o
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to switching on the seat heating
to the correct position. Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad-
Using the head restraint fore-and-a adjustment,
ding to become very hot.
adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to
the back of the head as possible. The health of persons with limited temperature
sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high
temperatures may be a ected or they may
even su er burn-like injuries.
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating

may be temporarily deactivated a er it is switched
on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by

objects or documents when the seat heat-
ing is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over-
heating may occur due to objects or docu-
ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions
Head restraint (example of luxury head restraint on or child seats. This could cause damage to the
the driver's seat)
seat surface.
# To raise:
raise: pull the head restraint upwards into # Make sure that no objects or documents
the desired position and ensure that it are on the seats when the seat heating is
engages. switched on.
% Use the head restraint only when it is
engaged. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The power supply has been switched on.
# To lower
lower:: press release button 2, slide the
head restraint downwards into the desired
position and ensure that it engages.
% Use the head restraint only when it is
engaged.
# To move
move forw
forwar
ards:
ds: press release button 1
and pull the head restraint forwards until it
engages in the desired position.
# To move
move backw
backwarards:
ds: press release button 1
and slide the head restraint backwards into the
desired position.
# To remov
remove:e: press release button 2 and pull
the head restraint up and out.
# To install:
install: press the head restraint with detent
into the holes on the le -hand side when
# To switch
switch on: press button 1. Adjus
djusting
ting the
the steer
steering
ing wheel
All indicator lamps on the button light up.
# To lower
lower the
the level:
level: press button 1 until the
required heating level is reached.
Depending on the heating level, one to three
indicator lamps light up.
# To switch
switch o : press button 1 until all indica-
tor lamps are o .
% The seat heating automatically switches back
out of the three heating levels a er 8, 10 and
20 minutes until the seat heating switches o .
Steer
eering
ing wheel
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the steer
steering
ing wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- 1 Lever

ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is 2 Steering column height
in motion 3 Steering column fore-and-a adjustment
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- # To unlock:
unlock: swing lever 1 down as far as it will
lowing situations in particular:
go.
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head The steering wheel is unlocked.
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror # To lock:
lock: pull lever 1 up as far as it will go.
The steering wheel is locked.
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
Stowag
agee areas
areas
# Before starting the engine: In particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the front
front stowag
stowagee compar
compartments
tments
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten Overvie
Over view
w of the
the front
front stor
storag
agee compar
compartments
tments
your seat belt. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 173).
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for children
when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust
the steering wheel.
vehicle.
1 Lockable compartment above windshield (sub-

ject to a maximum load of 4 lb (2 kg))
2 Windshield storage compartment with two cup
holders/ashtray storage space
Storage compartment with cover, depending # Only use the cup holder for containers of
on speci cation the right size.
3 Center console storage compartment with # Close the container, particularly if the liq-
USB port, charging interface, NFC interface uid is hot.
and 12 V socket
4 Storage compartment above windshield (sub-
ject to a maximum load of 5 lb (2.5 kg))
5 Co-driver side storage compartment (subject
to a maximum load of 11 lb (5 kg))
6 Cup holders (/ page 79)
7 Storage compartment in the doors
Infor
Information
mation about the
the bottle
bottle holder
The cup holders for the driver and co-driver are in

the center console.
Key holder 1 for vehicles with a reduced antenna
detection range (KEYLESS-START) is located in the
driver's cup holder. With manual transmission, the
key holder is located in the co-driver's cup holder.
Opening the
the cup holder in the
the rear
rear passenger
passenger com-
partment
par tment
1 Bottle holder in the front doors (example: front
passenger door) & WARNING Risk of injury when getting out,
due to extended cup holder
Cup holders If the cup holder in the rear passenger com-

partment is extended when you are getting out,
Over
Overvie
view
w of cup holders
holders in the
the center
center console you may bump into it.
# Before getting out, slide the cup holder
& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
back under the rear bench seat.
when using the cup holder while the vehi-
cle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers while
the vehicle is moving.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is
moving, the container may be ung around and
liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occupants
may come into contact with the liquid and if it
is hot, they could be scalded. You could be dis-
tracted from tra c conditions and you may
lose control of the vehicle.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle
is stationary.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The ignition is switched on
# To open: press cup holder 1 or 2.

# Fold out the cup holder.
# To close: slide cup holder 1 or 2 back in # Press in cigarette lighter 1.
until it engages. The cigarette lighter will pop out when the
heating element is red-hot.
Ashtrayy and cigare

Ashtra cigarett
ttee lighter
lighter
Using ashtrays Sockets
Sockets
Using the
the 12 V sockets
sockets
# To use the
the ashtray
ashtray:: place the closed ashtray in
a cup holder in the windshield storage com- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
partments. R Only devices with a maximum power consump-
# Check that the ashtray is seated securely. tion of 180 W (15 A) may be connected.
% Do not place the ashtray in the center console 12 V socket
socket in stor
storag
agee compar
compartment
tment
cup holders. It cannot sit securely here.
Using the
the cigare
cigarett
ttee lighter
lighter in the
the center
center console
& WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from hot

cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, ammable materials may ignite if:
R you drop the hot cigarette lighter
R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob. # Open the lid of the storage compartment in the
center console .
# Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children. # Fold up cover 1 of the socket.
# Never leave children unattended in the # Insert the plug of the device.
vehicle.
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehi-

cle has additional 12 V sockets:
R In the lower control panel in the front cen-
ter console
R In the driver's seat
R In the cargo compartment
Using the
the 115 V socket
socket in the
the lower
lower control
control panel
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury due to dam-
aged connecting cables or sockets
If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V
socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the
connecting cable or the 115 V socket is pulled # Open ap 3.
out of the trim or is damaged or wet, you could
receive an electric shock. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket
# Only use dry and damage-free connect- 1.
ing cables. When the on-board electrical system voltage is
su cient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.
# When the ignition is switched o , ensure
that the 115 V socket is dry. If you will not be using the 115 V power socket,
# If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets keep the ap closed.
pulled out of the paneling, immediately
have the socket checked or replaced at a Charging a mobile phone using the
Charging the USB socket
socket in
quali ed specialized workshop. the rear
rear
# Never plug the connecting cable into a
115 V socket that is damaged or has
been pulled out of the trim.
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury due to incor-
rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock:
R if you reach into the socket.
R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.
# Do not reach into the socket.
# Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Place the mobile phone in stowage compart-
R The devices must be equipped with a suitable ment 1 and connect it to USB port 2 to
plug which conforms to the standards speci c charge.
to the country you are in.
R Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts
Installing
Inst alling or remo
removing
ving the
the oor mats
are permitted.
R Do not use multiple socket outlets. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell

of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
# Always install the oor mats securely and
as prescribed in order to ensure that
there is always su cient room for the
pedals.
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
# To install:
install: press pushbuttons 1 onto holders
2.
# To remov
remove:
e: pull the oor mats o holders 2.
Light and vision 83
Exter
Exterior
ior lighting % The turn signal light, the high beam and the
high-beam asher are operated with the com-
Notes on changing
changing the
the lights when driving
driving abroad
abroad bination switch (/ page 84).
Vehicles with
with halogen
halogen or static
static LED headlamps:
headlamps: % Leaving the parking lamps on for several hours
Changing the headlamps is not necessary. The drains the battery.
legal requirements will also be ful lled in countries If the battery charge is very low, the parking
with le and right-hand tra c. lamps will switch o automatically to enable
the next vehicle start.
Information
Infor mation about lighting systems
systems and your
your Aut
utomatic
omatic driving
driving lights function
responsibility
& WARNING Risk of accident when the low
The vehicle's various lighting systems are only
aids. The vehicle driver is responsible for adjusting beam is switched o in poor visibility
the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibil- When the light switch is set to Ã, the low
ity, statutory conditions and tra c conditions. beam may not be switched on automatically if
there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visi-
Light switch bility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to
Operating
Oper ating the
the light switch L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid.

Responsibility for vehicle lighting rests with you.
Turn the light switch from Ã to L immedi-
ately in the event of fog, snow or spray. Otherwise,
the driving light is temporarily interrupted.
To switch the automatic driving lights on:
R Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
Switch the power supply on: the parking lamps
will automatically switch on or o depending
on the brightness of the ambient light.
The daytime running lamps are switched on
when the engine is running. The parking lamps
and the low beam also switch on or o
depending on the brightness of the ambient
# 1 T Activates or deactivates parking light.
lamps and license plate and instrument light- When the low beam is switched on, the L
ing. indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will
# 2 Ã Activates or deactivates automatic also switch on.
driving lights/daytime running lamps (prefer-
red light switch position). Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the fog
fog lamps
lamps
# 3 L Activates or deactivates low beam/ Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
high beam. R The light switch is in the L or Ã posi-
# 4 Activates or deactivates fog lamp. tion.
R The power supply or the engine has been
# 5 R Activates or deactivates rear fog
lamp. switched on.
# 6 Applies or releases the electric parking # To switch
switch the
the fog
fog lamp
lamp on or o : press button
brake (/ page 136). 7.
% If you hear a warning tone when exiting the # To switch
switch the
the rear
rear fog
fog lamp
lamp on or o : press
vehicle, the lights may still be on. button 6.
Comply with the country-speci c regulations for
using the rear fog lamp.
84 Light and vision
Operating
Oper ating the
the combination light switch engages. In the case of larger steering move-
ments, the combination switch will automati-
cally switch back.
# To signal a turn
turn br
brie
ie y: press the combination
switch brie y in the required direction 2 or
4. The corresponding turn signal lamp will
ash three times.
Switching
Switching the
the hazard
hazard war
warning
ning light system
system on/o
1 High beam
2 Right turn signal light
3 Headlamp ashing
4 Le turn signal light
# Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
Switching on high beam
Switching
# Switch on the low beam (/ page 83). # Press button 1.
# Push the combination switch forwards 1. If you operate a turn signal indicator while the haz-
The K indicator lamp on the instrument ard warning light system is switched on, only the
cluster will light up. The combination switch turn signal lamps on the relevant side of the vehi-
will return to its starting position. cle will light up.
% The high beam switches to the Ã position % The hazard warning light system will work even
only in darkness and when the engine is run- when the vehicle has been switched o .
ning.
# To switch
switch o : push combination switch for- Corner
Cor nering
ing light function
wards 1 or brie y pull it in the direction of
arrow 3 (the action for headlamp ashing
switches high beam o ).
The K indicator lamp on the instrument
cluster will go out. The combination switch will
return to its starting position.
% Vehicles with
with Highbeam Assist: when High-
beam Assist is active, it controls the activation
and deactivation of the high beam
(/ page 85).
Headlamp ashing
Headlamp The cornering light improves the illumination of the
roadway over a wide angle in the turning direction,
# Brie y pull the combination switch in the direc-
e.g. enabling better visibility in tight bends.
tion of arrow 3.
Tur
urnn signal light
# To signal a turn:
turn: push the combination switch
in the required direction 2 or 4 until it
Light and vision 85
The function is active under the following condi- At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h), the
tions: system will switch to the following setting:
R The speed is less than 37 mph (60 km/h) and R If no other road users are detected, high beam
the indicator has been switched on or the will switch on automatically.
steering wheel is turned.
At speeds lower than 16 mph (25 km/h) or if there
R The speed is between 37 mph (60 km/h) and
is su cient street lighting, the system will switch
50 mph (80 km/h) and the steering wheel is to the following setting:
turned.
R High beam will automatically switch o .
The cornering light may still light up for a short
time but is switched o automatically a er a maxi- System limits
System
mum of three minutes. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take the road,
weather or tra c conditions into consideration.
% When reverse gear is engaged, the lighting
switches to the opposite side. The detection of obstacles may be restricted if:
R visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or snow.
Highbeam Assist R the sensors are dirty or covered.
Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist function Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for ensuring correct vehicle lighting in
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- accordance with the prevailing light, visibility and
tive Highbeam Assist tra c conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: The system's optical sensor is located behind the
windshield near the overhead control panel.
R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Switching
Switching Highbeam Assist
Assist on/o
R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, Req
equir
uirements
ements
e.g. by a barrier R The light switch is in the Ã position.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam # To switch

switch on: switch on high beam using the
Assist may fail to recognize other road users combination switch.
with their own lighting, or may recognize them If high beam is automatically switched on in
too late. darkness, the _ indicator lamp on the mul-
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic tifunction display will light up.
high beam will not be deactivated or will be # To switch
switch o : switch o high beam using the
activated despite the presence of other road combination switch.
users.
# Always observe the road and tra c con-
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically

switches between the following settings:
R Low beam
R High beam
The system detects that vehicle lights are

approaching in the opposite direction or driving
ahead of the vehicle.
86 Light and vision
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the inter
interior
ior lighting Adjus
djusting
ting the
the inter
interior
ior lighting for
for body manufac-
manufac-
turer
tur er add-on equipment
equipment
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the inter
interior
ior lighting
Variants 1 and 2 combined

Versions 1 to 4
1 p Switches the front le reading lamp
# 1 p Switches the front-le reading lamp on/o
on/o 2 | Activates/deactivates automatic interior
# 2 To switch
switch o the automatic
automatic inter
interior
ior lighting lighting control
control:
contr ol: press the | button. 3 c Switches the front interior lighting
The interior lighting will switch on automatically on/o
if you: 4 w Switches the body manufacturer lamps
R Unlock the vehicle on/o
R Open a door 5 p Switches the front right reading lamp
on/o
# 3 c Switches the (front) interior lighting
on/o . # To switch
switch the
the front
front le reading lamp
lamp on/o :
# 4 w Switches the rear passenger com- press button 1.
partment/cargo compartment lamp on/o . # To deactivat
deactivatee automatic
automatic inter
interior
ior lighting con-
# 5 p Switches the front-right reading lamp trol:
tr ol: press button 2.
on/o Interior lighting control will switch on automati-
cally if you do the following, for example:
R Unlock the vehicle
R Open a door
# To switch
switch the
the front
front inter
interior
ior lighting on/o :
press button 3.
# To switch
switch body manufactur
manufacturer
er lamps
lamps on/o :
press button 4.
R Your vehicle may be equipped with a func-
tional feedback system: w will light up
in red if the body manufacturer lamps are
switched on.
R If the body manufacturer lamps have been
activated manually, they will remain active
for an extended period of time a er lock-
ing.
Light and vision 87
% This period of time is shortened if there is passenger compartment will be illuminated

undervoltage in the starter battery. (dimmed).
% The body manufacturer lamps can be switched R Aut
utomatic
omatic o mode
on only when the battery voltage is stable. If automatic interior lighting control 3 is
# To switch
switch the
the front
front right
right reading
reading lamp
lamp on/o : deactivated, thereby activating automatic
press button 5. o mode, the passenger compartment will
be continuously illuminated (dimmed).
Adjus
djusting
ting inter
interior
ior lighting on bus equipment
equipment When the bus function is activated, the modes can
be selected via button 5 that switches passenger
compartment lighting on/o . Passenger compart-
ment lighting will then be deactivated completely.
When button 5 is pressed again to switch
passenger compartment lighting on/o , the bus
function will again be in one of the modes.
R If automatic interior lighting control 3 was
previously activated, automatic o mode will
be inactive again.
R If automatic o mode was not previously acti-
vated, either driving or stop mode will be
active.
% The bus function can be operated independ-
ently of button 5 that switches passenger
compartment lighting on/o . The passenger
1 i Activates/deactivates the bus function compartment lighting must not be switched on
2 p Switches the front le reading lamp beforehand.
on/o # To deactivat
deactivatee the
the bus function: press button
3 | Activates/deactivates automatic interior 1.
lighting control The LED will not light up.
4 c Switches the front interior lighting # To switch
switch the
the front
front le reading lamp
lamp on/o :
on/o press button 2.
5 w Switches passenger compartment light-
# To deactivat
deactivatee automatic
automatic inter
interior
ior lighting con-
ing on/o
trol:
tr ol: press button 3.
6 p Switches the front right reading lamp
Interior lighting control will switch on automati-
on/o cally if you do the following, for example:
7 j Activates/deactivates reading lighting in
R Unlock the vehicle
the passenger compartment
R Open a door
# To activat
activatee the
the bus function: press button 1. # To switch
switch the
the front
front inter
interior
ior lighting on/o :
The LED will light up.
press button 4.
The bus function will be in one of the following # To switch
switch passenger
passenger compar
compartment
tment lighting on
modes: or o : press button 5.
R StStop
op mode # To switch
switch the
the front
front right
right reading
reading lamp
lamp on/o :
If the vehicle comes to a standstill at a press button 6.
stop, for example, and the passenger door # To activat
activatee reading
reading lighting in the
the passenger
passenger
opens, the passenger compartment will be
compar
com partment
tment:: press button 7.
illuminated (undimmed).
The LED will light up.
R DrDriving
iving mode
Passengers will be able to switch the reading
If all doors are closed and the vehicle is lamps on and o .
traveling faster than walking pace, the
88 Light and vision
# To deactivat
deactivatee reading
reading lighting in the
the passenger
passenger The motion detector is located in the cargo com-
compar
com partment
tment:: press button 7. partment behind the partition, in the center of the
The LED will not light up. roof.
Passengers will no longer be able to operate
the reading lamps.
Switching
Switching the
the reading
reading lamp
lamp above
above the
the passenger
passenger
seat on and o (bus equipment)
equipment)
# Press the p button above the passenger
seat.
Rear inter
interior
ior lighting
1 Position of motion detector
If the vehicle is equipped with a motion detector,
the cargo compartment lighting is also activated
via the motion detector.
If the motion detector detects movement in the
cargo compartment while the vehicle is stationary,
the cargo compartment lighting will switch on for
approximately two minutes.
The cargo compartment lighting will be switched
on via the motion detector in the following situa-
tions:
R The vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is
applied and you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
R Vehicles withwith automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: the
# 1 Switches rear compartment/cargo com-
selector lever is in position j and you are not
partment lamp on or o
depressing the brake pedal.
R The vehicle has not been locked from the out-
Motion
Motion detect
detector
or side using the SmartKey.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to laser beam If no change to the vehicle, such as a door open-
of the motion detector ing, is detected over several hours, the motion
detector will automatically switch o . This prevents
The motion detector emits non-visible radiation the battery from discharging.
from LEDs that are classi ed as class 1M
lasers.
This may damage the retina in the following sit- Changing bulbs
uations: Notes about replacing
replacing light sources
sources
R If you look directly into the un ltered laser
beam of the motion detector for an exten- & WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
ded period. nent parts whilst replacing a bulb
R If you look directly into the laser beam of Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become
the motion detector with optical instru- very hot during operation.
ments, such as glasses or magnifying When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself
glasses. on these component parts.
# Never look directly into the motion detec- # Allow the component parts to cool down
tor. before replacing the bulbs.
Light and vision 89
Important safety notes

R Before changing the bulbs, switch o the vehi-
cle's lighting system. This will prevent a short
circuit.
R Use only spare bulbs of the same type and with
the correct voltage.
R Use bulbs only in enclosed lamps that have
been designed for them.
R Do not use any light source that has been
dropped or has scratches on its glass tube.
Otherwise, the light source may explode.
R The light source may explode under the follow-
ing conditions:
- If it is hot and you touch it
- If you drop it Halogen headlamps
1 High beam/daytime running lamps:
- If you scratch it H15 55 W/15 W
R Stains on the glass tube will reduce the service 2 Low beam/perimeter light: H7 55 W/W 5 W
life of the light source. Do not touch the glass 3 Turn signal light: 3457 NAK 28 W
tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean
the glass tube with alcohol or spirits while it is Replacing halogen
halogen headlamps
headlamps
cold and wipe it down with a lint-free cloth.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Protect light sources from moisture and do not
R Lo
Loww beam: bulb type H7 55 W
bring them into contact with liquids.
Always ensure the bulbs are rmly secured. R High beam/daytime
beam/daytime running
running lamps:
lamps: bulb type
H15 55 W/15 W
If your vehicle is equipped with LED modules, you
can check this as follows: the light cone will move R Per
erimet
imeter
er lights: bulb type W 5 W
from top to bottom and back again when the vehi- R Tur
urnn signal lights: bulb type 3457 NAK 28 W
cle starts. For this to work, low beam needs to
have been switched on before the vehicle is star-
ted.
Bulbs and lamps are major elements in vehicle
safety. Therefore, ensure that they are always
working. Have the headlamp setting checked regu-
larly.
If the new light source also does not light up, con-
sult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Replacing front
front light bulbs (vehicles
(vehicles with
with halogen
halogen
headlamps)
headlam ps)
Over
Overvie
view
w of front
front light source
source types
You can replace the following light sources.
1 Low beam/perimeter light housing cover
2 High beam/daytime running lamps housing
cover
3 Turn signal light socket
# Switch o the lighting system.
# Low
Low beam/perimet
beam/perimeter er light:
light: remove housing
cover 1 towards the rear.
90 Light and vision
# Pull out the socket towards the rear. # Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and
# Remove the bulb from the socket. take it out of the socket.
# Insert the new bulb into the socket such that # Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it
the base of the bulb rests fully against the base clockwise.
of the socket. # Place lens2 in position and tighten the
# Align and insert the socket. screws1.
# Attach housing cover 1.
# High beam/daytime
beam/daytime running
running lamps:
lamps: remove Replacing rear
rear light bulbs (Cargo
(Cargo Van
Van and
housing cover 2 towards the rear. Passeng
assenger
er Van)
Van)
# Turn the socket counter-clockwise and pull it Overvie
Over view
w of rear
rear bulb types (Cargo
(Cargo Van
Van and
out. Passeng
assenger
er Van)
Van)
# Remove the bulb from the socket. You can replace the following bulbs.
# Insert the new bulb into the socket such that
the base of the bulb rests fully against the base
of the socket.
# Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.
# Attach housing cover 2.
# Tur
urnn signal light:
light:
# Turn socket 3 counter-clockwise and remove
it.
# Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and
take it out of the socket.
# Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it
clockwise.
# Insert socket 3 and turn it clockwise.
Additional turn
turn signal light Vehicles with standard tail lamps
1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light: P 21 W
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Additional turn
2 Backing up light: P 21 W
turn signal light (all-wheel driv
drivee vehi-
vehi-
cles): bulb type P 21 W 3 License plate lamp: W 5 W
4 Rear fog light: P 21 W
You can replace the following bulbs.
# Switching o the lighting system.

# Unscrew screws1 and remove lens 2.
Light and vision 91
Vehicles with partial LED tail lamps

1 Backing up light: P 21 W
2 License plate lamp: W 5 W
3 Rear fog light: P 21 W
Changing the
the tail
tail lamps
lamps (Cargo
(Cargo Van
Van and Passeng
Passenger
er
Van)
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Br
Brak
akee lights/tail
lights/tail lights/perimet
lights/perimeter
er lights: bulb
type P 21 W
R Bac
Backing
king up lights: bulb type P 21 W
R Rear fogfog lights: bulb type P 21 W
# To remov
remove:
e: loosen screws 1 and pull out the
tail lamp in the direction of the arrow.
# Remove the plug from bulb mount 3.
# Loosen screws 2 and remove bulb mount 3
from the tail lamp.
clockwise.
# To install:
install: set bulb mount 3 on the tail lamp
and screw in screws 2.
# Press the plug into bulb mount 3.
1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light # Insert the tail lamp and screw in screws 1.
2 Backing up light
3 Rear fog light
# Open the rear-end door.
92 Light and vision
License plate
plate lamp 5 Backing up light: P 21 W
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: 6 Rear fog light (driver's side): P 21 W
R License plate
plate lamp:
lamp: light bulb type W 5 W 7 License plate lamp: R 5 W
Replacing the
the tail
tail lamps
lamps on the
the chassis
chassis
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Rear fogfog lights: bulb type P 21 W
R License plate
plate lighting: bulb type R 5 W
R Bac
Backing
king up lights: bulb type P 21 W
R Tur
urnn signal lights: bulb type PY 21 W
R Clear
Clearance
ance lamps:
lamps: bulb type R 5 W
# Switch o the lighting system. R Br
Brak
akee lights: bulb type P 21 W
# Place a screwdriver, for example, at opening R Tail lights: bulb type R 5 W
2 between lamp 3 and panel 1 and care-
fully pry o lamp 3.
# Remove lamp 3 from panel 1.
# Rotate the bulb holder by around 45° and
detach it from the lamp.
# Remove the light bulb.
# Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
# Insert the bulb holder into the lamp and rotate
it by around 45°.
# Insert the lamp into the panel opening until it
engages.
Replacing rear
rear light bulbs (chassis)
(chassis)
Over
Overvie
view
w of rear
rear light source
source types (chassis)
(chassis)
You can replace the following light sources. 1 Light lens
2 Screws
3 Rear fog light
4 License plate lamp
5 Backing up light
6 Turn signal light
7 Clearance lamp
8 Brake light
9 Tail light
# Unscrew screws 2 and remove light lens 1.
# Remove the plug from the bulb mount.
Vehicles with standard tail lamps
clockwise.
1 Clearance lamp: R 5 W
# Position light lens 1 and tighten screws 2.
2 Tail light: R 5 W
3 Brake light: P 21 W
4 Turn signal lights: PY 21 W
Light and vision 93
Replacing inter
interior
ior light bulbs Windshield wipers
Replacing rear
rear inter
interior
ior lamps
lamps Switching
Switching the
the windshield wipers
wipers on and o
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
% For the standard bulb failure indicator function
to work correctly, only lights bulbs must be
used that are the same type and power as
those installed during production.
1 î Single wipe/wiping with washer uid

1 g Windshield wipers o
2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
Vehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping,
normal
# Switch o the interior lighting. 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent
# Press in catch spring of lens 1 with a suitable Vehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping,
object e.g. a screwdriver, and then lever o the frequent
lens with the lamp housing. 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
# To pull back
back lens from
from the
the lamp
lamp housing: press 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
the lugs of lens 2 inwards.
# Turn the combination switch to the corre-
# Remove light bulb 3 from the lamp housing. sponding position 1 – 5.
# Insert the new light bulb. # Single wipe/washing:
wipe/washing: press the button on the
# Insert the lens in the lamp housing until it combination switch in the direction of arrow
engages. 1.
# Place the lens with the lamp housing in posi- R í Single wipe
tion and engage it. R î Wiping with washer uid
94 Light and vision
Switching
Switching the
the rear
rear window
window wiper on/o % If the wiper blades are worn out, they will not
wipe the windshield properly. Replace the
wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring
and fall.
1 ô Single wipe/wash
2 è Intermittent wiping
# Single wipe: press button 1 to the point of # Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield.
resistance. # Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade
# Wiping with
with washer
washer uid: press button 1 away from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the
beyond the point of resistance. arrow as far as it will go.
# To switch
switch inter
intermitt
mittent
ent wiping on or o : press # Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the
button 2. arrow until it engages.
If the rear window wiper is switched on, the # Fold back the wiper blade onto the wiper arm.
è symbol will appear on the instrument dis- # Remove wiper blade 1 from wiper arm.
play.
# Insert new washer blade 1 in the holder on
wiper arm 3.
Replacing the
the windshield wiper blades
When doing so, take into account the di erent
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the lengths of the wiper blades:
windshield wipers are switched on while R Driver's side: long wiper blade
wiper blades are being replaced
R Front-passenger side: short wiper blade
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be # Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages.
trapped by the wiper arm. # Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield.
# Always switch o the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the Replacing the
the windshield wiper blades (WET WIPER
wiper blades.
SYSTEM)
SYSTEM)
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
windshield wipers while the engine hood is windshield wipers are switched on while
open wiper blades are being replaced
When the engine hood is open and the wind- If the windshield wipers begin to move while
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage. trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch o the windshield wipers # Always switch o the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine and the ignition before changing the
hood. wiper blades.
Light and vision 95
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the # Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield.
windshield wipers while the engine hood is
open Replacing the
the rear
rear window
window wiper blade
When the engine hood is open and the wind-
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch o the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.
% If the wiper blades are worn out, they will not

wipe the windshield properly. Replace the
wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring
and fall.
# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the rear window.

# Press both retaining clips 2 together in the
direction of the arrow and swivel the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm.
# Pull wiper blade 1 upwards out of the holder
on wiper arm 3.
# Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on
wiper arm 3.
# Push new wiper blade 1 onto wiper arm 3
until the retaining clips engage.
# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield. # Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the rear window.
# Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade
away from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the
arrow as far as it will go. Mirrors
Mirr ors
# Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the Operating
Oper ating the
the outside mirrors
mirrors
arrow until it engages.
# Remove wiper blade 1 from the wiper arm in
the direction of arrow 4. ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
# Carefully remove hose 5 from the wiper
blade. You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
# Attach hose 5 to the new wiper blade.
# Insert new washer blade 1 in the holder on restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
wiper arm 3. while the vehicle is in motion
When doing so, take into account the di erent R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
lengths of the wiper blades: cle is in motion
R Driver's side: long wiper blade # Before starting the engine: In particular,
R front-passenger side: short wiper blade adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
# Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages. your seat belt.
# Fold back the wiper blade onto the wiper arm.
96 Light and vision
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- # Before driving o , switch on the power supply
judgment of distance when using the or the ignition.
front-passenger mirror # To fold
fold in or out:
out: brie y press button 2.
The outside mirror on the front passenger side # To adjust:
adjust: use button 1 or 3 to select the
re ects objects on a smaller scale. The objects outside mirror to be adjusted.
in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Set the position of the mirror glass using but-
# Therefore, always look over your shoulder ton 4.
to check the actual distance between # To engag
engagee an outside mirror
mirror that
that has been
you and the road users traveling behind pushed out of position: press and hold button
you. 2.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the outside mirror
mirrorss manually engage in position. The outside mirror is set in
# Adjust the outside mirrors to the correct posi- the correct position.
tion manually.
Heating the
the outside mirrors
mirrors
# To engag
engagee an outside mirror
mirror that
that has been
# Vehicles without
without a rear
rear window
window heater
heater:: at low
pushed out of position: push the outside mirror
into position manually. temperatures, the mirror heater will switch on
automatically once the engine has been star-
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the outside mirror
mirrorss electrically
electrically ted.
# Vehicles with
with a rear
rear window
window heater
heater:: at low tem-
peratures, the mirror heater will switch on
automatically once the engine has been star-
ted. The mirror heater can also be switched on
together with the rear window heater using the
rear window heater button.
Dimming the
the inside rear
rearvie
view
w mirror
mirror
Example image
* NOTE Damage to the electric outside mir-

rors
If you fold or unfold the electric outside mirrors
by hand, you may damage the outside mirrors
and the outside mirrors will not engage prop-
erly.
If the outside mirrors are not folded in when # Fold anti-glare lever 1 in the direction of the
washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, arrow.
the brushes may forcibly fold in and damage
the outside mirrors.
# Only fold the outside mirrors in and out
electrically.
# Fold in the outside mirrors before wash-
ing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
Climate control 97
Over
Overvie
view
w of climate
climate control
control systems
systems
Heating system
system over
overview
view
1 Adjusts the temperature

2 / Switches the rear-compartment heating
on/o
3 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
(/ page 101)
4 O Switches footwell air distribution on/o
5 ¬ Switches windshield defrosting on/o
(/ page 100)
6 Vehicles with stationary heater or heater boos-
ter: & switches the stationary heater or
heater booster on/o (/ page 103)
7 Sets the air ow
% The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that
the function in question has been activated.
98 Climate control
Over
Overvie
view
w of dual-zone or 3-zone automatic
automatic climate
climate control
control
1 w Sets the temperature Operating

Oper ating climate
climate control
control systems
systems
2 Display Switching
Switching the
the climate
climate control
control system
system on/o
3 K Sets the air ow
4
# To switch
switch on: set the air ow to 1 or higher on
Î Vehicles with windshield heating:
the front-compartment menu.
switches the windshield heating on/o
(/ page 100) # To switch
switch o : set the air ow to 0 or OFF on the
5 Vehicles with stationary heaters or heater front-compartment menu.
boosters: & switches the stationary heater OFF will appear on the climate control system
or heater booster on/o (/ page 103) display.
6 Vehicles with a rear window heating: ¤ % When the climate control system is switched
switches the rear window heating on/o o , the windows may fog up more quickly.
(/ page 101) Switch the climate control system o only
7 brie y.
h Switches air-recirculation mode on/o
(/ page 100) % If the front-compartment system has already
8 ¬ Switches windshield defrosting on/o been switched on and the rear-compartment
(/ page 100) system has been switched o , you can switch
it on by turning up the blower on the rear-com-
9 _ Sets the air distribution (/ page 100) partment menu. If the front-compartment sys-
A ¿ Switches the A/C function on/o tem is switched on, the rear-compartment sys-
(/ page 99) tem will automatically switch on as well.
B Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode,
front (/ page 99) and rear (/ page 99)
Setting
Setting the
the rear
rear-com
-compar
partment
tment climate
climate control
control
C 0 Activates/deactivates synchronization
(/ page 100) Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
D / Vehicles with dual-zone climate control R The climate control system has been switched
systems: adjusts the rear-compartment cli- on (/ page 98).
mate control/heating (indicator lamp ashes) Setting the
Setting the tem
temper
peratur
aturee and air ow wit
withh dual-zone
(/ page 98) and 3-zone automatic
automatic climate
climate control:
control:
% The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that # Press the / button.
the function in question has been activated. The indicator lamp on the / button and
the / symbol on the climate control system
display will ash.
Climate control 99
The display will switch to the temperature and Aut

utomaticall
omaticallyy regulating
regulating climate
climate control
control
the blower on the rear menu.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
# Use the w and K rocker switches to set
R The climate control system has been switched
the required temperature and air ow on the on (/ page 98).
rear-compartment menu.
% If there are signi cant di erences between the Switching
Switc hing on automatic
automatic climate
climate control
control
temperature settings of the front and rear sys- In automatic mode, the temperature, air ow and
tems, these cannot be regulated accurately. air distribution are regulated and kept constant.
% If the rear-compartment climate control has # Press the Ã button.
been switched o , you can switch it on auto- The display will show the temperature. The air-
matically by pressing the 0 button. ow and air distribution will disappear from the
display.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, climate con-
trol will switch on the roof-mounted air condition- If the rear compartment climate control has
ing system or rear-compartment heating as been switched on, the setting for the rear com-
required: partment will be carried over.
R Vehicles withwith a roof-mount
roof-mounted
ed air conditioning Switching o aut
Switching automatic
omatic climate
climate control
control
system:
syst em: the rear compartment can only be # Use the K rocker switch to change the air-
cooled. ow setting and air distribution
R Vehicles withwith rear
rear-com
-compar
partment
tment heating: the (/ page 100) .
rear compartment can only be heated. The other setting will remain una ected by the
change.
Switching o rear
Switching ear-com
-compar
partment
tment climate
climate control
control via
dual-zone and 3-zone automatic
automatic climate
climate control:
control:
# Press the / button.
Aut
utomaticall
omaticallyy controlling
controlling climate
climate control
control in the
the
rear compar
compartment
tment
# If the indicator lamp on the / button and
the / symbol on the climate control system Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
display ash, set the air ow to 0 on the rear- R Rear-compartment climate control has been
compartment menu. switched on (/ page 98).
% Indicator lamp on: rear-compartment climate In automatic mode, the temperature, air ow and
control has been switched on. air distribution are regulated and kept constant.
Indicator lamp o : rear-compartment climate # Press the / button.
control has been switched o .
Indicator lamp ashes: the setting mode of the # Press the Ã button.
rear-compartment climate control is active. % Even if the front-compartment system is in

automatic mode, the rear-compartment sys-
Switching
Switching the
the A/C function on/o tem can exit automatic mode if you adjust the
blower on the rear-compartment menu.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: % If the air is cooled and the driver's, front
R The climate control system has been switched passenger or sliding door is opened, the rear
on (/ page 98). air conditioning system blower will be turned
The A/C function controls the climate and dries down a er around 15 minutes.
the air inside the vehicle. When all doors have been closed again, the
blower will be reset to the previous setting
# Press the ¿ button.
a er around one minute.
% Switch o the A/C function only brie y. Other-
wise, the windows could fog up more quickly.
Infor
Information
mation on the
the air distr
distribution
ibution settings
settings
% Condensation may leak from the underside of
the vehicle in cooling mode. This is not a sign The symbols on the display indicate the vents
of a malfunction. through which the air is being directed.
100 Climate control
Automatic climate control # Vehicles with

with dual-zone or 3-zone automatic
automatic
R b Defroster and center air vent climatee control:
climat control: press the ¿ button and, if
necessary, use the _ button to direct the
R _ All vents
air onto the windshield ¯.
R P Center air vent # Increase the air ow as necessary and close all
R S Center and footwell vents air vents (/ page 101).
3-zone automatic climate control # If the windows remain fogged up: press
the ¬ button.
R ¯ Defroster vent
When windshield defrosting is switched on, the
R b Defroster and center air vent temperature and air ow cannot be adjusted.
R _ All vents ¬ or no symbol will appear on the climate
R a Defroster and footwell vents control system display.
R P Center air vent # Vehicles with
with a windshield heater
heater:: press
the Î button.
R S Center and footwell vents
# Close the center air vent (/ page 101) and air
R O Footwell vents
vents for the headroom (/ page 101) and
rear compartment (/ page 102).
Setting
Setting the
the air distr
distribution
ibution
Condensation on the
the outside of windows
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Switch on the windshield wipers (/ page 93).
R The climate control system is switched on.
# Press the _ button repeatedly until the Switching

Switching air-r
air-recir
ecirculation
culation mode on/o
desired air distribution appears in the air con-
ditioning system display. # Press the h button.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Switching
Switching the
the synchr
synchronization
onization function on/o Air-recirculation mode will switch o automatically.
% When air-recirculation mode is switched on,
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch
R The climate control system has been switched
on air-recirculation mode only brie y.
on (/ page 98).
Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch on
The synchronization function controls the climate in the following cases:
control function centrally. The settings for the tem-
R At high outside temperatures
perature and air ow in the front zone are automati-
cally adopted for the rear zone. R While the vehicle is driving through a tunnel
# Press the 0 button.
(vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
only)
% If the rear-compartment climate control has R When the windshield wipers are switched on
been switched o , you can switch it on auto-
(/ page 93)
matically by pressing the 0 button.
The indicator lamp on the h button will not
Defros
Defr osting
ting the
the windows light up in this case. A er a maximum of
30 minutes, outside air will automatically be intro-
Condensation on the
the inside of windows duced again.
# Press the ¬ button.
When windshield defrosting is switched on, the Switching
Switching the
the windshield heater
heater on and o
temperature and air ow cannot be adjusted.
% In the event of high outside temperatures, the
# In vehicles with a heating system and a manual
windshield heater may not switch on.
air-conditioning system, also close the side and
center air vent (/ page 101) as well as the air
# Press the Î button.
vents for the rear compartment (/ page 102). If the indicator lamp on the button lights up,
the windshield heater has switched on.
Climate control 101
% The windshield heater switches o automati-

cally a er a few minutes.
% If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be
possible to switch the windshield heater on. If
the battery voltage becomes too low while the
windshield heater is in operation, the wind-
shield heater will switch o automatically.
Switching
Switching the
the rear
rear window
window heater
heater on or o
# Press the ¤ button.
If the indicator lamp lights up, the rear window
heater is switched on.
Operating
Oper ating air vents
vents # To open or close: turn the adjustment
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front-com
front-compar
partment
tment air vents
vents wheels 1 on the high-power air vents to the
le or right as far as they will go.
& WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite % Cooled air will ow out of the high-power air
due to being too close to the air vents vents. Heating will not be possible. Open the
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air high-power air vents only in summer during
vents. cooling mode and keep them closed in winter.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. Adjus
djusting
ting air vents
vents in the
the roof
roof air duct
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a su cient distance to
the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the air ow to another
area of the vehicle interior.
In vehicles with a rear compartment air condition-

ing system, adjustable air vents have been integra-
ted in the roof air duct.
# To adjust
adjust the
the air ow: if necessary, open or
close the air aps in air vents 1.
# To open or close: hold center 2 of air vent 1 # To adjust
adjust the
the air distr
distribution:
ibution: turn air vents 1
and turn it to the le or right as far as it will go. to the required position.
# To set
set the
the air direction:
direction: hold center 2 of air
vent 1 and swivel it upwards, downwards, to
the le or to the right.
102 Climate control
Information
Infor mation about air vents
vents in the
the rear
rear compar
compart-
t- # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the
ment vehicle free from snow when the engine
or the stationary heater are running.
& WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite # Open a window on the windward side of
due to being too close to the air vents the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air of fresh air.
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the & WARNING Risk of re due to hot stationary
immediate vicinity of the air vents. heater components and exhaust gases
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
always maintain a su cient distance to twigs may ignite.
the air vents. # When the stationary heater is switched
# If necessary, direct the air ow to another on, make sure that:
area of the vehicle interior. R Hot vehicle parts do not come into
contact with ammable materials.
R The exhaust gas can ow out of the
stationary heater exhaust pipe unhin-
dered.
R The exhaust gas does not come into
contact with ammable materials.
* NOTE Damage to the auxiliary heating

If the auxiliary heating is not used for a long
time, it may be damaged.
# Switch on the auxiliary heating at least
once a month for about ten minutes.
* NOTE Damage to the auxiliary heating due

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there will be to overheating
an air duct or a heater with additional air vents in If the ow of hot air is blocked, the auxiliary
the rear compartment footwell on the le -hand heating may overheat and switch o .
side 1. No objects may be placed there. Occu-
# Do not block the ow of hot air.
pants must maintain a su cient distance due to
the warm air ow and air intake.
% Vehicles with
with modi ed fuel displays:
displays: if an
externally operated consumer is connected via
Auxiliar
uxiliaryy heating the cable for the auxiliary heating, this is not
taken into consideration on the "remaining
Notes about auxiliary
auxiliar y heating range" display of the on-board computer.
In this case, observe the fuel display. The fuel
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- display re ects the actual ll level.
ous exhaust gases
If you are transporting hazardous materials, com-
If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation ply with the relevant safety regulations. Place
is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such objects a su cient distance from the auxiliary
as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. heating outlet opening.
This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the Auxiliary heating works independently of the
vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example. engine and complements the climate control sys-
# Always switch the stationary heater o in tem in the vehicle. Auxiliary heating heats the air
enclosed spaces without an air extrac- inside the vehicle to the set temperature.
tion systems, e.g. in garages.
Climate control 103
Hot-w
Hot-wat
ater
er auxiliary
auxiliar y heater
heater Colors of the indicator lamp:
Function of the
the hot-w
hot-wat
ater
er auxiliary
auxiliar y heater
heater R Blue: stationary ventilation has been switched
The hot-water auxiliary heater complements your on.
vehicle's climate control system, and has a heater R Red: the stationary heater has been switched
booster, auxiliary heating and auxiliary ventilation on.
function. In addition, the auxiliary heating system R Yellow: a departure time has been preselected.
heats the engine coolant to protect the engine and
save fuel during the warming-up phase. The auxili- The stationary heater or ventilation switches o
ary heating heats the air inside the vehicle to the a er a maximum of 50 minutes.
set temperature. It is not dependent on the heat # To activat
activatee heater
heater booster
booster mode: switch on the
output of the running engine. The auxiliary heating ignition and press the & button.
is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For # To switch
switch o heat
heater
er booster
booster mode: press
this reason, the fuel tank must have been lled
the & button.
above the reserve fuel level so that the auxiliary
heating can work. The auxiliary heating automati- Heater booster mode will be switched on as
cally adapts its operating mode to the outside tem- necessary when the outside temperature is
perature and weather. It is therefore possible that lower than 32°F (0°C).
the auxiliary heating may switch from ventilation to Setting
Setting the
the hot-w
hot-wat
ater
er auxiliary
auxiliar y heater
heater using the
the on-
heating mode or from heating to ventilation mode. board comput
board computerer
When the engine is running, auxiliary ventilation is
not active. Auxiliary heating automatically switches Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
itself o a er a maximum of 50 minutes. You can- R The fuel tank is lled above the reserve level.
not use the "auxiliary ventilation" operating mode R The ignition is switched on.
to cool the air inside the vehicle to below the out-
side temperature. Auxiliary heating helps to heat On-board computer:
up the vehicle while the engine is running and at 4 Settings 5 Heating
low outside temperatures.
Setting
Setting the
the switch-on
switch-on time
Operating the hot-water auxiliary heater draws
# Select Settings.
power from the vehicle battery. Therefore, drive a
reasonably long distance a er heating or ventilat- # Select the desired departure time.
ing the vehicle twice in succession at most.
Activ
ctivating
ating the
the departur
depar turee time
Auxiliary heating can be activated only at tempera-
# Activate the departure time by ticking the box.
tures below 40 °F (4.5 °C).
% Ensure that A, B and C each correspond to a
Switching the
Switching the hot-w
hot-wat
ater
er auxiliary
auxiliar y heater
heater on/o programmed departure time.
withh the
wit the button
button
% The programmed time remains set only until
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: the next time the engine is started.
R The fuel tank is lled above the reserve level.
Selecting a progr
programmed
ammed time
# To switch
switch the
the auxiliary
auxiliar y heating on and o : # Set the required programmed time A, B or C.
press the & button.
# To activat
activatee the
the speci ed tem
emper
peratur
ature:
e: switch % The required programmed time A, B or C will
on the ignition and press the & button. appear only if the box to activate the depar-
# To deactivat
deactivatee the
the speci ed tememper
peratur
ature:
e: press ture time is ticked.
the & button. # Select the required programmed time by swip-
ing le or right, e.g. A, B or C.
# Set the temperature using the w button
and press the & button.
104 Climate control
Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the hot-w
hot-wat
ater
er auxiliary # To switch
switch on and extr
extract
act:: press switch 1 at
heater
heater the top.
The roof ventilator removes used air from the
FAIL ¨ appear
appearss on the
the remot
remotee control
control display cargo compartment.
Possible cause: # To switch
switch on and admit fresh
fresh air:
air: press switch
R Signal transmission between transmitter and 2 at the bottom.
receiver is malfunctioning. The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into the
cargo compartment.
# Change your position in relation to the vehicle,
moving closer if necessary.
# To switch
switch o : set the switch to the center posi-
tion.
FAIL appears
appears on the
the remot
remotee control
control display
Possible cause:
R The starter battery is not su ciently charged.
# Charge the starter battery.
Possible cause:
R The fuel tank is not lled up to the reserve
level.
# Refuel at the nearest gas station.
FAIL appears
appears on the
the remot
remotee control
control display
display ¯
Possible cause:
R The auxiliary heating has malfunctioned.
# Have the auxiliary heating checked at a quali-
Operating
Oper ating cargo
cargo compar
compartment
tment ventilation
ventilation
If your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator,

you can admit fresh air to the cargo compartment,
or extract air from it as well.
# Switch on the ignition.
Driving and parking 105
Driving
Dr iving Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The key is in detection range of the antenna
Switching on pow
Switching power
er supply
supply or ignition with
with the
the (/ page 47) and the key battery is not dis-
star
st art/st
t/stop
op button
button charged.
R In addition, the following applies for vehicles
with a reduced detection range: the key is
to children le unattended in the vehicle
located in the key holder provided in the driv-
If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, er's cup holder (/ page 79).
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
R Get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R Releasing the parking brake.
R Changing the transmission position.
R Starting the vehicle.

vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the # To switch
switch on the
the power
power supply:
supply: press button
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. 1 once.
You can switch on the windshield wipers, for
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
example.
of children.
The power supply is switched o again when one
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death caused by exhaust of the following conditions is met:
gases R The driver's door is open.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust R You press button 1 twice.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these
exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads # To switch
switch on the
the ignition: press button 1
to poisoning. twice.
The indicator lamps appear in the instrument
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the
cluster.
auxiliary heating running in an enclosed
space without su cient ventilation. The ignition is switched o again when one of the
following conditions is met:
& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes.
material in the engine compartment or the R You press button 1 once.
exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite.
# Therefore, check regularly that there are
no ammable materials in the engine
compartment or on the exhaust system.
106 Driving and parking
Star
arting
ting the
the engine Req
equir
uirements
ements
R The key is in detection range of the antenna
Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with the
the star
start/st
t/stop
op button
button (/ page 47) and the key battery is not dis-
charged.
to children le unattended in the vehicle R In addition, the following applies for vehicles
with a reduced detection range: the key is
If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, located in the key holder provided in the driv-
they could, in particular: er's cup holder (/ page 79).
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
R Get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R Releasing the parking brake.
R Changing the transmission position.
R Starting the vehicle.

vehicle.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: shi the
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach transmission to position j or i.
of children. # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1
once.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due # If the vehicle does not start: switch o unnec-
to animals le unsecured or unattended in essary consumers and press button 1 once.
the vehicle # If the vehicle still does not start and the display
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended messagePlace Key in Marked Space See
or unsecured, they could possibly press but- Operator's Manual also appears in the multi-
tons or switches. function display: start the vehicle in emergency
An animal may: operation mode.
R Activate vehicle equipment and become Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle in emergency
emergency operation
operation mode
trapped, for example
R Switch systems on or o and endanger
other road users to children le unattended in the vehicle
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- they could, in particular:
den steering and braking maneuvers and injure R open doors, thereby endangering other
vehicle occupants in the process. persons or road users.
# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat- R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
tended. R operate vehicle equipment and become
# Always correctly secure animals while trapped, for example.
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car-
rier.
In addition, the children could also set the Breaking-in

Br eaking-in notes
notes
vehicle in motion, for example by: Protect the engine during the rst 1,000 miles
R releasing the parking brake. (1,500 km) by:
R changing the transmission position. R Driving at varying road and engine speeds.
R starting the vehicle. R Shi ing to the next highest gear at the very lat-
est when the needle reaches the last third
# Never leave children unattended in the before the red area in the tachometer.
vehicle.
R Avoiding stress on the vehicle such as driving
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the at full throttle.
R Not shi ing manually to a lower gear to brake.
R A er 1,000 miles (1,500 km), gradually
of children.
increasing the engine speed and accelerating
If the vehicle does not start and the display mes- the vehicle up to full speed.
sage Place Key in Marked Space See Operator's R Vehicles withwith automatic
transmission: not
Manual appears in the multifunction display, you depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the
can start the vehicle in emergency operation pressure point (kickdown).
mode.
This also applies if the engine or parts of the drive-
train have been replaced.
Also observe the following breaking-in notes:
R A er the vehicle has been delivered or a er
repairs, the sensor system of the ESP® driving
safety system adjusts itself automatically a er
the vehicle has been driven a certain distance.
Full system e ectiveness is not reached until
the end of this teach-in process.
R New and replaced brakepads, brake discs and
tires only reach their optimal braking e ect
and traction a er approximately 100 miles.
Until then, compensate for the reduced brak-
ing e ect by applying greater pressure to the
brake pedal.
# Remove key 1 from your key ring.
# Insert key 1 into the slot. Driving
Dr iving tips
The vehicle is started a er a brief time. Notes on driving
driving
# Leave the key inserted during the entire jour-
ney. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
If you pull key 1 out of the slot, the engine in the driver's footwell
continues to run. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
# Have key 1 checked at a quali ed specialist pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
workshop. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety
If the
the vehicle
vehicle does not
not start:
start: of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects securely in the vehicle
# Leave key 1 in the marked space.
so that they do not get into the driver's
# Depress the brake pedal. footwell.
# Start the vehicle with the start/stop button. # When using oor mats or carpets, make
% You can also switch on the power supply or sure that they are properly secured so
the ignition with the start/stop button. that they do not slip or obstruct the ped-
als.
# Do not lay multiple oor mats or carpets # Open a window on the side of the vehicle
on top of one another. facing away from the wind to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect footwear & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to being under the in uence of alcohol and
Incorrect footwear includes, for example:
drugs while driving
R Shoes with platform soles
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
R Shoes with high heels
driving are very dangerous combinations. Even
R Slippers a small amount of alcohol or drugs can a ect
your re exes, perceptions and judgment.
There is a risk of an accident.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
# Always wear suitable footwear so that
dent are greatly increased when you drink or
you can operate the pedals safely.
take drugs and drive.
# Do not drink or take drugs and drive or
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is
allow anyone to drive who has been
switched o while driving drinking or taking drugs.
If you switch o the ignition while driving,
safety functions are restricted or no longer & WARNING Risk of accident and injury from
available. operating mobile communications equip-
This may a ect the power steering system and ment
the brake force boosting, for example.
If you operate mobile communication equip-
You will need to use considerably more force ment when driving, you will be distracted from
to steer and brake, for example. the tra c situation. This could also cause you
# Do not switch o the ignition while driv- to lose control of the vehicle.
ing. The probability of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent increases greatly if you operate mobile
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death caused by exhaust communication equipment when driving.
gases # Only operate mobile communication
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these
exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads For your own safety, always observe the following
to poisoning. points when operating mobile communications
equipment:
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the
R Observe the legal requirements for the country
auxiliary heating running in an enclosed
space without su cient ventilation. in which you are driving.
R While driving, only operate mobile communica-
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- tions equipment when the tra c conditions
ous exhaust gases permit it. You may otherwise be distracted
from the tra c conditions and cause an acci-
If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation dent, injuring yourself and others.
is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such
as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident due to over-
This is the case when the vehicle becomes heated brake system
stuck in snow, for example.
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal during
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the
while driving, the brake system may overheat.
vehicle free from snow when the engine
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
# Do not press the brake pedal and accel- # If the vehicle height is greater than the
erator pedal simultaneously while driving. permitted headroom clearance, do not
enter.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you should # Observe the changed vehicle height with
change down to a lower gear in good time. Take add-on roof equipment.
particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle.
By doing so, you will make use of the engine's Exhaust emission monitor
Exhaust monitoring
ing
braking e ect. This will take some of the strain o Speci c engine systems are designed to keep poi-
the brake system and prevent the brakes from sonous components of exhaust gases within legal
overheating and wearing too quickly. limits.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by These systems only work optimally if they are
continuously depressing the brake pedal maintained exactly according to manufacturer's
speci cations. It is for this reason that all work on
# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- the engine should only be performed by quali ed
ously whilst driving. and authorized Mercedes-Benz Center technicians.
# To use the braking e ect of the engine, Under no circumstances should engine settings be
shi to a lower gear in good time. changed. In addition, all speci c maintenance
work must be performed at regular intervals and in
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine compliance with the service regulations of the
when pulling away dealer named in the imprint. Refer to the Mainte-
nance Booklet for details.
# Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi- Notes
Not es on short-dist
shor t-distance
ance trips
trips
ately. If the vehicle is predominantly used for short-dis-
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at tance driving, fuel may accumulate in the engine
full throttle until the engine has reached oil and cause engine damage.
its operating temperature. If you mainly drive short distances, you should
drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter minutes every 480 km (300 miles). This facilitates
due to non-combusted fuel the regeneration of the diesel particulate lter.
The engine is not running smoothly and is mis- Notes

Notes on the
the limit speed
ring.
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding
Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic the speci ed tire load-bearing capacity or
converter. the permissible speed rating
# Only depress the accelerator pedal
Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the
slightly.
permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam-
# Have the cause recti ed immediately at a
age and to the tires bursting.
quali ed specialist workshop. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not # Observe the tire load rating and speed
observing the maximum permitted head-
rating required for your vehicle.
room clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- You must nd out about the maximum permissible
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof speed for the tires, i.e. tire and tire pressure.
and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- Observe the legal requirements for tires for the
aged. country in which you are staying.
# Observe the signposted headroom clear- % Vehicles with
with tac
tachogr
hograph:
aph: due to the di erent
ance. certi cation requirements for the tachograph
and instrument cluster, the displayed speeds
may di er. Please keep to the speed display in
the instrument cluster.
You can permanently limit the speed of your vehi- # Do not shi down on slippery road surfa-
cle. ces to increase the engine braking
Mercedes-Benz recommends a quali ed specialist e ect.
workshop for programming the limit speed.
Note that you cannot exceed a programmed limit & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
speed when overtaking. brake system overheating
On downhill gradients, the limit speed may be If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when
exceeded. Apply the brakes if necessary. driving, the brake system may overheat.
Display messages indicate that you are approach- This increases the braking distance and the
ing the limit speed. brake system can even fail.
% For buses, the speed is limited to 60 mph # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
(100 km/h) at the factory. When overtaking, # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
bear in mind that the limit speed cannot be
accelerator pedal at the same time while
exceeded.
driving.
Infor
Information
mation about driving
driving abroad
abroad
Ser vice
Service * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by
An extensive Mercedes-Benz service is also availa- continuously depressing the brake pedal
ble abroad. Nevertheless, please remember that # Do not depress the brake pedal continu-
services facilities or spare parts may not be availa- ously whilst driving.
ble immediately. The relevant workshop directories # To use the braking e ect of the engine,
are available from an authorized Mercedes-Benz shi to a lower gear in good time.
Center.
Fuel Downhill
Downhill gradients
gradients
In some countries, only fuels with an increased sul- On long and steep downhill gradients you should
fur content are available. observe the following instructions:
Mercedes-Benz recommends installing a fuel lter R In vehicles with an automatic transmission,
with a water separator for countries with an shi down to shi ranges 2 or 1 in good time
increased water content in diesel. so that the engine is running at a medium to
Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Infor- high engine speed (/ page 120).
mation about fuel can be found in the "Fuel" sec-
% Change the shi range in good time when
tion (/ page 240).
cruise control is activated. Observe the driving
Information
Infor mation about transpor
transportt by
by rail
rail tips (/ page 107).
Transporting your vehicle by rail may be subject to You thereby make use of the braking e ect of the
certain restrictions or require special measures to engine and do not have to brake as o en to main-
be taken in some countries due to varying tunnel tain the speed. This relieves the load on the
heights and loading standards. service brake and prevents the brakes from over-
You can obtain information about this from any heating and wearing too quickly.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Heavy and light loads
Heavy
Infor
Information
mation on brak
brakes
es If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load,
do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci- short while. The brakes cool down more quickly in
dent due to shi ing down on slippery road the air ow.
surfaces If the brakes have been used only moderately, you
If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to should occasionally test their e ectiveness. To do
increase the engine braking e ect, the drive this, brake more rmly from a higher speed while
wheels may lose traction. paying attention to the tra c conditions. The
brakes will grip better as a result.
Wet road
road surfaces
surfaces R Every time a tire is replaced
If you have been driving for a long time in heavy R During regular visual inspections for your own
rain without braking, there may be a delayed safety
response when you rst apply the brakes. This may
also occur a er driving through a car wash or deep New brak
brakee discs and brak
brakepads
epads
water. You must depress the brake pedal more New brakepads and brake discs only reach their
rmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in optimal braking e ect a er a few hundred miles (a
front. few hundred kilometers).
While paying attention to the tra c conditions, you Until then, compensate for the reduced braking
should brake the vehicle rmly a er driving on a e ect by applying greater pressure to the brake
wet road surface or through a car wash. This heats pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
the brake discs so that they dry more quickly, mends that you only have brakepads and brake
which protects them against corrosion. discs which are approved by Mercedes-Benz instal-
Limited braking e ect on salt-treated roads: led on your vehicle.
R A layer of salt on the brake discs or brakepads
Other brake discs or brakepads may compromise
the safety of your vehicle.
can increase braking distances considerably,
or braking may happen on only one side Always replace all brake discs and brakepads on
R Maintain an especially large safe distance to
an axle at the same time. Always install new brake-
pads when replacing brake discs.
the vehicle in front
Par
arking
king brake
brake
To remove the layer of salt:
R Apply the brakes from time to time, paying & WARNING Risk of skidding or an accident
attention to tra c conditions by braking with the parking brake
R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of
If you have to brake your vehicle with the park-
a journey and a er the start of a new journey ing brake, the braking distance is considerably
Checking
Chec king the
the brak
brakepad
epad thic
thickness
kness longer and the wheels may lock. There is an
In addition to monitoring using the brakepad wear increased risk of skidding and/or accident.
sensor, regularly monitor and check all of the # Only brake the vehicle with the parking
brakepads by performing a visual inspection to brake if the service brake has failed.
look for material wear on the pads. # In this case, do not apply the parking
If you are unable to check the brakepad wear on brake with too much force.
the inside of the wheels, remove the wheels if you # If the wheels lock, immediately release
possess the required skills, or visit a quali ed spe- the parking brake as much as required
cialist workshop. for the wheels to turn again.
If the brakepad material thickness is less than
0.12 in (3 mm), have the brakepads checked and Vehicles with
with a manual parking
parking brake
brake
replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop, if nec- When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered surfa-
essary. ces, road salt or dirt may get into the parking
Do not solely rely on the brakepad wear sensor. brake. This causes corrosion and a reduction of
braking force.
It is also strongly recommended that you have the
brakepads checked at a quali ed specialist work- In order to prevent this, drive with the parking
shop, not only at every service displayed by the brake lightly applied from time to time.
maintenance interval display, but also prior to long When doing so, drive for a distance of approx-
journeys and whenever the wheels are removed. imately 300 at a maximum speed of 13 mph
In the following situations, check the brake pads: (20 km/h).
R At every service according to maintenance The brake lights do not light up when you brake the
interval vehicle with the parking brake.
R Before long journeys
Infor
Information
driving on wet
wet roads
roads & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci-
Hydroplaning
Hydr oplaning dent due to shi ing down on slippery road
surfaces
& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning because If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to
tire tread is too low increase the engine braking e ect, the drive
Depending on the depth of the water on the wheels may lose traction.
roadway, aquaplaning can occur despite su - # Do not shi down on slippery road surfa-
cient tire tread depth and low speed. ces to increase the engine braking
# Avoid tire ruts and brake carefully. e ect.
Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in Vehicles with automatic transmissions are permit-
which hydroplaning can occur, drive as follows: ted to roll when in neutral i for only a short time.
Allowing the wheels to roll for longer, e.g. when
R Reduce your speed
towing, causes transmission damage.
R Avoid tire ruts
If the vehicle threatens to skid, or cannot be
R Brake carefully brought to a standstill when traveling at a low
speed, you can stabilize the vehicle using the fol-
Driving
Dr iving on ooded roads
Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in lowing measures:
the opposite direction create waves. This may R Shi the automatic transmission to neutral i.
cause the maximum permissible depth of water to R Try to maintain control of the vehicle using cor-
be exceeded. These notes must be observed under rective steering.
all circumstances. Otherwise, you can damage the
engine, electrics and transmission. Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads. Avoid
sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneu-
If you have to drive on stretches of road on which
vers.
water has collected, please bear in mind the fol-
lowing: Have your vehicle winterized at a quali ed special-
ist workshop in good time at the onset of winter.
R The water level of standing water may not be
above the lower edge of the front bumper. Observe the notes on snow chains (/ page 209).
R You may drive no faster than walking pace. Regularly check the vehicle and remove snow or
ice when traveling in wintry conditions.
Observe the notes on fording while o -road for all- An accumulation of snow and ice, particularly
wheel drive vehicles (/ page 112).
when frozen, in the area around the air intake,
Infor
Information
driving in winter
winter moving parts, the axles, and the wheel wells may
cause the following problems:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- R Obstruction of the air intake
ous exhaust gases
R Damage to vehicle parts
If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation R Malfunctions due to restriction of the mobility
is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such intended by the design (e.g. reduced steering
as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. movement)
This is the case when the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow, for example. If there is any damage, inform a quali ed specialist
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the workshop.
vehicle free from snow when the engine Infor
Information
driving o -road
-road
# Open a window on the side of the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident if you do not
facing away from the wind to ensure an keep to line of fall on inclines
adequate supply of fresh air.
If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline,
the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover.
# Always drive on inclines in the line of fall # Regularly remove any trapped foreign
(straight up or down) and do not turn. bodies, e.g. stones and branches.
# A er driving o -road, check carefully
& WARNING Risk of injury from acceleration whether there is any damage to the vehi-
forces during o -road driving cle.
You could be thrown from your seat, for exam- # If there is damage, have the vehicle
ple. checked at a quali ed specialist work-
# Always wear your seat belt even when
shop.
driving o -road.
When driving o -road or on unpaved surfaces,
check the vehicle underside, wheels and tires reg-
& WARNING Risk of injury to the hands when ularly at regular intervals. In particular, remove any
driving over obstacles trapped foreign bodies, e.g. stones and branches.
If you drive over obstacles or in tire ruts, the Observe the following notes regarding foreign bod-
steering wheel may whip around. ies of this kind:
# The steering wheel must always be held R They may damage the suspension, the fuel
securely with both hands. tank or the brake system.
# Always hold the steering wheel so that R They may disturb the balance and cause vibra-
your thumbs are on the outer rim of the tions.
steering wheel. R They may be ung out from the vehicle when
# When driving over obstacles, expect you continue driving.
increased steering forces at short notice.
If there is any damage, inform a quali ed specialist
workshop.
& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
materials on hot parts of the exhaust sys- When driving o -road on steep inclines, you must
tem make sure that the DEF tank is su ciently lled.
Therefore, ensure a level of at least ten liters
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or before o -road driving.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
When driving o -road and on construction sites,
hot parts of the exhaust system.
sand, mud and water, also mixed with oil, can get
# When driving on unpaved roads or o - into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in
road, regularly check the vehicle under- braking e ect or total brake failure, also as a result
side. of increased wear. The braking characteristics will
# Remove trapped plants or other amma- vary depending on the material that has got into
ble material, in particular. the system. Clean the brakes a er driving o -road.
# If there is damage, consult a quali ed If you then notice a reduced braking e ect or hear
specialist workshop immediately. scraping noises, have the brake system checked
immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Adjust your driving style to the changed braking
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle a er driving characteristics.
o -road
Driving o -road or on construction sites increases
Foreign bodies, such as stones and branches, the possibility of vehicle damage which may in turn
could become trapped on the vehicle under- lead to the failure of certain major assemblies and
side or on wheels and tires while you are driv- systems. Adapt your driving style to the o -road
ing and cause damage to the vehicle. driving conditions. Drive carefully. Have any vehicle
Foreign bodies could cause the following dam- damage recti ed at a quali ed specialist workshop
age: as soon as possible.
R Damage the suspension, the fuel tank or When driving on rough cross-country terrain, do
the brake system not shi the transmission to neutral and do not
disengage the clutch. You could lose control when
R Cause imbalances and thus vibrations attempting to brake the vehicle with the service
brake. If your vehicle cannot manage an uphill R All-wheel driv

drivee vehicles
vehicles with
with engine OM642 or
incline, drive back down in reverse gear. engine OM651: activate all-wheel drive
When loading your vehicle for o -road driving or on (/ page 122) and, if necessary, activate the
a construction site, keep the vehicle's center of LOW RANGE transmission ratio (/ page 123).
gravity as low as possible. R If the surface requires, temporarily deactivate
ESP® when pulling away (/ page 141).
Checklistt befor
Checklis beforee o -road
-road dr
driving
iving
R Check the fuel and DEF levels (/ page 164) R Only drive o -road with the engine running and
and re ll if necessary (/ page 127). a gear engaged.
R Engine: check the oil level and add oil if neces- R Drive slowly and smoothly. It may o en be nec-
sary (/ page 181). Before driving up or down essary to drive at walking pace.
extreme inclines or slopes, ll the oil to the R Avoid spinning the drive wheels.
maximum level. R Ensure that the wheels remain in contact with
% If you drive up or down extreme inclines or the ground.
slopes, the 4 symbol may appear in the R As a precaution, get out of the vehicle to take a
multifunction display. The engine operating look at the route to be taken rst. Exercise the
safety is not put at risk if you have lled the utmost caution when driving across unfamiliar,
engine oil to the maximum level before the unpredictable terrain.
journey. R Look out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes, tree
R Vehicle tool
tool kit: check that the jack is working stumps and tire ruts).
(/ page 226). R Avoid edges where the surface could crumble
R Make sure that a lug wrench (/ page 226), a or break away.
wooden underlay for the jack, a sturdy tow
rope, a folding spade and a wheel chock Rules for
for o -road
-road for
ording
ding
(depending on equipment) are carried in the
R Observe the safety notes and general notes on
vehicle. driving o -road.
R Check the depth and characteristics of the
R Tir
ires
es and wheels: check the tire tread depth
(/ page 208) and the tire pressure body of water before fording.
(/ page 215). R The climate control system is switched o
(/ page 98).
Rules for
for o -road
-road dr
driving
iving
R The stationary heater is switched o
Always be aware of the ground clearance of the
(/ page 103).
vehicle and avoid obstacles such as deep tire ruts.
R All-wheel driv
drivee vehicles
vehicles with
with engine OM642 or
Obstacles can damage the following parts of the
engine OM651: activate all-wheel drive
vehicle, for example:
(/ page 122) and activate in vehicles with
R Suspension LOW RANGE transmission ratio (/ page 123).
R Drivetrain R Restrict the shi range to 1 or 2.
R Fuel and operating uid reservoirs R Avoid high engine speeds.
Therefore, always drive slowly when o -road. If you R Drive slowly and smoothly at no more than a
must drive over obstacles, have the co-driver walking pace.
instruct you. R Ensure that no wave at the front of the vehicle
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you addi- forms while driving.
tionally carry a shovel and a recovery rope R A er fording, dry the brakes.
with a shackle in the vehicle.
R Make sure that loads and items of luggage are
A er driving through a body of water deeper than
securely stored or lashed down (/ page 173). 19.7 in (50 cm):
R Check all vehicle uids for any signs of water
R Before driving o -road, stop the vehicle and
engage a low gear. penetration.
R Have the oil changed by a specialist workshop.
R Vehicles withwith DSR: activate DSR when you are
driving downhill (/ page 146).
Check all vehicle uids for any signs of water pene- R Check the service brake for operating safety,
tration. e.g. carry out a brake test.
R If you notice strong vibrations a er driving o -
Checklistt a er dr
Checklis driving
iving o -road
-road
Driving over rough terrain places greater demands road, check the wheels and drivetrain for for-
on your vehicle than normal road operation. Check eign objects again. Remove any foreign objects
your vehicle a er driving on rough terrain. This which can lead to imbalances and thus cause
allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce vibrations. In the event of damage to the
the risk of an accident for yourself and other road wheels and the drive train, visit a quali ed spe-
users. Clean your vehicle thoroughly before driving cialist workshop immediately.
on public roads.
If you nd damage to the vehicle a er o -road Function of the
the ECO
ECO display
driving, have the vehicle checked at a quali ed The ECO display summarizes your driving charac-
specialist workshop immediately. teristics from the start of the journey to its com-
Observe the following points a er driving o -road, pletion and assists you in achieving the most eco-
on construction sites and before driving on public nomical driving style.
roads: An economical driving style means that the ECO
R Vehicles with
with DSR: deactivate DSR display will feature a star or a shine e ect.
(/ page 146). You can in uence consumption as follows:
R All-wheel driv
drivee vehicles
vehicles with
with engine OM642 or R Anticipate road and tra c conditions.
engine OM651: deactivate all-wheel drive
R Observe the gearshi recommendations.
(/ page 122).
R Activate ESP® (/ page 141).
R Clean the exterior lighting, particularly the
headlamps and tail lamps, and check them for
damage.
R Clean the front and rear license plate.
R Clean the windshield, windows and outside
mirrors.
R Clean the steps, entrances and grab handles.
This will make your footing safer.
Instrument display with color display
R Clean the wheels and tires, wheel wells and
the underbody of the vehicle with a water jet. The segment's lettering lights up brightly, the outer
This increases road adhesion, especially on edge lights up and the segment is lled when the
wet roadways. vehicle is driven with the following characteristics:
R Check the wheels and tires and wheel wells for R 1 ACCELERATION: moderate acceleration
trapped foreign objects and remove them.
Trapped foreign objects can damage the
R 2 CONSTANT: consistent speed
wheels and tires or may be ung out from the R 3 COASTING: gentle deceleration and rolling
vehicle when continuing the journey.
The segment's lettering is gray, the outer edge is
R Check the underbody for trapped branches or dark and the segment is emptied when the vehicle
other parts of plants and remove them. is driven with the following characteristics:
R Clean the brake discs, brakepads and axle R 1 ACCELERATION: sporty acceleration
joints, particularly a er operation in sand,
mud, grit and gravel, water or similarly dirty R 2 CONSTANT: speed uctuations
conditions. R 3 COASTING: heavy braking
R Check the entire oor assembly, the tires,
You have driven in an economical manner if:
wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steering,
suspension and exhaust system for any dam- R The three segments have been completely l-
age. led simultaneously.
R The edge of all three segments lights up.
# Park the vehicle so that no ammable

material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
# In particular, do not park on dry grass-
land or harvested grain elds.
* NOTE Damage due to hot exhaust gases

Very hot exhaust gases are emitted from the
tailpipe during regeneration.
Instrument display with black and white display # During regeneration, maintain a minimum
The bars will ll up when the vehicle is driven with distance of 7 (2 m) to other objects,
the following characteristics: e.g. parked vehicles.
R 1 Moderate acceleration # Carry out regeneration only on concrete
or asphalt surfaces.
R 2 Consistent speed
# Do not carry out regeneration in the
R 3 Gentle deceleration and rolling immediate vicinity of people.
The bars will empty when the vehicle is driven with # Carry out regeneration in the open air
the following characteristics: and not in closed halls or rooms.
R 1 Sporty acceleration # Make sure that there are no ammable
R 2 Speed uctuations materials or objects in the area of the

exhaust system.
R 3 Heavy braking
The display will also show additional range 4 Regeneration without interruption takes approx.
Bonus XXX mi From Start or XXX mi From Start 20‑25 minutes.
that you have achieved with your driving style com- If the vehicle is predominantly used for short dis-
pared with a driver with a very sporty driving style. tance driving or extended non-operational times,
The range displayed does not indicate a xed this could lead to a malfunction in the automatic
reduction in consumption. cleaning function for the diesel particulate lter. As
a result, permanent blocking of the diesel particu-
late lter may occur. and fuel may also accumulate
Diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt
lter
er in the engine oil and cause engine failure.
Notes on reg
regener
eneration
ation If you mainly drive short distances, you should
% The regeneration of the diesel particulate lter drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20
is special equipment and not installed as minutes every 500 km (300 miles). This facilitates
standard. the diesel particulate lter's burn-o process.
Star
arting
ting and canceling reg
regener
eneration
ation
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death caused by exhaust
gases Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R All system conditions are ful lled.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these R The load condition of the diesel particulate l-
exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads ter is at least 100%.
to poisoning. R The vehicle is stationary.
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the R The engine is running.
auxiliary heating running in an enclosed R If the vehicle has a transmission-mounted
space without su cient ventilation. power take-o , the latter is deactivated.
R If the vehicle has a parameterizable special
& WARNING Risk of re caused by hot
module, the rpm request is deactivated.
exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
On-board computer: Bear in mind the following related topic:

4 Service 5 Particle Filter R Operating the on-board com-
# To req
reques
uestt reg
regener
eneration:
ation: select OK. puter(/ page 165)
# To observe
observe the
the vehicle
vehicle surroundings:
surroundings: Make
sure that no injuries or damage due to the hot Batter
Batteryy main switch
exhaust gases can occur in the vehicle sur-
roundings. Con rm for three seconds with OK. Notes on the
the batter
batteryy main switch
Regeneration starts. The engine speed increa-
ses and the message Regeneration Active * NOTE Damage to the electrical system
appears. If you remove the battery main switch, it could
% The duration of regeneration depends on the lead to the electrical system becoming dam-
load condition of the diesel particulate lter aged.
(approx. 20‑25 minutes). # Make sure that the ignition is switched
A er successful regeneration, the engine o and that at least 20 minutes have
speed is reduced again. passed before removing the battery main
# To cancel reg
regener
eneration:
ation: switch o the engine switch. Otherwise, electrical system
or depress the clutch (for manual transmission) components could be damaged.
or brake (for automatic transmission).
Regeneration is canceled. You can use the battery main switch to disconnect
the current to all your vehicle's consumers. This
Regeneration cannot be requested again until the will prevent uncontrolled battery discharge caused
load condition of the diesel particulate lter is at by quiescent current consumers.
least 100%. If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery
Displaying
Displaying the
the load in the engine compartment or in the base of the
On-board computer: co-driver seat, you must disconnect both batteries.
4 Service 5 Consumption Info
Only then is the electrical system fully disconnec-
ted from the power supply.
The load of the diesel particulate lter is displayed. % Only disconnect the vehicle from the power
supply using the battery main switch in the fol-
lowing situations:
R The vehicle is stationary for a long time
R It is absolutely necessary to disconnect
the vehicle from the power supply
A er switching on the power supply, you will
need to reset the side windows (/ page 60)
and the electric sliding door (/ page 56).
Load display at 75% load

# To exit
exit the
the display:
display: press the back button on
the le -hand side of the steering wheel.
Switching
Switching the
the power
power supply
supply on/o Aut
utomatic
omatic transmission
transmission
Switching
Switching o the power
power supply DIRECT SELECT lever
lever
Function of the
the DIRECT SELECT lever
lever

Battery main switch R releasing the parking brake.
% Note the remaining time before the next
service due date (/ page 178)and oil change R starting the vehicle.
(/ page 181). The time recording is also dis- # Never leave children unattended in the
rupted if the power supply is disconnected. vehicle.
# Switch o the ignition and wait at least # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
15 minutes. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Remove cover 1. To do this, take hold of the # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
cover at the upper edge, move it outwards in of children.
the direction of the driver's door and li it o .
# Press and hold button 3. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
# Pull plug 2 out of the earth pin. rect gearshi ing
# Push plug 2 as far as possible in the direction If the engine speed is higher than the idle
of the arrow so that it cannot make contact speed and you engage the transmission posi-
with the earth pin. tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
All starter battery consumers are disconnected sharply.
from the power supply. # If you engage the transmission position
Switching on the
Switching the power
power supply h or k when the vehicle is at a stand-
# Press plug 2 onto the earth pin until you feel
still, always depress the brake pedal
rmly and do not accelerate at the same
it engage and plug 2 is in full contact with the time.
earth pin.
All starter battery consumers are reconnected You use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
to the power supply. transmission position. The current transmission
# Fasten cover 1. To do this, place the cover on position appears in the multifunction display
from above. (/ page 166).
# Press the cover into the neighboring switching The shi ing characteristics of the automatic trans-
console on the right hand side. mission is designed for comfortable and economi-
cal handling. For this reason, the multifunction dis-
play shows, in addition to the transmission position
display, the A for Comfort.
j Park position # Press the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT
k Reverse gear lever upwards or downwards to the rst point
i of resistance.
Neutral
Transmission position display i is shown in
h Drive position the multifunction display.
Engaging
Engaging rever
reverse
se gear
gear R Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move
the vehicle freely, for example, to push it or tow it.
If the
the automatic
automatic transmission
transmission should also stay
stay in
neutral
neutr al i when the the ignition is switched
switched o , carry
out the
the follo
following:
wing:
# Start the vehicle.
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral

i.
# Release the brake pedal.
# Switch o the ignition.
% if you then leave the vehicle and the key is still

in the vehicle, the automatic transmission will
stay in neutral i from then on.
Engaging
Engaging park
park position P
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of
resistance.
Transmission position display k is shown in
the multifunction display.
Selecting neutral
neutral N
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

when neutral position is engaged
If you park the vehicle with the transmission in
neutral position i and the parking brake is
not engaged, the vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
# Before parking the vehicle, apply the
parking brake.
# Press button 1. Res

estr
tricting
icting the
the shi range
Transmission position display j is shown in
the multifunction display. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Transmission position h is engaged
Park position j is engaged automatically when (/ page 120).
one of the following conditions is met:
R you switch o the engine in transmission posi-
tion h or k.
R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary or when driving at a very low speed
and in transmission position h or k.
Engaging
Engaging driv
drivee position D
# To res
restr
trict
ict the
the shi rang
ange:
e: brie y pull steering
wheel gearshi paddle 1.
The automatic transmission shi s to the next
lower gear, depending on the gear currently
engaged. The shi range is also restricted.
The shi range selected is shown in the multi-
function display. The automatic transmission
shi s only as far as the selected gear.
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever downwards past the rst point of
# Pull and hold steering wheel gearshi paddle
resistance. 1.
Transmission position display h is shown in The automatic transmission will change to a
the multifunction display. shi range which allows easy acceleration and
deceleration. To do this, the automatic trans-
The automatic transmission shi s through the indi- mission shi s down one or more gears and
vidual gears automatically when it is in transmis- restricts the shi range.
sion position h. This is determined by the follow-
The shi range selected is shown in the multi-
ing factors:
function display. The automatic transmission
R position of the accelerator pedal shi s only as far as the selected gear.
R driving speed
% The automatic transmission does not shi
down if you pull steering wheel gearshi pad-
dle 1 whilst traveling at too high a speed.
For vehicle
vehicle with
with engine OM642, OM651: the
automatic transmission does not shi up if the
shi range is restricted and the maximum
engine speed of the restricted shi range has
been reached.
For vehicles
vehicles with
with engine M274: if the maxi-
mum engine speed for the restricted shi
range is reached and you continue to depress
the accelerator pedal, the automatic transmis-
sion will shi up automatically.
# To de-res
de-restr
trict
ict the
the shi rang
ange:
e: brie y pull steer- brake system can overheat during extreme o -road
ing wheel gearshi paddle 2. use. In this case, ease o the accelerator pedal or
The automatic transmission shi s to the next stop to allow the brake system to cool down.
gear up, depending on the gear currently If a driven wheel spins due to insu cient traction,
engaged. This de-restricts the shi range at observe the following notes:
the same time.
R When pulling away, make use of the traction
The shi range selected is shown in the multi- control integrated in ESP®. Depress the accel-
function display. The automatic transmission erator pedal as far as necessary.
shi s only as far as the selected gear.
# To de-res
de-restr
trict
ict the
the shi rang
ange:
e: pull and hold R Take your foot o the accelerator pedal, slowly,
steering wheel gearshi paddle 2. while the vehicle is in motion.
or In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires
# Engage transmission position h again (M+S tires) and, if necessary, snow chains
(/ page 120). (/ page 209). Only in this way can the maximum
The automatic transmission shi s up one or e ect of all-wheel drive be achieved.
more gears depending on the gear currently Use DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) when driving
engaged. Simultaneously, the shi range downhill o -road (/ page 145).
restriction is deactivated and the transmission If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
position appears in the multifunction display inattentive, the all-wheel drive system can neither
h. reduce the risk of an accident nor override the
Recommended shi ranges for the following driv- laws of physics. The all-wheel drive system cannot
ing conditions: take road, weather and tra c conditions into
3 Use the engine's braking e ect. account. The all-wheel drive system is only an aid.
You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance
2 Use the engine's braking e ect on downhill from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
gradients and when driving on steep roads, in braking in good time and for staying in lane.
mountainous areas as well as under arduous
operating conditions. * NOTE Risk of damage to the drivetrain and
1 Use the engine's braking e ect on extremely the brake system
steep downhill gradients and on long downhill
If you operate vehicles with all-wheel drive on a
stretches.
one-axle test stand, you may damage the drive-
train or the brake system.
Using kickdo
kickdown
wn # A function or performance test should
only be carried out on a two-axle test
# For maximum acceleration:
acceleration: depress the accel- stand.
erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
# If you wish to operate the vehicle on such
# Ease o the accelerator pedal once the a test stand, please consult a quali ed
desired speed is reached. specialist workshop in advance.
All-wheel drive
drive * NOTE Risk of damage to the transfer case
Notes on all-wheel drive
drive If you tow the vehicle with a raised axle, the
All-wheel drive ensures permanent drive for all four transfer case can get damaged. Such damage
is not covered by Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
wheels, and together with ESP® it improves the
ranty.
traction of the vehicle.
# Never tow the vehicle with a raised axle.
With the OM651 and OM642 engines, the all-
# Only tow the vehicle with all wheels on
wheel drive must be switched on (/ page 122).
With the OM654 engine, there is intelligent closed- the ground or fully raised.
loop control of the drive torque between the front # Note the instructions on towing the vehi-
and rear axles. cle with full contact with the ground for
The traction control of the all-wheel drive also all wheels.
takes place via the brake system. Therefore, the
Engaging
Engaging all-wheel drive
drive
Conditions for
for engaging/diseng
engaging/disengaging
aging
You can engage and deactivate the all-wheel drive
when stationary or while driving slowly.
When stationary, observe the following:
R The engine is running.
R The steering wheel in the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
If the all-wheel drive cannot be engaged when sta-
tionary:
# Vehicles withwith automatic
transmission: Shi the
selector lever from i to h from h to i
from i to k and back to i.
Engaging and disengaging the all-wheel drive # To engag
engage/diseng
e/disengag
age:
e: Press the upper section
can be made easier in this way. of switch 1.
The indicator lamp in switch 1 ashes while
Observe the following when driving slowly: the all-wheel drive is engaged or disengaged.
R The engine is running.
The ÷ and : warning lamps light up in
R The vehicle is not traveling faster than 6.2 mph the instrument display. ESP® and ASR are
(10 km/h). deactivated for the duration of the shi opera-
R The vehicle is not being driven around a curve. tion. If the shi operation is successful, the
÷ and : warning lamps in the instru-
If it is not possible to engage all-wheel drive when ment display go out and ESP® and ASR are
the vehicle is rolling: reactivated.
transmission: Brie y
move the selector lever to i. As long as the indicator lamp in the switch 1 is
ashing, you can cancel the shi operation by
pressing switch 1 again. If the shi operation
Engaging/diseng
Engaging/disengaging
aging all-wheel drive
drive fails, the indicator lamp in switch 1 brie y ashes
three times. One of the shi conditions was not
* NOTE Risk of damage to the transfer case met.
The transfer case may be damaged if you If the indicator lamp in switch 1 lights up, all-
depress the accelerator pedal while engaging wheel drive is engaged.
or disengaging the all-wheel drive. % If the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is
# Do not depress the accelerator pedal engaged, the all-wheel drive cannot be disen-
while the indicator lamp in the all-wheel gaged.
drive switch is ashing.
Function of the
the LOW
LOW RANGE
RANGE gear
gear reduction
reduction
The LOW RANGE gear reduction enables very slow
driving in the respective gears. If you engage LOW
RANGE, the engine's performance characteristics
and the automatic transmission's shi ing charac-
teristics are adjusted accordingly. The transmis-
sion ratio from the engine to the wheels is around
40% lower than in the road position. The drive tor-
que is increased correspondingly.
Conditions for
for engaging/diseng
engaging/disengaging
aging
The following shi ing conditions must be met in Electronic

Electr onic level
level control
control
order to engage or disengage LOW RANGE:
Function of ENR (electronic
(electronic level
level control)
control)
R All-wheel drive is engaged (/ page 122).
R The engine is running. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle
R The vehicle is stationary. lowering
R You depress the brake pedal. When lowering the vehicle, people could
R Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: the become trapped if their limbs are between the
selector lever is in position j or i. vehicle body and the tires or underneath the
vehicle.
# Make sure no one is underneath the vehi-
Engaging
Engaging and disengaging
disengaging LOW
LOW range
range cle or in the immediate vicinity of the
wheel arches when the vehicle is being
lowered.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to tipping

over of the jack
When you park a vehicle with air suspension,
the air suspension can remain activated for up
to one hour even if the ignition is switched o .
If you then li the vehicle with the jack, the air
suspension tries to compensate for the vehicle
level.
The jack can tip over.
# Before li ing the vehicle, press the
Service button on the air suspension
remote control.
1 Engaging and disengaging LOW range This prevents automatic adjustment of
% On vehicles with DSR (Downhill Speed Regula- the vehicle level and manual raising or
tion), switch 1 is replaced with the switch for lowering.
DSR.
# To engag
engagee and disengag
disengage:
e: press the upper sec- & WARNING Risk of accident due to lowered
tion of switch 1. or raised chassis frame
The + indicator lamp ashes in the instru- If the chassis frame is adjusted, the braking
ment display for the duration of the shi opera- and driving characteristics can be severely
tion. impaired. You could also exceed the permissi-
ble vehicle height.
R When the shi operation takes place and
# Adjust the driving level before driving o .
LOW RANGE is engaged, the + indica-
tor lamp lights up.
R When the shi operation takes place and & WARNING Risk of accident due to a mal-
LOW RANGE is disengaged, the + indi- function of electronic level control
cator lamp goes out. The vehicle level may be too high, too low or
asymmetrical.
As long as the indicator lamp + is ashing, you
can cancel the shi operation by pressing button The driving and steering characteristics of the
1 again. If the shi operation fails, the indicator vehicle may be noticeably di erent.
lamp + brie y ashes three times. One of the # Adapt your driving style to the changed
shi conditions was not met. driving characteristics.
# Stop, paying attention to road and tra c
conditions.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* NOTE Risk of damage to the chassis from control adjusts the vehicle level to the normal level
lowered vehicle level as soon as possible. Drive on carefully until the
warning tone stops. Only then is the vehicle at nor-
If electronic level control is malfunctioning or mal level.
readjusts while you are driving, the vehicle To restore the vehicle level, automatic mode and
level may be lowered.
electronic level control automatically switch on
# Pay attention to the road conditions and
again depending on the option selected:
ensure there is su cient ground clear-
R When the parking brake is released
ance.
R From speeds of approximately 6 mph
# Drive carefully.
(10 km/h)
The level of the vehicle depends on vehicle load If the electronic level control compressor threatens
and the load distribution. Electronic level control to overheat, e.g. due to repeated raising or lower-
adjusts the level of the rear axle automatically on ing within a short period, electronic level control is
vehicles with an air-sprung rear axle. The vehicle deactivated. You can raise or lower the vehicle
level is thereby always maintained at the driving level again a er a few minutes.
level, regardless of vehicle load. Driving dynamics
remain una ected. The height di erence between
the sides of the vehicle may be up to 0.4 in (1 cm). Raising and lower
lowering
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle level
level
Electronic level control is not engine-dependent Certain special equipment
Certain equipment enables other
other opera-
opera-
and is only operational when the ignition is tion options:
options:
switched on. The electronic level control compres- R Ambulance: raising the vehicle level above the
sor works audibly. driving level (center position) is not possible.
% If the compressor works constantly or starts Only the lowest position and the driving level
up several times per minute, electronic level can be set.
control is malfunctioning. R Speed signal: in order to operate electronic
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, electronic level control, the parking brake must not be
level control switches between manual mode and applied. Electronic level control can be oper-
automatic mode. This is dependent on the driving ated manually up to 6.2 mph (10 km/h). If this
speed or the parking brake position. speed is exceeded, driving level will be set
automatically.
If electronic level control switches depending on
vehicle speed, manual operation is automatically R 30-minute run-on module: electronic level con-
activated when the vehicle is stationary. You may trol can be operated up to 30 minutes a er
raise or lower the vehicle level. If you subsequently switching o the ignition.
drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), manual mode Using the
the remot
remotee control
control
is automatically deactivated and automatic mode
The remote control is located in a holder on the
sets the vehicle level.
B‑pillar on the driver's side. Remove the remote
If electronic level control switches depending on control from the holder before use.
the parking brake position, manual mode is auto-
matically activated when the parking brake is
applied. You may raise or lower the vehicle level to
load and unload. If you release the parking brake,
manual mode is automatically deactivated and
automatic mode sets the driving level.
When working on the vehicle or changing a wheel,
you can deactivate electronic level control
(/ page 124).
If electronic level control is malfunctioning or the
vehicle level is too high or too low, warning tone Electronic level control starts automatically if the
sounds. ignition is switched on. Operation is only possible
The driving and steering characteristics of the vehi- a er the parking brake has been applied.
cle will be noticeably di erent. Electronic level
Electronic level control performs a self-check regu- % By pressing button 5 during the movement,
larly when it is activated and while in use. Indicator the original position will be reset.
lamp 7 on the remote control lights up for about # To raise
raise or lower
lower automaticall
automaticallyy to
to driving
driving level
level
one second when you switch on the ignition. (center
(cent er position): press and hold button 6.
There is a malfunction if indicator lamp 7 Electronic level control automatically raises or
behaves in the following ways: lowers the vehicle to driving level.
R The indicator lamp does not light up when you # To save
save the
the set
set vehicle
vehicle level:
level: set the required
switch on the ignition vehicle level.
or # Press and hold button 1 or 2 until you hear
R The indicator lamp then lights up again or a tone.
ashes The vehicle level set has been saved on corre-
sponding button 1 or 2.
In addition, a warning tone is emitted from the # To call up the
the saved
saved vehicle
vehicle level:
level: brie y press
remote control for approximately 30 seconds. The button 1 or 2.
malfunction that has been detected can be shown Electronic level control automatically raises or
using the indicator lamps (signaling of malfunction lowers the vehicle to the saved driving level.
codes).
The indicator lamp on button 1 or 2 ashes
# Park the vehicle, leaving the ignition switched
as long as the vehicle level is being changed.
on.
When the vehicle level has been set, the indi-
# Apply the parking brake. cator lamp on button 1 or 2 lights up.
# To raise
raise or lower
lower the
the vehicle
vehicle level:
level: press and
% Service mode may only be activated or deacti-
hold button 4 or 5 until the vehicle level
vated at a quali ed specialist workshop by
reaches the required height.
trained personnel. In service mode, the air
The indicator lamp on button 4 or 5 ashes
suspension system is deactivated for mainte-
as long as the vehicle level is being changed. nance or error detection.
cator lamp on button 4 or 5 lights up. # To activat
activatee service
ser vice mode: press button 3.
Service mode is active and the indicator lamp
# To lower
lower automatically
automatically:: brie y press button 5. in button 3 lights up continuously.
Electronic level control automatically lowers # To deactivat
deactivatee service
ser vice mode: press button 3.
the vehicle to the next lower position: Service mode is deactivated and the indicator
R From the highest position to driving level lamp in button 3 goes out.
R From driving level to the lowest position # To switch
switch on automatic
automatic mode: drive at over
6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking
The indicator lamp on button 5 ashes as
brake.
long as the vehicle level is being changed.
Electronic level control controls the vehicle
level automatically.
cator lamp on button 5 lights up.
% By pressing button 4 during the movement,
the original position will be reset.
# To raise
raise automatically
automatically:: brie y press button 4.
Electronic level control automatically raises the
vehicle to the next higher position:
R From the lowest position to driving level
R From driving level to the highest position
The indicator lamp on button 4 ashes as

long as the vehicle level is being changed.
cator lamp on button 4 lights up.
Using the
the button
button in the
the switch
switch panel Using the
the button
button in the
the rear
rear compar
compartment
tment
# Park the vehicle, leaving the ignition switched # Park the vehicle, leaving the ignition switched
on. on.
# Apply the parking brake. # Apply the parking brake.
# To raise
raise or low
lower
er the
the vehicle
vehicle level:
level: press and # To raise
raise or lower
lower the
the vehicle
vehicle level:
level: press and
hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level
reaches the required height. reaches the required height.
# To lower
lower automatically
automatically:: brie y press the lower # To lower
lower automatically
automatically:: brie y press the lower
section of switch 2. section of switch 2.
Electronic level control automatically lowers Electronic level control automatically lowers
the vehicle to the next lower position: the vehicle to the next lower position:
R From the highest position to driving level R From the highest position to driving level
R From driving level to the lowest position R From driving level to the lowest position
% By pressing button 1 during the movement, % By pressing button 1 during the movement,
the original position will be reset. the original position will be reset.
# To raise
raise automatically
automatically:: brie y press the lower # To raise
raise automatically
automatically:: brie y press the lower
section of switch 1. section of switch 1.
Electronic level control automatically raises the Electronic level control automatically raises the
vehicle to the next higher position: vehicle to the next higher position:
R From the lowest position to driving level R From the lowest position to driving level
R From driving level to the highest position R From driving level to the highest position
% By pressing button 2 during the movement, % By pressing button 2 during the movement,
the original position will be reset. the original position will be reset.
# To switch
switch on automatic
automatic mode: drive at over # To switch
switch on automatic
automatic mode: drive at over
6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking
brake. brake.
Electronic level control controls the vehicle Electronic level control controls the vehicle
level automatically. level automatically.
Using electronic
electronic level
level control
control for
for char
charging
ging with
with air # Tighten the valve cap on the valve (1 L = le ,
in an emergency
emergency 2 R = right).
# Drive on carefully to the nearest quali ed spe-
* NOTE Damage due to excess pressure cialist workshop.
If the pressure in the air suspension bellows is
too high, the compressed-air lines or the air Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the electronic
electronic level
level con-
suspension bellows can be damaged. trol
tr ol
# In doing so, do not exceed the maximum
permissible operating pressure of You cannot
cannot raise
raise or lower
lower the
the vehicle
vehicle level
level when
0.113 ksi (900 kPa (9 bar/130 psi)). stationary
stationary
Possible cause:
Only for
Only for vehicles
vehicles with
with valv
valves
es for
for electronic
electronic level
level R The compressor is in danger of overheating.
control
contr ol emergency
emergency char
charging:
ging: if electronic level
A er repeatedly raising and lowering the vehi-
control is malfunctioning and the vehicle is leaning,
cle, electronic level control (play protection) is
you can raise or lower the vehicle by connecting
deactivated.
an external compressed-air source to one of the
emergency valves (similarly to tire valves). If elec- # Try to set the vehicle level manually again a er
tronic level control is not operational, you can approximately one minute.
drive on carefully to the nearest quali ed specialist
workshop and have the malfunction remedied. or
Possible cause:
R Electric level control has been deactivated due
to undervoltage. The battery may not be charg-
ing.
Handling and ride comfort may su er.
# Start the engine.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop as soon

as possible.
Refueling
Refueling the
the vehicle
vehicle
& WARNING Risk of re or explosion from

# Apply the parking brake. fuel
# Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: shi the Fuels are highly ammable.
transmission to position j. # Fire, open ames, smoking and creation
# Switch o the engine. of sparks must be avoided.
# Turn the valve cap of the corresponding valve # Switch o the ignition and, if available,
(1 L = le , 2 R = right). the stationary heater, before and while
# Stand to the side of the vehicle when connect- refueling the vehicle.
ing the external compressed-air source.
# Raise or lower the vehicle level by charging or & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
releasing compressed air until the driving level Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
has been reached and the vehicle is in a hori- health.
zontal position. While doing so, ensure you # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
observe the maximum permissible operating contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
pressure of 900 kPa (9 bar/130 psi).
# Do not inhale fuel vapor.
# Disconnect the external compressed-air
# Keep children away from fuel.
source.
# Keep doors and windows closed during * NOTE Do not use gasoline to refuel vehi-
the refueling process. cles with a diesel engine
If you or other people come into contact with If you have accidentally refueled with the
fuel, observe the following: wrong fuel:
# Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise,
soap and water. fuel can enter the fuel system.
# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
immediately rinse them thoroughly with could result in damage to the fuel system
clean water. Seek medical attention and the engine. The repair costs are high.
immediately. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
tion immediately. Do not induce vomiting. completely.
# Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
by over lled fuel tanks
& WARNING Risk of re and explosion due to
electrostatic charge
# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o .
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor.
# Before you open the fuel ller cap or take
* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
hold of the pump nozzle, touch the met- remove the fuel pump nozzle
allic vehicle body.
# To avoid creating another electrostatic
# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o .
charge, do not get into the vehicle again
during the refueling process.
* NOTE Damage to painted surfaces due to
fuel
& WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
# Do not spill any fuel on painted surfaces.
While the engine is running, component parts
in the exhaust system may overheat without + ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
warning. damage due to improper handling of fuel
# Never refuel using gasoline. If fuels are handled improperly, they pose a
# Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
danger to persons and the environment.
# Do not allow fuels to run into the sewage
system, the surface waters, the ground
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
water or into the ground.
with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
wrong fuel: R The vehicle is unlocked
R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise R The auxiliary heating is deactivated
fuel can enter the engine. R The ignition is switched o
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel R The front le -hand door is open
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high. % Do not get back into the vehicle during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. charge could build up again.
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained Observe the notes on operating uids
completely. (/ page 239).
% Vehicles that can use a mixture of fuels can be

recognized by the sticker "Ethanol up to E85!"
on the fuel ller ap.
Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the fuel and fuel tank
tank
Fuel is leaking from
from the
the vehicle
vehicle
Possible cause:
R The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
# Apply the parking brake.
# Switch o the engine.
# Open the driver's door.
The tow position is set to g.
1 Fuel ller ap # Do not restart the engine under any circum-
2 Fuel ller cap stances.
% The fuel ller ap is beside the front le -hand
door when viewed in the direction of travel.
# Take measures to contain leaked fuel.
The position of the fuel ller cap æ is also The engine does not
not start
start
shown in the Instrument Display. The arrow on
Possible cause:
the lling pump speci es the side of the vehi-
cle. R The fuel tank has been run completely dry.
# Open fuel ller ap 1. # Refuel the vehicle with at least 1.3 gal (5 l) of
# Turn fuel ller cap 2 counter-clockwise and fuel.
remove it. # Switch the ignition on for approximately
# Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapors ten seconds.
from entering the vehicle interior. # Start the engine continuously for a maximum
# Completely slide the ller neck of the pump of ten seconds until it runs smoothly.
nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.
If the engine does not start:
# Fill the fuel tank only until the pump nozzle
# Switch the ignition on for approximately
switches o .
ten seconds.
# Replace fuel ller cap 2 and turn it clockwise.
# Start the engine continuously for a maximum
You will hear a click when the fuel ller cap is
closed fully. of ten seconds until it runs smoothly.
# Open the front le -hand door. If the engine does not start a er three attempts:
# Close fuel ller ap 1. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
% Vehicles with
with a diesel engine and incorrect
incorrect
fueling protect
protector
or agains
againstt refueling
refueling with
with gaso-
gaso- DEF
line: the ller neck is designed for refueling at
diesel lling pumps for passenger vehicles. Notes on DEF
% Vehicles with
with a diesel engine without
without an incor-
rect fueling protect
protector
or:: refueling preferred at * NOTE
NOTE Irritation to skin, eyes and respira-
diesel lling pumps for passenger vehicles. tory tract due to DEF
However, you can also refuel at a diesel lling DEF can cause irritation if inhaled or ingested,
pump for trucks. or if it comes in contact with eyes or skin.
% If the fuel tank has been run completely dry, When the tank is open, ammonia vapor can
add at least 1.3 gal (5 l) of fuel. escape.
# Do not inhale or ingest DEF.
# Make sure DEF does not come into con- DEF is a liquid urea solution used for exhaust gas
tact with your skin, eyes or clothing. a ertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the
exhaust gas a ertreatment to function properly,
# Keep DEF away from children.
only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241.
# Only ll the DEF tank in well-ventilated
DEF has the following properties:
areas.
R Non-toxic
If a person comes into contact with DEF,
R Colorless and odorless
observe the following:
R If you have ingested DEF, drink plenty of R Non- ammable
water and seek medical attention immedi- DEF availability:
ately.
R You can have DEF re lled by fast service at a
R If DEF has come into contact with your quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
eyes, rinse them for 15 minutes, also ized Mercedes-Benz Center
beneath the eyelids.
R DEF is available at numerous gas stations via
R Immediately rinse DEF o your skin with DEF lling pumps.
soap and water.
R Alternatively, DEF is available at quali ed spe-
cialist workshops, e.g. an authorized
* NOTE Damage and malfunctions caused Mercedes-Benz Center, and at numerous gas
by impurities in DEF stations as a DEF re ll canister or DEF re ll
bottle
Impurities in DEF result in the following:
R Higher emission values % DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately
12.2 °F (-11 °C). The vehicle is equipped with
R Damage to the catalytic converter
a DEF preheating system at the factory. This
R Engine damage means that winter operation is also ensured
R Malfunctions in the DEF exhaust gas a erfor temperatures below 12.2 °F (-11 °C). If
treatment system you re ll DEF at temperatures below 12.2 °F
(-11 °C), the DEF level in the instrument clus-
# Avoid impurities in DEF. ter may not be displayed correctly. If the DEF
is frozen, drive for at least 20 minutes and
* NOTE Soiling due to crystallized DEF resi- then park the vehicle for a minimum of 30 sec-
due onds, so that the level is correctly displayed. In
extreme winter conditions, the time needed to
DEF residue crystallizes a er some time. detect the amount topped up may be consid-
# When re lling DEF, immediately rinse any erably longer. Park the vehicle in a warm
surfaces that it comes into contact with garage to speed up this process.
and remove all DEF residue. % Ensure the connection between the re ll con-
# DEF can also be removed with a damp tainer and vehicle ller neck does not drip.
cloth and cold water.
Calling up the
the DEF level
level gauge
gauge
# If DEF has already crystallized, clean
On-board computer:
using a sponge and cold water. 4 Service
# Select DEF and con rm.

+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIRONMENTAL
AL NOTE
NOTE Soiling with DEF
The DEF level appears.
DEF residue crystallizes a er some time and
stain the a ected surfaces.
# Immediately rinse surfaces that come in
contact with DEF when lling with water
or remove DEF with a damp cloth and
cold water.
If DEF has already crystallized, clean using a
sponge and cold water.
The DEF level has fallen below the rst warning

threshold.
R Refill Additive (DEF) Starts until Emerg. Op.:
XXX See Operator's Manual
The DEF level has fallen into the reserve range.
A er the message appears for the rst time,
the remaining DEF supply will last for approx-
imately 1,200 mi (1,900 km) and you can start
the engine a further 16 times. The number of
Instrument Display with color display remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown
1 DEF level in the message every time the engine is star-
ted.
R Refill Additive Emer. Op.: Max. XXX mph See
Operator's Manual
You can only drive the vehicle at a maximum
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
Re ll quantity:
With a prompt in the display at least 8 l
Without a prompt in the display at least 2 l
Instrument Display with black and white dis- You can also have the DEF level displayed
play (/ page 130).
1 DEF level Opening the
the DEF ller cap on ller caps that
that are
Re lling DEF not lockable
not lockable
* NOTE
NOTE Engine damage due to DEF being in
the fuel
# DEF must not be used to ll the fuel tank.
# Only use DEF to ll the DEF tank.
# Do not over ll the DEF tank.
* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior

due to DEF leakage
# A er adding, carefully close the DEF re ll
container.
# Avoid carrying DEF re ll containers per-
manently in the vehicle.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Open the hood.
R The ignition is switched o . # Turn DEF ller cap 1 counter-clockwise and
remove it.
The following messages that appear in succession
in the multifunction display indicate that you need
to re ll the DEF tank:
R Refill Additive See Operator's Manual
Opening the
the DEF ller cap on lockable
lockable ller caps
Variant 2
# Unscrew the cap on DEF re ll canister 1.
# Screw disposable hose 2 onto the opening of
DEF re ll canister 1 until hand-tight.
Re lling DEF
# Open the hood.

# Take tool 4 for unlocking DEF ller cap 1
from the vehicle tool kit.
# Pull cover 3 on DEF ller cap 1 up, turn 90°
and release it.
# Insert tool 4 in holes 2 of DEF ller cap 1.
# Turn DEF ller cap 1 counter-clockwise and
remove it.
Prepar
Pr eparing
ing the
the DEF re ll canist
canister
er
Variant 1
Variant 1
DEF re ll bottles 1 can be obtained at many gas

stations or at a quali ed specialist workshop. Re ll
bottles without a threaded cap o er no over ll pro-
tection. DEF may leak out as a result of over lling.
Mercedes-Benz o ers special re ll bottles with a
threaded cap. You can obtain this from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Variant 2
# Screw on hand-tight (variant 1) or insert (var-
iant 2) disposable hose 2 into the ller neck
of the vehicle.
# Li up and tip DEF re ll canister 1.
The lling process stops when the DEF tank is
completely full.
# Unscrew the protective cap from DEF re ll bot-
DEF re ll canister 1 can be removed when it tle 1.
has been only partially emptied.
# Place DEF re ll bottle 1 as shown on ller
# Unscrew disposable hose 2 and close DEF
opening 2 and screw it on clockwise until
and re ll canister 1 in reverse order.
hand-tight.
# Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds. # Press DEF re ll bottle 1 towards ller opening
# Start the vehicle. 2.
% Avoid storing DEF containers permanently in The DEF tank is lled. This could take up to
the vehicle. one minute.
DEF re ll bo
bottle
ttle % When the DEF re ll bottle is no longer pressed
Only screw the DEF re ll bottle hand-tight onto the down, lling stops. The bottle can be removed
ller opening in the engine compartment. It may when it has been only partially emptied.
otherwise be damaged. # Let go of DEF re ll bottle 1.
# Turn DEF re ll bottle 1 counter-clockwise and
remove it.
# Screw the protective cap onto DEF re ll bottle
1 again.
Filling procedur
proceduree with
with the
the pump
pump nozzle of an DEF
lling pump
# Insert the pump nozzle into the ller neck and
add DEF. When doing so, do not over ll the
DEF tank. You can also use a DEF lling pump
for trucks.
Closing the
the DEF ller cap on ller caps that
that are
are not # A er lling the DEF tank, place DEF ller cap
lockable
lockable 1 on the ller neck and tighten it clockwise.
# Remove tool 4 from DEF ller cap 1 and
store it in the vehicle tool kit.
# Pull cover 3 on DEF ller cap 1 up over
holes 2 of DEF ller cap 1, turn and
release.
# Turn DEF ller cap 1.
If DEF ller cap 1 turns freely, the DEF tank is
closed.
Par
arking
king
Par
arking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle
& WARNING Risk of re caused by hot

exhaust system parts
# A er lling the DEF tank, place DEF ller cap
1 on the ller neck and tighten it clockwise. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
# Turn the DEF ller cap until the lettering is legi- # Park the vehicle so that no ammable
ble and horizontal.
material can come into contact with hot
The ller neck is only locked correctly when
vehicle components.
this is the case.
# In particular, do not park on dry grass-
# Close the hood.
land or harvested grain elds.
Closing the
the DEF ller cap on lockable
lockable ller caps

vehicle.
of children.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the drive- The brake lights do not light up when you brake the
train due to rolling away vehicle with the parking brake.
# Always park your vehicle safely and

according to legal requirements.
# Always properly secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Observe the following points to ensure that the

vehicle is properly secured against rolling away
unintentionally.
# Always apply the parking brake.
# Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: Engage
transmission position j.
# On uphill or downhill
downhill inclines: Secure the rear
axle with a chock or an object without sharp
edges.
% You can operate the side windows for ve Generally, you may only apply the parking brake
minutes a er you have switched o the vehi- when the vehicle is stationary.
cle. # To apply
apply the
the parking
parking brak
brake:
e: pull handbrake
lever 1 up as far as the last possible detent.
Manual parking
parking br
brake
ake When the engine is running, the F
and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator
Applying
Appl ying or releasing
releasing the
the parking
parking brak
brakee lever
lever lamps in the Instrument Display light up. If the
vehicle is in motion, a warning tone sounds.
& WARNING Risk of skidding or an accident
by braking with the parking brake % In vehicles with a folding parking brake lever,
you can then press parking brake lever 1
If you have to brake your vehicle with the park- down as far as it will go.
ing brake, the braking distance is considerably # To release
release the
the parking
parking brak
brake:
e: on vehicles with
longer and the wheels may lock. There is an
a folding handbrake lever, rst pull handbrake
increased risk of skidding and/or accident.
lever 1 up as far as it will go.
# Only brake the vehicle with the parking
brake if the service brake has failed.
# Pull parking brake lever 1 slightly and press
release knob 2.
# In this case, do not apply the parking
brake with too much force. # Guide handbrake lever 1 down as far as it will
go with release knob 2 pressed.
# If the wheels lock, immediately release
The F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada)
the parking brake as much as required
indicator lamps in the Instrument Display go
for the wheels to turn again.
out.
& WARNING Risk of re and an accident if Folding the
the handbrak
handbrakee lever
lever up or down
down (only
(only in
the parking brake is not released vehicles with
with a folding
folding handbrak
handbrakee lever)
lever)
If the parking brake is not fully released when Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
driving, the following situations can occur: R The handbrake lever is applied.
R The parking brake can overheat and cause # To fold
fold down
down the
the handbrak
handbrakee lever
lever:: push the
a re handbrake lever down as far as it will go.
R The parking brake can lose its holding # To raise
raise the
the handbrak
handbrakee lever:
lever: pull the hand-
function brake lever up as far as it will go.
# Completely release the parking brake
before driving o .
Perf
erfor
orming
ming emergency
emergency braking
braking with
with the
the handbrake
handbrake For the automatic functions to work correctly, the
lever
lever driver must be seated in the correct seat position
(/ page 66).
The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board electrical system volt-
age. If the on-board electrical system voltage is
low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may
not be possible to apply the electric parking brake
and the yellow ! indicator lamp lights up.
In this case, park the vehicle in the following way:
R Park the vehicle on level ground and secure it
to prevent it from rolling away.
R Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission to position j.
% The electric parking brake is only actually
applied when the red F and ! (USA)
If, in exceptional cases, the service brake fails, you or ! (Canada) indicator lamps light up con-
may use the parking brake to perform emergency tinuously.
braking. It may not be possible to release a parking brake if
# Emerg
Emergency
ency braking:
braking: press and hold release the on-board electrical system voltage is low or if
button 2 and carefully pull brake lever 1. there is a malfunction in the system. Inform a
quali ed specialist workshop.
When the engine is switched o , the electric park-
Electric
Electr ic parking
parking brake
brake
ing brake carries out a function test at regular
Infor
Information
mation on the
the electric
electric parking
parking brake
brake intervals. Noises are normal in this process.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due Aut

utomaticall
omaticallyy applying
applying the
the electric
electric parking
parking brake
brake
Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission:
The electric parking brake is automatically applied
If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, when the transmission is in position j.
In addition, at least one of the following conditions
must be ful lled:
R the engine is switched o
R the driver is not sitting in the driver's seat
trapped, for example. R the belt buckle is undone


vehicle.
of children.
To prevent the electric parking brake from applying Applying/r

Appl ying/releasing
eleasing the
the electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee man-
automatically, pull switch 1. ually
The electric parking brake is also automatically
applied if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
brought the vehicle to a standstill. to children and animals le unattended in
the vehicle
In addition, at least one of the following conditions
must be ful lled: If you leave children and animals unattended in
R the engine is switched o
the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle
in motion, for example by:
R the driver is not sitting in the driver's seat
R Releasing the parking brake
R the belt buckle is undone
R Shi ing the automatic transmission out of
R there is a system malfunction
park position j.
R the power supply is insu cient R Starting the engine
R the vehicle is stationary for a long time
They could also operate vehicle equipment and
The red F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) become trapped.
indicator lamp in the Instrument Display lights up. # Never leave children and animals unat-
The electric parking brake is only actually applied tended in the vehicle.
when the red F and ! (USA) or ! (Can-
ada) indicator lamps light up continuously.
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Releasing the
the electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee automatically
automatically
Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: # To apply:
apply: press the ! switch when the vehi-
The electric parking brake of your vehicle is cle is stationary.
released when all of the following conditions are When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada)
ful lled:
indicator lamps light up in the instrument dis-
R The driver is sitting in the driver's seat. play. The electric parking brake is only actually
R The driver is belted. applied when the red F and ! (USA)
R The engine is running. or ! (Canada) indicator lamps light up con-
tinuously.
R The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator. It is also possible to apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is switched o .
or
# To release:
release: pull the ! switch.
You switch from transmission position j to The red F and ! (USA) or ! (Can-
position h or k. You must also depress the ada) indicator lamps in the instrument display
accelerator if traveling on steep uphill gradi- go out.
ents.
You may only release the electric parking brake
R If the transmission is in position k, the rear-
if the ignition is switched on with the start/
end doors must be closed. stop button.
Emergency
Emergency braking
braking
In the event of an emergency, you can brake the
vehicle while it is in motion with the electric park-
ing brake.
# While driving, press the ! switch of the
electric parking brake.
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
the ! switch of the electric parking brake
depressed.
The vehicle's brake lights light up.
The longer the ! switch of the electric Standb

andbyy mode
parking brake is depressed, the greater the
braking force. Activ
ctivating
deactivating standb
standbyy mode
During the braking procedure, you will receive the Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
following feedback from the vehicle: R The engine is switched o .
R A warning tone sounds. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be

R The Release Parking Brake message appears minimized during extended periods of non-opera-
in the multifunction display. tion.
R The red F and ! (USA) or ! (Can- Standby mode is characterized by the following:
ada) indicator lamps ash in the multifunction R The starter battery is preserved.
display. R The maximum non-operational time appears in
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the media display.
the electric parking brake is applied. R The connection to online services is interrup-
ted.
Par
arking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for an ext
extended
ended period
period R The ATA (anti-the alarm system) is unavaila-
ble.
* NOTE Starter battery damage due to leav- R The interior motion sensor and tow-away alarm
ing the vehicle standing idle for extended functions are not available.
periods of time
If the following conditions are ful lled, standby
If the vehicle is not moved for a prolonged mode can be activated or deactivated using the
period, quiescent current can lead to excessive multimedia system:
discharge of the starter battery and cause bat-
R The engine is switched o .
tery damage.
# Charge the starter battery if the voltage
R The ignition is switched on.
is below 12.2 V, for example by driving a Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational
considerable distance. time may cause inconvenience, for example it can-
# Charge the starter battery every six not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reli-
months, even if it has been disconnected ably start the engine.
or is in standby mode. Charge the starter battery rst in the following sit-
# Check the charge level every four weeks uations:
if no trickle charger is being used. R In order to extend the vehicle's non-opera-
# If possible, connect a trickle charger to tional time.
the jump-start connection point. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop to Mode message appears in the media display.
disconnect the battery or if you have any
questions. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated
when the ignition is switched on.
Par
arking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for over
over ffour
our weeks
weeks On-board computer:
# Met
Method
hod 1: connect the batteries to a trickle 4 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Standby Mode
charger via the jump-start connection. # To activat

activate/deactiv
e/deactivat
ate:
e: selectYes or No.
# Met
Method
hod 2: interrupt the power supply by acti- % If the options are grayed out, the condition of
vating standby mode (/ page 138). charge of the battery is not su cient for
# Met
Method
hod 3: disconnect all batteries. For this, standby mode.
please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Driving
Dr iving and driving
driving safety
safety systems
systems
Notes on driving
driving systems
systems and your
your responsibility
responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and maneuver-
ing the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. Function of driving
driving systems
systems and driving
driving safety
safety sys-
sys-
These cannot replace your attention to the sur- tems
roundings and do not release you from your
responsibility under road tra c law. The driver is In this section, you will nd information about the
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, following driving systems and driving safety sys-
for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for tems:
staying in lane. Always pay attention to the tra c R ABS (A Anti-lock braking system) (/ page 139)
and intervene if necessary. Be aware of the limita- R ASR (acceleration skid control) (/ page 140)
tions regarding the safe use of these systems.
R BAS (B Brake Assist System) (/ page 140)
If you fail to adapt your driving style, the driving
systems can neither reduce the risk of accident R ESP® (EElectronic Stability Program)
nor override the laws of physics. The road and (/ page 140)
weather conditions as well as the tra c situation R EBD (EElectronic Brakeforce Distribution)
cannot always be taken into account. (/ page 142)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 142)
Infor
Information
mation about sensors R Cruise control (/ page 144)
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 147)
R Hill start assist (/ page 149)
R HOLD function (/ page 150)
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R Rear view camera
R Surround view camera
R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 152)
R Blind Spot Assist (/ page 153)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 156)
Functions of ABS (Anti-lock

(Anti-lock Braking
Braking System)
System)
Certain driving and driving safety systems use sen- Observe the important safety guidelines for the
sors 1 to monitor the area in front of, behind or driving safety system.
next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's ABS controls the brake pressure in critical situa-
equipment). tions:
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar R The wheels are prevented from locking when
sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or braking, e.g. during maximum full-stop braking
behind the radiator grille. Keep these parts free of or when there is insu cient tire traction
dirt, ice and slush (/ page 188). The sensors
R The steerability of the vehicle in terms of physi-
must not be covered, for example by bicycle racks,
overhanging loads or stickers. A er a collision, cal possibilities is ensured when braking
have the function of the radar sensors checked at R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph
a quali ed specialist workshop as damage (both (5 km/h). On a slippery road surface, ABS
visible or non-visible) may have occurred to the intervenes even if you only brake gently.
bumper or radiator grille.
System limits
System
If there is a malfunction and the yellow ! ABS
warning lamp lights up continuously in the instru-
ment display a er starting the engine, ABS may be
impaired or inoperative.
If ABS intervenes, you will feel a pulsing in the
brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal may be an
indication of hazardous road conditions and func- you when pulling away and accelerating, especially
tions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. on wet or slippery roads.
If ABS interv
intervenes:
enes: keep the brake pedal rmly If traction on the road surface is not su cient,
depressed until the braking situation has passed. even ASR will not allow you to pull away without
To carry
carr y out maximum full-stop
full-stop braking:
braking: depress di culty. The type of tires and total weight of the
the brake pedal with full force. vehicle as well as the gradient of the road also play
a crucial role.
If ASR intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp in the
Function of BAS
BAS (Brak
(Brakee Assist
Assist System)
System)
Instrument Display ashes.
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a
malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System) Functions of ESP® (Electr
(Electronic
onic Stability
Stability Progr
Program)
am)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is increased. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is mal-
# Depress the brake pedal with full force in
functioning
emergency braking situations. ABS pre- If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry
vents the wheels from locking. out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driv-
ing safety systems are switched o .
BAS supports you with additional braking force in # Drive on carefully.
an emergency braking situation.
# Have ESP® checked at a quali ed spe-
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is acti- cialist workshop.
vated:
R BAS automatically boosts the braking force of & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deac-
the brakes tivated
R BAS can shorten the braking distance
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking
vehicle stabilization.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
function as usual again. BAS is deactivated. following situations.
Functions of ASR (Acceler

(Acceleration
ation Skid Control)
Control) If the surface requires, temporarily deactivate
ESP® when pulling away (/ page 141).
ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
Do not operate the vehicle on a roller dynamome-
override the laws of physics if the driver does not
ter (e.g. for a performance test). If you have to
pay attention when pulling away or accelerating.
operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer, con-
ASR is only an aid. Always adapt your driving style
sult a quali ed specialist workshop beforehand.
to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a
If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a
vehicle with this option, ESP® will be deactivated
vehicle with this option, ASR will be deactivated for
for the duration of the activation/deactivation
the duration of the activation/deactivation proc-
process.
ess.
Vehicles without
without steer
steering
ing wheel buttons:
buttons: if ASR is If ESP® is malfunctioning or deactivated, the ÷
malfunctioning, the ÷ indicator lamp lights up warning lamp lights up while the engine is running
while the engine is running and the engine output and the engine output may be reduced
may be reduced (/ page 26). (/ page 26).
ASR improves traction, i.e. the transfer of power % Only use wheels with the recommended tire
from the tires to the road surface, for a sustained sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
period and thereby, also improves the driving sta-
bility of the vehicle. If the drive wheels start to
spin, ASR brakes individual drive wheels and limits
the engine torque. ASR thus signi cantly assists
ESP® can, within physical limits, monitor and Functions of ESP® Cr

Crosswind
osswind Assist
improve driving stability and traction in the follow-
Crosswind Assist does not react under the follow-
ing situations:
ing conditions:
R When pulling away on wet or slippery road sur-
R The vehicle is subjected to severe jolts and
faces
vibrations, e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces
R When braking or potholes.
R If you are driving faster than 49.7 mph R The vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or ice
(80 km/h) in strong crosswinds or when hydroplaning.
If the vehicle is deviating from the direction R The driver is performing sudden and large
desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehi- steering movements.
cle by performing the following actions: Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon as
R One or more wheels are braked the driving conditions return to normal.
R The drive system performance is adapted Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind gusts
depending on the situation that can impair ability of your vehicle to drive
straight ahead. Crosswind Assist intervenes
When ESP® is deactivated, the ÷ warning lamp depending on the direction and strength of the
in the Instrument Display lights up continuously: crosswind.
R Vehicle stabilization may be delayed A stabilizing brake application helps you to keep
R Crosswind Assist is still active the vehicle on track.
R The drive wheels may start to spin Information is shown in the instrument cluster in
R ASR traction control is no longer active the event of a clearly discernible intervention by
Crosswind Assist.
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® will still support you Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle speed of
when braking. 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight or slightly
If the ÷ warning lamp in the Instrument Display cornering.
ashes, one or more tires have reached their tire
traction limit: Function of ESP® tr
trailer
ailer stabilization
stabilization
R Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions & WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstan- and weather conditions
ces In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer
stabilization cannot prevent lurching of the
Activ
ctivating/deactivating ESP® (Electr
ating/deactivating (Electronic
onic Stability
Stability vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high
Progr
Pr ogram)
am) center of gravity may tip over before ESP®
detects this.
On-board computer: # Always adapt your driving style to suit the
4 Settings 5 DriveAssist 5 ESP (ESP) current road and weather conditions.
# Select On or Off ESP_OFF_SMALL.
ESP® trailer stabilization counteracts critical driv-
ing situations in good time and thereby provides
considerable assistance when driving with a trailer.
Trailer stabilization is part of ESP®.
If the sensor system and evaluation logic detect
trailer swinging movements, ESP® trailer stabiliza-
tion initially brakes individual vehicle wheels in a
targeted manner. It thus counteracts swinging
movements. If the swinging movements do not
stop, the vehicle is braked until the vehicle/trailer
combination is stabilized. If necessary, the vehi-
cle's engine output is limited.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combina- occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi-
tion) starts to swerve, you are able to stabilize the mum full-stop braking if necessary. Situation-
vehicle/trailer combination only by braking. ESP® dependent braking assistance only intervenes
trailer stabilization helps you to stabilize the vehi- when the brakes are applied rmly; otherwise, it
cle/trailer combination in this situation. remains within the autonomous braking process.
ESP® trailer stabilization is active at speeds above & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
ted detection performance of Active Brake
If ESP® is deactivated because of a malfunction, Assist
trailer stabilization will not function.
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex tra c situations.
Function of EBD (electronic
(electronic brak
brakee for
force
ce distr
distribu-
ibu- Due to the nature of the system, complex driv-
tion) ing conditions may also cause Brake Assist to
EBD has the following characteristics: intervene or not intervene without reason. In
such cases, and in the event of Active Brake
R monitoring and controlling the braking force on
Assist malfunctioning, the brake system will
the rear wheels continue to be available with full brake boost
R improving driving stabilization when braking, and BAS.
especially on bends # Always pay careful attention to the tra c
situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Functions of Activ
Activee Brak
Brakee Assist Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only
an aid. The driver of the vehicle is
Active Brake Assist consists of the following func- responsible for keeping a su ciently safe
tions: distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
R Distance warning function cle speed and for braking in good time.
R Autonomous braking function # Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces-
R Situation-dependent braking assistance sary.
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or to Assist.
reduce the e ects of such a collision.
The individual subfunctions areare available
available in the
the fol-
fol-
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- lowing
lo wing speed rang
ranges:
es:
sion, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Distance
Dist ance war
warning
ning function
If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn- The distance warning function warns you at speeds
ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical greater than approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
situations. vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian.
If there are pedestrians and cyclists crossing: in An intermittent warning tone sounds and the ·
especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument
can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this cluster.
case, the visual and acoustic warning occurs
simultaneously with the braking application. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided
it is safe to do so and the tra c situation allows
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- this.
tion, or apply the brakes during autonomous brak-
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
The distance
distance war
warning
ning function can aid you
you in the
the follo
following
wing situations with
with an inter
intermitt
mittent
ent war
warning
ning tone
tone and
a war
warning
ning lamp:
lamp:
Vehicles trav
traveling
eling Stationaryy vehi-
Stationar vehi- Crossing
Cr ossing vehicles
vehicles Crossing pedes-
Crossing Stationaryy pedes-
Stationar
in front
front cles trians/cy
tr ians/cyclis
clists
ts trians
tr ians
Up to approx. Up to approx. No reaction Up to approx. No reaction
155 mph 124 mph 37 mph
(250 km/h) (200 km/h) (60 km/h)
Aut
utonomous
onomous braking
braking function
The autonomous
autonomous braking
braking function may
may interv
intervene
ene at speeds star
starting
ting from
from approximat
approximatel
elyy 4 mph
mph (7 km/h) in
the follo
following
wing situations:
Vehicles trav
traveling
Cr ossing vehicles
Stationar
in front
tr ians/cyclis
clists
ts trians
tr ians
(250 km/h) (200 km/h) (60 km/h)
Situation-dependent braking
braking assistance
assistance
Situation-dependent braking
braking assistance
assistance may
may interv
intervene
ene at speeds star
starting
ting from
from approximat
approximatel
elyy 4 mph
mph
(7 km/h) in the
the follo
following
wing situations:
Vehicles trav
traveling
Cr ossing vehicles
Stationar
in front
tr ians/cyclis
clists
ts trians
tr ians
(250 km/h) (80 km/h) (60 km/h)
Canceling a brak
brakee application of Activ
Activee Brake
Brake System
System limits
Assist The system may be impaired or may not function in
You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake the following situations:
Assist at any time by: R The sensors are a ected by snow, rain, fog or
R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with heavy spray.
kickdown. R The sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or
R Fully releasing the brake pedal (only during sit- covered.
uation-dependent braking assistance). R The sensors are a ected by interference from
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica- other radar sources, e.g. strong radar re ec-
tion when one of the following conditions is ful l- tions in parking garages.
led: R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle.

been detected and displayed.
R Full system performance is not available for a
R There is no longer a risk of collision.
few seconds a er switching on the ignition or
R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of a er driving o .
your vehicle.
The system may not react correctly in the following Cruise

Cr uise control
control
situations:
Function of cruise
cruise control
control
R In complex tra c situations, objects may not Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehicle
always be clearly detected. automatically in order to maintain a previously
R Pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the stored speed.
detection range of the sensors. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
R Pedestrians are obscured by other objects. stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
R In curves with a narrow radius. foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking,
cruise control will resume speed regulation back to
the stored speed.
Setting
Setting Activ
Activee Brak
Brakee Assist Cruise control is operated using the corresponding
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed
R The drive system has been started. above 15 mph (20 km/h).
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control
On-board computer: can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
4 Settings 5 DriveAssist
override the laws of physics. It cannot take into
5 Active Brake Assist account road, weather or tra c conditions. Cruise
The following settings are available: control is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
R Early braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
R Medium
The status of cruise control and the stored speed
R Late are shown in the Instrument Display.
R Active Brake Assist is deactivated by removing
the tick next to the Early, Medium or Late set-
ting.
% It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is
always le activated.
# Select a setting.
The last active setting is selected automatically
every time the engine is started.
Exception: if the last setting was Off, the Medium
setting will be automatically activated the next Display in the Instrument Display (color display)
time the engine is started. 1 Cruise control is selected.
2 Set speed gray: speed is stored, cruise control
Deactivating Activ
Deactivating Activee Brak
Brakee Assist is deactivated.
% It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is 3 Set speed green: speed is stored, cruise con-
always le activated. trol is activated.
# Remove the tick next to the Early, Medium or
System limits
System
Late setting. Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
The distance warning function and autono- stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed
mous braking function are deactivated. is resumed when the gradient levels out.
% When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the On long and steep downhill gradients, you should
æ symbol appears in the status area of the change down to a lower gear in good time. Take
multifunction display. particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle.
By doing so, you will make use of the engine's
braking e ect. This will take some of the strain o
the brake system and prevent the brakes from
overheating and wearing too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa- # Press rocker switch 2 up or down and hold.
tions: The stored speed is increased or reduced in
R In tra c situations where frequent speed 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.
changes are required, e.g. in heavy tra c or on or
winding roads. # Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure
R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the point.
drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle The stored speed is increased or reduced by
could then skid. 5 mph (10 km/h).
R If you are driving when visibility is poor. or
Operating
Oper ating cruise
cruise control
control
# Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure
point and hold.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored The stored speed is increased or reduced in
speed 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower or
than your current speed, the vehicle deceler- # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
ates. # Push rocker switch 2 up.
# Take into account the tra c situation If cruise control is activated and Tra c Sign Assist
before calling up the stored speed. has detected a speed restriction sign with a maxi-
mum permissible speed and this appears in the
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: instrument display:
R ESP® is activated, but may not intervene. # To adopt
adopt the
the detect
detected
ed speed: push rocker
R The driving speed is at least 15 mph switch 3 up.
(20 km/h). The maximum permissible speed shown by the
tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains
this speed.
# To deactivat
deactivatee cruise
cruise control:
control: push rocker
switch 3 (CNCL) down.
If cruise control is deactivated, it can be reactiva-
ted as follows:
R rocker switch 2 (SET+) or (SET-) stores the
current speed and the vehicle maintains this
speed
R rocker switch 3 (RES) calls up the last speed
stored and the vehicle maintains this speed
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter-
venes, cruise control is deactivated.
When you switch o the vehicle, the last speed
# To activat
activatee cruise
cruise control:
control: push rocker switch stored is cleared.
1 up. Setting the
Setting the limit speed for
for winter
winter tires
tires
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. On-board computer
The current speed is then saved and main- 4 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter Tires Limit
tained by the vehicle. # Select a speed or deactivate the function.
# Push rocker switch 1 up.
# To increase/r
increase/reduce
educe speed: push rocker switch
2 up or down. DSR (Downhill
(Downhill Speed Regulation)
Regulation)
The stored speed is increased or reduced by Notes on DSR
1 mph (1 km/h). If you fail to adapt your driving style or you are
or inattentive, DSR can neither reduce the risk of
accident nor override the laws of physics. DSR
cannot take road, weather and tra c conditions # Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired
into account. DSR is only an aid. You are responsi- speed between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph
ble especially for a safe distance to the vehicle in (18 km/h).
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good # Release the brake or accelerator pedal.
time. The current speed is stored. When stationary,
DSR supports you when driving downhill. DSR 2 mph (4 km/h) or the minimum possible
maintains a set speed for you on downhill gradi- speed for each gear range is stored. DSR main-
ents by applying the brakes as required. Maintain- tains the stored speed on the downhill gradient
ing the speed is dependent on the road surface and brakes automatically.
conditions and the downhill gradient and cannot
therefore be guaranteed in all situations. When DSR is activated and the vehicle pulls away,
accelerates or brakes on an incline, the speed set
You can set the speed depending on the gear corresponds to the speed at which the accelerator
range to between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph or brake pedal is released or the rocker switch is
(18 km/h) using the brake and accelerator pedals pressed during DSR regulation. This is only the
or the rocker switch on the steering wheel. case if you are not driving faster than 11 mph
DSR automatically controls in the following situa- (18 km/h).
tions: DSR status display in the on-board computer
R If the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is less R DSR is activat
activated:
ed:
than 2 mph (4 km/h) , the speed is set to
- DSR and the set speed appear in the sta-
2 mph (4 km/h) or it is set to the minimum
speed for the respective gear range. tus area of the on-board computer.
R DSR is activat
activated,
ed, but is not
not interv
intervening:
ening:
R If you drive faster than 11 mph (18 km/h) o -
road, DSR switches to standby mode. DSR - You are driving between 11 mph (18 km/h)
remains activated, but does not brake automat- and 28 mph (45 km/h).
ically. - DSR and the speed 11 mph (18 km/h)
R If you drive downhill slower than 11 mph appear in the status area of the on-board
(18 km/h), DSR sets the speed to the previ- computer.
ously set speed. DSR is in standby mode.
R If you drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h), R DSR is inactive:
inactive:
DSR switches o automatically. - You are exceeding a speed of 28 mph
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating DSR (45 km/h).
- DSR appears in the status area of the on-
Activ
ctivating
ating DSR
board computer. In addition, the DSR Off
message appears.
- DSR - - - appears in the status area of the
on-board computer.
Setting the
Setting the speed while driving
driving downhill
downhill
You can set the speed to between 2 mph (4 km/h)
and, depending on the gear range, up to 11 mph
(18 km/h) using the brake and accelerator pedals
or the rocker switch on the steering wheel.
You can activate DSR when the vehicle is station-

ary or moving.
# Press the upper section of switch 1.
# Press the upper section of switch 1.

or
# Accelerate and drive faster than 28 mph
(45 km/h).
DSR deactivates automatically in the following sit-
uations:
R You drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h).
R There is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys-
tem.
Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC
Function of Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
# Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles ahead
speed on the downhill gradient. are detected, the set distance is maintained, if
# Release the brake or accelerator pedal. necessary until the vehicle comes to a halt. The
The current speed is stored. vehicle accelerates or brakes, depending on the
or distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed.
# Press rocker switch 1 up or down during a Speed and distance are set and stored on the
DSR regulation. steering wheel. The speed can be set in the range
The last saved speed is increased or reduced. between 15 mph (20 km/h) and 99 mph
(160 km/h) or between 15 mph (20 km/h) and
# Release rocker switch 1. the vehicle's maximum speed.
The current speed is stored.
Other features of Active Distance Assist
or DISTRONIC:
# Press rocker switch 1 up or down until R Depending on the preselected distance,
desired speed is reached. DISTRONIC intervenes either dynamically
# Release rocker switch 1. (short distance) or to save fuel (long distance).
The current speed is stored. R Depending on the vehicle mass detected, the
% It may be a moment before the vehicle starts dynamics of the DISTRONIC intervention are
to brake to the set speed. Take this delay into reduced.
account when setting the speed with rocker R Rapid acceleration to the stored speed is initi-
switch 1. ated if the turn signal indicator is switched on
Deactivating
Deactivating DSR to change to the overtaking lane.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking
in good time.
System
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function in
the following instances, for example:
R The radar sensors are a ected by snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, glare, direct sunlight or
greatly varying ambient light.
R The radar sensors may malfunction in parking
garages or on roads with steep uphill or down-
hill gradients.
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R On icy or slippery roads, braking or accelerat- & WARNING Risk of accident if detection
ing can cause the drive wheels to lose traction function of Active Distance Assist
and the vehicle could then skid. DISTRONIC is impaired
R Stationary objects are not detected if these
were not previously detected as moving. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
R On curves, target vehicles may be lost or not
R when driving on a di erent lane or when
recognized correctly. As a result, a target vehi-
cle is not used to regulate the speed which changing lanes
may lead to unwanted acceleration. R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or station-
ary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
R to complex tra c conditions
these situations.
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c
& WARNING Risk of accident from accelera-
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
tion or braking by Active Distance Assist
may neither give warnings nor intervene in
DISTRONIC
such situations.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- # Always observe the tra c conditions
erate or brake in the following cases, for exam- carefully and react accordingly.
ple:
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis- Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not detect
tance Assist DISTRONIC. narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles
R If the stored speed is called up and is con- and vehicles not traveling in line with your vehicle.
siderably faster or slower than the cur- Operating
Oper ating Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC
rently driven speed.
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle has been started.
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects. R The parking brake has been released.
# Always carefully observe the tra c con-

R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
ditions and be ready to brake at all times. R The transmission is in position h.
# Take into account the tra c situation R The driver's and the co-driver door are closed.
before calling up the stored speed. R The seat occupancy recognition on the driver's
seat has detected that the driver has fastened
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - the seat belt.
cient deceleration by Active Distance R The check of the radar sensor system has been
Assist DISTRONIC successfully completed.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your Activ
ctivating
ating Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC
vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler-
ation. If this deceleration is not su cient,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you
with a visual and acoustic warning.
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-
ble distance from the vehicle in front.
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
# Press button 1. R The transmission is not in position D.

# To activat
activatee without
without a stor
stored
ed speed: press R The parking brake is applied.
rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-).
R The driver or co-driver door is open.
The current speed is then saved and main-
tained by the vehicle. R There is an internal error.
or In addition to the deactivation of Active Distance

# To activat
activatee with
with a stor
stored
ed speed: press rocker Assist DISTRONIC, transmission position j is
switch 4 up (RES). automatically engaged if one of these conditions is
met or if the vehicle is traveling very slowly.
% If rocker switch 4 is pressed up twice, Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated with Increasing
Incr easing or reducing
reducing the
the speed
the speed restriction displayed in the instru- # Push rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
ment cluster. (SET-) to the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
Adop
dopting
ting the
the displayed
displayed limit speed when Active
Active
1 mph (1 km/h).
Distance
Dist ance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC is active
or
# Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
# Press and hold rocker switch 3 up (SET+)/
The limit speed displayed in the instrument
cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The down (SET-) to the pressure point.
vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle The stored speed is increased or reduced in
in front, but only up to the stored speed. 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.
or
Pulling away
away again
again with
with Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
# Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure
DISTRONIC
DISTR ONIC
point.
# Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
# Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
5 mph (10 km/h).
or or
# Depress the accelerator pedal brie y with # Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure
force. point and hold.
The functions of Active Distance Assist The stored speed is increased or reduced in
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
Deactivating
Deactivating Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC Increasing
Incr easing or reducing
reducing the
the speci ed dist
distance
ance from
from
the vehicle
vehicle in front
front
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to
# To increase
increase the
the speci ed dist
distance:
ance: press
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being
active when you leave the driver's seat rocker switch 2 down (Ò).
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
# To reduce
reduce the
the speci ed dist
distance:
ance: press rocker
is being braked by Active Distance Assist switch 2 up (Ñ).
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist Infor
Information
mation on Hill Star
Startt Assist
DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time
prevent it from rolling away before you
when pulling away on a hill under the following
leave the driver's seat.
conditions:
# Press rocker switch 4 down (CNCL). R Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: the
# Depress the brake pedal. transmission is in position h or k.
R The parking brake has been released.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automatically
deactivated in the following circumstances: This gives you enough time to move your foot from
R The driver's seat belt buckle is open and the the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and
vehicle is traveling slower than 2 mph depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
(3 km/h).
R The driver's seat is not occupied.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due Activ

ctivating
ating the
the HOLD function
to the vehicle rolling away
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer HOLD function being active when you
holds the vehicle. leave the vehicle
# Swi ly move your foot from the brake
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not function it could, in the following situations, roll
leave the vehicle when it is being held by
away:
Hill Start Assist.
R If there is a malfunction in the system or in
the power supply.
HOLD function R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
HOLD function depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling
R The seat occupancy recognition on the driver's
away before you leave it.
seat has detected that the driver has fastened
the seat belt.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to auto-
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill matic braking
without requiring you to depress the brake pedal,
e.g. when pulling away on steep slopes or when When the following functions are activated, the
waiting in tra c. When you depress the accelera- vehicle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tor pedal to pull away, the braking e ect is can- tions:
celed and the HOLD function is deactivated. R Active Brake Assist
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil- R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with
R HOLD function
the driver.
System limits
System To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar situa-
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
tions:
assistance when driving and is not a su cient
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling # When towing
away when stationary. # In a car wash

R The incline cannot be greater than 30%.
# Make sure that the activation conditions are
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the HOLD function met.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display
R The vehicle is stationary. appears in the multifunction display.
R The engine is running or it has been automati- The HOLD function is activated. You can
cally switched o by the ECO start/stop func- release the brake pedal.
tion. % If depressing the brake pedal the rst time
R The driver is seated and belted. does not activate the HOLD function, wait
brie y and then try again.
R The electric parking brake is released.
R Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: the Deactivating the
Deactivating the HOLD function
selector lever is in position h, k or i. # Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: depress
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva- the accelerator pedal when the automatic
ted. transmission is in position h or k.
# Depress the brake pedal again with su cient
pressure until the ë display in the multi-
function display goes out.
% Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: the R There is a rapid change in temperature, e.g. if,
automatic transmission of your vehicle shi s in the winter, you drive out of the cold into a
to j a er some time. This relieves the load heated garage.
on the service brake. R The ambient temperature is very high.
When the HOLD function is activated, the auto- R The camera lens is covered, dirty or fogged up.
matic transmission automatically shi s to j in Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view
the following situations: camera (/ page 188).
R The driver leaves the driver's seat. R The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged.
R The driver's door is opened. In this case, have the camera and its position
R The engine is switched o without the ECO and setting checked at a quali ed specialist
start/stop function. workshop.
The eld of vision and other functions of the rear
Rear view
view camera
camera with
with inside rear
rearvie
view
w mirror
mirror dis- view camera may be restricted due to additional
play accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license
plate bracket or bicycle rack).
Function of the
the rear
rear view
view camera
camera with
with inside rear-
rear- % The inside rearview mirror display contrast
view mirror
view mirror display may be impaired due to incident sunlight or
The rear view camera is connected to the vehicle's other light sources. In this case, pay particular
inside rearview mirror. When you engage reverse attention.
gear the rear view camera's image appears in the
le area of the inside rearview mirror. It is there- % Have the inside rearview mirror repaired or
fore possible to see what is behind the vehicle replaced if its use is considerably restricted,
when backing up. for example due to pixel errors.
The rear view camera with inside rearview mirror % Objects that are not at ground level appear
display is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you further away than they actually are.
paying attention to the surroundings. You are Examples of such objects:
always responsible for safe maneuvering and park- R The bumper of a vehicle parked behind
ing. Make sure that there are no persons, animals
R The drawbar of a trailer
or objects etc. in the maneuvering area while
maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. R The ball neck of a trailer hitch
The rear view camera with inside rearview mirror R The rear-end of a truck
display may show a distorted view of obstacles, R Slanted posts
show them incorrectly or not at all. It cannot show
all objects which are very near to or under the rear Displaying and hiding the
Displaying the inside rear
rearvie
view
w mirror
mirror
bumper. It will not warn you of a collision, people display
or objects.
Displaying
Displaying
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mir- # Engage reverse gear.
ror image.
The rear view camera image appears on the
System
System limits le side of the inside rearview mirror.
The rear view camera with inside rearview mirror % Be aware of the system limitations of the rear
display will not function, or will only partially func- view camera with inside rearview mirror dis-
tion, in the following situations: play.
R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. Hiding
R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at # Engage another gear.
night. or
R The area is illuminated with uorescent light- # Switch o the engine.
ing, the inside rearview mirror display may The display will be hidden a er a short time.
icker.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION
ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST can assist you on long, monot-
onous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue
or increased lapses in concentration on the part of
the driver, it suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always
detect drowsiness or increased lapses in concen-
tration in good time. The system is not a substitute Instrument Display (black and white display)
for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour-
neys, take regular and timely breaks that allow you You can have the following status information for
to rest properly. ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance
menu of the on-board computer:
You can choose between two settings:
R The journey time since the last break
R St Standar
andard:
d: normal system sensitivity
R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
R Sensitiv
Sensitive:
e: higher system sensitivity. The driver
ASSIST:
is warned earlier and the attention level detec-
ted by the system is adapted accordingly. - The fuller the bar is, the higher the detec-
ted attention level is
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration
- The bar empties as attentiveness decrea-
are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
ses
Break!warning appears in the Instrument Display.
You can acknowledge the message and take a If ATTENTION ASSIST cannot calculate the atten-
break where necessary. If you do not take a break tion level and cannot issue a warning, the Atten-
and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect tion Level message appears.
increasing lapses in concentration, you will be If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û
warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes.
symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
Instrument Display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
when the engine is re-started. The last selected
sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits
System
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph
(60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restric-
ted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at
Instrument Display (color display) all, in the following situations:
R The journey lasts less than approximately
You can have the following status information for
30 minutes
ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance
menu of the on-board computer: R The road condition is poor (uneven road sur-
face or potholes)
R The journey length since the last break
R The vehicle is subjected to a strong crosswind
R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: R You have a sporty driving style (high cornering
speeds or high rates of acceleration)
- The fuller the circle is, the higher the
detected attention level is R The time is set incorrectly
- The circle in the center of the display emp- R You change lanes and vary your speed fre-
ties from the outside inwards as attentive- quently in active driving situations
ness decreases
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness driving. Ensure that there is su cient distance to
assessment is deleted and restarted when continu- the side from other road users and obstacles.
ing the journey in the following situations: If a vehicle is detected above speeds of approx-
R You switch o the engine
imately 7.5 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse-
quently enters the detection range directly next to
R You unfasten your seat belt and open the driv- your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mir-
er's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a ror lights up red.
break)
% When a trailer is connected, the radar sensor's
Setting ATTENTION
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST eld of vision may be impaired, thereby mak-
On-board computer: ing limited monitoring possible. Always pay
4 Settings 5 DriveAssist careful attention to the tra c situation and
5 Attention Assist (Attention Assist) maintain a safe distance at the side of the
vehicle.
Setting
Setting options
options If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the
The following settings are available: lateral detection range and you switch on the turn
signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a
R Standard
warning tone sounds. The red warning lamp in the
R Sensitive outside mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator
R Off remains switched on, all other detected vehicles
are indicated only by the ashing of the red warn-
# Select a setting. ing lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
Blind Spot
Spot Assist given.
Function of Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist with
with exit
exit war
warning
ning Exit war
warning
ning
Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing radar The exit warning is an additional function of Blind
sensors to monitor the area directly next to and on Spot Assist and warns vehicle occupants when
the side behind the vehicle. leaving the vehicle about any approaching vehicles.
% USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor warning
is intended for use in an automotive radar sys- The exit warning neither reacts to stationary
tem only. Removal, tampering, or altering of objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a
the device will void any warranties, and is not greatly di ering speed.
permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with,
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these
alter or use in any non-approved way.
situations.
Any unauthorized modi cation to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the # Always pay particular attention to the
equipment. tra c situation when opening the doors

and make sure there is su cient clear-
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind ance.
Spot Assist
% An exit warning is not issued for sliding doors
Blind Spot Assist does not react to either sta- and rear-end doors.
tionary objects or vehicles approaching and
overtaking you at a greatly di erent speed.
Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these
situations.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c
situation and maintain a safe distance at
the side of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect

some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive
Over
Overview
view The exit warning function may be limited in the fol-
When the vehicle is Red warning lamp in lowing situations:
stationary, an object is the outside mirror R when the sensor is blocked by adjacent vehi-
detected from behind cles in narrow parking spaces
in the detection range. R when people are approaching
When the vehicle is Collision warning Activ

ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Blind Spot
Spot Assist
stationary, a door on On-board computer:
the relevant side of the 4 Settings
vehicle is opened. An
object which is close # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
to your vehicle is
detected in the detec- Driv
Dr ivee Away
Away Assist
tion range.
Function of Driv
Drivee Away
Away Assist
% This additional function is only available when % Drive Away Assist is only available for vehicles
Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi- with automatic transmission.
mum of three minutes a er the drive system
has been switched o . The end of the availa- Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
bility of the exit warning function is indicated impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detec-
by a series of ashes in the outside mirror. ted in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is
brie y reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h).
The exit warning function is only an aid and is no If a critical situation is detected, a symbol appears
substitute for the attentiveness of the vehicle on the camera image of the multimedia system.
occupants. Responsibility lies with the vehicle
occupants when opening doors and leaving the & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
vehicle. ted detection performance of Drive Away
System
System limits Assist
Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning function Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden-
may be limited in the following situations: tify objects and tra c situations.
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:
are obscured R Warn you without reason and limit the vehi-
R if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy cle speed.
rain, snow or spray R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle
R if narrow vehicles are within the detection speed.
range, e.g. bicycles # Always pay careful attention to the tra c
R on very wide lanes situation; do not rely on Drive Away
R on very narrow lanes Assist alone.
R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec-
lane essary, provided the tra c situation per-
mits and that it is safe to take evasive
% Stationary or slowly moving objects are not action.
displayed.
Warnings may be issued in error when driving Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi-
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor- tute for your attention to the surroundings. You are
ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no
prolonged time. persons, animals or objects etc. are in the path of
your vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
gear is engaged.
A risk of a collision may arise in the following situa- The Rear Cross Tra c Alert function is unavailable
tions, for example: when driving with a trailer.
R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake
pedals. Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
Assist and Activ
Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping
R If the wrong gear is selected. Assist
The Drive Away Assist function is active under the Function of Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
following conditions:
R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
R Every time the gear is changed to k or h
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx-
imately 3.3 (1.0 m) away.
R If the maneuvering assistance function is acti-
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits
System
Drive Away Assist is unavailable on inclines and
when driving with a trailer.
Rear Cross
Cross Tr
Traa c Alert
Function of Rear
Rear Cross
Cross Tr
Traa c Alert Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
The radar sensors in the bumper are used for the your vehicle with multifunction camera 1. It
system. This way the area adjacent to the vehicle serves to protect you against unintentionally leav-
is continually monitored. If the radar sensors are ing your lane. You may also be warned by a notice-
obscured by vehicles or other objects, detection is able vibration in the steering wheel or by a warning
not possible. tone and by the status symbol ashing in the
% Also read the notes on Blind Spot Assist Instrument Display.
(/ page 153). The function is available in the speed range
Vehicles with
with Blind Spot
Spot Assist: drivers can also be between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) and
warned of any crossing tra c when backing up out 100 mph (160 km/h).
of a parking space. If a vehicle is detected, the The warning is issued when the following condi-
warning lamp in the outside mirror on the corre- tions are met at the same time:
sponding side lights up red. If it detects a critical R If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings.
situation, a warning tone also sounds.
R If a front wheel drives over lane markings.
Vehicles with
with Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist and Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist
PARK
ARKTR
TRONIC:
ONIC: drivers can also be warned of any % You may also be warned by a noticeable vibra-
crossing tra c when backing up out of a parking tion in the steering wheel (4x2 model) or by a
space. If a critical situation is detected, a warning warning tone (4x4 model) and by the status
symbol appears on the camera image of the multi- symbol ashing in the Instrument Display.
media system. If the driver does not respond to the You can activate and deactivate the Lane Keeping
warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied auto- Assist warning.
matically. In this case, a warning tone sounds.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping
The Rear Cross Tra c Alert function is active Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
under the following conditions: override the laws of physics. It cannot take into
R Blind Spot Assist is activated. account road, weather or tra c conditions. Lane
R Reverse gear is engaged or the vehicle is back- Keeping Assist is only an aid and is not intended to
ing up at walking pace. keep the vehicle in the lane without the driver's
cooperation. You are responsible for the distance
R If the maneuvering assistance function is acti- to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in
vated in the multimedia system. good time and for staying in your lane.
System
System limits The warning is issued when the following condi-
The system may be impaired or may not function in tions are met at the same time:
the following situations: R The driving system detects lane markings.
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient R If a front wheel drives over lane markings.
illumination of the road, if there are highly vari-
able shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or A lane-correcting brake application occurs when
spray. the following conditions are met:
R Glare from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane mark-
re ections. ings on both sides of the vehicle.
R There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of R A front wheel drives over a solid lane marking.
the multifunction camera or the camera is fog- A relevant message appears in the Instrument Dis-
ged up, damaged or obscured. play.
R No or several unclear lane markings are pres- The brake application is available in the speed
ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area. range between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h)
R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or and 100 mph (160 km/h).
covered up. You can either deactivate the Active Lane Keeping
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too Assist warning or switch o the system completely.
short and thus the lane markings cannot be If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
detected. Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an
R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot
branch o , cross one another or merge. take into account road, weather or tra c condi-
R The road is very narrow and winding. tions. The driving system is an aid for when you
unintentionally leave or cross the lane and not a
Functions of Activ
Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist system for automatically keeping to the lane. You
are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and
for staying in your lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application from Active

Lane Keeping Assist occurs, display 1 appears in
the multifunction display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction System
System limits
camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin-
No lane-correcting brake application from Active
tentionally leaving your lane. You may also be
Lane Keeping Assist occurs in the following situa-
warned by a noticeable vibration in the steering
wheel or by a warning tone and by the status sym- tions:
bol ashing in the Instrument Display. In addition, R You clearly and actively steer, brake or acceler-
you may be guided back into your lane by a lane- ate.
correcting brake application. A relevant message R You switch on the turn signal.
appears in the Instrument Display. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or Active Brake Assist.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with speed, the working speed is only reached
high cornering speeds or high rates of acceler- once the engine has completed the warm-up
ation. phase.
R ESP® has been switched o . It is only possible to activate ADR with the
vehicle stationary and the parking brake
R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con-
applied.
nection to the trailer has been correctly estab- On vehicles with automatic transmission, the
lished. selector lever must be in position j.
R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed. Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating ADR
The system may be impaired or may not function in

the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient
illumination of the road, if there are highly vari-
able shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or
spray.
R Glare from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or
re ections.
R There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of
the multifunction camera or the camera is fog-
ged up, damaged or obscured.
R No or several unclear lane markings are pres-
ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area.
R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up.
# To activat
activate:
e: while the engine is running, press
switch 1.
R The distance to the vehicle in front is too short
The Working Speed Governor Active message
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec- appears in the multifunction display.
ted.
# To deactivat
deactivate:
e: while the engine is running,
R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
press switch 2.
branch o , cross one another or merge.
R The road is very narrow and winding.
ADR goes out automatically in the following situa-
tions:
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
Assist and R You release the parking brake.
Activ
ctivee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist R You depress the brake pedal.
On-board computer:
4 Settings 5 DriveAssist
R The vehicle moves.
R The control unit detects a malfunction.
# Depending on vehicle equipment, select Act.
Lane Keeping Assist or Lane Keeping Assist.
The driving system is activated or deactivated,
depending on its previous status.
Wor
orkk mode
ADR (wor
(working
king speed control)
control)
Function of ADR (wor
(working
king speed control)
control)
When activated, ADR automatically increases the
engine speed to a preset speed or a speed you
have set.
% A er a cold start, the idle speed of the engine
is increased automatically. If the preset work-
ing speed is lower than the increased idle
Adjus
djusting
ting ADR This increases the braking distance and the
brake system can even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
# Do not depress the brake pedal and the

accelerator pedal at the same time while
driving.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita-

ble ball neck
If you install an unsuitable ball neck, the trailer
hitch and the rear axle may be overloaded.
This can signi cantly impair the driving charac-
teristics and the trailer may become loose.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
# Only install a ball neck that complies with
# Engage power take-o or activate ADR. the permissible dimensions and is
# To increase:
increase: press switch 1. designed for the requirements of trailer
operation.
# To reduce:
reduce: press switch 2.
# Do not modify the ball neck or the trailer
hitch.
Trailer operation
operation
You can nd speci cations regarding the ball neck
Notes on trailer
trailer operation
operation
on the trailer's identi cation plate. You can nd
speci cations regarding the trailer on the towing
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if
vehicle's identi cation plate and in the technical
the tongue weight is exceeded data (/ page 248).
The carrier system may detach from the vehi-
cle, thereby endangering other road users. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
# Always comply with the permissible to incorrectly installed ball neck
tongue weight when using a carrier. If the ball neck is not correctly installed and
secured, it may become loose during a journey
& WARNING Swerving of the vehicle/trailer and endanger other road users. There is a risk
combination due to increased speed of fatal injuries.
# Install and secure the ball neck as descri-
You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer
combination. bed in the ball neck manufacturer's
installation instructions.
The vehicle/trailer combination may even tip
# If a ball neck is installed, ensure sure
over.
that it is properly secured before every
# Under no circumstances should you try
journey.
to straighten the vehicle/trailer combina-
tion by increasing the speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a ball
# Reduce your speed and do not counter-
neck that is not correctly installed or
steer. secured
# If necessary, apply the brakes.
If the ball neck is not correctly installed and
secured, the trailer may come loose.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
# Install and secure the ball neck as descri-
brake system overheating
bed in the ball neck manufacturer's
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when installation instructions.
driving, the brake system may overheat.
# If a ball neck is installed, ensure sure R On the trailer's identi cation plate
that it is properly secured before every R On the vehicle identi cation plate
journey.
If there are discrepancies between the values, the
lowest one shall apply.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by
continuously depressing the brake pedal Before driving o , ensure the following:
R The tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing
# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- vehicle has been set for the maximum load.
ously whilst driving.
R The headlamps have been set correctly.
# To use the braking e ect of the engine,
shi to a lower gear in good time. Values approved by the manufacturer can be found
on the identi cation plates and in the section for
Be sure to comply with the operating instructions the towing vehicle (/ page 211).
of the manufacturer of the trailer coupling and the Your vehicle will behave di erently with a trailer
ball neck. relative to without a trailer:
Place your vehicle/trailer combination on surfaces R The vehicle/trailer combination will be heavier.
that are as even as possible and secure it against
rolling away (/ page 134). Couple and uncouple R The vehicle/trailer combination will be restric-
the trailer carefully. ted in its acceleration and gradeability.
R The vehicle/trailer combination will have an
When backing up the towing vehicle, ensure that
there is no-one between the vehicle and the trailer. increased braking distance.
R The vehicle/trailer combination will be more
If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehi-
cle correctly, the trailer may become detached. susceptible to crosswind gusts.
Once it has been coupled and is roadworthy, the R The vehicle/trailer combination will require
trailer must be in a horizontal position behind the more sensitive steering.
towing vehicle. R The vehicle/trailer combination will have a
Note the following regarding the tongue weight: larger turning radius.
R Make full use of the maximum tongue weight, This may impair the vehicle's driving characteris-
where possible. tics.
R Never fall below a legally prescribed minimum When driving with a vehicle/trailer combination,
tongue weight; the tongue weight must always always adapt your speed to the current road and
be positive. weather conditions. Drive carefully. Keep a su -
R Do not exceed or fall below the permissible cient safe distance.
tongue weights – this must be observed during Comply with the maximum permissible speed of
loading and unloading of the trailer. 50 mph (80 km/h) or 62 mph (100 km/h), even in
Do not exceed the following values: countries in which higher speeds are permitted for
vehicle/trailer combinations.
R Permitted braked or unbraked towing capacity
Attach only an approved trailer hitch to your vehi-
The maximum permissible towing capacity for cle. Use only a ball neck that has been approved
unbraked trailers is 1,653 lbs (750 kg). for your vehicle. Further information about availa-
R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle bility and installation, including that of the trailer
R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle electrics, is available from any quali ed specialist
workshop.
R Permissible gross weight of the trailer
The trailer hitch is one of the most important vehi-
R Permissible gross combination weight
cle parts for road safety. Comply with the instruc-
R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer tions on operation, maintenance and servicing in
the manufacturer's operating instructions.
The relevant permitted values, which must not be
exceeded, can be found in the following places: % Your vehicle's bumpers are not suitable for
installing detachable trailer hitches.
R In your vehicle documents
Do not attach any rented trailer hitches or any
R On the identi cation plate of the trailer hitch
other detachable trailer hitches to the bumpers.
% During trailer operation, remember that start-o gradeability, will decrease with
PARKTRONIC is available only to a limited increasing elevation.
extent, if at all.
% The height of the ball head will change Coupling/uncoupling a trailer
trailer
depending on the vehicle's load. In this case,
use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. Coupling a trailer
trailer
Driving instr
Driving instructions
uctions * NOTE
NOTE Damage to the vehicle battery due
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer to full discharge
combinations depends on the type of trailer.
Before setting o , consult the trailer's vehicle Charging the trailer battery using the power
documents to nd out the maximum permissible supply of the trailer can damage the vehicle
speed. battery.
Your vehicle will behave di erently with a trailer # Do not use the vehicle's power supply to
relative to without a trailer, and will consume more charge the trailer battery.
fuel.
# Shi the selector lever to position j.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you must
select shi range 3, 2 or 1 in good time. # Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
% This also applies if cruise control is switched # Close all the doors.
on. # Position the trailer on a level surface behind
You will thereby make use of the engine's braking the vehicle.
e ect and will not have to brake as o en to control % The ball head height changes depending on
the speed. This will take some of the strain o the the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer
brake system and prevent the brakes from over- with a height-adjustable trailer drawbar.
heating and wearing too quickly. If you need addi-
# Couple up the trailer.
tional braking, depress the brake pedal intermit-
tently rather than continuously. # Establish all electrical and other connections
Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilization to the trailer.

(/ page 141). # Remove objects or devices which prevent the
trailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks.
Driving
Dr iving tips
# Release the trailer's parking brake.
If the trailer sways, remember the following points:
% The vehicle harness has a cable connection to
R Do not accelerate under any circumstances. the brake light indicator lamp.
R Do not countersteer. Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimen-
R If necessary, apply the brakes. sions (width and length).
% You can reduce the risk of the trailer swaying Most US states and all Canadian provinces pre-
and rocking by retro tting stabilizer bars or scribe the following points, and you are urgently
trailer stability programs. Further information recommended to comply with these:
is available from an authorized Mercedes-Benz R Safety chains between the towing vehicle and
Center. the trailer. The chains should be routed in a
When you are driving with a trailer, observe the fol- criss-cross pattern under the trailer drawbar.
lowing points: They must be connected to the trailer tow
hitch and not to the bumper or to the vehicle
R Maintain a greater distance than when driving
axle.
without a trailer.
Leave su cient slack in the chains. This allows
R Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently
for even sharp cornering.
rst of all so that the trailer closes up behind
R A separate brake system is required for certain
your vehicle. Then, increase the braking force
rapidly. trailers.
R The values given for start-o gradeability refer R A safety feature is required for braked trailers.
to sea level. When driving in mountainous Determine the speci c requirements according
areas, note that engine output, and therefore to the relevant laws.
If the trailer becomes detached from the tow- driving experience and become accustomed to
ing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the the new handling characteristics.
trailer brakes and can thus reduce the danger. R Before driving, check the following:
Uncoupling a trailer
trailer - that the trailer tow hitch and ball coupling
are secure
& WARNING Risk of being crushed and - that the safety switch for braked trailers is
becoming trapped when uncoupling a functioning correctly
trailer
- that the safety chains are secure and
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged undamaged
inertia-activated brake, your hand may become - that the electrical connections are secure
trapped between the vehicle and the trailer
drawbar. - that the lights are functioning correctly
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged - the wheels for damage and correct tire
overrun brake. pressure (/ page 208)
R Adjust the outside mirrors so that you have a
Do not uncouple a trailer with an overrun brake in clear view of the rear section of the trailer.
a state of overrun. Otherwise, the rebound of the R If the trailer is equipped with an individual brak-
overrun brake can damage your vehicle. ing system, check before each journey whether
# Shi the selector lever to position j. the brakes are functioning correctly.
# Apply the vehicle's parking brake. R If the trailer has electronically controlled
# Close all the doors. brakes, pull away carefully with the vehicle/
# Apply the trailer's parking brake.
trailer combination. Brake manually using the
brake controller and check whether the brakes
# Secure the trailer against rolling away with a are functioning correctly.
wheel chock or similar object. R Secure the load on the trailer in line with the
# Remove the trailer cables and safety chains. requirements and rules for load-securing meth-
# Uncouple the trailer. ods.
R When driving with a trailer, check at regular
Infor
Information
mation about to
towing
wing a trailer
trailer intervals that the load is secure and that the
lights and brakes are functioning correctly.
Operating a trailer is subject to many statutory R Bear in mind that the handling characteristics
regulations such as speed restrictions. are more unstable when towing a trailer than
Many states also require an auxiliary separate when driving without a trailer. Avoid sudden
functional braking system when towing a weight steering movements.
that exceeds a certain limit. For your safety, it is R The vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
recommended to use a separate functional braking accelerates more slowly, has a reduced climb-
system on any towed vehicle. ing ability and an increased braking distance. It
Make sure that your trailer combination meets is more susceptible to side winds and requires
local regulations. This not only applies to your careful steering.
place of residence, but also to your destination. R If possible, do not brake suddenly, but rather
Information on this can be obtained from the moderately at rst so that the trailer can acti-
police and local authorities. vate its brakes. Then increase the pressure on
Comply with the following when driving with a the brake pedal.
trailer: R If the automatic transmission shi s between
R Practice cornering, stopping and backing up in gears on uphill or downhill gradients, restrict
a tra c-free location. In this way, you will gain the shi range. Select shi range 4, 3, 2 or 1.
A lower gear and reduced speed decrease the
risk of engine damage.
R When driving on a downhill gradient, shi to a
lower gear to use the engine's braking e ect.
Avoid constant braking, as this could cause the missible trailer load. If either the vehicle or the
vehicle brakes and possibly also the trailer trailer is fully laden, the permitted gross vehicle
brakes to overheat. weight or the permitted trailer load values are
R If the coolant temperature increases signi - reduced accordingly. In this case, you may only
cantly when the air-conditioning system is partially load the trailer or the vehicle.
switched on, switch the air-conditioning sys- The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated by
tem o . adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of the
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by switch- load and equipment. If the trailer is equipped with
ing the air ow and the temperature of the a separate braking system, then the maximum
heater or air conditioning to the maximum gross trailer weight is 5000 lbs (2268 kg) or
level. Open the windows if necessary. 7500 lbs (3402 kg).
R When overtaking, pay particular attention to The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-
the increased overtaking distance of your vehi- weight on the ball head is 500 lbs (227 kg) or
cle/trailer combination. 750 lbs (340 kg). However, the actual trailer draw-
bar noseweight must not exceed the value given on
Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer combi- the trailer tow hitch or trailer identi cation plates.
nation you will require a longer stretch of road Where the values di er, the lowest value always
before switching back to the original lane. applies.
The permissible gross weight for vehicle-trailer
Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer loads and trailer
trailer drawbar
drawbar nose- combinations (GCWR) is calculated by adding the
weights gross weight of the trailer to the gross vehicle
weight including a driver's weight of approximately
Weight infor
information
mation 150 lbs (68 kg). The maximum permissible gross
combination weight is vehicle-speci c and equip-
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
ment-dependent. When driving with a trailer, you
unbraked trailer with excessively high should not exceed the maximum permitted permis-
gross weight sible gross weight for vehicle-trailer combinations
If you tow a trailer without a separate func- (GCWR).
tional braking system and a gross trailer weight The permissible values, which must not be excee-
(GTW) of more than 1635 lbs (750 kg), then ded, can be found in your vehicle documents and
the vehicle brake system may overheat. on the identi cation plates of the trailer tow hitch,
This increases the braking distance and the the trailer and the vehicle. The values approved by
brake system may even fail. the manufacturer can also be found in the "Techni-
# Always use a trailer with a separate func- cal data" section. Where the values di er, the low-
tional braking system when towing a est value always applies.
trailer with a gross trailer weight (GTW) of Loading tthe
he trailer
trailer
more than 1635 lbs (750 kg). Use a drawbar noseweight that is as close as pos-
sible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do
* NOTE Damage to the drive train, transmis- not undershoot the minimum permissible nose-
sion or trailer tow hitch due to excess weight. Otherwise, the trailer may become
gross combination weight detached.
The permissible gross combination weight is R Distribute the load over the vehicle and the
exceeded. trailer so as not to exceed either the maximum
permissible values for the gross vehicle weight
The drive train, the transmission or the trailer rating (GVWR) and gross trailer weight (GTW),
tow hitch may be damaged. the permissible gross weight for vehicle-trailer
# Comply with the permissible gross com- combinations (GCWR), nor the maximum per-
bination weight. missible gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and
trailer drawbar noseweight (TWR) of your vehi-
For vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle cle.
weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible R Add the rear axle load to the trailer drawbar
gross combination weight is less than the sum of
noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball
the permissible gross vehicle weight plus the per-
head (TWR). This will ensure that you do not
exceed the permissible gross axle weight rating

(GAWR).
R Add the vehicle load to the trailer drawbar
noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball
head (TWR). This will ensure that you do not
exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR).
Checking the
Checking the vehicle
vehicle and trailer
trailer weight
weight
R Make sure that the weights of the towing vehi-
cle and the trailer comply with the maximum
permissible values. Have the car/trailer combi-
nation weighed on a calibrated weighing
machine. The car/trailer combination compri-
ses the towing vehicle including driver, passen-
gers and load as well as the laden trailer.
R Check the maximum permissible gross axle
weight rating of the front and rear axles
(GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the
permissible gross weight for vehicle-trailer
combinations (GCWR) and the trailer drawbar
noseweight rating (TWR).
Trailer power
power supply
Incorrect cabling of the connector plug may inter-
fere with other electronic systems in the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that you
have the cabling of the connector plug carried out
at a quali ed specialist workshop.
You can connect accessories up to a maximum of
240 W to the permanent power supply. Do not
charge a trailer battery using the power supply.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a range of elec-
trical equipment for trailer operation. Depending
on your trailer, you may need an adapter for the
electrical connection between the trailer and your
vehicle.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped with a
permanent power supply at the factory.
The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer
socket pin 4.
Note that the trailer's permanent power supply is
not switched o when the vehicle's on-board elec-
trical system voltage is low. This could completely
discharge your vehicle's starter battery.
Further information on the electrical equipment
currently installed on your vehicle and on installing
the trailer electrics can be obtained at a quali ed
specialist workshop.
164 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Over
Overvie
view
w of Instr
Instrument
ument Display
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an

instrument display malfunction
If the Instrument Display has failed or malfunc-
tioned, you may not recognize function restric-
tions applying to safety relevant systems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have the vehicle checked immediately at

If you are uncertain regarding the operational

safety of your vehicle, park the vehicle safely as Example: Instrument Display with black and white
soon as possible. Inform a quali ed specialist display
workshop. 1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps display
Instr
Ins trument
ument Display
3 Tachometer
4 Multifunction display
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively

high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
# Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
When the red marking in tachometer 3 is

reached (overspeed range), the fuel supply will be
interrupted in order to protect the engine.
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening

the hood
Example: Instrument Display with color display
1 Speedometer If you open the hood when the engine has
2 Multifunction display overheated or during a re in the engine com-
partment, you could come into contact with
3 Tachometer
hot gases or other escaping operating uids.
4 Coolant temperature display
# Before opening the hood, allow the
5 Fuel level and fuel ller ap location indicator
engine to cool down.
In normal driving mode, coolant temperature dis- # In the event of a re in the engine com-
play 4 is permitted to rise to the red marking. partment, keep the hood closed and call
the re service.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 165
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the buttons
buttons on the
the steer
steering
ing wheel
1 % Back button, le (on-board computer)

2 Touch Control, le (on-board computer)
3 Main menu button (on-board computer)
4 Button group for cruise control or Active Dis- Variant 1
tance Assist DISTRONIC The on-board computer is operated using le -hand
Touch Control 2 and back button on the le 1.
Operating
Oper ating the
the on-board
on-board comput
computer
er
& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor-

mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munications equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you could be distracted from
the tra c situation. This could also cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
tra c situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle in accordance with the tra c
conditions and operate the equipment
with the vehicle stationary. Variant 2
The on-board computer is operated using the fol-
You must observe the legal requirements for the lowing buttons:
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer. R Back button on the le 1
R Le -hand Touch Control 2
Operating the
Operating the on-board
on-board comput
computer
er (vehicles
(vehicles with
steer
st eering
ing wheel buttons)
buttons) R Main menu button on the le 3
% The displays of the on-board computer appear The following menus are available depending on
on the multifunction display (/ page 166). the equipment:
When the function is switched on, di erent signal R Service
tones will provide feedback while the on-board R Radio
computer is being operated. These include a signal
tone when the end of a list is reached or when a R Settings
list is being scrolled through. # To call up the
the main menu: press main menu
button on the le 3 or press back button on
the le 1 repeatedly, or press and hold this
once.
% Vehicles without
without Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist 3 Time
DISTRONIC:
DISTR ONIC: you can call up the main menu of 4 Transmission position
the on-board computer with the ò button.
# To browse
browse thr
through
ough the
the menu bar:
bar: swipe to the Further displays on the multifunction display:
le or right on the le -hand Touch Control 2. Z Gearshi recommendation
# To call up a menu or con rm a selection: press é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC switched
the le -hand Touch Control 2. o
# To browse
browse thr
through
ough displays
displays or lists
lists in the
the ¯ Cruise control (/ page 144)
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on le - ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
hand Touch Control 2. (/ page 147)
# To call up a submenu or con rm a selection: z DSR (/ page 145)
press the le -hand Touch Control 2.
ë HOLD function (/ page 150)
# To exit
exit a submenu: press the back button on
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 85)
the le 1.
Û ATTENTION ASSIST switched o
If you are in a submenu and press and hold back 1 A door is not fully closed.
button on the le 1, the main menu will appear.
è Rear window wiper switched on
(/ page 94)
Overvie
Over view
w of what is shown
shown on the
the multifunction + LOW RANGE active (/ page 122)
display
SOS Emergency call system not active
NOT
READY
h Active Lane Keeping Assist switched o
(/ page 156)
æ Active Brake Assist switched o
(/ page 142)
e Blind Spot Assist switched o
(/ page 153)
Instrument Display with color display

1 Outside temperature Setting
Setting the
the instr
instrument
ument lighting
2 Transmission position
3 Time
4 Display section
Instrument Display with black and white dis-

play
1 Outside temperature
2 Display section
# Turn brightness control 1 upwards or down-

wards.
The lighting on the instrument display and the
control elements in the vehicle interior will be
adjusted.
% In vehicles without brightness control 1, the
instrument lighting can be adjusted via the on-
board computer (/ page 169).
Menus and submenus

Calling up functions on the
the service
ser vice menu
On-board computer:
4 Service
# Select and con rm the required function. Instrument Display with color display
The following functions are available on the service The following displays are available on the assis-
menu: tant display:
R Announcements: message memory R Assistant display
(/ page 254) R Attention level (/ page 152)
R DEF: display the DEF ll level (/ page 130)
# Switch between the displays and con rm the
R Tires:
selected display.
- Check the tire pressure with the tire pres- The following status displays are available on the
sure monitoring system (/ page 215) assistant display:
- Restart the tire pressure monitoring system R Û ATTENTION ASSIST switched o
(/ page 216)
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC speci ed
R ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date
distance (/ page 147)
(/ page 178)
R Engine Oil Level: measure the engine oil level
Calling up the
the assistant
assistant display
On-board computer:
4 Assistance
# Select the desired display and con rm.
Instrument Display with black and white display

The following status displays are available on the
assistant display:
R Lane markings solid and thick: Lane Keeping
Assist on and ready to issue warnings
R Lane markings solid and thin: Lane Keeping
Assist on and not ready to issue warnings
R Lane markings dotted: Lane Keeping Assist o
R Û ATTENTION ASSIST o
R d Blind Spot Assist on and ready to issue
warnings (lines of the radio waves solid)
R c Blind Spot Assist on and not ready to

issue warnings (lines of the radio waves bro-
ken)
R e Blind Spot Assist o
Calling up displays
displays on the
the trip
trip menu
On-board computer:
4 Trip
# Select the desired display and con rm. Instrument Display with black and white display
The following displays are available on the trip Standard display (example)
menu: 1 Trip distance
R Standard display 2 Total distance
R Range and current fuel consumption
With certain engines, a recuperation display is
also shown. If only a small amount of fuel is le
in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled will
appear instead of the approximate range.
R ECO display (/ page 115)
R Trip computer:
- From Start
- From Reset
R Digital speedometer
Trip computer (example)
1 Distance covered (from start/from reset)
2 Driving time (from start/from reset)
3 Average speed (from start/from reset)
4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from
reset)

Standard display (example)
1 Trip distance
2 Total distance

Trip computer (example)
1 Distance covered (from start/from reset)
2 Driving time (from start/from reset)
3 Average speed (from start/from reset)
4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from
reset)
Rese
esetting
tting values
values on the
the on-board
on-board comput
computer
er trip
trip R Vehicle
menu - Setting Winter Tire Limit
On-board computer: - Switching Acoustic Locking on and o
4 Trip - Switching Automatic Locking on and o
% The spelling of the displayed main menu may - Switching Standby Mode on and o
di er. Therefore, pay attention to the menu - Switching Rain Sensor on and o
overview for the instrument display
(/ page 165). R Setting Heating
R Display and Operation
You can reset the values of the following functions:
R Trip Odometer: - Selecting LanguageLANGUAGE_FLAG
- Reset Trip Odometer? - Setting Time
R Trip computer: - Setting Date
- From Start - Setting Units
- From Reset - Switching permanent Display additive
(DEF) Level on and o
R ECO display
- Operation: Switching Acoustic Op. Feed-
# Select the function for which the value is to be back on and o and setting Touch Control
reset and con rm this selection. Sensitivity
# Con rm the Reset Values? prompt with Yes. R Factory Settings: Restoring settings
# Select an entry and con rm the selection.

Calling up settings
settings on the
the on-board
on-board comput
computer
er
# Make the necessary changes.
On-board computer:
4 Settings
The following entries can be set on the Settings

menu:
R DriveAssist
- Switching ESP (ESP) on and o
- Switching Act. Lane Keeping Assist on and
o
- Switching Lane Keeping Assist on and o
- Switching Active Brake Assist on and o
- Switching Blind Spot Assist on and o
- Switching Attention Assist on and o
R Light
- Switching Daytime Driving Lights on and
o
- Switching Illumination period inside on
and o
- Switching Illumination period outside on
and o
- Switching Locator Lighting on and o
- Setting Instr. Clust. Light.
170 Mercedes me
Mercedes
Mer cedes me calls R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Making a call via the
the over
overhead
head control
control panel R Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transmitted during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz customer center (/ page 170).
Transf
ansferr
erred
ed data
data during
during a Mercedes
Mercedes me call
When you make a service call via Mercedes me,
data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice
and smooth service.
The following requirements must be met for data
transmission:
R The necessary data transmission technology is
supported by the mobile network provider.
R A su cient mobile phone connection quality is
1 Breakdown assistance call button F provided.
2 The cover for the G button (SOS button)
Multi-stage transmission depends on the following
3 G button (SOS button)
factors:
Making a breakdo
breakdown
wn assistance
assistance call R Reason for the initiation of the call
# Press button 1. R Available mobile radio transmission technology
Making an emergency
emergency call R Activated Mercedes me connect services
# Brie y press the cover on G button 2 to R Selected service in the voice dialog system
open it. % A request for consent to data transmission is
# Press and hold G button 3 for at least one only made if the corresponding Mercedes me
second. connect service has not been activated.
An emergency call can still be triggered when a Dataa transmission
Dat transmission when Mercedes
Mercedes me connect
breakdown assistance call is active. This has prior- ser vices are
services are not
not activat
activated
ed
ity over all other active calls. If no Mercedes me connect services are activated
and the data protection query has been con rmed,
Infor
Information
mation about the
the Mercedes
Mercedes me call using the
the the following data will be transferred:
breakdown
breakdo wn call button
button R Vehicle identi cation number
A call to the Mercedes-Benz customer center using R Time of the call
the breakdown assistance button has been initi- R Reason for the initiation of the call
ated via the overhead control panel (/ page 170).
R Con rmation of the data protection prompt
You can reach the desired service via the voice
R Vehicle country code
dialog system:
R Call number of the communication platform
R Accident and Breakdown Management
installed in the vehicle
R Mercedes-Benz customer center for general
information about the vehicle
You can nd information on the following topics:
R Activation of Mercedes me connect
R Operating the vehicle
Mercedes me 171
If the Accident and Breakdown Management selec- Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
tion has been made via the voice dialog system to nd out whether these functions are availa-
and no service has been activated, but the data ble in your country.
protection query has been con rmed, the following Mercedes me connect and Mercedes PRO connect
data can be additionally requested from the vehicle consist of a variety of services.
by the Mercedes-Benz customer center: Using the multimedia system or the overhead con-
R Current vehicle location trol panel, you can use the following services, for
example:
If the data protection request has been declined,
the following data will be transferred to enable tar- R Accident and Breakdown Management (break-
geted advice and a smooth service: down button)
R Reason for the initiation of the call R Emergency Call System (automatic emergency
call and SOS button)
R Rejection of the data protection prompt
R Vehicle country code Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown
Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency
R Call number of the communication platform
call center are available to you around the clock.
installed in the vehicle
You will nd the breakdown call button and the
Data transmission
Data transmission when Mercedes
Mercedes me connect SOS button in the vehicle's overhead control panel
services
ser vices are
are activat
activated
ed (/ page 170).
Only in the second step, only for the respective Please note that Mercedes me connect and
activated services, further case-speci c data is Mercedes PRO connect are Mercedes-Benz serv-
transmitted in order to enable an optimal service. ices. In emergencies, call the national emergency
An overview of the transmitted data can be found services rst using the standard national emer-
in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me gency service phone numbers. In emergencies,
connect services. These can be obtained in the you can also use the Emergency Call System
Mercedes me portal: https:// (/ page 192).
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me
Data processing
Data processing connect and Mercedes PRO connect as well as
The data transmitted as part of the call will be other services. You can obtain these in the
deleted from the transmitting systems once the Mercedes me/PRO Portal: https://
call has been completed, provided they are not me.secure.mercedes-benz.com or https://
used for other activated Mercedes me connect www.mercedes.pro
services. Further information about Mercedes me connect
The case-related data will be processed and stored services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por-
in the Mercedes-Benz customer center and, if nec- tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
essary for case processing, forwarded to the
service partners commissioned by the Mercedes- Infor
Information
mation on Mercedes
Mercedes me connect Accident
Accident
Benz customer center. Please refer to the data pro- and Breakdo
Breakdown
wn Management
Management
tection information on the Mercedes me website
at https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded The Accident and Breakdown Management can,
message immediately a er the call to the amongst others, include the following functions:
Mercedes-Benz customer center has been set up. R Supplement to the Emergency Call System
% The recorded message is not available in every (/ page 192)
country. If necessary, the contact person at the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for-
wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci-
Mercedes
Mer cedes me connect dent and Breakdown Management. However,
Infor
Information
mation about Mercedes
Mercedes me/PRO
me/PRO connect call forwarding is not possible in all countries.
% Mercedes me connect and Mercedes PRO R Breakdown assistance on location by a techni-
connect or individual Mercedes me connect cian and/or towing away of the vehicle to the
services are not available in every country. nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
172 Mercedes me
You may be charged for these services.

Further information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por-
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Transmitt
ansmitteded data
data with
with the
the Mercedes
Mercedes me connect
call services
ser vices
The data transferred during the Mercedes me con-
nect call depends on:
R The reason for the initiation of the call
R The service selected in the voice dialog system
R The activated Mercedes me connect services
You can nd out which data is transferred during

the services in the currently valid Mercedes me
connect terms of use and the data protection
information for Mercedes me connect. You can
nd these in your Mercedes me user account.
Transporting 173
Notes on loading guidelines # Always make sure that objects do not

protrude from storage spaces, parcel
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of poisoning from exhaust nets or storage nets.
gases # Close the lockable storage spaces before
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust starting a journey.
gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust # Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the rear- hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too
end door is open when the engine is running, large in the cargo compartment.
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch o the engine before & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe
opening the rear-end door. and tailpipe trims
# Never drive with the rear-end door open.
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact with
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured these parts of the vehicle, you could burn your-
objects in the vehicle self.
When objects are unsecured or inadequately # Always be particularly careful around the
secured, they can slip, tip over or be thrown tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super-
about, striking vehicle occupants. vise children especially closely in this
area.
This also applies to:
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
R Luggage or loads
touching them.
R Seats which have been removed and are
being transported in the vehicle in an If you are using a roof luggage rack, please note
exceptional case the maximum roof load and the maximum load
capacity of the roof luggage rack (/ page 253).
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of braking maneuvers or abrupt changes Camera-based driving systems and the sensor
in direction. functions of the inside rearview mirror may be
# Always stow objects in such a way that impaired if you are transporting a load on the roof
they cannot be tossed about. and it protrudes more than 16 in (40 cm) over the
front edge of the roof. Therefore, make sure that
# Before traveling, secure objects, luggage
the load does not overhang by more than 16 in
or load to prevent them slipping or tip- (40 cm).
ping over.
The handling characteristics of your vehicle are
# When a seat is removed, keep it prefera-
dependent on the load distribution.
bly outside the vehicle.
Therefore, please observe the following notes
when loading:
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
R When transporting a load, never exceed the
being stowed incorrectly
permissible gross mass or the gross axle
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed weight rating for the vehicle (including occu-
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around pants). The values are speci ed on the vehicle
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup identi cation plate on the B-pillar.
holders, open storage spaces and mobile R The load must not protrude above the upper
phone receptacles cannot always retain all
edge of the seat backrests.
objects within.
R If possible, always transport the load in the
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
cargo compartment.
event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in
direction. R Fasten the load to the tie-down eyes and dis-
# Always store objects such that they can-
tribute the load evenly among them.
not be thrown around in such situations. R Use tie-down eyes and fastening components
which are suitable for the weight and size of
the load.
174 Transporting
Load distr
distribution
ibution Securing
Secur ing loads
Notes on load securing
securing
* NO
NOTE
TE Risk of damage to the oor covering
Excessive point loading on the cargo compart- & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
ment oor or on the load area can negatively to incorrect use of the lashing straps
a ect the driving characteristics and could The following can occur:
damage the oor covering.
R The tie-down eyes may detach or the lash-
# Vehicles with
with rear
rear-wheel
-wheel driv
drive:
e: distribute ing strap may tear if the permissible load is
the load uniformly. When doing so, exceeded
ensure that the overall center of gravity
of the load is always as low and close to R The load cannot be restrained
the center as possible and between the The load can slip, tip over or be ung about,
axles near the rear axle. striking vehicle occupants.
# Vehicles with
with all-wheel driv
drive:
e: distribute # Always tension the lashing straps in the
the load uniformly. When doing so, proper manner and only between the
ensure that the overall center of gravity described tie-down eyes.
of the load is always as low and close to
# Always use lashing straps designed spe-
the center as possible and between the
axles. ci cally for the loads.
For Cargo Vans, buses and Passenger Vans:

% Observe the information relating to the maxi-
mum loading capacity of the individual cargo
R Always transport loads in the cargo compart- tie-down point. If you combine various cargo
ment. tie-down points to secure a load, always take
R Always place the load against the seat backr- the maximum loading capacity of the weakest
ests of the rear bench seat. cargo tie-down point into account. During
R Move large and heavy loads as far towards the maximum full-stop braking, forces may act
front of the vehicle as possible in the direction which can multiply the weight of the load.
of travel against the rear bench seat. Store Always use several cargo tie-down points to
loads ush with the rear bench seat. distribute the load. Spread the load evenly
between the cargo tie-down points or tie-down
R Always additionally secure the load with suita-
eyes.
ble load securing aids or tie downs.
Observe the Operating Instructions or the lashing
R The load must not protrude above the upper
strap manufacturer's instructions for the operation
edge of the seat backrests. of the lashing strap.
R Transport loads behind seats that are not
Observe the information relating to the maximum
occupied. loading capacity of the cargo tie-down points
R If the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert (/ page 252).
the seat belts crosswise into the seat belt As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring the
buckle of the opposite seat belt.
following:
R The load is secured against slipping, tipping,
rolling or falling o .
Take usual tra c conditions as well as swerv-
ing or full brake application and bad roads into
account.
R The applicable requirements and guidelines
relating to load-securing practices are met.
If this is not the case, this may constitute a
punishable o ense, depending on local legisla-
tion and any ensuing consequences. Observe
country-speci c laws.
Transporting 175
Make sure that the load is secure before every Over

Overvie
view
w of cargo
cargo tie-down
tie-down points
journey and at regular intervals during a long jour-
ney. Adjust the load securing as necessary. Infor-
mation on how to secure loads correctly can be
obtained from the manufacturers of the load
securing aids or tie downs for load securing, for
example.
When securing loads, observe the following:
R Fill spaces between the load and the cargo
compartment walls or wheel wells. For this pur-
pose, use rigid load securing aids, such as
chocks, wooden xings or padding.
R Attach secured and stabilized loads in all direc-
tions.
Use the cargo tie-down points or tie-down eyes
and the loading rails in the cargo compart-
ment. Cargo tie-down points (example: Cargo Van
Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods, lock without loading rails)
rods or lashing nets and lashing straps, which 1 Tie-down eyes
have been tested in accordance with current
standards (e.g. DIN EN). Always use the cargo Secure loose loads with an approved lashing net or
tie-down points closest to the load and pad a tarp.
sharp edges. Always fasten the lashing net or tarp to all available
Loads, and heavy loads in particular, should cargo tie-down points. Make sure that the fasten-
preferably be secured using the tie-down eyes. ing hooks are secured against accidental opening.
If your vehicle is equipped with loading rails in the
% You can obtain tie downs tested in accordance cargo compartment oor, you can place lashing
with current standards (e.g. DIN EN) from any rods directly in front of and behind the load. The
specialist company or from a quali ed special- lashing rods directly absorb the potential shi ing
ist workshop. forces.
Notes on the
the partition
par tition Securing loads on the cargo compartment oor by
Without a partition, vehicles that are approved as lashing them down is only recommended for light-
commercial vehicles (vehicle category N1, N2) do weight loads. Lay anti-slip mats under the load to
not ful ll standard ISO 27956, which describes the assist in securing it.
equipment for properly securing a load in delivery
vehicles. If the vehicle is used to transport goods,
Installing
removing
ving tie-down
tie-down eyes
eyes
retro tting the partition is strongly recommended,
as properly securing the load in vehicles without a # To install:
install: slide the tie-down eye through a
partition will always be a complex operation. recess in the loading rail close to the load until
% Nothing may be stowed in the area between the locking mechanism engages in the recess.
the rear side of the seats and the partition. % When you pull the locking mechanism up and
out of the recess, the tie-down eye is able to
move within the loading rail. Make sure that
the locking mechanism is always engaged in a
recess.
# Check the tie-down eye for rm seating.
# To remov
remove: e: pull the locking mechanism up and
pull the tie-down eye towards the locking
mechanism and out of the loading rail through
a recess.
176 Transporting
Carrier
Carr ier syst
systems
ems Observe the following points for installing roof lug-
gage racks:
Infor
Information
mation on the
the roof
roof luggag
luggagee rack
rack
R Tighten the screws of the roof luggage rack to
& WARNING Risk of injury if maximum roof a torque of 6.0 lb- (8 Nm) – 7.4 lb- (10 Nm)
load is exceeded in the designated sliding blocks.
R The tightened screws should not touch the
The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driv-
rails.
ing characteristics as well as the steering and
braking characteristics will change. R Ensure that the sliding blocks are not located
in the areas around the plastic caps.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv-
ing characteristics, as well as the steering and R The sliding blocks must have the right cross-
braking characteristics, will be greatly section.
impaired. R The insides of the mounting rails must be free
# Always comply with the maximum roof of dirt.
load and adjust your driving style. R Re-tighten the screws uniformly a er around
300 miles (500 km).
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only
observe the maximum permissible clear- roof luggage racks that have been tested and
ance height approved for Mercedes-Benz. These help to pre-
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- vent vehicle damage.
mum permitted clearance height, the roof and Have mounting rails retro tted only at a quali ed
other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. specialist workshop. Otherwise, you could damage
# Observe the signposted clearance the vehicle.
height. If your vehicle is equipped with mounting rails on
# If the vehicle height is greater than the the roof, you can install a roof luggage rack on the
clearance height, do not enter. roof. Special fasteners (sliding blocks) are available
# Note the changed vehicle height with
as accessories for this purpose.
roof mountings. These fasteners are available from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Placing a load on the

the wheel arch
Comply with the important safety notes under
"Notes on loading" (/ page 173).
1 Mounting rails
Information about the maximum roof load can be
found in the "Technical data" section
(/ page 253).
# Place the objects on wheel arch 2 and lash
them using tie-down eyes 1(/ page 175).
Transporting 177
% A wheel arch may be subjected to a load of

330 lb (150 kg).
178 Maintenance and care
ASSYSTT PLUS
ASSYS PLUS service
ser vice interv
interval
al display Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate
Function of the
the ASSYST
ASSYST PLUS
PLUS service
ser vice interv
interval
al dis-
play stops
R Mainly short-distance driving
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
instrument display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next service on poor road surfaces
due date. R When the engine is o en le idling for long
You can hide this service message by using the periods
back button on the le -hand side of the steering R Operation in particularly dusty conditions
wheel. and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
You can obtain further information concerning the used
servicing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist In these or similar operating conditions, have the
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter, for
ter. example, changed more frequently. If the vehicle is
subjected to increased loads, check the tires more
Displaying
Displaying the
the service
ser vice due date frequently. You can obtain further information at a
On-board computer:
4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS
Batter
Batteryy disconnection periods
periods
The next service due date is displayed.
# To exit
exit the
the display:
display: press the back button on The ASSYS
ASSYSTT PLUS
PLUS service
ser vice interv
interval
al display
display can only
the le -hand side of the steering wheel. calculatee the
calculat the service
ser vice due date
date when the
the batter
batteryy is
connected.
connect ed.
Bear in mind the following related topic:
# Note down the service due date displayed on
R Operating the on-board com-
the Instrument Display before disconnecting
puter(/ page 165) the battery (/ page 178).
Carrying
Carr ying out maintenance
maintenance wor
workk regularly
regularly
Engine compar
compartment
tment
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to Opening and closing the
the hood
observe service due dates
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine
Service work which is not carried out at the
hood is unlatched while driving
right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle. An unlocked engine hood may open up when
# Always observe the prescribed service the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
intervals. # Never unlatch the engine hood while
# Always have the prescribed service work driving.

carried out at a quali ed specialist work- # Before every trip, ensure that the engine
shop. hood is latched.

Special service
ser vice req
requir
uirements
ements the hood
The prescribed service interval is based on normal If you open the hood when the engine has
vehicle use. Perform maintenance work more o en overheated or during a re in the engine com-
than prescribed if the vehicle is operated under partment, you could come into contact with
arduous operating conditions or increased loads. hot gases or other escaping operating uids.
Maintenance and care 179
# In the event of a re in the engine com- If you have to carry out any work in the engine
partment, keep the hood closed and call compartment, touch only the following compo-
the re service. nents:
R Hood
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving R Engine oil ller opening cap
parts R Washer uid reservoir cap
Certain components in the engine compart- R Coolant expansion reservoir cap
ment may continue to move or suddenly move
again even a er the ignition has been switched & WARNING Risk of injury from using the
o , e.g. the cooler fan. windshield wipers while the engine hood is
Make sure of the following before performing open
tasks in the engine compartment: When the engine hood is open and the wind-
# Switch the ignition o . shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
# Never touch the danger zone surrounding trapped by the wiper linkage.
moving component parts, e.g. the rota- # Always switch o the windshield wipers
tion area of the fan. and ignition before opening the engine
# Remove jewelry and watches. hood.
# Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching

component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem work under high voltage. If you touch com-
ponent parts which are under voltage, you
could receive an electric shock.
# Never touch component parts of the igni-
tion system or the fuel injection system
when the ignition is switched on.
Live components of the fuel injection system

include the injectors, for example.
Live components of the ignition system include the
# Park the vehicle in a safe location and on a
following, for example: level surface if possible.
R Ignition coils
R Spark plug connectors
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
R Diagnostic socket
& WARNING Risk of injury when the hood is
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- opened
nent parts in the engine compartment When you open the hood, it may suddenly drop
into the end position.
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radi- There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
ator and parts of the exhaust system. hood's range of movement.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only # Before releasing the hood, ensure that
touch component parts described in the the support is rmly seated in the holder.
following. # Open the hood only when there is no-one
in the hood's range of movement.
# To open: pull handle 1 to release the hood.

# Reach into the gap and push the hood catch # To close: li the hood slightly.
handle upwards. # Move support 1 to the bracket on the hood
# Open the hood and hold it up. and apply light pressure to engage it.
# Lower the hood and let it drop from a height of
approximately 0.5 (15 cm).
# If it is still possible to li the hood a little, open
the hood again and let it drop from a height of
approximately 0.7 (20 cm) until it engages
correctly.
Engine oil
Checking
Checking the
the engine oil level
level with
with the
the on-board
computer
comput er
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle is level during the measuring proc-
ess.
R The hood is closed.
# Take support 1 from the bracket on the hood
R Depending on the driving pro le, the oil level
and pull it downwards.
can be displayed only a er a driving time of up
# Insert the support into the bracket below 2. to 30 minutes and only when the ignition is
switched on.
& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
On-board computer:
material in the engine compartment or the
4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level
exhaust system
Cloths or other ammable materials le in the You will see one of the
the follo
following
wing messages
messages on the
the
engine compartment by mistake could ignite multifunction display:
upon coming into contact with hot sections of # Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement of
the engine or exhaust system. the oil level not yet possible. Repeat the query
# Ensure that there are no ammable a er driving for a maximum of 30 minutes.
external materials in the engine compart- # Engine Oil Level OK and the bar showing the
ment or on the exhaust system a er oil level on the multifunction display is green
maintenance work has been conducted. and lies between "MIN" and "MAX": the oil level
is OK.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Engine Oil Level Drive until the engine is
when opening and closing the engine hood warm.: warm up the engine to operating tem-
When opening or closing the engine hood, it perature.
may suddenly drop into the end position. # Engine Oil Level Correct Measurement Only
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the if Vehicle Is on Level Ground: park the vehicle
engine hood's range of movement. on a level surface.
# Only open or close the engine hood # Engine Oil Level Add 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar
when there are no persons in the engine showing the oil level on the multifunction dis-
hood's range of movement. play is orange and lies below "MIN": add
1.0 US qt (1 l ) of engine oil.
* NOTE Damage to the hood # Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar showing
the oil level on the multifunction display is
Pushing the hood closed with your hands could orange and lies above "MAX": drain o excess
damage it. engine oil.
# To close the hood, let it drop from the Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
speci ed height.
# For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On:

switch on the ignition in order to check the
engine oil level.
# Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: the sen-
sor is defective or not connected. Consult a
# Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavaila-
ble: close the hood.
% Vehicles with
with cold oil level
level displays:
displays: the oil
level is automatically displayed on the multi-
function display a er the vehicle has been
non-operational for an extended period. If it is
not possible to measure the engine oil level, a
message to that e ect will appear.
% The result of the electronic measurement Oil dipstick (example, if purchased)
always takes precedence over other measure-
ments. # Remove oil dipstick 1 and wipe it o .
Checking
Checking the
the engine oil level
level with
with an oil dipstick
dipstick
# Slowly insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick
guide tube as far as it will go and pull it out
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- a er three seconds.
R Oil level OK: the oil level is between the
nent parts in the engine compartment
MIN and the MAX mark.
Certain component parts in the engine com- R Oil level too low: the oil level is at the MIN
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
mark or below.
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only
# If the oil level is too low, add approx. 1.0 US qt
(1 liter) engine oil.
touch component parts described in the
following. # If the oil level is too high, drain o excess
engine oil.
% For oil level measurement, Mercedes-Benz pri- Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
oritizes electronic measurement while driving Adding engine oil
with the display in the instrument cluster. If
there is a discrepancy between electronic oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
level measurement and dipstick method, the nent parts in the engine compartment
result of the electronic oil level measurement
is given precedence. Certain component parts in the engine com-
% Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
level measurement. For this reason, the oil
pipe is closed with a plug. The oil dipstick can # Allow the engine to cool down and only
be purchased from your authorized Service touch component parts described in the
Partner as special equipment. following.
Requirements:
R The vehicle is on a level surface.
R The engine is turned o and the ignition key is
kept out of range.
R The engine is at operating temperature.
R Wait ve minutes a er a short drive for the
engine oil to drip o .
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the # Follow the instructions on the service
hood interval display for changing the engine
oil.
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or when there is a re in the engine
compartment, the following situations may * NOTE Damage caused by re lling too
occur: much engine oil
R You could come into contact with hot Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
gases. the catalytic converter.
R You could come into contact with other # Have excess engine oil removed at a
hot, escaping operating uids. quali ed specialist workshop.

# Before opening the hood, allow the over-
heated engine to cool down.
# In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the hood closed and call
the re service.
If you have to carry out any work in the engine

compartment, touch only the following compo-
nents:
R Hood
R Engine oil ller opening cap
R Washer uid reservoir cap
R Coolant expansion reservoir cap
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from OM651 engine

engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
may ignite.
# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the ller opening.
# Allow the engine to cool o and thor-
oughly clean the engine oil from compo-
nent parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage due to incorrect oil

lter, incorrect oil or additive
# Do not use engine oil or an oil lter with
speci cations deviating from those
required for the prescribed service inter- OM642 engine
vals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends using original or

tested replacement and service parts.
# Do not change the engine oil or oil lter
in order to set change intervals longer
than those prescribed.
# Do not use any additive.

# In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the hood closed and call
the re service.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool-

ant
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-
ticularly when the engine is warm. If you open
the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant
spraying out.
# Let the engine cool down before opening
the cap.
M274 engine # When opening the cap, wear protective
# Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. gloves and safety glasses.
# Add engine oil. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it

Allow the engine and the engine cooling system to
engages. cool down before checking the coolant level or
# Check the oil level again. Check using the on- re lling coolant.
board computer (/ page 180), check with the
oil dipstick (/ page 181). * NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant
If coolant gets on painted surfaces, the paint-
Checking
Checking the
the coolant level
level work can be damaged.
# Add coolant carefully.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
# Remove spilled coolant.
Certain components in the engine compart- Checking
Checking the
the coolant level
level
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radi-
ator and parts of the exhaust system.
following.

nents:
R Hood
R Coolant expansion reservoir cap

the hood Example: coolant expansion reservoir
If you open the hood when the engine has # Park the vehicle on an even surface.
overheated or during a re in the engine com- # Open the hood (/ page 178).
# Slowly turn coolant expansion reservoir cap # Before opening the hood, allow the
1 half a turn counter-clockwise and allow engine to cool down.
excess pressure to escape. # In the event of a re in the engine com-
# Turn coolant expansion reservoir cap 1 fur- partment, keep the hood closed and call
ther and remove it. the re service.
# Check the coolant level.
There is enough coolant in coolant expansion & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from
reservoir if the coolant reaches the MAX mark. windshield washer concentrate
Adding coolant Windshield washer concentrate is highly am-
# Re ll the coolant to the MAX mark on the cool- mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
ant expansion reservoir. with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
Only use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz to # Make sure that no windshield washer
avoid damaging the engine cooling system. concentrate spills out next to the ller
# Replace coolant expansion reservoir cap 1 opening.
and tighten in a clockwise direction.
# Start the engine. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due
# A er approximately ve minutes, switch o the
to unsuitable windshield washer uid
engine again and allow it to cool down. Unsuitable windshield washer uid may dam-
# Check the coolant level again and add coolant age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.
if necessary. # Only use windshield washer uids that
% Observe additional coolant information are also suitable for use on plastic surfa-
(/ page 246). ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
Adding washer
washer uid
Filling up the
the windshield washer
washer system
system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-

ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radi-
ator and parts of the exhaust system.
following.

nents:
R Hood
R Engine oil ller opening cap Washer uid reservoir (example)
R Washer uid reservoir cap # Pre-mix the washer uid in the correct mixing
R Coolant expansion reservoir cap ratio in a container.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface and secure
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening it against rolling away (/ page 134).
the hood # Open the hood (/ page 178).
If you open the hood when the engine has # Pull the cap of the washer uid container 1
overheated or during a re in the engine com- upwards by the tab.
hot gases or other escaping operating uids. # Pour in the pre-mixed washer uid.
# Press cap 1 onto the ller opening until it

audibly engages.
# Close the hood (/ page 178).
% Mix the washer uid with windshield washer

concentrate all year round. Comply with the
information about windshield washer uid in
the technical data (/ page 246).
% Comply with the further information about
windshield washer uid (/ page 246)
Cleaning the
the wat
water
er drain
drain valv
valvee of the
the air intak
intakee box
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving

parts
# Open the hood (/ page 178).
ment may continue to move or suddenly move # Remove dirt from water drain valve 2 of air
again even a er the ignition has been switched intake box 1.
o , e.g. the cooler fan.
Make sure of the following before performing Draining
Dr aining the
the fuel lt
lter
er
tasks in the engine compartment:
# Switch the ignition o . & WARNING Danger of re and explosion
# Never touch the danger zone surrounding due to fuel
moving component parts, e.g. the rota- Fuels are highly ammable.
tion area of the fan. # It is essential to avoid re, open ames,
# Remove jewelry and watches. smoking and creating sparks.
# Keep items of clothing and hair away # Before lling up, switch o the engine,
from moving parts. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- & WARNING Risk of re and explosion due to
nent parts in the engine compartment fuel
Certain components in the engine compart- Fuels are highly ammable. There is a risk of
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radi- re and explosion due to contact with hot com-
ator and parts of the exhaust system. ponent parts.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only # Allow the engine and the exhaust system
touch component parts described in the to cool down.
following.
* NOTE Engine damage due to delayed
If you have to carry out any work in the engine drainage of the fuel lter
nents: Vehicles with
with a diesel engine: delayed drainage
of the fuel lter can lead to engine damage.
R Hood
If the ! indicator lamp lights up, drain the
fuel lter immediately.
R Coolant expansion reservoir cap + ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
pollution due to disposal in a non-environ-
mentally responsible manner
# Dispose of the water/fuel mixture in an
# Dispose of the collected water/fuel mixture in

an environmentally responsible manner, e.g. at
# Check that drain screw 1 has been closed.
If the engine is running while drain screw 1 is
open, you will lose fuel through drain hose 2.
# Close the hood (/ page 178).
# ! The indicator
indicator lamp
lamp does not
not go out a er
draining:
dr aining: drain the fuel lter again.
# ! The indicator
indicator lamp
lamp does not
not go out a er
the second draining:
draining: consult a quali ed spe-
cialist workshop.
fuel lter drained at a quali ed specialist work-
Engine OM642
shop.
Cleaning and care

Notes on washing
washing the
the vehicle
vehicle in an automatic
automatic car
wash
& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced

braking e ect a er washing the vehicle
The braking e ect is reduced a er washing the
vehicle.
# A er the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the
tra c conditions until the braking e ect
has been fully restored.
Engine OM651 rear wheel drive
* NOTE Risk of damage to the paintwork
# Park the vehicle in a safe location and secure it and plastic components
against rolling away.
If you wash your vehicle in Touchless Auto-
# Switch o the auxiliary heating (/ page 103). matic Car Wash systems that use special
# Switch o the engine. cleaning agents, the cleaning agents used can
# Open the hood (/ page 178). damage the paintwork or plastic components
of the vehicle.
# Place a suitable collecting pan beneath drain
# Do not wash the vehicle in Touchless
hose 2.
Automatic Car Wash systems that use
# Switch on the ignition. special cleaning agents.
# Open drain screw 1 until the water/fuel mix-
ture emerges from drain hose 2. Make sure that the automatic car wash is suitable
# Close drain screw 1 as soon as around 0.2 qt for the size of the vehicle.
(0.2 liter) of the water/fuel mixture has been Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car
collected. wash, fold in the outside mirrors and remove any
A er 30 seconds, the electrical fuel pump additional antennas. Otherwise, the outside mir-
automatically stops the discharge of the rors, antennas or the vehicle itself could be dam-
water/fuel mixture. aged.
# A er draining, switch o the ignition.
Make sure any additional antennas are re-installed Washing the

the vehicle
vehicle by
by hand
and that the outside mirrors are fully folded out
again when you leave the automatic car wash. Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- specially designated wash bays. In this case, make
lowing before using an automatic car wash: sure that a specially designated wash bay is used
R the side windows and the sliding window are for washing by hand.
completely closed. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
R the blower for ventilation and heating is # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water and a
switched o . so car sponge. When doing so, do not expose
R the windshield wiper switch is in position g. the vehicle to direct sunlight.
# Carefully spray the vehicle with water and dry
If the vehicle is very dirty, wash o excess dirt
before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car o with a leather cloth. Be careful not to point
wash. the water jet directly towards the air inlet
grilles. The blower should be switched o while
% Removing the wax from the windshield and the doing so.
wiper rubbers a er washing the vehicle, will # Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
help avoid smearing and reduce wiper noise.
work.
Notes on use of a power

power washer
washer At the onset of winter, remove all traces of road
salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using
power washers with round-spray nozzles Notes on care
care of paint and matte
matte nish
The water jet can cause externally invisible
damage. * NOTE Paintwork damage and corrosion
due to inadequate care
Components damaged in this way may unex-
pectedly fail. Failure to promptly and thoroughly remove dirt
# Do not use a power washer with round- from bird droppings or other residue could
spray nozzles. result in paintwork damage and corrosion at a
later date.
# Have damaged tires or chassis parts
# Clean dirt o paint and matte nish thor-
replaced immediately.
oughly and as soon as possible.
Never use a power washer in the vehicle interior.
The pressurized water created by the power Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid
washer and the associated spray could cause con- paintwork damage.
siderable damage to the vehicle. Paint
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
lowing when using a power washer: then wash o .
R Maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in R Bird droppings: soak with water and then wash
(30 cm) to the vehicle when using 25° at- o .
spray nozzles and concentrated-power jets or R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
27.6 in (70 cm) when using round-spray noz- rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum
zles and observe the information in the equip- ether or lighter uid.
ment manufacturer's operating instructions. R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a moist
R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer cloth and clean water.
directly at sensitive parts such as tires, gaps, R Tar stains: use tar remover.
electrical components, batteries, light bulbs
and ventilation slits. R Wax: use silicone remover.
R Maintain a minimum distance of 19.7 in R Do not a x stickers, lms or similar.

(50 cm) for a rear view camera. R Remove dirt as soon as possible.
Matte nish
Matte # Always switch o the windshield wipers
R Only use care products approved for and the ignition before cleaning the wind-
Mercedes-Benz. shield or wiper blades.
R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels.
R Use only automatic car washes that meet cur- & WARNING Risk of burning from the tailpipe
rent technological standards. or tailpipe trim
R Do not use a wash program that ends with a The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very
hot wax treatment in automatic car washes. hot. If you come into contact with these car
R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing parts, you could burn yourself.
products, or gloss preservers, e.g. wax. # Always be particularly careful when in the
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a vicinity of the tailpipe and tailpipe trims
quali ed specialist workshop. and supervise children very closely when
in this area.
# Before any contact, allow the car parts to
Notes on the
the care
care of vehicle
vehicle parts
par ts
cool down.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-
shield wipers are switched on while the
windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion while
you are cleaning the windshield or wiper
blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
Observee the
Observ the follo
following
wing notes:
notes:
Notes on cleaning and care Preventing

Preventing damage
damage to
to the
the vehicle
vehicle
Wheels/rims
Wheels/r ims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaner. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to
remove brake dust. Otherwise, wheel
bolts and brake components may be
damaged.
R To avoid corrosion of brake discs and
brakepads, drive for a few minutes
a er cleaning before parking the vehi-
cle. The brake discs and brakepads
warm up and dry out.
Windows Clean windows inside and outside with a Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or sol-
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent rec- vent-based cleaning agents to clean the
ommended for Mercedes-Benz . inside of windows.
Wiper blades Carefully clean the folded-away wiper Do not clean the wiper blades too o en.
blades with a damp cloth.
Exterior
Exter ior light- Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and Only use cleaning agents or cloths suita-
ing mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. ble for plastic lenses.
Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear When using a power washer, keep a mini-
bumper and in the radiator grill with a so mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
cloth and car shampoo.
Rear view
view Use clean water and a so cloth to clean Do not use a power washer.
camera and the camera lens.
360° Camera
Camera

Preventing damage
damage to
to the
the vehicle
vehicle
Trailer
Tr ailer hitch R Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. Do not clean the ball neck with a power
with a wire brush. washer or solvent.
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
R A er cleaning, lightly oil or grease the
ball head.
R Observe the notes on care in the
trailer hitch manufacturer's operating
instructions.
Sliding door R Remove foreign objects from the Do not oil or grease the contact plates
vicinity of the contact plates and con- and the contact pins.
tact pins of the sliding door.
R Clean the contact plates and contact
pins with a mild cleaning agent and a
so cloth.
Steps R Clean the electrically operated steps Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant.
and their housing with a power
washer.
R A er cleaning, spray the lateral guides
with silicone spray.
R Clean the steps in the bumper with a
power washer.
Aluminum R Brush down the aluminum dropsides Do not use abrasive cleaning agents to
dropsides
dr opsides with water and a neutral or mild alka- clean the dropsides.
line cleaning agent.
Notes on inter
interior
ior care * NOTE Damage to property due to incor-
rect leather care
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts
breaking o a er the use of solvent-based The steering wheel, seat covers and other
care products parts of the vehicle interior can be made of
leather.
Care and cleaning products containing sol-
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to Leather becomes brittle and can crack if it is
become porous. When the airbags are incorrectly cared for or cleaned.
deployed, plastic parts may break away. # If it gets dirty, thoroughly wipe it with a
# Do not use any care or cleaning products damp cloth (water or mild soapy water)
containing solvents to clean the cockpit. or use leather care agents or cleaners
that have been recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Then wipe
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from it over again with a dry cloth.
bleached seat belts
# Do not use a micro ber cloth for clean-
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely ing.
weaken them. # Do not soak the leather.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear # Do not use solvent-based cleaning
or fail in an accident. agents such as tar remover or wheel
# Never bleach or dye seat belts. cleaner; neither should you use polishes
or waxes.
Observee the
Observ the follo
following
wing notes:
notes:

Preventing damage
damage to
to the
the vehicle
vehicle
Seat belts Clean with lukewarm soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R Do not dry the seat belt by heating
above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sun-
light.
Instrument
Instr ument Clean the surfaces carefully with a micro- Do not use any other agents.
cluster
clust er surfa-
surfa- ber cloth and acrylic glass care product.
ces
Display Clean the surface carefully with a micro- R Switch o the display and let it cool
ber cloth and LC/TFT display care prod- down.
uct. R Do not use any other agents.
Plastic
Plas tic trim
trim R Clean with a damp micro ber cloth. R Do not a x stickers, lms or similar.
R For heavy soiling: Use care product R Do not allow to come into contact
recommended for Mercedes-Benz. with cosmetics, insect repellent and
sun creams.
Real wood
wood R Clean with a micro ber cloth. Do not use solvent-based cleaning
and trim
trim ele- R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a agents, polishes or waxes.
ments damp cloth and soapy water.
R For heavy soiling: Use care product
recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Headliner Clean with a so brush or dry shampoo.
Cloth seat
Cloth Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust Do not use any oil-based cleaning and
cover
coverss and then use a damp micro ber cloth and care products.
a 1% soapsuds solution to clean the entire
seat cover. Do not spot-clean.
Use cleaning and care products recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
Imitation
Imitation Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust Do not use a micro ber cloth.
leather
leather seat and then use a damp cotton cloth and a Do not use any oil-based cleaning and
covers
cov ers 1% soapsuds solution to clean the entire care products.
seat cover. Do not spot-clean.
Use cleaning and care products recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
Steer
eering
ing Clean with a damp cloth.
wheel and
gear or selec-
tor lever
lever
Pedals and Clean with a damp cloth. Do not use any cleaning and care prod-
oor mats ucts.

Preventing damage
damage to
to the
the vehicle
vehicle
Vehicle inte-
inte- Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a power washer.
rior R Allow the vehicle interior to dry com-
pletely a er cleaning.
R Do not allow liquids to penetrate into
gaps or cavities.
Curtains
Curt ains The curtains may only be dry cleaned. Do not wash the curtains.
192 Breakdown assistance
Emergency
Emergency Emergency
Emergency Call System
System
Remo
emoving
ving the
the safety
safety vest
vest Infor
Information
mation on the
the emergency
emergency call system
system
# Remove the safety vest from the storage com- USA
US A only: Your vehicle is equipped with the Emer-
partment in the driver's door. gency Call System ("eCall"). This feature can help
% Safety vests can also be stored in the storage save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no
compartments of the rear doors and the co- way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911.
driver door. eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone
coverage is available from the wireless service pro-
viders. Insu cient network coverage from the
wireless service providers may result in an emer-
gency call not being transmitted.
eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz
vehicle. In order to function as intended, the sys-
tem relies on the transmission of data detailed in
the Transmitted Data section that follows
(/ page 193). To disable eCall, a customer must
visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service depart-
ment to deactivate the vehicle's communication
1 Maximum number of washes
module.
2 Maximum wash temperature
Deactivation
Deactiv ation of this
this module prevents
prevents the
the activa-
activa-
3 Do not bleach
tion of any
any and all Mercedes
Mercedes me connect services.
ser vices.
4 Do not iron A er the deactivation
deactivation of eCall, automatic
automatic emer-
5 Do not tumble dry gency call and manual emergency
emergency call will not
not be
6 Do not dry-clean available.
av ailable.
7 This is a class 2 vest The ignition must be switched on before an auto-
matic emergency call can be made.
The safety vest only ful lls the legally required
standards if it is the correct size and is completely % eCall is activated at the factory.
closed. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Replace the safety vest if: Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the
event ownership of the vehicle is transferred
R Damaged or if the re ex strips are dirty
to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall
R The maximum permitted number of washes is will remain deactivated unless the new owner
exceeded visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership
R The safety vest's uorescence has faded to reactivate the system.
Remo
emoving
ving the
the rs
rst-aid
t-aid kit (so sided) Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the Emergency
Emergency Call System
System
The rst-aid kit (so sided) is located in the stow- eCall can help to reduce the time between an acci-
age compartment in the front passenger door. dent and the arrival of emergency services at the
# Remove rst-aid (so sided) kit from the stow- site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site
age compartment. in places that are di cult to access. However,
even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does
not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does
Remo
emoving
ving the
the war
warning
ning lamp not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident.
The warning lamp is located in the stowage com- An emergency call can be made automatically
partment in the front-passenger door. (/ page 193) or manually (/ page 193). Only
# Remove the warning lamp from the stowage
make emergency calls if you or others are in need
of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the
compartment.
event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Breakdown assistance 193
Trigg
igger
ering
ing an automatic
automatic emergency
emergency call connection is established with the emergency
call center operator.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The starter battery is su ciently charged.
Transmitt
ansmitted
ed data
data with
with the
the emergency
emergency call system
system
Data transmitted by the eCall includes but is not
If restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency
limited to:
Tensioning Devices have been activated a er an
accident, eCall may automatically initiate an emer- R Vehicle's GPS position data
gency call. R GPS position data on the route
When the emergency call is made: (a few hundred meters before the incident)
R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes- R Direction of travel
Benz emergency call center. R Vehicle identi cation number
R A message with accident data is transmitted to R Vehicle drive type
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. R Estimated number of people in the vehicle
The SOS button in the overhead control panel R Whether the emergency call was initiated man-
ashes until the emergency call is nished. ually or automatically
It is not possible to immediately end an automatic R Time of the accident
emergency call.
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any
If no connection can be made to the emergency questions about the collection, use and sharing of
services: the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's
# Dial the local emergency number on your Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC.
mobile phone. For Canada, please contact MBC’s Customer
If an emergency call has been initiated: Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100.
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c Customer requests for covered information should
conditions permit you to do so until a voice be submitted via the same channels.
connection is established with the emergency For accident clari cation purposes, the following
call center operator. measures can be taken up to an hour a er the
R Based on the call, the operator decides emergency call has been initiated:
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams R The current vehicle position can be determined
and/or the police to the accident site.
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance
can be established
is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Trigg
igger
ering
ing a manual emergency
emergency call Flat tire
# To use the
the SOS button
button in the
the over
overhead
head control
control Notes on at tir
tires
es
panel: press the SOS button at least one sec-
ond long. & WARNING Risk of accident due to a at
tire
When the emergency call is made:
A at tire strongly impairs the vehicle's driving
R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
characteristics, as well as its steering and
Benz emergency call center.
braking characteristics.
R A message with accident data is transmitted to
# Do not drive with a at tire.
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
# Replace the at tire with the spare wheel.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can
Alternatively, consult a quali ed special-
transmit the vehicle position data to one of the
ist workshop.
emergency call center.
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
In the event of a at tire, the following options are Install the existing or newly supplied stop
available depending on your vehicle's equipment: plugs.
R You can make a breakdown assistance call Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
using the breakdown assistance call button in R Make sure that the detachable parts are con-
the overhead control panel . nected in the same way as before.
R Change the wheel (/ page 226).
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries that have been tested
Battery
Battery and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
These batteries provide increased impact protec-
Notes on the
the start
starter
er battery
battery tion to prevent vehicle occupants from su ering
acid burns should the battery be damaged in an
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work accident.
carried out incorrectly on the battery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec-
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This trostatic charge
can restrict functions relevant for safety sys- Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explo-
tems and impair the operating safety of your sive gas mixture in the battery.
vehicle. # To discharge any electrostatic charge
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- that may have built up, touch the metal
lowing situations in particular: vehicle body before handling the battery.
R When braking
The highly ammable gas mixture is created while
R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
the battery is charging and when jump-starting.
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from
# In the event of a short circuit or a similar the battery acid
incident, contact a quali ed specialist Battery acid is caustic.
workshop immediately.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
# Do not drive on. clothing.
# Always have work on the battery carried # Do not lean over the battery.
out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Do not inhale battery gases.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 139) # Keep children away from the battery.
# Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-

R Further information on ESP®(/ page 140)
oughly with plenty of clean water and
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the seek medical attention immediately.
starter battery replaced at a quali ed specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIR ONMENTAL
AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
If you want to replace the battery yourself, observe teries
the following information:
R Only replace a faulty battery with a battery
which ful lls the vehicle's speci c require-
ments. Batteries contain pollutants. It is
R Carry over detachable parts such as the vent illegal to dispose of them with the household
hose or terminal cover from the battery which rubbish.
is to be replaced. #
R Make sure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to its original opening on the battery
side. Dispose of batteries in an
Take discharged batteries to a quali ed * NOTE Damage to the battery from over-
specialist workshop or to a collection voltage
point for used batteries.
When charging using a battery charger without
Consult a quali ed specialist workshop to connect a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the
the battery. on-board electronics may be damaged.
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
Observe the safety notes and protective measures
when handling batteries. mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Risk of explosion
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydrogen
gas igniting
There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting
Fire, open ames and smoking are pro- when charging the battery if there is a short
hibited when handling the battery. circuit or sparks start to form.
Avoid creating sparks. # Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. into contact with vehicle parts.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes and # Never place metal objects or tools on a
clothing. Wear suitable protective battery.
clothing, in particular gloves, an apron
# The described order of the battery
and a safety mask. Immediately rinse
electrolyte acid splashes o with clean clamps must be observed when connect-
water. If necessary, seek medical ing and disconnecting the battery.
advice. # When giving starting assistance, always
Wear eye protection. make sure that you only connect battery
terminals with identical polarity.
# During starting assistance, you must
observe the described order for connect-
Keep children at a safe distance. ing and disconnecting the jumper cable.
# Do not connect or disconnect the battery
clamps while the engine is running.
Observe this Operator's Manual. & WARNING Risk of explosion during charg-
ing process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting assis-
tance, the battery may release an explosive
If you do not use the vehicle for a long period or gas mixture.
drive short distances regularly: # Avoid re, open ames, creating sparks
R Connect the battery to a charger recommen- and smoking.
ded for Mercedes-Benz # Make sure there is su cient ventilation.
R Consult a quali ed specialist workshop to dis-
# Do not lean over a battery.
connect the battery
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen
Star
arting
ting assistance
assistance and char
charging
ging the
the start
starter
er bat- battery
tery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera-
# Always use the jump-start connection in the tures slightly above or below freezing point.
engine compartment for starting assistance
During starting assistance or battery charging,
and when charging the battery.
battery gas can be released.
# Always allow a battery to thaw before Observe the additional following points during
charging it or performing starting assis- starting assistance:
tance. R Starting assistance may only be provided using
batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
If the warning/indicator lamps do not light up in R The vehicles must not touch each other
the instrument display around or below freezing
point, it is very likely that the discharged battery R Vehicles with
with a gasoline
gasoline engine: only perform
has frozen. starting assistance when the engine and
exhaust system are cold
In this case, observe the following points:
R Do not give the vehicle starting assistance or
# Vehicles with
with a batter
batteryy main switch:
switch: check
charge the battery whether the battery main switch is inserted
(/ page 117).
R The service life of a battery that has been
thawed may be reduced drastically # Secure the vehicle using the parking brake.
R The starting behavior may deteriorate, particu- # Vehicles with
with automatic
larly at low temperatures transmission to position j.
R It is recommended that you have a thawed bat- # Vehicles with
with manual transmission:
transmission: shi to
tery checked at a quali ed specialist workshop neutral.
# Switch o the ignition and all electrical con-
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or sumers.
extended attempts to start the engine # Open the hood (/ page 178).
Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
# Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
When jump-starting and charging the batteries,

observe the following points:
R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charging
cables with a su cient cross-section and insu-
lated terminal clamps
R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jumper cables/charging cables
are connected to the battery/jump-start con-
nection point % Right-hand driv
drivee vehicle:
vehicle: the jump-start con-
R The jumper cables/charging cables must not nection may be on the opposite side.
come into contact with any parts which may # Remove the cover from the POSITIVE terminal
move when the engine is running of the donor battery.
R Make sure that neither you nor the battery is # First connect a red POSITIVE terminal clamp
electrostatically charged 1 of the starting assistance/charging cable
R Avoid re and open ames to the POSITIVE terminal of the donor battery.
R Do not lean over a battery # With second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2
R When char
charging:
ging: only use a battery charger that of the starting assistance/charging cable, slide
has been tested and approved by Mercedes- the red protective cap on jump-start connec-
Benz and read the operating instructions for tion 3 back with a clockwise turn.
your charger before charging the batteries # Attach second red POSITIVE terminal clamp
2 to the POSITIVE terminal of jump-start con-
nection 3.
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: start the engine of # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
the donor vehicle and let it run at idle speed. so that they cannot get into the driver's
# First, connect a black NEGATIVE terminal footwell.
clamp 4 of the starting assistance/charging # Ensure oor mats and carpets cannot
cable to the NEGATIVE terminal of the donor slip and provide su cient room for the
battery. pedals.
# Connect the second black NEGATIVE terminal # Do not lay multiple oor mats or carpets
clamp 5 of the starting assistance/charging on top of one another.
cable to ground point 6 on your own vehicle
(bare metal part in the engine compartment).
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: start the engine on
your own vehicle.
# When char
charging:
ging: start the charging process.
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: let the engine run
for a few minutes.
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: before disconnect-
ing the jumper cable, switch on an electrical
consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear
window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is

complete:
# To remove the clamps of the starting assis-
tance/charging cable in reverse order: rst # Switch o all electrical consumers.
remove second black NEGATIVE terminal
clamp 5 from ground point 6 in the engine
# To remov
remove:
e: unscrew screws 3 and remove
compartment, then black NEGATIVE terminal trim 2.
clamp 4 from the donor battery. Then remove # Remove oor covering 1.
second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 from # To install:
install: insert oor covering 1 and align it
the POSITIVE terminal of jump-start connec- at the base of the driver's seat and at the door
tion 3, followed by red POSITIVE terminal sill.
clamp 1 on the donor battery. # Put trim 2 in place and screw screws 3
The red protective cap springs back to its initial
back in.
position when second red POSITIVE terminal
clamp 2 is disconnected from jump-start
connection 3. Disconnecting the
the start
starter
er battery
battery
You can obtain further information at a quali ed * NOTE Damage to electrical assemblies
Electrical assemblies could be damaged if the
starter battery is disconnected while the
Installing/remo
Installing/r emoving
ving the
the oor cov
cover
ering
ing (vehicles
(vehicles engine is running.
withh rear
wit rear wheel driv
drive)
e)
# Switch o the engine. Then, release the
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects battery clamps of the starter battery.
in the driver's footwell # Always disconnect the starter battery in
the battery case in the le footwell rst.
Otherwise, electrical assemblies, e.g. the
alternator, could be damaged.
of the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle's electronics

If the starter battery is not disconnected as
described below, the vehicle's electronics may
be damaged.
# Always disconnect the starter battery as
described in the following sequence.
Never reverse the terminal clamps. The
vehicle's electronics system may other-
wise be damaged.
# First loosen and remove the NEGATIVE termi-

nal clamp on the battery so that the clamp is
no longer in contact with the terminal.
# Remove the clamp cover of the POSITIVE ter-
minal.
# Loosen the POSITIVE terminal clamp and fold it
up to the side, together with the prefuse box.
Remo
emoving/inst
ving/installing
alling the
the start
starter
er battery
battery
Vehicles with rear wheel drive Vehicles with

with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: remo
removing
ving the
the
start
st arter
er battery
battery
% If the vehicle is expected to be parked up or
out of use for longer than four weeks, observe
the information on parking up the vehicle
(/ page 138).
# Vehicles with
with a batter
switch: remove
the main switch of the battery (/ page 118).
# Vehicles without
without a batter
switch: switch
o all electrical consumers.
# Switch o the engine and the power supply.
# Remove the oor covering (/ page 197).
# Disconnect the starter battery (/ page 197).
# Remove screws 1 and slide battery cover 2
in the direction of the arrow.
# Remove breather hose 1 with the connector
The screws must protrude over the larger bracket from the connection on the degassing
recesses. cover.
# Remove battery cover 2 upwards.
# Pull out and remove screws 2 of bracket 3 If you want to replace the starter battery yourself,
upwards. observe the following notes:
# Slide the starter battery from its anchorage in R Always replace a defective starter battery with
the direction of travel. a starter battery which meets the speci c
# Fold the bars of the starter battery upwards requirements of the vehicle.
and remove the starter battery from the bat- R Carry over detachable parts such as the vent
tery box. hose, elbow tting or terminal cover from the
starter battery to be replaced.
Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: installing
installing the
the start
starter
er
R Make sure that the vent hose is always con-
battery
battery
nected to its original opening on the battery
# When reconnecting the starter battery,
side.
observe the safety measures and protection
notes (/ page 195). Install the existing or newly supplied stop
plugs.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
R Make sure that the detachable parts are con-
nected in the same way as before.
Disconnecting the
the auxiliary
auxiliar y batter
batteryy in the
the engine
compartment
compar tment
* NOTE Damage to electrical assemblies

Electrical assemblies could be damaged if the
# Insert the starter battery into the battery box. starter battery is disconnected while the
# Fold down the bars of the starter battery. engine is running.
# Slide the starter battery into its anchorage in # Switch o the engine. Then, release the
the opposite direction to the direction of travel. battery clamps of the starter battery.
# Insert bracket 3. # Always disconnect the starter battery in
# Tighten screws 2 on bracket 3 which holds the battery case in the le footwell rst.
the battery in place. Otherwise, electrical assemblies, e.g. the
alternator, could be damaged.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle's electronics

Incorrectly disconnecting the auxiliary battery
can cause damage to the vehicle's electronics.
# Always disconnect the auxiliary battery
as described in the following sequence.
Do not reverse the battery terminals
under any circumstances.
# Attach breather hose 1 with the connector

bracket to the connection of the degassing
cover.
# Reconnect the starter battery (/ page 197).
starter battery replaced at a quali ed specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
# Remove the positive terminal clamp cover.

# Loosen and remove the positive terminal
clamp.
Towing or tow-st
tow -star
arting
ting
Over
Overvie
view
w of permissible
permissible towing
towing methods
methods
In the event of a breakdown, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you have the vehicle transported
instead of towed.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing

away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on
# Observe the safety measures and protection towing away.
notices when disconnecting the auxiliary bat-
tery (/ page 195). % Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission and rear-
rear-
# Switch o all electrical consumers. wheel driv
drive:
e: if there is a malfunction, the auto-
matic transmission may be locked in position
# Switch o the engine and the power supply. j.
# Open the hood (/ page 178). If the automatic transmission cannot be shif-
# First loosen and remove the negative terminal ted to position i, transport the vehicle
clamp on the auxiliary battery so that the (/ page 202). A towing vehicle with li ing
clamp is no longer in contact with the terminal. equipment is required for vehicle transport.
Per
ermissible
missible towing
towing methods
methods
Both axles on the

Both the Front axle raised
raised Rear axle raised
raised
ground
gr ound
Vehicles with automatic Yes, no further than Yes, no further than Yes, if the steering
transmission and rear- 31 miles (50 km) at 31 miles (50 km) at wheel is xed in the
wheel drive 31 mph (50 km/h) 31 mph (50 km/h) center position with a
steering wheel lock
Vehicles with all-wheel Yes, no further than No No
drive 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)
To tow
tow with
with a raised
raised axle: towing should be per- # Make sure that the battery is connected and
formed by a towing company. charged.
Towing away
away the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with both
both axles on the
the
ground
gr ound
# Observe the notes on permissible towing meth-
ods (/ page 200).
When the battery is discharged, the following situa- the automatic transmission automatically shi s
tions occur: to position j.
R The engine will not start.
# Install the towing eye (/ page 203).
R It is not possible to release or apply the elec-
# Secure the towing device.
tric parking brake.
R Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: the auto- * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec-
matic transmission cannot be shi ed to position of the tow bar
tion i or j. # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.
* NOTE
NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis- % You can also secure the towing device to the
tances trailer hitch.
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing
at excessively high speeds or over long distan- * NOTE Damage and risk of accident when
ces. towing with a tow rope
# A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) There is a risk of an accident if you do not
must not be exceeded. observe safety and protective measures when
# A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
towing using a tow rope.
must not be exceeded. Observe the following points when towing with
a tow rope:
% Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission and rear
rear # Secure the tow rope on the same side on
wheel driv
drive:
e: if there is a malfunction, the auto- both vehicles.
matic transmission may be locked in position # Make sure the tow rope does not exceed
j. the legally prescribed length.
If the automatic transmission cannot be shif-
# Mark the tow rope in the center, e.g. with
ted to position i, transport the vehicle
(/ page 202). A towing vehicle with li ing a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make
equipment is required for vehicle transport. other road users aware that a vehicle is
being towed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to towing # Observe the brake lamps of the towing
away a vehicle that is too heavy vehicle while driving. Always maintain a
distance that ensures the tow rope does
If the vehicle being tow started or towed away
not sag.
is heavier than the permissible gross weight of
# Do not use steel cables or chains to tow
your vehicle, the following situations may arise:
your vehicle. Otherwise, you could dam-
R The towing eye may become detached.
age the vehicle.
R The vehicle/trailer combination may even
tip over. # Deactivate automatic locking (/ page 50).
# Before tow starting or towing away a # Do not activate the HOLD function.
vehicle, check that it does not exceed # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 64).
the permissible gross weight. # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 144).
If a vehicle is towed or tow started, its weight # Vehicles with
with automatic
should not be greater than the permissible gross automatic transmission to i.
mass of the towing vehicle. # Release the parking brake.
# Information on the vehicle's permissible gross
mass can be found on the vehicle identi cation
plate (/ page 237).
transmission: do not
open the driver's or co-driver door. Otherwise,
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limited % Vehicles with

with automatic
transmission and rear
rear
safety-related functions during the towing wheel driv
drive:
e: if there is a malfunction, the auto-
process matic transmission may be locked in position
j.
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon- If the automatic transmission cannot be shif-
ger available in the following situations: ted to position i, transport the vehicle
R The ignition is switched o . (/ page 202). A towing vehicle with li ing
R The brake system or power steering system
equipment is required for vehicle transport.
is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on permissible towing meth-
R The energy supply or the on-board electri-
ods (/ page 200).
cal system is malfunctioning. # The propeller sha s to the drive axles must be
removed if the maximum permissible towing
When your vehicle is then towed away, signi - distance is exceeded.
cantly more e ort may be required to steer
and brake than is normally required.
# Only have the propeller sha s installed or
removed by quali ed, trained personnel.
# Use a tow bar.
# Vehicles with
with automatic
# Make sure that the steering wheel can
automatic transmission to i.
move freely before towing the vehicle
away.
# Release the parking brake.
# Switch o the ignition.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power Loading the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for transport
transport
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may # Observe the notes on permissible towing meth-
be too high and the vehicles could be dam- ods (/ page 200, 202).
aged. # Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to load
# Pull away slowly and smoothly. the vehicle.
# Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission to position i.
Towing a vehicle
vehicle with
with the
the front
front or rear
rear axle raised
raised
% Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: in the
* NOTE Damage when the ignition is event of damage to the electrics, the auto-
switched on matic transmission may be locked in position
If you leave the ignition switched on when tow- j. To shi to position i, provide the on-
ing the vehicle with the front or rear axle board electrical system with power
(/ page 195).
raised, ESP® actuation can damage the brake
system. # Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
# The ignition must be switched o . # Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission to position j.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect removal or # Use the parking brake to secure the vehicle
installation of the propeller sha s against rolling away.
When installing the propeller sha s, they can
# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
be damaged if you do not use new screws.
Always use new screws when installing the
propeller sha s.
Only have the propeller sha s installed or
removed by quali ed, skilled personnel.
% If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle

at the front axle and if the rear axle is dam-
aged, raise the vehicle at the rear axle.
Vehicles with
with all-wheel driv
drive/v
e/vehicles
ehicles with
with auto-
auto- Installing/r
Inst alling/remo
emoving
ving the
the towing
towing eye
matic transmission
transmission
Installing
Inst alling the
the front
front towing
towing eye
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come

to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to

incorrect positioning of the vehicle
# Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehicle.
# Press the top of the cover and remove the
cover.
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to improper
# Screw in towing eye 1 clockwise to the stop
loading and tighten.
An all-wheel drive vehicle may be damaged if it Remo

emoving
ving the
the front
front towing
towing eye
is tilted, pushed or moved while being loaded # Unscrew towing eye 1 counter-clockwise.
using a hydraulic platform. # Insert the cover with the tabs at the top and
# When loading a vehicle with all-wheel push in at the bottom until the cover engages.
drive, the vehicle should only be moved
and positioned by its own power.
# The vehicle and the surface it is posi-
tioned on should no longer be moved
when the key is removed or if the door is
open.
Towing eye
eye stor
storag
agee location
The towing eye is located in the vehicle tool kit in
the front-passenger footwell (/ page 205).
Rear towing eye (vehicles with passenger vehicle

approval)
% Rear towing eye 2 is permanently attached
to the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-

rect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehicle,
the vehicle may be damaged in the process.
# Only use the towing eye to tow away or * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by
tow start the vehicle. moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
Tow star
starting
ting vehicle
vehicle (emergency
(emergency engine star
start)
t) system or cause it to malfunction.
# When the fuse box is open, make sure
Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure
* NOTE
NOTE Damage to the automatic transmis-
sion due to tow starting that the seal of the lid is positioned cor-
rectly on the fuse box.
The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow starting vehicles with If the new fuse which has been inserted also
automatic transmission. blows, have the cause traced and recti ed at a
# Vehicles with automatic transmission quali ed specialist workshop.
must not be tow started. Make sure of the following before replacing a fuse:
R the vehicle is secured such that it does not roll
# Do not tow start vehicles with automatic trans- away
mission.
R all electrical consumers are switched o
R the ignition is switched o
Electrical
Electr ical fuses
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
Notes on electrical
electrical fuses
R fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due (/ page 205)
to overloaded lines R fuse box in the seat base of the driver's seat
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if (/ page 204)

you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
age, the electric line could be overloaded. Opening the
the fuse box
box in the
the seat base of the
the driv-
driv-
This could result in a re. er's seat
# Always replace faulty fuses with speci ed
new fuses containing the correct amper-
age.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems could be
damaged by incorrect fuses.
# Only use fuses which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz and which
have the correct fuse rating.
The electrical fuses in your vehicle switch o

defective circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions will cease
to operate.
# To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of an
on the cover.
equivalent speci cation, which you can determine
by the color and fuse rating. The fuse allocation # Remove the cover.
chart and further information on the electric fuses # To close: press the cover rmly into the seat
and relays can be found in the "Fuse allocation base until fasteners 1 clip in.
chart" supplement.

the fuse box
box in the
the co-driv
co-driver's
er's R A plug-in blade
foo
ootw
twell
ell R A socket wrench
Opening the
the fuse box R Tool for unlocking the lockable DEF ller cap
# Unlocking and removing the stowage compart-

ment cover in the co-driver's footwell Unloc
nlocking
king and remo
removing
ving the
the stor
storag
agee compar
compartment
tment
(/ page 205). cover
cover
Example: vehicle tool kit insert # Remove the rubber mat from the co-driver's
footwell.
# Li the insert at marked positions 1.
# To unlock:
unlock: turn quick-release fastener 1
# Pull the insert out of clips 2. counter-clockwise to position 1.
Closing the
the fuse box # Slightly raise and pull out the cover.
# Slide the insert into clips 2.
Inser ting and locking
Inserting locking the
the cover
cover
# Close the insert by pressing on marked posi- # Slide in the cover and press it downwards.
tions 1. # Press down quick-release fastener 1 until it
# Put on the stowage compartment cover in the engages.
co-driver's footwell and lock it (/ page 205). # To lock:
lock: turn quick-release fastener 1 clock-
wise to position 2.
Vehicle tool
tool kit
Infor
Information
mation on the
the vehicle
vehicle tool
tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is located in the stowage com-
partment in the footwell on the co-driver side
(/ page 205).
The vehicle tool kit contains:
R A towing eye
R A screwdriver with Torx®, Phillips and slotted
heads
The vehicle tool kit may also contain the following,
for example:
R An open-end wrench
R A wheel wrench
R A release tool for the park pawl
Remo
emoving
ving the
the vvehicle
ehicle tool
tool kit
Hydraulic jack 1 is located behind the last bench

seat on the right.
Example: vehicle tool kit insert
The jack has a maximum weight of 16.5 lbs
# Raise the insert at marked points 1. (7.5 kg) depending on the vehicle's equipment.
# Pull the insert out of clips 2. You will nd the maximum load capacity of the jack
stated on the adhesive label attached to the jack.
Stor
oring
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle tool
tool kit If there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed
# Slide the insert into clips 2. specialist workshop.
# Close the insert by pressing on marked points Jack maintenance:
1. R Clean and grease all moving parts a er use.
R Extend and retract the pistons fully every six
months.
Hydraulic
Hydr aulic jack
Infor
Information
mation on the
the hydr
hydraulic
aulic jack
Remo
emoving
ving the
the pump
pump lever
lever rod
rod and the
the jack
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The co-driver door is open.
The hydraulic jack is located in side compartment

1 above the co-driver door step.
Vehicles with
with more
more than
than 18 seats
# To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1
on the cover.
# Remove the cover.
# Pull out the holder completely and place it on

the step.
# Remove jack 2 and the pump lever rod.

# To close: press the cover rmly so that fasten-
ers 1 engage.
Vehicles with
with more
more than
than 18 seats
Req
equir
uirement
ement::
R The right-hand rear-end door is open.
# Open clasps 2 on jack 1, loosen the straps

and remove the jack.
# Open clasp 2 on pump lever rod 3, loosen
the straps and remove the pump lever rod.
# To stor
store:
e: collapse pump lever rod 3 and place
it along with jack 1 in the loosened straps,
and tighten clasps 2 to close.
208 Wheels and tires
Information
Infor mation on noise or unusual driving
driving char
charac-
ac- # For safety reasons, replace the tires
ter
eris
istics
tics before the legally prescribed limit for the
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises minimum tread depth is reached.
and unusual driving characteristics, e.g. pulling to
one side. This may indicate damage to the wheels Conduct the following checks regularly on all
or tires. If you suspect that a tire is defective, wheels, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
reduce your speed. Stop the vehicle as soon as before a long journey or when driving o -road:
possible to check if wheels and tires have been R Check the tire pressure (/ page 210)
damaged or are no longer functioning properly. R Check the valve caps
Hidden tire damage could also be causing the
unusual driving characteristics. If no signs of dam- Valves must be protected from moisture and
age can be detected, have the tires and wheels dirt with valve caps speci cally approved by
checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
R Visually inspect the tread depth and the tire
tread across the whole tire width
Notes on regularl
regularlyy inspecting wheels and tires
tires The minimum tread depth for summer use is
â in (3 mm) and for winter use ã in (4 mm).
& WARNING Risk of injury through damaged
tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss.
# Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires
immediately.
Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for

damage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks, as
well as a er driving o -road or on rough roads.
Damaged wheels can lead to a loss of tire pres- Markings 1 show in which places the bar indica-
sure.
tors (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They
Look out for the following types of damage, for are visible as soon as the tread depth is approx-
example: imately á in (1.6 mm).
R Cuts in the tires
R Punctures in the tires
Infor
Information
mation on driving
driving with
with summer tires
tires
R Tears in the tires
At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) Summer
R Bulges on tires tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
R Deformation or severe corrosion on wheels braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to
M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temper-
& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to atures could cause tears to form, thereby damag-
insu cient tire tread ing the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot
accept responsibility for this type of damage.
Insu cient tire tread will result in reduced tire
grip. Always observe the maximum permissible speed
speci ed for the summer tires you have installed
# Thus, you should regularly check the
(/ page 221).
tread depth and the condition of the
tread across the entire width of all tires. Once you have installed the summer tires:
R Check the tire pressure (/ page 210)
Minimum tread depth for:
R Restart the tire pressure monitor
R Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
(/ page 216)
R M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Wheels and tires 209
Infor
Information
mation on M+S tires
tires # Only install snow chains that have been
At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C), use winter approved by Mercedes-Benz for these
tires or all-season tires that are marked with M+S. tires.
Only winter tires bearing the i snow ake sym- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the that you only use snow chains that have been
best possible grip in wintry road conditions. checked and approved. You can obtain information
Only these tires allow driving safety systems such about snow chains from any quali ed specialist
as ABS and ESP® to also function optimally in win- workshop.
ter. These tires have been developed speci cally
for driving in snow. & WARNING Risk of accident due to snow
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all chains breaking
wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. If you drive too fast with snow chains, they can
Always observe the maximum permissible speed break, injure other persons, and damage the
speci ed for the M+S tires you have installed vehicle.
(/ page 221). # Observe the maximum permissible speed
If you install M+S tires that have a lower maximum for operation with snow chains.
permissible speed than the maximum design
speed of the vehicle, a x an appropriate warning * NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from
sign in the driver's eld of vision. You can obtain mounted snow chains
this at a quali ed specialist workshop.
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels,
Once you have installed the M+S tires, take the fol- the wheel trims can be damaged.
lowing measures: # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
R Check the tire pressure (/ page 210) before mounting snow chains.
R Restart the tire pressure monitor
(/ page 216) Observe the following notes when using snow
chains:
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain
Notes on snow
snow chains
chains wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain infor-
mation on them at a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
rectly installed snow chains
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
Vehicles with
with rear
rear-wheel
-wheel driv
drive:
e: if you have have been speci cally approved for your vehi-
installed snow chains to the front wheels, they cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the
may drag against the vehicle body or chassis same quality standard.
components.
R The snow chains must be retightened a er
# Never install snow chains on the front
driving approximately 0.6 miles (1 km). This is
wheels. the only way to ensure the snow chains are
# Only install snow chains on the rear optimally seated with clearance to adjacent
wheels in pairs. components.
# Vehicles with
with twin tires:
tires: install the snow R Vehicles with
with all-wheel driv
drive:
e: install snow
chains on the outer wheels. chains on the wheels on the rear axle. On vehi-
cles with twin tires, install the snow chains on
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita- the outer wheels. Observe the manufacturer's
ble snow chains installation instructions.
R Use snow chains only when the road surface is
Commercially available snow chains can come completely snow-covered. Remove the snow
loose and damage chassis components or chains as soon as possible when you come to
brake hoses. a road that is not snow-covered.
R Local regulations may restrict the use of snow & WARNING Risk of accident due to too low
chains. Observe the applicable regulations a tire pressure
before installing snow chains.
R Activate all-wheel drive before driving o with
Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat
and burst as a consequence.
snow chains (/ page 121, 122).
R If snow chains are installed, the maximum per-
In addition, they also su er from irregular wear,
which can signi cantly impair the braking prop-
missible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
erties and the handling characteristics.
R Vehicles with
with Par
Parking
king Assist: do not use Park- # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.
ing Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains are
installed.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause:
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away . This R Tire faults as a result of overheating
allows the wheels to spin, achieving an R Impaired handling characteristics
increased driving force.
R Irregular wear
R Increased fuel consumption
Tir
iree pressure
pressure
Notes on tire
tire pressure
pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to too high
a tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - Tires with excessively high pressure can burst.
cient or excessive tire pressure
In addition, they also su er from irregular wear,
Underin ated or overin ated tires pose in par- which can signi cantly impair the braking prop-
ticular the following risks: erties and the handling characteristics.
R The tires can burst. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.
R The tires can wear excessively and/or

unevenly. Excessively high tire pressure can result in:
R The driving characteristics as well as the R Increased braking distance
steering and braking characteristics may R Impaired handling characteristics
be greatly impaired. R Irregular wear
# Comply with the recommended tire pres- R Impaired driving comfort
sures and check the tire pressure of all R Susceptibility to damage
tires, including the spare wheel, regu-
larly: & WARNING Risk of accident due to repea-
R Monthly ted pressure drop in the tires
R When the load changes The wheels, valves or tires could be damaged.
R Before embarking on a longer journey Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires
R If operating conditions change, e.g. o - bursting.
road driving # Examine the tires for foreign objects.
# Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or
the valve has a leak.
Driving with tire pressure that is too high or too low # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
can: contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
R Shorten the service life of the tires
R Cause increased tire damage
R Adversely a ect handling characteristics and
thus driving safety, for example, due to hydro-
planing
You can nd information on recommended tire Notes on trailer

trailer operation
operation
pressures for the vehicle's factory-installed tires The applicable tire pressure for the tires of the rear
on the following labels: axle is always the recommended tire pressure for a
R Tire and Loading Information placard on the full load.
B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 216).
R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the tire
tire pressur
pressuree table
table
ller ap . The tire pressure table can be found on the seat
Observe the maximum tire pressure base or on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
(/ page 221). % The data shown in the images is example data.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not
permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pres-
sure.
+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIR ONMENTAL
AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to insu cient or excessive
tire pressure
Insu cient or excessive tire pressure shortens The tire pressure table shows the recommended
the service life of the tires. tire pressure for the tires installed at the factory on
# Check the tire pressure regularly, but at this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures are
least every 14 days. valid for cold tires and di erent vehicle load condi-
tions.
Vehicles with
with a tire
tire pressur
pressuree monitor:
monitor: you can also If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure,
check the tire pressure using the on-board com- the tire pressure information following is only valid
puter. for those tire sizes.
Only check tire pressure when the tires are cold. If the preceding tire sizes are supplemented by the
Conditions for cold tires: + symbol, the tire pressure information follow-
R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out ing shows alternative tire pressures.
of direct sunlight for at least three hours. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile laden" are de ned in the table for varying weights.
(1.6 km). Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diam-
A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C) eter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R16.
R16 The
increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
(0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when found on the side wall of the tire (/ page 221).
checking the tire pressure of warm tires.
The tire pressures recommended for increased
load/speed in the tire pressure table may a ect
the ride comfort.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita-

ble accessories on tire valves
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss.
# Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps speci cally approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Front axle tire

tire pressur
pressures
es on vehicles
vehicles with
with all-wheel/rear
all-wheel/rear wheel driv
drivee and single tires
tires
Max. front
front axle load 4101 lbs (1860 kg)kg)
Tir
ires/disc
es/disc wheel Vehicle load
Vehicle Max. front
front axle load
4101 lbs (1860 kg)
kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q Fully laden 320 kPa (3.2 bar/46 psi)
Front axle tire

tire pressur
pressures
es on vehicles
vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
tires
Max. front
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. front
front axle load
4409 lbs (2000 kg)
kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q Fully laden 360 kPa (3.6 bar/52 psi) 1)
1)Only valid for vehicles with a long wheelbase

171 in (4350 mm) and a permissible gross mass of
over 7716 lbs (3.5 t).
Rear axle tire

tire pressur
pressures
es on vehicles
vehicles with
with all-wheel/rear
tires
Max. rear
rear axle load 5357 lbs (2430 kg)kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. rear
rear axle load
5357 lbs (2430 kg)
kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q Partially laden 2) 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 2)
2)It is only permissible to use this reduced tire

pressure if it can be guaranteed by weighing the
vehicle that the rear axle load of 4960 lbs
(2250 kg) will not be exceeded. In case of doubt,
in ate to 480 kPa (4.8 bar/70 psi).
Front axle tire

tire pressur
pressures
es for
for vehicles
vehicles with
with all-wheel/rear
drivee and twin tires
tires
Max. front
front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg) kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. front
front axle load
4079 lbs (1850 kg)
kg)
Max. front
front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. front
front axle load
4409 lbs (2000 kg)
kg)
Max. front
kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. front
front axle load
4630 lbs (2100 kg)
kg)
Rear axle tire

tire pressur
pressures
es for
for vehicles
vehicles with
with all-wheel/rear
drivee and twin tires
tires
Max. rear
rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg) kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. rear
rear axle load
up to
to 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
kg)
Max. rear
rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. rear
rear axle load
7716 lbs (3500 kg)
kg)
Max. rear
kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. rear
rear axle load
7937 lbs (3600 kg)
kg)
Front axle tire

tire pressur
pressures
es on vehicles
vehicles with
with Super Single tires
tires
Max. front
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. front
front axle load
4079 lbs (1850 kg)
kg)
225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) Fully laden 340 kPa (3.4 bar/49 psi)
Max. front
kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. front
front axle load
4409 lbs (2000 kg)
kg)
225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) Fully laden 370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi)
Rear axle tire

tire pressur
pressures
es on vehicles
vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
drivee and Super Single tires
tires
Max. rear
rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg)kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. rear
rear axle load
7055 lbs (3200 kg)
kg)
285/65R16C 131R Fully laden 460 kPa (4.6 bar/67 psi)
Max. rear
kg)
Tir
ires/disc
Vehicle Max. rear
rear axle load
7716 lbs (3500 kg)
kg)
285/65R16C 131R Fully laden 520 kPa (5.2 bar/75 psi)
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-

ted subjects:
R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 210)
R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 216)
R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 221)
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the tire
tire pressur
pressuree tables
tables for
for emergency
emergency spare
spare wheels
Tir
ires/emerg
es/emergency
ency spare
spare wheel Air pressure
pressure In combination with
with vehicle
vehicle tires
tires
225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 1) 370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi) 225/75 R16C 121/120R
(122L)
225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 1) 690 kPa (6.9 bar/100 psi) 285/65 R16C 131R
1)Valid to use as an emergency spare wheel on the proper tire in ation pressure for those
Super Single vehicles for a maximum distance of tires.)
100 km (62 mi) and a maximum permissible speed
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
of 55 km/h (34 mph).
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
Tir
iree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
signi cantly under-in ated. Accordingly, when
Function of tire
tire pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor on single tires
tires the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of accident due to incorrect possible, and in ate them to the proper pres-
tire pressure sure. Driving on a signi cantly under-in ated
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
should be checked monthly when cold and tire failure. Under-in ation also reduces fuel
in ated to the in ation pressure recommended e ciency and tire tread life, and may a ect the
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
placard or tire in ation pressure label. (If your note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
vehicle has tires of a di erent size than the proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
in ation pressure label, you should determine even if under-in ation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire System

System limits
pressure telltale. The system may be impaired or may not function in
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a the following situations:
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when R If the tire pressure has been set incorrectly
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
example, by a foreign object penetrating the
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
tire
a malfunction, the telltale will ash for approx-
imately one minute and then remain continu- R If there is a malfunction caused by another
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue radio signal source
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as R If there is a change of tire size
the malfunction exists.
Bear in mind the following related topic:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 210)
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- Checking
Checking the
the tire
tire pressur
pressuree with
with the
the tire
tire pressure
pressure
tions may occur for a variety of reasons, monitoring
monitor ing system
system
including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. R The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer:
The system checks the tire pressure and the tem- 4 Service 5 Tires
perature of the tires installed on the vehicle by
means of a tire pressure sensor. One of the following displays appears:
New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires, are R The current tire pressure and tire temperature
automatically taught-in during the rst journey they of the individual wheels.
are used.
The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear
in the multifunction display (/ page 166).
If there is a substantial loss of tire pressure, a
warning is issued:
R Via display messages (/ page 268)
R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pres-
sure to the recommended cold tire pressure suita- Instrument Display with color display
ble for the operating situation. Set the tire pres- R The current tire pressure for each wheel.
sure for cold tires using a tire pressure gauge.
Note that the correct tire pressure for the current
operating situation must rst be taught-in to the
tire pressure monitoring system.
In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring system
will automatically update the new reference values
a er you have changed the tire pressure. You can,
however, also update the reference values by
restarting the tire pressure monitoring system
manually (/ page 216).
R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a
few minutes: the teach-in process of the sys-
tem is not yet complete. The tire pressures are Make sure to observe the following further related
already being monitored. subject:
# Compare the tire pressure with the recommen- R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 210)
ded tire pressure for the current operating
Radio equipment
equipment approv
approval
al of the
the tire
tire pressure
pressure
condition (/ page 211). Observe the notes on
monitor
monitoring
ing system
system
tire temperature (/ page 210).
% The values displayed in the multifunction dis- Country Radio equipment
approval
al number
play may deviate from those of the tire pres-
sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high Canada IC: 4008C-TSSRE4A
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by Operation is subject to the follow-
a pressure gauge are higher than those shown ing two conditions:
by the on-board computer. In this case, do not
(1) this device may not cause
reduce the tire pressure.
harmful interference, and
Make sure to observe the following further related
(2) this device must accept any
subject: interference received, including
R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 210) interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
Rest
estar
arting
ting the
the tire
tire pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor
Mexico Model: TSSRE4A & TSSSG4G6,
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806
set for the respective operating condition on USA FCC ID: YGOTSSRE4A
each of the wheels (/ page 210).
This device complies with Part 15
R Rest
estar
artt the
the tire
tire pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system in of the FCC Rules. Operation is
the follo
following
wing situations: subject to the following two condi-
- The tire pressure has changed. tions: (1) this device may not
- The wheels or tires have been changed or cause harmful interference, and
newly installed. (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
On-board computer: interference that may cause unde-
4 Service 5 Tires sired operation.
# Scroll down in the menu. WARNING: Any changes or modi -
The Use Current Pressures as New Refer- cation not expressly approved by
ence Values message appears in the multi- the party responsible for compli-
function display. ance could void the user's author-
ity to operate this equipment.
# Con rm the message to initiate a restart.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message
appears in the multifunction display. Loading the
the vehicle
vehicle
Current warning messages are deleted and the Tir
iree and Loading Infor
Information
mation placard
h yellow warning lamp goes out.
A er you have driven for a few minutes, the & WARNING Risk of an accident when driv-
system checks whether the current tire pres- ing with an overloaded tire
sures are within the speci ed range. The cur-
rent tire pressures are then accepted as refer- Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a
ence values and monitored. consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair
the steering and handling characteristics and
lead to brake failure.
# Observe the load rating of the tires.
# The load rating must be at least half the Additional related subjects:
gross axle weight rating of the vehicle. R Determining the maximum load (/ page 217).
Mercedes-Benz recommends you use the R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 210).
load-bearing index, which is given in the
vehicle documents.
# Never overload the tires by exceeding the Steps to
to deter
determining
mining the
the correct
correct critical
critical load
maximum load. The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code
Only vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in accord-
than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Loading ance with the "National Tra c and Motor Vehicle
Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's Safety Act of 1966".
side. # Step 1: locate the statement, "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on the Tire and
Loading Information placard of your vehicle.
# Step 2: determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be traveling in
your vehicle.
# Step 3: subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
# Step 4: the resulting gure equals the permis-
1 Tire and Loading Information placard sible amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be ve 150 lb passen-
gers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
# Step 5: determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
For safety reasons, this weight must not
exceed the cargo and luggage load capacity
% The data shown in the illustration is sample calculated in step 4.
data. # Step 6:
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows:

Even if you have calculated the total load carefully,
R The maximum number of seats indicates the you should still make sure that the maximum per-
maximum number of occupants permitted to missible gross weight and the maximum gross axle
travel in the vehicle. weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded.
R The maximum permissible load equals the Information for this can be found on the vehicle
gross weight of all vehicle occupants, the lug- identi cation plate.
gage and cargo. # Weigh the laden vehicle, including driver, pas-
R The recommended tire pressures for cold tires. sengers and load, on a suitable vehicle weigh-
The recommended tire pressures apply to the bridge.
maximum permissible load and up to the maxi- The measured values must not exceed the
mum permissible speed of the vehicle. maximum permitted values listed on the vehi-
cle identi cation plate.
Also observe the following information:
Additional related subjects:
R The information about permissible weights on
the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 237). R Sample calculation for determining the maxi-
mum load (/ page 218)
R The information about tire pressure on the tire
pressure table . R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 216)
R Tire pressure table sizes of occupants. The following examples use a

R Vehicle identi cation plate maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This valuevalue is
for illustr
illustrativ
ativee purposes
purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
Sample
Sam ple calculation for
for deter
determining
mining the
the maximum on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
load placard (/ page 216).
The following table has examples of how to calcu- The higher the weight of all the occupants, the
late total and cargo load capacities with varying smaller the maximum load for luggage.
seating con gurations and di erent numbers and
Step
Step 1
Exam
Example
ple 1 Exam
Example
ple 2
Combined maximum weight of 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
occupants and load (data from
the Tire and Loading Information
placard)
Step 2
Exam
Example
ple 1 Exam
Example
ple 2
Number of people in the vehicle 5 1
(driver and occupants)
Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Front: 1
Rear: 3
Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)
Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Exam
Example
ple 1 Exam
Example
ple 2
Permissible load (maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs
gross vehicle weight rating from (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)
the Tire and Loading Information
placard minus the gross weight
of all occupants)
Tir
iree labeling
Over
Overvie
view
w of tire
tire labeling
1 Tread wear grade

2 Traction grade
3 Temperature grade
% The data shown in the illustration is sample
data.
% This grading is not legally prescribed for Can-
ada, but speci ed in most cases anyway.
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Tread wear
wear grade
grade
(/ page 219) The tread wear grade is a comparative grading
2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire based on tread wear grade tests conducted under
Identi cation Number (/ page 220) controlled conditions on a speci ed U.S. Depart-
3 Maximum tire load (/ page 220) ment of Transportation test track. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times
4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 221)
as well on the government test track as a tire gra-
5 Manufacturer ded 100.
6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 221)
The relative performance of tires depends upon
7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity the actual conditions of their use, however, and
and speed rating (/ page 221) may depart signi cantly from the norm due to var-
8 Tire name iations in driving habits, service practices and dif-
ferences in road characteristics and climate condi-
% The data shown in the illustration is sample tions.
data.
Traction
Tr action grade
grade
Infor
Information
mation on tire
tire quality
quality grades
grades & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of accident due to inade-
According to the requirements of the U.S. Depart- quate traction
ment of Transportation's "Uniform Tire Quality The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Grading Standards" tire manufacturers must grade based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
their tires using the following three performance and does not include either acceleration, cor-
factors: nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac-
teristics.
# Always adapt your driving style and drive
at a speed to suit the prevailing tra c
and weather conditions.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from

wheelspin
# Avoid wheelspin.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are

AA, A, B and C. These grades relate to the tire's
ability to come to a standstill on a wet pavement The TIN is a unique identi cation number for tires
under controlled conditions on a speci ed U.S. and consists of the following components:
government test surface made from asphalt and R DO
DOTT (Department
(Depar tment of Transport
Transportation):
ation): tire sym-
concrete. bol 1 indicates that the tire complies with the
Tem
emper
peratur
aturee grade
grade requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation.
& WARNING Risk of accident from tire over- R Manuf
Manufactur
acturer
er identi cation code: manufac-
heating and tire failure turer identi cation code 2 provides informa-
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- tion about the tire manufacturer. New tires
lished for a tire that is properly in ated and not have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires
overloaded. Excessive speed, underin ation, or have a code with four symbols. For further
excessive loading, either separately or in com- information about retreaded tires, see
bination, can cause excessive heat build-up (/ page 223).
and possible tire failure. R Tiriree size: identi er 3 describes the tire size.
# Observe the recommended tire pres- R Tir
iree type code: tire type code 4 can be used
sures and regularly check the tire pres- by the manufacturer as a code to describe spe-
sure of all tires including the spare ci c characteristics of the tire.
wheel. R Dat
Datee of manufactur
manufacture: e: date of manufacture 5
# Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. provides information about the age of a tire.
The 1st and 2nd numbers indicate the calendar
The temperature grades are A (highest grade), B week and the 3rd and 4th numbers indicate
and C. These relate to a tire's resistance to heat the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" refers to
and its ability to release heat on a speci ed test the 32nd week of the year 2008).
wheel in laboratory tests under controlled condi-
tions. Sustained high temperatures can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire Infor
Information
mation on maximum tire
tire load
life. In addition, excessively high temperatures can
lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C refers to a per-
formance which all passenger vehicle tires must
exhibit, according to the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation's requirements.
Information
Infor mation on DOT
DOT and TIN (Tir
(Tiree Identi cation
Number)
U.S. tire regulations indicate that every tire manu-
facturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on % The data shown in the illustration is sample
the sidewall of each tire produced. data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the maxi-
mum permissible load. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Load-
ing Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv-
er's side (/ page 216).

data.
Infor
Information
mation on maximum tire
tire pressure
pressure # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.

data.
1 First letter(s)
Maximum permitted tire pressure 1, which is per-
2 Nominal tire width in millimeters
mitted for the tires must not be exceeded.
3 Aspect ratio (in percent)
Exception: when using the 225/75 R16C
4 Tire code
121/120R (122L) tires as a spare wheel on the
rear axle of Super Single vehicles with a distance 5 Rim diameter
limit of 62 mi (100 km) and speed limit of 34 mph 6 Load-bearing index, single tires
(55 km/h). 7 Load-bearing index, twin tires
8 Speed rating
Infor
Information
mation on tire
tire char
charact
acter
eris
istics
tics % The data shown in the illustration is sample
data.
Further information about reading tire data can be
obtained from any quali ed specialist workshop.
Firs
irstt lett
letter(s)
er(s) 1:
R "LT": light truck tires in accordance with U.S.
manufacturer standards.
R "C": tires for commercial usage in accordance
with European manufacturer standards.
Aspect ratio
ratio (in percent)
percent) 3:
% The data shown in the illustration is sample The size ratio between the tire height and tire
data. width and is shown in percent (tire height divided
This information describes the type of tire cord by tire width).
and the number of layers in sidewall 1 and under
tire tread 2. Tir
iree code 4 (tir
(tiree type):
R "R": radial tire
Tir
iree size designation, load-bearing
load-bearing capacity and Rim diameter
diameter 5:
speed rating
rating The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of
the rim ange). The rim diameter is speci ed in
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding inches (in).
the speci ed tire load-bearing capacity or Load-bearing index
Load-bearing index 6 and 7:
the permissible speed rating
Numerical code which speci es the maximum
Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the load-bearing capacity of a tire ("91" equals, e.g.
permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- 1,356 lb (615 kg)).
age and to the tires bursting. The tire load-bearing capacity must be at least half
# Therefore, only use tire types and sizes the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle. Do not
approved for your vehicle model. overload the tires by exceeding the maximum per-
missible load of the tires.
See also: Infor

Inf ormation
mation on de nitions (tir(tires
es and loading)
R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Tir
iree str
structur
ucturee and char
charact
acter
eris
istics:
tics: describes the
Loading Information placard (/ page 216) number of layers or the number of rubber-coated
R Maximum tire load (/ page 220) layers in the tire tread and the tire wall. These are
made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materi-
Speed rating
rating 8: als.
Speci es the approved maximum design speed of
Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
the tire.
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are
% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi- the equivalent of 1 bar.
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
DOTT (Department
DO (Depar tment of Transport
Transportation):
ation): DOT marked
(210 km/h).
tires ful ll the requirements of the
Ensure that your tires have the required speed rat- U.S. Department of Transportation.
ing. You can obtain information on the required
Aver
Av erag
agee weight
weight of vehicle
vehicle occupants: the number
speed rating at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
of occupants for which the vehicle is designed mul-
ter.
tiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
Summer tires
tires Unif
nifor
ormm Tir
Tiree Quality Grading
Grading Standar
Standards:
ds: a uniform
Index Speed rating
rating standard to grade the quality of tires with regards
to tread quality, tire traction and temperature char-
L Up to 75 mph (120 km/h) acteristics. The quality grading assessment is
made by the manufacturer in accordance with test
M Up to 81 mph (130 km/h) speci cations of the U.S. government. The quality
N Up to 87 mph (140 km/h) grade of a tire is imprinted on the sidewall of the
tire.
P Up to 93 mph (150 km/h) Recommended tire tire pressur
pressure:
e: the recommended
Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) tire pressure is the pressure speci ed for the tires
installed on the vehicle at the factory.
R Up to 106 mph (170 km/h) The Tire and Loading Information placard contains
the recommended tire pressures for cold tires, the
Summer,, all-season and winter
Summer winter tires
tires maximum permissible load and the maximum per-
Index Speed rating
rating missible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommended
L M+S1 Up to 75 mph (120 km/h)
tire pressures for cold tires under various operat-
M M+S1 Up to 81 mph (130 km/h) ing conditions, i.e. load and/or speed of the vehi-
cle.
N M+S1 Up to 87 mph (140 km/h) Increased
Incr eased vehicle
vehicle weight
weight due to to optional
optional equip-
equip-
ment: the combined weight of all standard and
P M+S1 Up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
Q M+S1 Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) regardless of whether it is actually installed on the
vehicle or not.
R M+S1 Up to 118 mph (170 km/h) Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is
installed.
1: or "M+S i" for winter tires.
GAWR
GA WR (Gross
(Gross Axle Weight
Weight Rating):
Rating): GAWR is the
Winter tires are marked with the i snow ake gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle
symbol and ful ll the requirements of the Rubber must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber You can nd the Gross Axle Weight Rating on the
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire B-pillar on the driver's side.
traction on snow.
Speed rating:
rating: the speed rating is part of the tire
identi cation. It speci es the speed range for
which a tire is approved.
GVW (Gross
(Gross Vehicle
Vehicle Weight):
Weight): the Gross Vehicle
Weight includes the weight of the vehicle including
fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, Tir

iree contact
contact surface:
surface: the part of the tire that
occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar nose- comes into contact with the road.
weight if applicable. The Gross Vehicle Weight Tir
iree bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure
must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There
ing (GVWR) speci ed on the B-pillar on the driver's are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent
side. the tire from changing length on the wheel rim.
GVWR (Gross
(Gross Vehicle
Vehicle Weight
Weight Rating):
Rating): the GVWR is Side wall:
wall: the part of the tire between the tread
the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully and the tire bead.
laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all
accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the Special equipment
equipment weight:
weight: the combined weight of
trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable). The those optional extras that weigh more than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is speci ed on the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs
vehicle identi cation plate on the B-pillar on the (2.3 kg). Special equipment, such as high-perform-
driver's side. ance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage
rack or a high-performance battery, are not inclu-
Maximum weight
weight of the
the laden vehicle:
vehicle: the maxi- ded in the curb weight and the weight of the
mum weight is the sum of the vehicle's curb accessories.
weight, weight of the accessories, maximum load
and the weight of the factory installed optional TIN (Tir
(Tiree Identi cation Number): a unique identi -
equipment. cation number which can be used by a tire manu-
facturer to identify tires, for example for a product
Kilopascal (kPa):
(kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is
6.9 kPa are the equivalent of 1 psi. Another unit made up of the manufacturer identi cation code,
for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing
the equivalent of 1 bar. date.
Curb weight:
weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard Load-bearing
Load-bear ing index:
index: the load-bearing index (also
equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, load index) is a code that contains the maximum
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning load-bearing capacity of a tire.
system and optional equipment if these are instal-
led on the vehicle, but does not include passen- Traction:
Tr action: traction is the result of friction between
gers or luggage. the tires and the road surface.
Maximum tire tire load: the maximum tire load is the Wear indicator:
indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that
maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
for which a tire is approved. is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Maximum permissible
permissible tire
tire pressur
pressure:
e: maximum per-
missible tire pressure for one tire. Distr
Dis tribution
ibution of vehicle
vehicle occupants: distribution of
vehicle occupants over designated seat positions
Maximum load on one tire: tire: maximum load on one in a vehicle.
tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum
axle load for one axle by two. Maximum permissible
permissible payload
payload weight:
weight: nominal
load and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) multi-
PSI (pounds per squar
squaree inch):
inch): standard unit of plied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
measurement for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio:
ratio: relationship between tire height and
tire width in percent. Changing a wheel
Tir
iree pressur
pressure:
e: pressure inside the tire applying an Notes on selecting, installing
installing and replacing
replacing tires
tires
outward force to every square inch of the tire's You can ask for information regarding permitted
surface. The tire pressure is speci ed in pounds wheel/tire combinations at a quali ed specialist
per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. workshop.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
Tir
iree pressur
pressuree on cold tires:
tires: the tires are cold when rect wheel and tire dimensions
the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
direct sunlight for at least three hours and the
the service brakes or wheel suspension com-
vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
ponents may be damaged.
# Always replace wheels and tires with * NOTE Driving safety put at risk by retrea-
ones that ful ll the speci cations of the ded tires
original part.
Retreaded tires are not checked or recommen-
For wheels, pay attention to the following: ded by Mercedes-Benz, as previous damage is
R Designation not always detected during the retread proc-
R Type ess.
R Permissible wheel load Driving safety cannot, therefore, be guaran-
teed.
R Wheel o set
# Do not use used tires when their previ-
For tires, pay attention to the following: ous usage is unknown.
R Designation
R Manufacturer * NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts through the use of tire-installing
R Type
tools
R Load-bearing index
Vehicles with
with a tire
tire pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys-
R Speed rating
tem: there are electronic component parts in
the wheel. Tire-installing tools should not be
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding applied in the area of the valve.
the speci ed tire load-bearing capacity or Otherwise, the electronic component parts
the permissible speed rating could be damaged.
Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the # Always have tires changed at a quali ed
permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- specialist workshop.
age and to the tires bursting.
# Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
Accessory parts that are not approved for your
approved for your vehicle model. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are not being used
correctly, can impair operating safety.
# Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle. Before purchasing and using non-approved acces-
sories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and
inquire about:
* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage due to tire
R Suitability
types and sizes that have not been
approved R Legal stipulations
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and R Factory recommendations
accessory parts which have been specially Observe the following points when selecting,
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. installing and replacing tires:
These tires have been specially adapted for use R Use only tires and wheels of the same type,
with driving systems and driving safety sys- design (winter tires, all-season tires) and make.
tems, such as ABS or ESP®.
R Only install wheels of the same size and tread
Otherwise, certain properties, such as han- design on one axle (le and right).
dling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions
and consumption could be adversely a ected. It is only permissible to install a di erent wheel
Other wheel sizes may cause the tires to come size to this in the event of a at tire in order to
into contact with the vehicle body and axle drive to the specialist workshop.
components when under load. This may result R Only install tires of the correct size onto the
in damage to the tire or the vehicle. wheels.
# Only use tires, wheels and accessory R Vehicles withwith a tire
tire pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys-
parts that have been checked and rec- tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with
ommended by Mercedes-Benz. functioning sensors for the tire pressure moni-
toring system.
R At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) use win- R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
ter tires or all-season tires with the M+S mark- and speed rating (/ page 221)
ing on all wheels. R Tire pressure table (/ page 211)
Winter tires bearing the i snow ake sym- R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the (/ page 231)
best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
R Only use tires with the same tread.
Notes on changing
changing wheels
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the installed tires. & WARNING Risk of injury through di erent
If this is below the vehicle's maximum permis- wheel sizes
sible speed, this must be indicated in an appro-
Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely
priate label in the driver's eld of vision.
impair the driving characteristics.
R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the
The wheel brakes or suspension components
rst 60 miles (100 km).
may also be damaged.
R Replace the tires a er six years at the latest, # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
regardless of wear.
wheels and tires are of the same dimen-
For more information on wheels and tires, contact sions.
% Vehicles with with twin tires:
tires: On vehicles that have the same size front and rear
For vehicles with twin tires with a GVW of wheels, rotate the wheels according to the inter-
11,030 lbs or 12,125 lbs, only use tires with vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in
the dimension LT 215/85 R16 which have your vehicle documents. If this is not available,
been approved for this vehicle by the manufac- rotate the tires every 3,000 (5,000) to 6,000 miles
turer. It is not permissible to use tires with dif- (10,000 km), depending on the degree of wear.
ferent dimensions; doing so may lead to the Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained.
general operating permit being rendered inva- It is imperative to observe the instructions and
lid. safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so.
% Vehicles with with single tires:
tires:
For vehicles with single tires with a GVW less Size categor
categories
ies of wheels
than or equal to 9,480 lbs, only use tires with
the dimension LT 245/75 R16 which have The determined vehicle speed is displayed in the
been approved for this vehicle by the manufac- instrument cluster and is important for controlling
turer. It is not permissible to use tires with dif- the driving safety systems and driving systems. The
ferent dimensions; doing so may lead to the display accuracy of the speedometer and the
general operating permit being rendered inva- odometer is legally prescribed. Determining the
lid. speed is dependent on the tire size or the rolling
circumference of the tires. The rim diameter is
% Vehicles with with Super Single tires:
tires: always speci ed in inches.
For vehicles with single tires with a GVW of
11,030 lbs, only use tires with the dimensions For this reason, the vehicle control units can be
225/75 R16C (FA) and 285/65 R16C (RA) coded for the following wheel size categories:
which have been approved for this vehicle by Wheel size category 3
the manufacturer. It is not permissible to use R 205/75 R16C FA
tires with di erent dimensions; doing so may
R 225/75 R16C FA
lead to the general operating permit being ren-
dered invalid. R 285/65 R16C RA
Also observe the following further related subjects: R LT245/75 R16
R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 210) R LT215/85 R16
R Tire and Loading Information placard % Mercedes-Benz recommends that you stay
(/ page 216) within a wheel size category when changing a
tire. In this way, you avoid recoding the control
units.
If you change the wheel size of your vehicle, for Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel drive
drive
instance when changing wheels for winter opera-
tion, check it is assigned to the correct wheel size
category. If the wheel size category changes, you
must have your vehicle's control units recoded at a
Otherwise, the display accuracy of the speedome-
ter and the odometer will be outside the legally
prescribed tolerance. It may also be lower, i.e. the
current road speed is then higher than the speed
shown on the speedometer. If a deviation is out-
side the range of tolerance, driving safety systems
and driving systems may be operationally impaired
or may detect a malfunction and switch them-
selves o .
Infor
Information
mation on the
the direction
direction of the
the tires'
tires' rotation
rotation The tire-change tool kit is located in stowage com-
Tires with a speci ed direction of rotation have partment 1 above the step of the co-driver's door
additional bene ts, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- and in the stowage compartment in the footwell on
planing. You will only gain these bene ts if the cor- the co-driver side.
rect direction of rotation is observed.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its Prepar
Pr eparing
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for a wheel change
change
correct direction of rotation.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
You may also install a spare wheel against the
R The tire-change tool kit is available.
direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction
on use as well as the speed limitation speci ed on R The vehicle is not on a slope.
the spare wheel. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
Infor
Information
mation on stor
storing
ing wheels # Apply the parking brake.
Observe the following when storing wheels: # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
R Wheels that have been removed should be position.
stored in a cool, dry and, if possible, dark # Vehicles with
with automatic
place. transmission to position j.
R Protect the tires from oil, grease and fuel. # Switch o the engine.
# Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the tire-c
tire-chang
hangee tool
tool kit # Take the vehicle tool kit from the footwell on
the co-driver side (/ page 205).
Necessary tire-changing tools may include, for
example:
R Jack
R Wheel wrench
% You will nd the maximum load capacity of the

jack stated on the adhesive label attached to
the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a mal-
function, please contact a quali ed specialist
workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect

positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of
the jack must be positioned vertically
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from vehicle tip-

ping
On slopes, the jack could tip with the vehicle
raised.
Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel drive
drive
# Never change a wheel on a slope.
# Take the jack and the tire-change tool kit out of
the storage compartment (/ page 226).
# If necessary, remove the hub cap.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
# Assemble the lug wrench extension using the
middle rod and the rod with the largest diame- If you do not position the jack correctly at the
ter from the three-piece jack pump lever. appropriate jack support point of the vehicle,
# Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug
the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
wrench extension as far as it will go onto the # The jack is designed exclusively for jack-
lug wrench. ing up the vehicle at the jack support
# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts or
points.
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheel
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
nuts or bolts completely.
R The vehicle is prepared for changing a wheel
# Raise the vehicle (/ page 227).
(/ page 226).
Raising the
the vehicle
vehicle when changing
changing a wheel Only position the jack on the jack support points
intended for this purpose. You could otherwise
& WARNING Risk of injury from jack tipping damage the vehicle.
Important notes on using the jack:
If you park a vehicle with air suspension, the
air suspension may remain activated for up to R Only use the vehicle-speci c jack that has
one hour, even when the ignition is switched been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
o . If you then raise the vehicle with the jack, to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incor-
the air suspension will attempt to adjust the rectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is
vehicle level. raised.
The jack may tip. R The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle
# Press the Service button on the air sus-

for a short time while a wheel is being changed
and is not suitable for carrying out mainte-
pension remote control before raising the nance work under the vehicle.
vehicle.
This prevents automatic readjustment of R Avoid changing a wheel on uphill and downhill
the vehicle level and prevents it from slopes.
being raised or lowered manually. R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at,
load bearing and non-slip underlay.
R The base of the jack is positioned vertically
under the jack support point.
Safety instructions while the vehicle is raised: # Close pressure release screw 3.
R Do not put your hands or feet under the vehi- # To do this, use the attened section on pump
cle. lever 1 to turn pressure release screw 3
R Do not lie underneath the vehicle. clockwise to the stop.
R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the % Do not turn pressure release screw 3 more
parking brake. than one or two full turns. Hydraulic uid could
R Do not open or close any doors. otherwise escape.
# Insert pump lever 1 with the largest rod into
Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel drive
drive
the recess on the jack and secure by turning it
clockwise.
# Place the jack vertically beneath the jack sup-
port points described below.
Jack support points

Only use the middle rod and the pump lever rod
with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug
wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on
Jack support point, front axle
the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Oth-
erwise, the rods could bend and deform so much
that they can no longer be used as pump levers for
the jack.
Jack support point, rear axle (example: chassis

up to 3.5 t)
# To prepar
preparee the
the hydr
hydraulic
aulic jack:
jack: insert the third
rod of pump lever 1 for the jack into the lug
wrench extension.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on

wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface.
# Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts with the wheel

nut wrench.
# On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove the
wheel nut cover.
# Remove the wheel.
Installing
Inst alling a new
new wheel
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Jack support point, rear axle (example: Cargo R The wheel is removed (/ page 229).
Van and Passenger Van up to 4.0 t)
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt
threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts
to come loose.
# Never oil or grease the threads.
# In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a quali ed specialist workshop
immediately.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam-
aged hub threads replaced.
# Do not continue driving.
Jack support point, rear axle (vehicles 5.0 t) & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
# Place the jack beneath the jack support point.
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
# Vehicles with
with all-wheel driv
drive:
e: turn jack spindle when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
2 counter-clockwise as far as it will go. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
# Raise the vehicle until the tire is raised a maxi- when the vehicle is on the ground.
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) o the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 229). # Observe the information on the choice of tires
(/ page 223).
Remo
emoving
ving a wheel
# Observe the instructions and safety notes on
changing a wheel (/ page 223).
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts or
R The vehicle is raised (/ page 227). wheel nuts which have been approved by
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
to the brake discs since this could impair the level
When you install the steel spare wheel, it is essen-
of comfort when braking.
tial you use short wheel bolts for a steel wheel.
Using other wheel bolts when installing the steel
spare wheel may damage the brake system.
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

are tightened to the prescribed tighten-
ing torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehi-
cle. Contact a quali ed specialist work-
shop and have the tightening torque
checked immediately.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 229).
Observe the notes on raising the vehicle
(/ page 227).
Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel drive
drive
1 Wheel bolt for alloy wheels Only use the middle rod and the pump lever rod
2 Wheel bolt for steel wheel with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug
wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on
# Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfa- the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Oth-
ces. erwise, the rods could bend and deform so much
# Vehicles with
with ultrawide-base
ultrawide-base tires:
tires: rst install that they can no longer be used as pump levers for
the adapter for the more narrow spare wheel the jack.
on the wheel hub. Vehicles with
with Super Single tires:
tires: if you mount the
# Slide the wheel which is to be installed onto spare wheel to the rear axle, do not exceed the
the wheel hub or the adapter for the spare maximum speed of 34 mph (55 km/h) and the
wheel and push it on. maximum distance of 62 miles (100 km). Other-
wise, the transmission could be damaged due to
Vehicles with
with light alloy
alloy wheels
the di erent rotational speeds of the wheels.
# Use the short wheel bolts intended for the
# Using the pump lever, slowly turn the drain
steel spare wheel, which are found in the vehi-
screw on the jack approximately one revolution
cle tool kit.
and carefully lower the vehicle.
# Screw in the wheel bolts until they are nger-
# Place the jack to one side.
tight.
# Pull the rod with the smallest diameter o the
Wheels with
with wheel nuts pump lever.
# Front wheels with wheel nut cover: press the The shortened pump lever serves as a lug
wheel nut cover onto the wheel nuts. wrench extension.
# Screw in three wheel nuts over the xing discs # Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug
of the wheel nut cover. wrench extension as far as it will go onto the
# Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are in
lug wrench.
the middle of the holes.
# Screw in the remaining wheel nuts.
# Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.
Lower
Lowering
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle a er a wheel change
change

rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts
or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescri-
bed torque.
# Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to the

speci ed tightening torque a er the vehicle
has been driven 31 miles (50 km).
# When using a wheel or spare wheel with a new
or newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts retightened a er approx-
imately 620 miles (1,000 km) to 3,100 miles
(5,000 km).
% Vehicles with
with the
the tire
tire pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor sys-
sys-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors.
Make sure to observe the following further related
subject:
R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 210)
# Tighten the wheel bolts or nuts evenly in the
sequence indicated (1 to 6).
Sparee wheel
Spar
Speci ed tightening torque:
Notes on the
the emergency
emergency spare
spare wheel and spare
R Steel wheel bolts: 177 lb- (240 Nm)
wheel
R Wheel nuts: 133 lb- (180 Nm)
Spare wheel: wheel and tire dimensions as well as
Spare
R Alloy wheel bolts: 133 lb- (180 Nm) the type of tire correspond to the other installed
# Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in again wheels.
and close the pressure release screw. Emergency
Emerg ency spare
spare wheel: wheel and/or tire dimen-
# Vehicles with
with all-wheel driv
drive:
e: turn the jack sions as well as the type of tire are di erent from
spindle clockwise as far as it will go. the wheel to be replaced. A label with a speed limit
% You can now install the hub caps on steel can be found on the emergency spare wheel.
wheels with wheel bolts. The installation pro- A installed emergency spare wheel or spare wheel
cedure depends on whether the hub cap acts changes the driving characteristics and bears
as wheel trim that covers the whole wheel, or risks.
just covers the center.
# Wheel trim:
trim: position the opening in the wheel & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
trim for the tire valve over the tire valve. rect wheel and tire dimensions
# Push the wheel trim onto the wheel rim with Mounting an emergency spare wheel or spare
both hands until it engages into place. Make wheel may severely impair the driving charac-
sure the wheel trim retaining catches engage teristics.
on the steel wheel. There is an increased risk of an accident.
# Wheel with
with central
central hub cap: position the retain- To prevent hazardous situations:
ing lugs of the central hub cap over the wheel # Check the tire pressure of the spare
bolts. wheel or emergency spare wheel once
# Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage it on installed and, if necessary, adjust.
the wheel. # The emergency spare wheel may only be
# Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel used temporarily and must be replaced
holder. with a standard wheel as soon as possi-
# Vehicles with
tires: transport the ble.
faulty rear wheel in the load area. The rear # Never install more than one emergency
wheel is too large for the spare wheel holder. spare wheel.
# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed # Adapt your driving style and drive care-
wheel and adjust it if necessary. fully in emergency spare wheel mode.
# Do not switch o ESP®.
# Do not use snow chains on the emer- The following should be checked regularly, particu-
gency spare wheel. larly prior to long journeys:
# Replace the emergency spare wheel a er R The secure positioning of the spare wheel
six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R The tire pressure of the spare wheel (adjust the
tire pressure if necessary) (/ page 211)
R When using an emergency spare wheel (di er- R The fastenings of the spare wheel holder
ent from the wheel to be replaced), you must
not exceed a permissible top speed of 50 mph Replace the tires a er six years at the latest,
(80 km/h). regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare
R Check the tire pressure of the emergency wheel.
spare wheel before starting a journey . % If you have installed an emergency spare
R Have the emergency spare wheel replaced by a wheel or spare wheel, the tire pressure moni-
quali ed specialist workshop. tor will not function for this wheel. The emer-
gency spare wheel or spare wheel is not equip-
& WARNING Risk of accident due to dam- ped with a sensor for monitoring tire pressure.
aged spare wheel with Super Single tires
Vehicles with
with Super Single tires
tires Installing
removing
ving the
the spare
spare wheel
If you exceed the maximum speed or maximum Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: remo
removing
ving the
the spare
distance, or re-install the spare wheel, its tire wheel (Cargo
(Cargo Van
Van or Passeng
Passengerer Van)
Van)
could be undetectably damaged and cause tire
pressure loss.
You could lose control of the vehicle.
# Only use the spare wheel if it has not yet
been installed on the rear axle with the
current tire.
# If the spare wheel has been installed on
the rear axle, have the tire of the spare
wheel replaced a er changing the wheel
again.
# For safety reasons, when changing a tire
ensure that only the tire valve type
approved for the tires is used.
* NOTE Damage to the transmission due to

di ering wheel speeds Bolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo
Van)
Vehicles with
tires: when you
install the spare wheel on the rear axle, the
transmission may be damaged by the di erent
rotational speeds of the wheels.
# When the spare wheel is installed on the
rear axle, observe the maximum speed of
34 mph (55 km/h) and a maximum driv-
ing distance of 62 mi (100 km).
% It is possible to use the spare wheel without

restrictions only on the front axle of a vehicle
with Super Single tires.
# Open the rear-end doors. Vehicles with

with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: remo
removing
ving the
the spare
# Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and then wheel (vehicle
(vehicle with
with lower
lowered
ed chassis)
chassis)
pry o covers 1.
# Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit,
unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clock-
wise by approximately 20 turns.
# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and
unhook le -hand retaining hook 3.
# Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide
it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of
spare wheel carrier 4.
# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump
lever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 3.
# Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the
ground.
# Li spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the
pump lever out of the sleeve. Bolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo
Van)
# Use the pump lever to li the spare wheel
beyond the rear edge of spare wheel carrier
4.
# Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare
wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy.
When the spare wheel is removed, the center
of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of
the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or
tip over.
Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: installing
installing the
the spare
wheel (Cargo
(Cargo Van
Van or Passeng
Passengerer Van)
Van)
# Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
When you place the spare wheel onto spare
wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes
due to the weight of the wheel. The spare # Open the rear-end doors.
wheel may slip down or tip over. # Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and then
# Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve pry o covers 1.
5 on spare wheel carrier 4. # Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit,
# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clock-
lever and attach right-hand retaining hook 3. wise by approximately 20 turns.
# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and # Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and
attach le -hand retaining hook 3. unhook le -hand retaining hook 3.
# Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5. # Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide
# Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook bolts it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of
3 by turning them clockwise. spare wheel carrier 4.
# Replace and engage covers 1.
# Raise spare wheel carrier with the pump lever
and unhook right-hand retaining hook 3.
# Close the rear-end doors.
# Prepare the jack.
# Place the jack beneath the corresponding jack
support point.
# Move the pump lever up and down until the tire Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: remo
removing
ving the
the spare
is raised a maximum of 1.18 in (3 cm) o the wheel (chassis)
(chassis)
ground.
When the spare wheel is removed, the center
of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of
the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or
tip over.
# Install the spare wheel on the vehicle.
# Lower the vehicle.
Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: installing
installing the
the spare
wheel (vehicle
(vehicle with
with lower
lowered
ed chassis)
chassis)
% In the event of a at tire, you may store the
faulty wheel inside the vehicle only. An intact
wheel may be stored in the spare wheel carrier
only when the vehicle is unladen. A laden vehi- # Loosen wing nuts 3 manually and then
cle must rst be raised. remove them.
# Loosen nuts 2 as far as the thread end.
# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and
wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes unhook le -hand retaining hook 1.
due to the weight of the wheel. The spare # Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide
wheel may slip down or tip over. it into sleeve on the right-hand side of spare
# Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve wheel carrier 4.
5 on spare wheel carrier 4. # Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump
# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 1.
lever and attach right-hand retaining hook 3. # Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the
# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and ground.
attach le -hand retaining hook 3. # Li spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the
# Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5. pump lever out of the sleeve.
# Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook bolts
# Use the pump lever to li the spare wheel
3 by turning them clockwise. beyond the rear edge of spare wheel carrier.
# Replace and engage covers 1.
wheel carrier. The spare wheel is heavy. When
# Close the rear-end doors. the spare wheel is removed, the center of grav-
ity changes due to the heavy weight of the
wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip
over.
Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel driv
drive:
e: installing
installing the
the spare
wheel (chassis)
(chassis)
wheel carrier, the center of gravity changes
due to the weight of the wheel. The spare
wheel may slip down or tip over.
# Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve on
spare wheel carrier 4.
# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump

lever and attach right-hand retaining hook 1.
# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier and attach
le -hand retaining hook 1.
# Pull the pump lever out of the sleeve.
# Tighten nuts 2.
# Put wing nuts 3 in place and tighten them.
236 Technical data
Notes on the
the tec
technical
hnical data # When operating two-way radios in the
The given data only applies to vehicles with stand- vehicle, always connect them to the low-
ard equipment. You can obtain further information re ection exterior antenna.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit
due to failure to comply with the instruc-
On-boardd electronics
On-boar electronics tions for installation and use
Notes on wor
workk on the
the engine electronics
electronics The operating permit may be invalidated if the
instructions for installation and use of two-way
* NOTES Premature wear through improper radios are not observed.
maintenance
# Only use approved frequency bands.
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle com- # Observe the maximum permissible out-
ponents to wear more quickly and the vehicle's put power in these frequency bands.
operating permit may be invalidated.
# Only use approved antenna positions.
# Always have work on the engine elec-
tronics and related components carried Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road
out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of a er-
market radio frequency transmitting equipment)
when retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the
Two-wa
o-wayy radios
radios legal requirements for detachable parts.
Installation
Inst allation notes
notes for
for two-wa
two-wayy radios
radios If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna con-
& WARNING Risk of accident due to nections intended for use with the installation.
improper work on two-way radios Observe the manufacturer's supplements during
If two-way radios are manipulated or retro tted installation.
incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from Two-wa
o-wayy radio
radio transmission
transmission output
the two-way radios can interfere with the vehi- The maximum transmission outputs (PEAK) at the
cle electronics and jeopardize the operating base of the antenna must not exceed the values in
safety of the vehicle. the following table:
# You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out Freq
Fr equency
uency band and maximum transmission
transmission out-
at a quali ed specialist workshop. put
Freq
equency
uency band Maximum transmis-
transmis-
& WARNING Risk of accident due to sion output
improper operation of two-way radios
Short wave 100 W
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle 3 – 54 MHz
improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can
disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the 4 m waveband 30 W
case in the following situations, in particular: 74 – 88 MHz
R The two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna. 2 m waveband 50 W
R The exterior antenna is installed incorrectly 144 – 174 MHz
or is not a low-re ection antenna. Trunked radio system/ 10 W
This could jeopardize the operating safety of Tetra
the vehicle. 380 – 460 MHz
# Have the low-re ection exterior antenna
installed at a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
Technical data 237
Freq
equency
uency band Maximum transmis-
transmis-
sion output
70 cm waveband 35 W
420 – 450 MHz
Two-way radio 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following devices can be used in the vehicle

without restrictions: Vehicle identi cation plate (example: USA,
R Two-way radios with a maximum transmission complete vehicles)
output of up to 100 mW 1 Vehicle manufacturer
R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in 2 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)
the 380 – 410 MHz frequency band and a 3 Permissible gross mass
maximum transmission output of up to 2W 4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combination
(trunked radio system/Tetra) 5 Permissible front axle load
R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) 6 Permissible rear axle load
There are no restrictions when positioning the 7 Date of manufacture
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol- 8 Paint code
lowing frequency bands:
R Trunked radio system/Tetra
R 70 cm waveband
R 2G/3G/4G
Vehicle identi cation plat

plate,
e, vehicle
vehicle identi cation
number (VIN) and engine number
Vehicle identi cation plate
Vehicle identi cation plate (example: USA,
incomplete vehicles)
1 Vehicle manufacturer
2 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)
3 Permissible gross mass
4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combination
5 Permissible front axle load
6 Permissible rear axle load
7 Date of manufacture
8 Paint code
Depending on the vehicle model, the vehicle identi-

cation plate is located on the seat base of the
driver's seat or on the B-pillar.
% The data is vehicle-speci c and can di er from
that shown. Always observe the speci cations
on your vehicle identi cation plate.
238 Technical data
The vehicle identi cation plate may also contain

the following data:
R Payload
R Curb weight
R Number of passenger seats
VIN engrav
engraved
ed underneat
underneathh the
the hood
Vehicle identi cation plate (example: Canada,

complete vehicles)
3 Permissible gross mass
4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combination
6 Permissible rear axle load
8 Paint code
Engraved VIN 1 is located underneath the hood.

VIN below
below the
the windshield
Vehicle identi cation plate (example: Canada,

incomplete vehicles)
3 Permissible gross mass The VIN is also attached as a label on the lower
4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combination section of windshield 2.
6 Permissible rear axle load Emission Control
Control Infor
Information
mation label
8 Paint code
The maximum permissible gross vehicle mass is
made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-
pants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross
axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can
be carried by one axle (front or rear axle).
Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross
vehicle mass or the maximum gross axle weight
rating for the front or rear axle. Example: Emission Control Information label
% The data is vehicle-speci c and can di er from
that shown.
Technical data 239
Engine number approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

The engine number is stamped onto the crank- guarantee or goodwill gestures.
case. You can obtain further information from a You can identify operating uids approved by
quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the
container:
Operating
Oper ating uids and capacities R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
Notes on operating
operating uids R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating uids is

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating
available at the following locations:
uids harmful to your health
R In the MB Speci cations for operating uids at
Operating uids may be poisonous and harmful https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (by entering
to your health. the designation)
# Observe the text on the original contain-
R At a quali ed specialist workshop
ers when using, storing or disposing of
operating uids. & WARNING Risk of re or explosion from
# Always store operating uids sealed in fuel
their original containers. Fuels are highly ammable.
# Always keep children away from operat-
# Fire, open ames, smoking and creation
ing uids. of sparks must be avoided.
# Switch o the ignition and, if available,
+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIR ONMENTAL AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental the stationary heater, before and while
pollution due to disposing of operating u- refueling the vehicle.
ids in a non-environmentally responsible
manner
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Operating uids include the following:
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
R fuels health.
R exhaust gas a ertreatment additives, e.g. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
DEF contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
R lubricants # Do not inhale fuel vapor.
Incorrect disposal of operating uids can # Keep children away from fuel.
cause considerable damage to the environ- # Keep doors and windows closed during
ment. the refueling process.
# Dispose of operating uids in an environ-
mentally responsible manner. If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
Operating uids include the following: # Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with
R Fuels soap and water.
R Exhaust gas a ertreatment additives, e.g. DEF # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
R Lubricants immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical attention
R Coolant immediately.
R Brake uid # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
R Windshield washer uid tion immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
R Climate control system refrigerants # Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
Only use products which have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused
by the use of products that have not been
240 Technical data
Fuel Note that the higher quality premium grade

gasoline can be refueled at any time.
Notes on fuel grades
grades on vehicles
vehicles with
with a gasoline
gasoline
engine If you are using drums or canisters to refuel the
Observe the notes on operating uids vehicle, you should lter the fuel before lling. This
(/ page 239). will prevent malfunctions in the fuel system due to
contaminated fuel.
* NOTE
NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles Usually you will nd information about the fuel
with a gasoline engine. grade on the fuel pump. If there is no identi cation
on the fuel pump, consult a gas station attendant.
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
% For further information, contact a quali ed
R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise
specialist workshop or visit http://
fuel can enter the engine. www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system Notes on additives
additives in gasoline
gasoline
and the engine. The repair costs are high. Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 239).
# Contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained * NOTE
NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
completely. additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may
Only refuel using low-sulfur regular fuel with at lead to malfunctions.
least 87 AKI/91 RON.
# Only add cleaning additives recommen-
% E10 fuel contains an additive of up to 10% ded by Mercedes-Benzto the fuel.
ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with
E10 fuel. You can fuel your vehicle with E10 Mercedes-Benz recommends using brand-name
fuel. fuels with additives.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel In some countries, the available fuel may not con-
tain su cient amounts of additives. Deposits could
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could build up in the fuel injection system as a result.
result in damage to the fuel system, engine and In this case, in consultation with an authorized
exhaust system. Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel should be mixed
# Only refuel with the recommended fuel. with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel You must observe the notes and mixing ratios indi-
cated on the container.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, engine and Notes on fuel grades
grades on vehicles
vehicles with
with diesel
exhaust system. engines
Never refuel with the following:
General
Gener al notes
notes
R Diesel Observe the notes on operating uids
R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by (/ page 239).
volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by & WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the ash
R Gasoline with additives containing metal point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel.
# Do not mix such fuels with the fuel rec- # Never refuel using gasoline in diesel
ommended for your vehicle.
engines.
% To ensure the longevity and performance of # Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
the engine, only unleaded regular gasoline may

be used.
Technical data 241
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel # Contact a quali ed specialist workshop

to rectify the malfunction.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the engine Re ll only with commercially available ULTRA-LOW
and the emission control system. SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maximum sulfur content
Never refuel with the following: 15 ppm), which ful lls the ASTM D975 standard.
R Gasoline The ow properties of diesel fuel may be inade-
R Marine diesel quate at low outside temperatures due to para n
separation.
R Heating oil
% Malfunctions resulting from para n separation
R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil
can only be recti ed by heating the entire fuel
R Para n or kerosene system. Park the vehicle in a heated garage,
for example.
# Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and
do not use any additive. To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved
ow characteristics is available in the winter
If you have accidentally refueled with the months. You can obtain further information on this
wrong fuel, observe the following: at the gas station or from your fuel supplier.
# Do not switch the ignition on. Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating sys-
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. tem. This additionally improves the ow character-
istics of the diesel fuel by about 14.5°F (8°C).
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used without
* NOTE Malfunctions due to contaminated risk of malfunction down to an outside tempera-
fuel ture of approximately 14.5°F (-10°C).
Fuel contamination can lead to malfunctions in
the fuel system. * NOTE Damage due to gasoline or para n
# If you are using drums or canisters to Gasoline or para n in diesel fuel impairs the
refuel the vehicle, you should lter the lubricity of the fuel. This can result in damage
fuel before lling. to the fuel injection system, for example.
# Do not add any gasoline or para n to
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel diesel fuel to improve its ow character-
istics.
Incorrect fuel can lead to engine damage.
# Refuel only ULSD or diesel fuel with a B20 fuels with
with bio-diesel content
content
sulfur content of maximum 15 ppm.
* NO
NOTE
TE Damage due to incorrect fuel
Usually you will nd information about the fuel
grade on the fuel dispenser. If there is no identi - Continuous use of fuels with bio-diesel content
cation on the fuel pump, consult a gas station over 5% (B20 fuels) can lead to fuel lter clog-
attendant. ging. Deposits may also form on the fuel injec-
tor. This may reduce the engine output.
The fuel grade recommended for your vehicle is Unburned fuel can get into the oil pan. This
found on the instruction label in the fuel ller ap . causes the engine oil level to rise. This can
Notes on low
low outside tem
temper
peratur
atures
es cause engine mechanical damage.
Observe the following points to avoid damage
& WARNING Risk of re and explosion from and reducing the engine output:
igniting fuel # Fill up with fuels with bio-diesel content
If you heat up parts of the fuel system, fuel of 5% (ULSD) or less, whenever possible.
may leak and ignite. Depending on the type of # Regularly check your engine oil level if
damage, fuel might not escape until the engine you use B20 fuels on a regular basis.
is running.
# Never heat fuel system components.
242 Technical data
# Strictly follow the oil change intervals When the tank is open, ammonia vapor can
quoted in the instrument cluster and escape.
within your Maintenance Booklet. # Do not inhale or ingest DEF.
# Use only engine oils and lters approved # Make sure DEF does not come into con-
for use in your vehicle. tact with your skin, eyes or clothing.
# If you do not plan to drive your vehicle for # Keep DEF away from children.
several weeks, completely ll the fuel
# Only ll the DEF tank in well-ventilated
tank in advance with ULSD fuel.
areas.
For more information, consult the gas station sta . If a person comes into contact with DEF,
The identi cation of fuels with bio-diesel content observe the following:
(ULSD or B20) must be clear. If the identi cation is R If you have ingested DEF, drink plenty of
not clear, do not refuel. Do not refuel with any water and seek medical attention immedi-
fuels that have not been approved for your vehicle. ately.
Tank content
content and reserv
reservee fuel R If DEF has come into contact with your
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, eyes, rinse them for 15 minutes, also
depending on the vehicle equipment. beneath the eyelids.
R Immediately rinse DEF o your skin with
Tank content
content and reserv
reservee fuel
soap and water.
Gasoline engine Total capacity
Total
M274 Approx. 22.5 gal * NOTE Damage caused by additives in DEF
(85 liters) or by diluting DEF
Diesel engine Total
Total capacity The DEF exhaust gas a ertreatment system
could be destroyed by the following:
OM642 Approx. 24.5 gal
R Additives in DEF
OM651 (93 liters)
R Diluting DEF
Gasoline engine Of which
which reserv
reservee fuel
# Only use DEF in accordance with ISO
Models with approx. Approx. 5 gal 22241.
22.5 gal (85 l) total (19 liters) # Do not mix additives.
capacity # Do not dilute DEF.
Diesel engine Of which
which reserv
reservee fuel
* NOTE Damage and malfunctions caused
Models with approx. Approx. 5 gal
by impurities in DEF
24.5 gal (93 l) total (19 liters)
capacity Impurities in DEF result in the following:
R Higher emission values
DEF R Damage to the catalytic converter

R Engine damage
Notes on DEF
Observe the notes on operating uids R Malfunctions in the DEF exhaust gas a er-
(/ page 239). treatment system
DEF is a water-soluble uid for the exhaust gas # Avoid impurities in DEF.
a ertreatment of diesel engines.
* NOTE
NOTE Irritation to skin, eyes and respira-
+ ENVIRONMENT
ENVIRONMENTAL
AL NOTE
NOTE Soiling with DEF
tory tract due to DEF DEF residue crystallizes a er some time and
stain the a ected surfaces.
DEF can cause irritation if inhaled or ingested,
or if it comes in contact with eyes or skin. # Immediately rinse surfaces that come in
contact with DEF when lling with water
Technical data 243
or remove DEF with a damp cloth and Therefore re ll the DEF tank regularly during vehi-
cold water. cle operation or, at the latest, a er receiving the
rst warning message via the instrument cluster.
If DEF has already crystallized, clean using a
sponge and cold water.
Engine oil
If you open the DEF tank, small amounts of ammo- Notes on engine oil
nia vapor may be released. Do not inhale any Observe the notes on operating uids
ammonia vapor that may be released. Fill the DEF (/ page 239).
tank only in well-ventilated areas.
DEF consumption
consumption and lling capacity
DEF consumption
consumption
Like fuel consumption, DEF consumption is highly
dependent upon driving style and operating condi-
tions. DEF consumption is usually within a range of
0 and 10% of the fuel consumption. If necessary,
DEF must be re lled in accordance with the
instructions when the re ll message is displayed in
the instrument cluster. This may also be necessary
between the scheduled maintenance. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor-
rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
Total
Tot al capacity of DEF tank
tank
# Do not use engine oils or oil lters other
Vehicle Total capacity
Total
than those which meet the speci cations
All models 5.8 gal (22 liters ) necessary for the prescribed service
intervals.
Exhaust gas
Exhaust gas a ertr
er treatment
eatment # Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in
The vehicle must be operated with DEF if the order to achieve longer change intervals
exhaust gas a ertreatment system is to function than prescribed.
correctly. # Do not use additives.
If you operate the vehicle without DEF or with # Have the engine oil changed a er the
emissions-relevant malfunctions, the legal MOT
prescribed intervals.
approval is invalidated. The vehicle could be pro-
hibited from public road use by an o cial ordi-
Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil
nance.
changed at a quali ed specialist workshop.
It may be improper or punishable in some coun-
Further information on engine oil and oil lter:
tries to operate a vehicle that uses no DEF or one
that does not comply with the speci cations of R In the MB Speci cations for operating uidsat
these operating instructions. https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (by entering
the designation)
Engine management monitors the exhaust gas
a ertreatment components for compliance with R At a quali ed specialist workshop
emissions laws and regulations. If you attempt to
operate the vehicle without DEF, with diluted DEF
or with a di erent reducing agent, this will be
detected by the engine management system.
Other emissions-relevant malfunctions, e.g. meter-
ing malfunctions or sensor errors, are also detec-
ted and logged.
The engine management system subsequently pre-
vents the engine being restarted a er issuing a
warning message.
244 Technical data
Quality and capacity of engine oil Engine oil viscosity

% The containers of the various engine oils are
marked with the ACEA (Association of Euro- * NOTE
NOTE Engine damage due to incorrect SAE
pean Automotive Manufacturers) and/or API classi cation (viscosity) of the engine oil
(America Petroleum Institute) classi cations. If the SAE classi cation (viscosity) of the
Only use approved engine oils that correspond engine oil added is not suitable for prolonged
to the MB Speci cations for operating uids low outside temperatures, it may cause engine
and the prescribed ACEA and/or API classi - damage.
cations named below. Engine oils of other
The temperature readings of the SAE classi -
grades are not permissible and can result in
cation are always based on fresh oil. Engine oil
the loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ages when driving as a result of soot and fuel
The use of other engine oils not approved for
residue. The characteristics of engine oil dete-
diesel engines can damage the diesel particu-
riorate signi cantly at low outside tempera-
late lter (DPF).
tures.
MB-Freig
MB-Fr eigabe
abe orMB-Approv
orMB- Approval
al # Use an engine oil of the appropriate SAE
Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe

MB-Freigabe orMB- classi cation at low outside tempera-
Approval
Approv al tures.
# Use oil for all-year-round operation.
M274 229.5
Diesel engines MB-Freigabe
MB-Freigabe orMB- The temperature readings of the SAE classi cation
Approval
Approv al are always based on fresh oil. The temperature
characteristics of the engine oil, especially at low
OM642 228.51, 229.31, outside temperatures, can deteriorate signi cantly
OM651 229.51, 229.52* due to aging when driving.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
* Recommended for lowest possible fuel consump- change the engine oil before the start of the cold
tion (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; season. Only use an approved engine oil in the
observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE prescribed SAE classi cation for this purpose.
viscosity classes).
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it
is recommended to use the engine oil speci ca-
tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE vis-
cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of
the approved SAE viscosity classes.
If the engine oils listed in the table are not availa-
ble, you may add a maximum 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
the following engine oils once only:
R Vehicles with
with gasoline
gasoline engines: MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4 Viscosity indicates the ow characteristics of a
uid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this
R Vehicles with
with diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it
MB-Approval 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5 is thin. Depending on the respective outside tem-
Multigrade engine oils of the prescribed SAE clas- peratures, select an engine oil according to the
si cation (viscosity) may be used all year round, SAE classi cation (viscosity). The table displays
taking the outside temperature into account. the SAE classi cation to be used. The low temper-
ature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate
signi cantly during operation due to aging and
soot and fuel accretion, for example. A regular oil
change with an approved engine oil in the appro-
priate SAE classi cation is therefore strongly rec-
ommended.
Technical data 245
Additiv
dditives
es Engine oil capacities
Engine Engine oil
* NOTE
NOTE Engine damage due to use of addi-
tives in the engine oil M274 approx. 11.1 qt
The use of additional additives in the engine oil (10.5 liters)
can damage the engine. OM642 approx. 13.2 qt
# Do not use any additional additives in the (12.5 liters)
engine oil.
OM651 approx. 12.2 qt
Miscibility of engine oil Rear-wheel drive (11.5 liters)
The bene ts of high-quality engine oils are reduced
by mixing oil. Information
Infor mation about oil consumption
consumption
We recommend that you only use engine oil of the Depending on the driving style, the vehicle con-
same grade and SAE classi cation as the oil lled sumes a maximum of 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine
at the last oil change. If, in exceptional cases, oil per 620 miles (1000 km).
engine oil of the type in the engine is not available, In the following cases, oil consumption may also
use another approved mineral or synthetic engine exceed this limit:
oil. R The vehicle is new.
Vehicles with
with diesel engines: if the grade is not R You use the vehicle mostly under arduous con-
available, you may also re ll with engine oils ditions.
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 228.5,
R You drive frequently at a high engine speed.
229.3 or 229.5. The re ll quantity is then limited to
maximum 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter). Regular maintenance is a prerequisite for favorable
You must then have an oil change carried out at consumption gures. You can only estimate the oil
the earliest possible opportunity. consumption a er you have driven a considerable
Vehicles with
with gasoline
gasoline engines: if the grade is not distance. Check the oil level in the engine regu-
available, you may re ll with engine oils according larly, e.g. weekly or every time you refuel.
to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3 or
ACEA A3/B4. The re ll quantity is then limited to Notes on brak
brakee uid
maximum 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter).
Observe the notes on operating uids
You must then have an oil change carried out at (/ page 239).
the earliest possible opportunity.
Engine oils are di erentiated according to: & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
R Engine oil brand vapor pockets forming in the brake system
R Grade (MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval) The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture
R SAE classi cation (viscosity)
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the
brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor
Oil chang
changee interv
interval
al pockets may form in the brake system when
The on-board computer automatically shows the the brakes are applied hard.
date of the next oil change as an event message This causes the braking e ect to be impaired.
on the display. # Have the brake uid renewed at the
Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil speci ed intervals.
changed at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* NOTE Damage to paint, plastic or rubber
by brake uid
There is a risk of damage to property if brake
uid comes into contact with paint, plastic or
rubber.
246 Technical data
# If paint, plastic or rubber comes into con- Information on coolant is available at the following
tact with brake uid, rinse with water locations:
immediately. R In the MB Speci cations for operating uids
320.1
Observe the notes on paintwork/matte nish - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
paintwork care (/ page 187).
- In the BeVo app
Have the brake uid renewed every two years at a
R At a quali ed specialist workshop
Only use brake uid approved by Mercedes-Benz in * NOTE Overheating at high outside temper-
accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval atures
331.0.
Information on brake uid is available at the follow- If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine
cooling system is not su ciently protected
ing locations:
against overheating and corrosion at high out-
R In the MB Speci cations for operating uids side temperatures.
331.0 # Always use coolant approved by
- At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com Mercedes-Benz .
- In the BeVo app # Observe the instructions in the MB Spec-
R At a quali ed specialist workshop i cations for operating uids320.1.
Coolant * NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant
Notes on coolant # Do not spill coolant on painted surfaces.

(/ page 239). Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed
& WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from Note the proportion of anti-corrosion agent/anti-
antifreeze freeze in the engine cooling system within the fol-
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- lowing temperature ranges:
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down
may ignite. to about -35°F (-37°C))
# Allow the engine to cool down before R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down
adding antifreeze. to -49°F (-45°C))
# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
Coolant capacities
next to the ller opening.
# Thoroughly clean o any antifreeze from Engine cooling system
system
component parts before starting the Engine Coolant
vehicle.
M274 approx. 3.0 gal
(11.5 liters)
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool-
ant OM642 approx. 2.6 gal
# Only add coolant that has been premixed (10 liters)
with the required antifreeze protection. OM651 approx. 2.5 gal
(9.5 liters)
Windshield washer
washer uid
Notes on windshield washer
washer uid
(/ page 239).
Technical data 247
& WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant
windshield washer concentrate or refrigerant compressor oil
Windshield washer concentrate is highly am- If the incorrect refrigerant or refrigerant com-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact pressor oil (PAG oil) is used, this can damage
with hot engine component parts or the the climate control system.
exhaust system. # Use only R‑134a refrigerant and the PAG
# Make sure that no windshield washer oil approved for your vehicle by
concentrate spills out next to the ller Mercedes-Benz.
opening. # Do not mix the approved PAG oil with
another PAG oil.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due
to unsuitable windshield washer uid Maintenance work, such as adding refrigerant or
replacing components, may be carried out only by
Unsuitable windshield washer uid may dam-
a quali ed specialist workshop. All applicable regu-
age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.
lations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be
# Only use windshield washer uid which is adhered to.
also suitable for use on plastic surfaces,
Have all work on the climate control system car-
e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by

mixing windshield washer uids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win-
terFit with other windshield washer uids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise,

the ll level sensor may give a false reading.
Infor
Information
mation on the
the windshield washer
washer uid
Recommended windshield washer uid: Example: refrigerant information label
R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit 1 Symbols for hazard and service information
R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit 2 Refrigerant capacity
3 Applicable standards
Mixing ratio
ratio
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- 4 PAG oil part number
tion on the anti-freeze container. 5 Refrigerant type
Mix the washer uid with windshield washer uid Warning symbols 1 refer to the following:
all year round. R Potential dangers
Filling capacities R The performance of maintenance work at a
quali ed specialist workshop
Windshield washer
washer system
system
Washer uid 5.8 qt (5.5 l)
Vehicle data
Infor
Information
mation on vehicle
vehicle dimensions
Refr
efrig
iger
erant
ant
The following section contains important technical
Notes on refr
refrig
iger
erant
ant data for your vehicle. Your vehicle documents con-
Observe the notes on operating uids tain further vehicle-speci c and equipment-
(/ page 239). dependent technical data such as vehicle dimen-
% Your vehicle's climate control system may be sions and weights.
lled with the refrigerant R134a. The refriger-
ant R134a contains uorinated greenhouse
gas.
248 Technical data
Trailer hitch
Notes on the
the trailer
trailer hitch
& WARNING Risk of accident due to imper-

missible attachment of a trailer tow hitch
If you install a trailer tow hitch or other compo-
nents, the longitudinal frame member is weak-
ened and can break. The trailer may become
detached from the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
Only retro t a trailer tow hitch if permissible.
Observe the notes on trailer operation

(/ page 158).
Retro tting a trailer hitch is only permissible if a
towing capacity is speci ed in your vehicle docu-
ments.
You can obtain further information on the trailer
hitch at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have a
trailer hitch retro tted at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Only use a trailer hitch which has been tested and
specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle.
Use only a ball neck that has been approved for
your vehicle and for your Sprinter trailer hitch.
Notes on the permissible dimensions of the ball
neck can also be found on the identi cation plate
of the trailer hitch.
The maximum permissible towing capacity for
unbraked trailers is 1,653 lbs (750 kg).
Trailer loads
The permissible weights and loads can also be
obtained from the following sources of information:
R Vehicle documents
R The type plates of the trailer hitch, trailer and
vehicle
The values approved by the manufacturer can be
found in the following table. If the values di er, the
lowest value applies. Use a calibrated weighing
machine to check that the weight restrictions have
been complied with before you start your journey.
Technical data 249
Maximum permissible
permissible weights
weights and loads
Vehicle type, gross
gross vehicle
vehicle weight
weight and curb weight
weight
Vehicle model Per

Permissible
missible gross
gross vehicle
vehicle weight
weight Per
ermissible weight7)
missible unladen weight
GVWR
1500 8550 lbs (3.878 t) 6950 lbs (3.152 t)
(gasoline only)
2500 8550 lbs (3.878 t) 7400 lbs (3.357 t)
(diesel only)
9050 lbs (4.105 t) 6450 lbs (2.926 t)
(gasoline only)
7400 lbs (3.357 t)
(diesel only)
9480 lbs (4.300 t) 7400 lbs (3.357 t)
(diesel only)
3500 9900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only) 7400 lbs (3.357 t)
9989 lbs (4.531 t) (USA only)
3500 XD 11030 lbs (5.003 t) 10470 lbs (4.749 t)
4500 12125 lbs (5.500 t) 9375 lbs (4.252 t)
7)Maximum permissible curb weight of a roadwor-

thy vehicle without driver or vehicle occupants,
including all uids and their reservoirs when lled
up to 100%.
Front axle load, rear

rear axle load, gross
gross weight
weight of vehicle
vehicle combination (series,
(series, optional)
optional)
Vehicle types 1500 and 2500 withwith a max. permissible
permissible gross
gross weight
weight of 8,550 lbs (3.878 t),
t), 9,050 lbs
(4.105 t) and 9,480 lbs (4.300 t)
Per
ermissible
missible front
front axle load GAWR
GAWR (FA)
(FA) Permissible
Per missible rear
rear axle load GAWR
GAWR (RA)
4100 lbs (1.860 t) 5) 5360 lbs (2.431 t)
4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1)
Vehicle type 3500 wit

withh a max. permissible
permissible gross
gross weight
weight of 9,900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only)
only) and 9,989 lbs
(4.531 t) (US
(USA
A only)
only)
Per
ermissible
missible front
GAWR (FA)
(FA) Permissible
Per missible rear
rear axle load GAWR
GAWR (RA)
4080 lbs (1.851 t) 5) 7060 lbs (3.202 t)
4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1)

250 Technical data
Vehicle type 3500 XD with

with a max. permissible
permissible gross
gross weight
weight of 11,030 lbs (5.003 t)
Per
ermissible
missible front
GAWR (FA)
(FA) Permissible
Per missible rear
rear axle load GAWR
GAWR (RA)
4080 lbs (1.851 t) 5) 7720 lbs (3.502 t)
4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1)
Vehicle type 4500 with

permissible gross
gross weight
Per
ermissible
missible front
GAWR (FA)
(FA) Permissible
Per missible rear
rear axle load GAWR
GAWR (RA)
4630 lbs (2.100 t) 7935 lbs (3.599 t)
1) Front axle with increased load capacity.

5)Not in combination with all-wheel drive (4x4) and
not in combination with vehicle model designation
907.745 (combination vehicles with a vehicle
length of 290 in (7,367 mm)).
Gross
Gr oss weight
weight of vehicle
vehicle combination, trailer
trailer load, tongue
tongue weight
weight
Vehicle types 1500 and 2500 with
permissible gross
gross weight
Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross weight
weight of Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer load Per
ermissible
missible tongue
tongue weight
weight TWR
T WR
vehicle/tr
ehicle/trailer
ailer combination GTW,, brak
GTW ed 6)
braked
GCWR 6), 9)
13550 lbs (6.146 t) 5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2) 500 lbs (0.227 t) 2)

permissible gross
gross weight
Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross weight
weight of Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer load Per
ermissible
missible tongue
tongue weight
weight TWR
T WR
vehicle/tr
ehicle/trailer
GTW ed 6)
braked
GCWR6), 9)
13930 lbs (6.319 t) 5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2) 500 lbs (0.227 t) 2)

permissible gross
gross weight
Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross weight
weight of Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer load Per
ermissible
missible tongue
tongue weight
weight TWR
T WR
vehicle/tr
ehicle/trailer
GTW ed 6)
braked
GCWR 6), 9)
9480 lbs (4.300 t) – –
Technical data 251

permissible gross
gross weight
weight of 9,900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only)
only)
Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross weight
weight of Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer load Per
ermissible
missible tongue
tongue weight
weight TWR
T WR
vehicle/tr
ehicle/trailer
GTW ed 6)
braked
GCWR 6), 9)
14900 lbs (6.759 t) 2), only 5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2), only 500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model
for vehicle model designa- for vehicle model designa- designation 907.657 8)
tion 907.657 8) tion 907.657 8)
15250 lbs (6.917 t) 3), not 7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehicle model
tion 907.657 8) tion 907.657 8)

permissible gross
gross weight
weight of 9,990 lbs (4.531 t) (US
(USA
A only)
only)
Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross weight
weight of Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer load Per
ermissible
missible tongue
tongue weight
weight TWR
T WR
vehicle/tr
ehicle/trailer
GTW ed 6)
braked
GCWR 6), 9)
14990 lbs (6.799 t) 2), only 5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only 500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model
tion 907.657 8) tion 907.657 8)
15250 lbs (6.917 t) 3), not 7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehicle model
tion 907.657 8) tion 907.657 8)
Vehicle type 3500 XD with

permissible gross
gross weight
Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross weight
weight of Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer load Per
ermissible
missible tongue
tongue weight
weight TWR
T WR
vehicle/tr
ehicle/trailer
GTW ed 6)
braked
GCWR 6), 9)
15250 lbs (6.917 t) 4) 5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only 500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model
for vehicle model designa- designation 907.657 8)
tion 907.657 8)
optional: 7500 lbs (3.402 t) optional: 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehi-
3), not for vehicle model
cle model designation 907.657 8)
designation 907.657 8)
252 Technical data

permissible gross
gross weight
Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross weight
weight of Per
ermissible
missible trailer
trailer load Per
ermissible
missible tongue
tongue weight
weight TWR
T WR
vehicle/tr
ehicle/trailer
GTW ed 6)
braked
GCWR 6), 9)
15250 lbs (6.917 t) 4) 5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only 500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model
for vehicle model designa- designation 907.657 8)
tion 907.657 8)
optional: 7500 lbs (3.400 t) optional: 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehi-
3), not for vehicle model
cle model designation 907.657 8)
designation 907.657 8)
2)Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- Cargo

Car go tie-down
tie-down points and carrier
carrier systems
systems
city 5,004 lbs (2.270 t).
Infor
Information
mation about the
the cargo
cargo tie-down
tie-down points
3) Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa-
city 7,500 lbs (3.400 t). * NOTE Risk of accident if the maximum
4)Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- loading capacity of the cargo tie-down
city 5,004 lbs (2.270 t) or 7,500 lbs (3.400 t). points is exceeded
6) In trailer operation, do not exceed any individual
If you combine various cargo tie-down points
maximum permissible gross weight of those speci- to secure a load, always take the maximum
ed in the table. loading capacity of the weakest cargo tie-down
8)The vehicle length for vehicles with the vehicle point into account.
model designation 907.657 (Cargo Van) is 290 in During maximum full-stop braking, forces may
(7,367 mm). act which can multiply the weight of the load.
9) It is not possible to tow a trailer on vehicles # Always use several cargo tie-down points
which have not been equipped with a trailer cou- to distribute and spread the load. Distrib-
pling as standard. In this case, the maximum per- ute the load on the cargo tie-down points
missible gross vehicle weight corresponds to the evenly.
maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle
combination. Nominal tensile load is the maximum permissible
% If the trailer coupling is retro tted, adapt the tractive power.
type plates accordingly with the altered, maxi- Further information on the cargo tie-down points
mum permissible weights. Please consult an and tie-down eyes can be obtained in the "Trans-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have porting" section (/ page 174).
any further questions.
Tie-do
ie-down
wn eyes
eyes
Nominal tensile
tensile load of tie-down
tie-down eyes
eyes
Tie-do
ie-down
wn eyes
eyes Nominal tensile
Nominal tensile load
Passenger Van 350 daN
Cargo Van 800 daN
The body builder label is found on the front-end

module above the radiator and contains the maxi-
mum permissible curb weight for the vehicles.
Technical data 253
Loading rails
rails * NOTE Risk of accident if the maximum
Nominal tensile
tensile load of cargo
cargo tie-down
tie-down points in permissible roof load is exceeded
the cargo
cargo compar
compartment
tment If the weight of the roof luggage, including the
Cargo
Car go tie-down
tie-down point Nominal tensile
Nominal tensile load roof rack, exceeds the maximum permissible
roof load, there will be a risk of an accident.
Loading rails on cargo 500 daN # Ensure that the weight of the roof lug-
compartment oor gage and roof rack does not exceed the
Lower loading rail on 200 daN maximum permissible roof load.
side wall # The roof rack supports must be arranged
at an even distance from each other.
Upper loading rail on 125 daN # Mercedes-Benz advises you to install a
side wall
stabilizer on the vehicle's front axle.
The values speci ed apply only to loads resting on
the cargo compartment oor under the following Further information about safety measures can be
found in the "Transport" section (/ page 174).
circumstances:
R The load is secured to two cargo tie-down Max. roof
roof load/pairs
load/pairs of roof
roof rac
rackk supports
suppor ts
points on the rail Vehicles with Maximum Minimum
R The distance to the nearest load-securing point roof load number of
on the same rail is approximately 1 m pairss of sup-
pair
ports
por ts
Infor
Information
mation about roof
roof racks
racks Roof 661 lbs 6
(300 kg)
& WARNING Risk of injury if maximum roof
load is exceeded High roof 331 lbs 3
(150 kg)
The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driv-
ing characteristics as well as the steering and This information applies if the load is distributed
braking characteristics will change. evenly across the entire roof area.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv- If the roof rack is shorter, reduce the load propor-
ing characteristics, as well as the steering and tionately. The maximum load per pair of roof rack
braking characteristics, will be greatly supports is 110 lbs (50 kg).
impaired.
The loading guidelines and other information about
# Always comply with the maximum roof
load distribution and load securing can be found in
load and adjust your driving style. the "Transport" section (/ page 174).
& WARNING Danger of accident due to

uneven loading
The driving characteristics, as well as steering
and braking characteristics, may be greatly
impaired.
# Load the vehicle evenly.
# Secure the load against sliding.
The driving, braking and steering characteristics of

the vehicle will change with the type of load, the
weight and the center of gravity of the load.
254 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Displayy messages
Displa messages
Introduction
Intr oduction
Function of display
display messages
messages
The display messages appear on the multifunction
display.
The display messages with graphic displays can be
displayed in simpli ed format in the Operator's
Manual and may deviate from the display on the
multifunction display. The multifunction display
shows high-priority display messages in red. In
addition, a warning tone sounds for speci c display
messages.
Act in accordance with the display messages and
comply with the additional instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
In addition, symbols are shown for some display
messages:
¤ Further information
O Hide display messages
You can use the le -hand Touch Control to select
between the symbols by swiping to the le or right.
Pressing ¤ displays further information on the
multifunction display. Pressing O hides the dis-
play message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the ¤ button or with the le -hand
Touch Control. The display messages are saved in
the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly
as possible.
You cannot hide high-priority display messages.
The multifunction display will show these display
messages until their causes have been recti ed.
Calling up saved
saved display
display messages
messages
On-board computer:
4 Service 5 1 Message
If there are no display messages, No Messages

appears on the multifunction display.
# Browse through the display messages by swip-
ing upwards or downwards on the le -hand
Touch Control.
# To exit
exit the
the message
message memory:
memory: press the %
button.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 255
Safety
Safety systems
systems
Displayy messages
Displa messages P
Possible
ossible causes/consequences
causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
* The respective window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 37).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in

the window airbag
Left Side Curtain Airbag
Malfunction Service If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unin-
Required (example) tentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an acci-
dent with high deceleration.
# Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
6
* The respective restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 33).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint

system
Front Left Malfunction
Service Required (exam- If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system compo-
ple) nents may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as inten-
ded during an accident. This may a ect the Emergency Tensioning
Devices or airbags, for example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when
the ignition is switched on.
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or
repeatedly during a journey.
6
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 33).

system
SRS Malfunction Service
Required If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system compo-
nents may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as inten-
ded during an accident. This may a ect the Emergency Tensioning
Devices or airbags, for example.
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when
the ignition is switched on.
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
* A malfunction has occurred in the system; the parking brake is inoper-
ative.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunc-

Parking Brake Inopera- tion
tive
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may
be impaired.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed

# Park the vehicle on a level surface only and secure it against roll-
ing away.
# Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: shi the transmission to
position j.
# Have the brake system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop
immediately.
!
* The on-board electrical system voltage is low or a malfunction has
occurred in the system; the holding force may not be su cient for the
incline.
Incline Too Steep See & WARNING Risk of accident if the electrical parking brake has
Operator's Manual insu cient holding force
If the electrical parking brake does not have su cient holding
force on a steep incline, the vehicle may roll away.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface only and secure it against
rolling away.
# Shi the automatic transmission to position j.
Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 134).
!
* The on-board electrical system voltage is low or a malfunction has
occurred in the system; the closing force may not be su cient for the
incline.
Parking Brake See Oper- & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunc-
ator's Manual tion
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may
be impaired.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface only and secure it against roll-
ing away.
# Vehicles with
with automatic
transmission: shi the transmission to
position j.
# Have the brake system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop
immediately.
Displayy messages
Check Brake Pads See * The brakepads have reached their wear limit.
Operator's Manual
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power
When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking
power may be restricted.

# Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
J
* There is not enough brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level

Check Brake Fluid Level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the brak-
ing characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not con-
tinue driving under any circumstances.
# Do not add brake uid.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c condi-

tions. Do not continue driving.
Active Brake Assist Func- * Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
tions Limited See Opera- # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
tor's Manual
Active Brake Assist Func- * Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.

tions Currently Limited The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 142).
See Operator's Manual
# Drive on.
When the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the sys-
tem will be available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop in accordance
with the tra c conditions and restart the engine.
Radar Sensors Dirty See * The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:
Operator's Manual R Dirt on the sensors
R Heavy precipitation
R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or

temporarily unavailable.
When the causes have been eliminated, the driving systems and driv-
ing safety systems will be available again.
If the display message does not disappear, proceed as follows:
Displayy messages
# Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Clean all sensors (/ page 188).
# Restart the engine.
SOS NOT READY * The emergency call system is not available.
Possible causes for this include:
R The ignition is switched o .
R The emergency call system is malfunctioning.
# Switch on the ignition.

If an emergency call is unavailable, a message to this e ect will
appear on the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.
% You can nd more information on the regional availability of the

emergency call system at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect_ecall
T
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal-
functioning.
! & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are mal-
functioning
÷ If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock
when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus
Inoperative See Opera- severely impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking
tor's Manual situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched o .

÷
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
functioning.
Inoperative See Opera- The brake system continues working with the normal e ect. The brak-
tor's Manual ing distance may increase in emergency braking situations.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabiliza-
tion. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o .
# Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Displayy messages
÷
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
functioning.
Currently Unavailable
See Operator's Manual & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
# Carefully drive some gentle curves at a speed greater than

19 mph (30 km/h) on a suitable stretch of road.
# If the display message does not disappear, visit a quali ed special-
ist workshop immediately. Drive carefully when doing so.
!
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be tempo-
rarily unavailable.
÷ & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunction-

ing
Currently Unavailable If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when
See Operator's Manual braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization.
severely impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking
situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched o .
# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed spe-

cialist workshop.
# Carefully drive some gentle curves at a speed greater than

19 mph (30 km/h) on a suitable stretch of road.
# If the display message does not disappear, visit a quali ed special-
ist workshop immediately. Drive carefully when doing so.
!
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
functioning.
÷ The brake system continues working with the normal e ect. The brak-
ing distance may increase in emergency braking situations.
Inoperative See Opera-

tor's Manual
Displayy messages
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunction-
ing
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when
braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization.
severely impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking
situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched o .
# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed spe-

cialist workshop.
Driving
Dr iving systems
systems
Displayy messages
Cruise Control Inopera- * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
tive # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
¯
* Cruise control has been deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, this means cruise control has deactiva-
ted itself automatically (/ page 144).
Off
¯
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions
have been met.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control
- - - mph (/ page 145).
Active Distance Assist * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.

Inoperative Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal-
functioning.
Active Distance Assist * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.

Currently Unavailable The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 147).
See Operator's Manual
# Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions
# Restart the engine

Displayy messages
_
* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:
R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's eld of vision
R Heavy precipitation or fog
Ã Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or

á
If the display message does not disappear:
Currently Unavailable # Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions.
Camera Dirty # Clean the windshield.
# If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:

R Dirt on the sensors
R Heavy precipitation
R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert
The following systems may be a ected:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 147)
Currently Unavailable R Blind Spot Assist (/ page 153)
Radar Sensors Dirty
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 142)

# Clean all sensors (/ page 188).
# Restart the engine.
# If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be
Now Available activated (/ page 148).
ë
* The HOLD function has been deactivated because the vehicle is slip-
ping or an activation condition has not been met.
# Reactivate the HOLD function later on or check the HOLD func-
Off tion's activation conditions (/ page 150).
Blind Spot Assist Inoper- * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning (/ page 153).
ative # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist Trailer * When you establish an electrical connection with the trailer, Blind
Not Monitored Spot Assist will remain available but the area beside the trailer will not
be monitored. The function of Blind Spot Assist may be restricted as a
result (/ page 153).
Displayy messages
# Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display
message.
Blind Spot Assist Cur- * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable (/ page 153).
rently Unavailable See The system limits have been reached (/ page 153).
Operator's Manual
# Drive on.
When the causes have been eliminated, the system will be availa-
ble again.
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop in accordance
with the tra c conditions and restart the engine.
# If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is very dirty,
the sensors in the bumper may malfunction.
Active Lane Keeping * The camera view is restricted (/ page 156).
Assist Camera View Possible causes:
Restricted See Opera-
tor's Manual R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's eld of vision

# Clean the windshield.
Active Lane Keeping * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning (/ page 156).
Assist Inoperative # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable (/ page 156).
Assist Currently Unavail- The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 156).
able See Operator's Man-
# Drive on.
ual

Û
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
ATTENTION ASSIST Inop-

erative
Displayy messages
Û
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or increasing inattentiveness
on the driver's part (/ page 152).
# If necessary, take a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST:
Take a Break!
ð
* You have exceeded the maximum permitted speed (speci c countries
only).
# Drive more slowly.
Maximum Speed Excee-

ded
Engine
Displayy messages
æ
* The fuel supplies have reached the reserve level.
# Refuel.
Fuel Level Low
¸
* Vehicles with
with a diesel engine: The engine air lter is clogged and must
be replaced.
Replace Air Filter
?
* The fan motor is defective.
# Without a high engine load, continue to the nearest quali ed spe-
cialist workshop. Ensure that the coolant temperature display
remains below 248 °F (120 °C).
!
* The water that has accumulated in the water separator has reached
the maximum level.
# Drain the water separator (/ page 185).
Check Fuel Filter
5
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted
or the oil level sensor is faulty.
Engine Oil Level Cannot

Be Measured
4
* Display message for certain engines only:
The engine oil pressure is too low.
Engine Oil Pressure Stop * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient
Switch Off Engine engine oil pressure
# Avoid driving with insu cient engine oil pressure.
Displayy messages
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving.
4
* The engine oil level has fallen to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient

engine oil
Check Engine Oil Level
(Add 1 Liter) # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.
# Check the engine oil level at the next fuel stop.

Re ll engine oil (/ page 181).
Observe the notes on engine oil (/ page 243).
4
The engine oil level is too high.
Engine Oil Reduce Oil * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
Level # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Visit a quali ed specialist workshop immediately and have the

engine oil suctioned o .
4
The engine oil level is too low.
Engine Oil Level Low * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient
Stop Vehicle Turn engine oil
Engine Off # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level.
Add engine oil (/ page 181).
4
* The engine oil level has fallen to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient

engine oil
Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.
# Check the engine oil level at the next fuel stop.

Top up engine oil (/ page 181).
Displayy messages
#
* The battery's charge level is too low.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
# Let the engine run.

Stop Vehicle Leave # Do not continue driving until the display message goes out.
Engine Running
#
* The battery is no longer being charged and has reached an exces-
sively low battery charge level.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Stop Vehicle See Opera-
tor's Manual # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

#
* The engine is o and the battery charge level is too low.
# Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.
# Let the engine run for a few minutes or drive an extended dis-
12 V Battery See Opera- tance.
tor's Manual The battery is charged.
#
* The battery is no longer being charged.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

See Operator's Manual # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Stop in a safe location immediately and switch o the engine.

?
* The coolant is too hot.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and
switch o the engine.
Coolant Too Hot Stop
Vehicle Turn Engine Off & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a
re in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with
# Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the

hood closed and call the re service.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the
engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
Displayy messages
# Let the engine cool down before opening the cap.
# When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety
glasses.
# Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

# Ensure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high engine loads, continue to the nearest quali ed spe-
cialist workshop. Ensure that the coolant temperature display
remains below 248°F (120°C).
?
* The coolant level is too low.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

Check Coolant Level See The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the
Operator's Manual engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
# Let the engine cool down before opening the cap.
# When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety

glasses.
# Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insu cient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant.
# Top up coolant (/ page 183).

Regeneration Not Possi- * Not all conditions have been met for regeneration of the diesel partic-
ble ulate lter (/ page 116).
# Continue driving as normal until all conditions have been met for
regeneration of the diesel particulate lter.
The load condition of the diesel particulate lter is over 50% and the
message still appears on the instrument cluster.
DEF (Diesel Exhaust

Exhaust Fluid)
Displayy messages
å
* In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up on the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
The DEF supply has fallen below the rst warning threshold.
Refill Additive See Opera- # Add at least 2.5 gal (9.5 l) of DEF (/ page 131).
tor's Manual The å DEF indicator lamp only disappears when the vehicle is
stationary, at the latest a er 20 seconds, as soon as you switch
on the ignition or start the engine a er topping up.
Displayy messages
å
* In addition, the yellow DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning tone
sounds.
The DEF supply has fallen below the reserve mark.
Refill Additive Starts A er the message appears for the rst time, the remaining DEF sup-
until Emerg. Op.: XXX ply will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can
See Operator's Manual then only be started another 16 times. The number of remaining
engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in the message every time the
engine is started.
# Add at least 2.5 gal (9.5 l) of DEF (/ page 131). The å DEF
indicator lamp only disappears when the vehicle is stationary, at
the latest a er 20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the ignition
or start the engine a er topping up.
å
* In addition, the yellow DEF indicator lamp å lights up on the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
If the Refill Additive Emergency Op.: XXX mph See Operator's Man-
Refill Additive Emer- ual display message is shown, you can only drive the vehicle at a max-
gency Op.: XXX mph See imum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
Operator's Manual # Add at least 2.5 gal (9.5 l) of DEF (/ page 131).
The DEF indicator lamp å only disappears when the vehicle is
stationary, at the latest a er 20 seconds, as soon as you switch
on the ignition or start the engine a er re lling.
¯
* In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine warning lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds.
The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant
Additive System Fault with ISO 22241.
See Operator's Manual # Have the DEF supply tank cleaned and re lled at a quali ed spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
¯
Starts until Emerg. Op.: The exhaust gas a ertreatment system is defective or an emissions-
XXX See Operator's Man- relevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or fault can dam-
ual age the exhaust gas a ertreatment system.
A er the message appears for the rst time, the engine can be star-
ted another 10 times. The number of remaining engine starts XX (10
to 1) is shown in the message every time the engine is started.
¯
Emergency Op.: XXX In emergency operating mode, you can drive the vehicle only at a
mph See Operator's maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
Tir
ires
es
Displayy messages
Tire Pressure Monitor * The installed wheels do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The
Inoperative No Wheel tire pressure monitor has been switched o .
Sensors # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
h
* The tire pressure sensor signal is missing from one or more tires. No
pressure value is displayed for the tire in question.
# Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed spe-
Tire Press. Sen. Missing cialist workshop.
Tire Press. Monitor Cur- * There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves As a
rently Unavailable result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are received. The tire
pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable.
# Continue driving.
As soon as the cause has been eliminated, the tire pressure moni-
tor automatically switches on.
h
* The pressure in one or more tires suddenly falls. The wheel position is
shown.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tire

Warning Tire Malfunction
Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways:
R The tires can overheat and cause a re.
R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking,
may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Do not drive with a at tire.
# Observe the notes on at tires.
Information about at tires (/ page 193).

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Check the tires.
h
* The pressure in one or more tires has fallen signi cantly. The wheel
position is shown.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure

Check Tires
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tire traction.
R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking,
may be greatly impaired.
# Observe the recommended tire pressure.
# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

Displayy messages
# Check the tire pressure (/ page 210) and the tires.
h
* The pressure in at least one tire is too low or the pressures of the indi-
vidual tires deviate too much from each other.
# Check the tire pressure, and add air if necessary.
Please Correct Tire Pres- # When the tire pressure has been set correctly, re-start the tire
sure pressure monitor (/ page 216).
Tire Pressure Monitor * The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
Inoperative # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
Key
Displayy messages
Â
* This message reminds you not to leave your SmartKey in the vehicle.
# Take the SmartKey with you when you get out of the vehicle.
Don't Forget Your Key
Â
* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning.
# Change the SmartKey's position in the vehicle.
# Start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space

Place the Key in the (/ page 106).
Marked Space See Oper-
ator's Manual
Â
* The SmartKey is not detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch the engine
o :
Key Not Detected (red R You can no longer start the engine.
display message) R You cannot lock the vehicle centrally.
# Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong

radio signal source, proceed as follows:
tions.
# Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting with the
SmartKey (/ page 106).
Â
* The SmartKey is currently not detected.
# Change the SmartKey's position in the vehicle.
# If the SmartKey is still not detected, start the engine with the
Key Not Detected (white SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 106).
display message)
Displayy messages
Â
* The SmartKey's battery is discharged.
# Changing the battery (/ page 48).
Replace Key Battery
Â
* The SmartKey must be replaced.
Obtain a New Key
Vehicle
Displayy messages
¥
* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
# Add washer uid (/ page 184).
Refill Washer Fluid If the display message still appears:

1
* At least one door is open.
# Close all the doors.
f
* The hood is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched

while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in
motion and block your view.
# Never unlatch the engine hood while driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.

tions.
# Close the hood.
&
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
# When the vehicle is at a standstill in a horizontal position and the
engine has cooled down: try to switch on the stationary heater
Inoperative See Opera- four times, leaving a gap of several minutes between each
tor’s Manual attempt.
# If the stationary heater does not switch on: consult a quali ed
Displayy messages
&
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be
switched on.
# Refuel the vehicle.
Inoperative Refuel Vehi-

cle
&
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
The stationary heater has switched o .
# Drive an extended distance until the battery has been su ciently
Inoperative Battery Low charged again.
Ð
* The steering power assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering charac-

teristics
Steering Malfunction
Increased Physical Effort If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely,
See Operator's Manual you will need to use more force to steer.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
# Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
Ð
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steerability is heavily impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Steering Malfunction If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operat-
Stop Immediately See ing safety is jeopardized.
Operator's Manual # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not con-
tinue driving under any circumstances.

Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start * You have attempted to start the engine in transmission position h or
Engine k.
# Shi the transmission to position j or i.
To Engage Transmiss. * You have attempted to shi from position h or i to position k.

Position R First Depress # Depress the brake pedal.
the Brake
# Shi the transmission to position k.
Air Conditioning Malfunc- * The function of the climate control system is temporarily restricted.
tion See Operator's Man- The quantity of air and ow of fresh air are controlled automatically.
ual # Have the climate control system checked at a quali ed specialist
workshop.
Displayy messages
Auxiliary Battery Mal- * The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
function # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Until then, always shi the transmission to position j manually

before you switch o the engine.
# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.
Reversing Not Possible * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to select

Service Required reverse gear.
Transmission Malfunc- * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission automatically

tion Stop shi s to position i.
tions.
# Shi the transmission to position j.
d
* You are about to exit the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
# When you exit the vehicle, switch o the ignition and take the key
with you.
Vehicle Operational # If you do not exit the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers,
Switch the Ignition Off e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V battery may discharge
Before Exiting and it will be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a
second battery (starting assistance).
Service Required Do Not * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no
Shift Gears Visit Dealer longer be changed.
# If the transmission is in position h, visit a quali ed specialist
workshop, without changing the transmission position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle in a safe
location.
# Inform a quali ed specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' when * The transmission can only be shi ed to position j if the vehicle is at
Vehicle is Stationary a standstill.
N Permanently Active * While the vehicle is rolling or driving, the transmission was shi ed to
Risk of Rolling Away position i.
# To stop, depress the brake pedal and, when the vehicle is at a
standstill, shi the transmission to position j.
# To continue your journey, shi the transmission to position h or
k.
Driver's Door Open & * The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position
Transmission Not in P k, i or h.
Risk of Vehicle Rolling # When parking the vehicle, shi the transmission to position j.
Away
Apply Brake to Shift * You have attempted to shi to a di erent transmission position from
from 'P' position j.
# Depress the brake pedal.
Displayy messages
x
* The vehicle has activated services from Mercedes PRO at its disposal.
Locating the vehicle may be possible within the framework of
Mercedes PRO connect.
Veh. Tracking Activated # Check the status of the activated services at http://
See Op. Manual or mercedes.pro.
mobile app # Ask the vehicle owner for the details.
g
* The electrical step is not, or is only partially, extended.
# Ensure there is su cient clearance for the electrical step.
# Open or close the sliding door again.

Step Not Extended See # If the electrical step does not completely extend again, push it in
Operator's Manualor manually (emergency release) (/ page 60).
Step Not Extended Mal-
# Inform passengers that the step is missing before they exit the
function
vehicle.
g
* The electric step is not, or is only partially, retracted.
# Ensure there is su cient clearance for the electric step.
# Open or close the sliding door again.

Step Not Retracted See # If the electric step does not completely retract again, push it in
Operator's Manualor manually (emergency release) (/ page 60).
step not retracted mal-
function
Lights
Displayy messages
b
* You are driving without the low beam.
# Turn the light switch to the L position.
or
Switch On Headlamps # Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
b
* The corresponding light source is faulty.
or
Check Left Low # Check whether changing the bulb is permitted.
Beam (example)
Adaptive Highbeam * The camera view is reduced. Possible causes:

Assist Camera View R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's eld of vision
Restricted See Opera-
tor's Manual
ing safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not go out:
# Stop in a safe location.
Displayy messages
Adaptive Highbeam * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Assist Currently Unavail- The system limits have been reached (/ page 85).
able See Operator's Man-
# Continue driving.
ual
When the causes have been eliminated, the system will be availa-
ble again. The display message Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now
Available appears.
Adaptive Highbeam * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
Assist Inoperative # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
b
* The light sensor is malfunctioning.
Auto Lamp Function

Inoperative
b
* You are leaving the vehicle and the light is still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to position Ã.
Switch Off Lights
b
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
* Vehicles with
with trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch a fuse may have blown.
Malfunction See Opera- # Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions.
tor’s Manual
# Check the fuses, and replace them if necessary(/ page 204).
Indicator
Indicator and war
warning
ning lamps
lamps J Canada: Brakes (red) (/ page 275)
Over
Overvie
view
w of indicator
indicator and war
warning
ning lamps
lamps J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 275)
! ABS malfunction (/ page 275)
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warn- + O -road gear
ing lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behav- ÷ ESP® (/ page 275)
ior is non-critical. These indicator and warning
å ESP® OFF (/ page 275)
lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or
ash a er the engine has been started or during a æ Active Brake Assist switched o
journey. (/ page 142)
Indicator and war
Indicator warning
ning lamps:
lamps: F USA: Electric parking brake applied
L Low beam (/ page 83) and ! (red) (/ page 275)
T Parking lamps (/ page 83) ! Canada: Electric parking brake
applied (red) (/ page 275)
K High beam (/ page 84)
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 84) (/ page 275)
R Rear fog lamp (/ page 83) Ð Electric power steering malfunction
ü Seat belt not fastened (/ page 281) (/ page 281)
$ and USA: Brakes (red) (/ page 275) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 282)
J 6 Restraint system (/ page 275)
; Check Engine (/ page 282)

æ Fuel reserve with fuel ller cap loca-
tion indicator (/ page 282)
? Coolant too hot/cold (/ page 282)
· Distance warning (/ page 281)
% Preglow
h Tire pressure monitoring system
(/ page 216, 214, 216, 215)
Safety
Safety systems
systems
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
!
*V
Vehicles with
with electric
electric parking
parking brak
brake:
e: the electric parking brake red indi-
cator lamp does not light up. The electric parking brake yellow indicator
lamp lights up.
and Meaning of the indicator lamps:
F
R The red indicator lamp does not light up: the electric parking brake
has been released.
R The yellow indicator lamp lights up: the electric parking brake is
Electric parking brake malfunctioning.
applied red indicator lamp # Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
(USA) does not light up
!
# Switch the ignition o and back on.
# If the fault message persists, consult a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
Electric parking brake # Park the vehicle only on level ground and secure it against rolling
applied red indicator lamp away (/ page 136).
(Canada) does not light
up
!
Electric parking brake
malfunctioning yellow
indicator lamp lights up
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
!
*V
Vehicles with
with electric
electric parking
parking brak
brake:
e: the red and yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamps light up.
Meaning of the indicator lamps:
and R The electric parking brake red indicator lamp lights up: the electric
F
parking brake has been applied.
R The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp lights up: the elec-
tric parking brake is malfunctioning.
Red electric parking brake # Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
applied indicator lamp
(USA) lights up # Switch the ignition o and back on.
!
# If the fault message persists, consult a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
# If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake, do not drive
Red electric parking brake the vehicle.
(Canada) lights up
!
!
*V
Vehicles with
with electric
electric parking
parking brak
brake:
cator lamp ashes. The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp
lights up.
F
R The electric parking brake red indicator lamp ashes: the activation
status of the electric parking brake is unknown.
R The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp lights up: the elec-
Red electric parking brake tric parking brake is malfunctioning.
applied indicator lamp # Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
(USA) ashes
!
# Switch the ignition o and back on.
# Engage and release the electric parking brake using the switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
Red electric parking brake # If the fault message persists, park the vehicle on level ground and
applied indicator lamp secure it against rolling away (/ page 136).
(Canada) ashes # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
! # When the red indicator lamp ashes, the vehicle must not be driven
as the brake system may overheat.

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
!
*V
Vehicles with
with electric
electric parking
parking brak
brake:
cator lamp lights up. The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp
does not light up.
F
R The electric parking brake red indicator lamp lights up: the electric
parking brake has been applied.
R The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp does not light up:
Red electric parking brake there are no faults with the electric parking brake.
applied indicator lamp # Do not drive the vehicle if the electric parking brake has been
(USA) lights up applied.
!
Red electric parking brake
(Canada) lights up
!
The electric parking brake
indicator lamp does not
light up
!
*V
Vehicles with
with manual parking
parking brak
brake:
e: the parking brake red indicator
lamp lights up.
Meaning of the indicator lamp:
and R The parking brake red indicator lamp lights up: the parking brake
F
has been applied.
# Do not drive the vehicle if the parking brake has been applied.
Red parking brake applied

indicator lamp (USA)
lights up
!
Red parking brake applied
indicator lamp (Canada)
lights up
J
*The brake system yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunc-

tion
Brake system warning
lamp (yellow) If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may
be impaired.
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
# Drive on carefully at an adjusted speed and at a su cient distance

from the vehicle in front.
# If the multifunction display shows a display message, comply with it.
J
*The brake system red warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
Possible causes:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning.
and R The EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning.
$ R There is not enough brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is

Brake warning lamp (red) malfunctioning
(USA)
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal
J force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics

may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency
braking situations.
Brake warning lamp (red) # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving.
(Canada)
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the EBD (electronic brake force

distribution) malfunctions
If the EBD malfunctions, the wheels may lock during braking.
The braking characteristics may be impaired.
The braking distance can increase in emergency situations.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level

If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking
characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, pay-
ing attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
J
*Only in the USA: The brake system red warning lamp lights up while the
engine is on.
Possible cause:
and R The brakepads have reached their wear limit.
$ & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power

When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking
Brake warning lamp (red) power may be restricted.
(USA) # Drive on carefully.

6
*The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the engine is on.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.

Restraint system warning system
lamp
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintention-
ally or not deploy as planned in an accident.
Detection of a restraint system malfunction:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the
ignition is switched on.
# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
÷
* The ESP® yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunc-
ESP® warning lamp lights tioning.
up
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
÷
* The ESP® yellow warning lamp ashes during a journey.
ESP® intervenes (/ page 140).
# Adapt your driving style to the weather and road conditions.
ESP® warning lamp
ashes
å
*The ESP® OFF yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
ESP® has been switched o .
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated

ESP® OFF warning lamp
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization.
The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
# Comply with instructions to switch ESP® o (/ page 140).
!
*The ABS yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If an additional warning tone sounds, this means the EBD is malfunc-
ABS warning lamp tioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunc-
tioning.
& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunc-

tioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely
impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched
o .

Seat belt
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible
Possible causes/consequences
causes/consequences and M Solutions
7
*The seat belt red warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone
sounds.
The driver or front passenger does not have their belt on while the vehi-
cle is in motion (speeds above 15 mph (25 km/h)).
Seat belt warning lamp
# Put on the seat belt (/ page 36).
ashes
There are objects on the front passenger seat.
# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
7
*The seat belt red warning lamp lights up a er the engine has started.
A warning tone may also sound.
When the vehicle is stationary: The seat belt warning lamp reminds driv-
Seat belt warning lamp ers and front passengers to put on their seat belt.
lights up # Put on the seat belt (/ page 36).
Objects on the front passenger seat may prevent the seat belt warning
lamp from going out.
Driving
Dr iving systems
systems
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
·
*The red distance warning lamp lights up while you are driving and a
warning tone sounds.
You are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
# Be ready to apply the brakes immediately.
Distance warning lamp
# Increase the distance.
Vehicle
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
Ð
*The power steering system red warning lamp lights up while the engine
is on.
The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
Power steering system & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
warning lamp
If the steering no longer functions as intended, the vehicle's operat-
ing safety is jeopardized.

Engine
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
?
*The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R temperature sensor malfunctioning
Coolant warning lamp R coolant level too low
R air supply to the engine radiator obstructed
R engine radiator fan faulty
If a warning tone also sounds, the coolant has exceeded the tempera-
ture of 248 °F (120 °C).
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a
re in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with
# Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the

hood closed and call the re service.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and

switch o the engine. Do not continue driving.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the tempera-

ture scale:
Otherwise:
# Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
# Check the coolant level(/ page 183).
# Ensure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not obstructed.
# Without subjecting the engine to excessive strain, continue to the

nearest quali ed specialist workshop. Ensure that the coolant tem-
perature display remains below 248 °F (120 °C).
#
*The electrical malfunction red warning lamp lights up.
A malfunction has occurred in the electrics.
# Read the messages on the multifunction display.
Electrical malfunction
warning lamp
6
*The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.
Fuel reserve warning lamp

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
;
*The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the
fuel system.
Engine diagnosis warning The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may
lamp be running in emergency operation mode.
# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a quali ed special-
ist workshop.
Tir
ires
es
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
h
*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure
loss/malfunction) ashes for roughly one minute and then lights up per-
manently.
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure
ashes monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not
able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of
the tires.
Underin ated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering
and braking characteristics.
# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali-
h
*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure
loss/malfunction) lights up.
The tire pressure monitoring system has detected a loss of pressure in
at least one tire.
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure
lights up
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tire traction.
R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
# Observe the recommended tire pressure.
# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Check the tire pressure and the tires.
284 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Additiv
dditives
es (DEF)
see DEF
3-zone automatic
automatic climate
climate control
control (con-
trol
tr ol panel)...................................................
panel) 98 Additiv
dditives
es (engine oil)
see Additive
12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) Additiv
dditives
es (fuel)
see Fuel
115 V socket
see Socket (115 V) ADR (wor
(working
king speed control)
control)
Adjusting............................................ 158
360° Camera Function............................................. 157
Care................................................... 188 Switching on/o ................................. 157
A A er-sales
er-sales ser
service
vice center
center
see ASSYST PLUS
ABS (Anti-lock
(Anti-lock Braking
Braking System)
System)................. 139
Air nozzles
Acceler
cceleration
ation see Air vents
see Using kickdown
Air vents
vents
Accident and Breakdo
Breakdown wn Management
Management adjusting (front).................................. 101
Mercedes me connect........................ 171 Adjusting (roof)................................... 101
Activ
ctivee Brak
Brakee Assist Rear passenger compartment............. 102
Function/notes................................... 142 Airbag
Setting................................................ 144 Activation............................................. 34
Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC ONIC Front airbag (driver, co-driver)............... 37
Calling up a speed.............................. 148 Installation locations............................. 37
Function............................................. 147 Overview............................................... 37
Increasing/decreasing speed.............. 148 Protection impaired............................... 38
Requirements..................................... 148 Protection provided............................... 37
Steering wheel buttons....................... 148 Side airbag........................................... 37
Storing a speed................................... 148 Window curtain airbag.......................... 37
Switching o /deactivating.................. 148 Alarm
Alar m system
system
Switching on/activating...................... 148 see ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
System limitations............................... 147
Alertness
Aler tness assistant
assistant
Activ
ctivee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating....................... 157
Function............................................. 156 All-wheel drive
drive
System limitations............................... 156 Engaging............................................. 122
Trailer operation.................................. 156 Engaging/disengaging........................ 122
LOW range.......................................... 123
Adap
daptivtivee cruise
cruise control
control Notes................................................. 121
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Animals
Adap
daptivtivee Highbeam Assist Pets in the vehicle................................. 46
Function............................................... 85
Switching on/o ................................... 85 Anti-lockk braking
Anti-loc braking system
system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Add-on equipment
equipment....................................... 21
Anti-skid chains
chains
Add-on equipment
equipment guidelines......................
guidelines 21 see Snow chains
Additional turn
turn signal light (all-wheel Anti-the
Anti-t he Alar
Alarm
m system
system
driv
dr ivee vehicles)
vehicles)............................................. 90 see ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
Additive Anti-the
Anti-t he prot
protection
ection
DEF............................................ 129, 242 Immobilizer........................................... 63
Engine oil............................................ 243
Anti-the
Anti-t he prot
protection
ection
Additiv
dditiveses see ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
Fuel.................................................... 240
Index 285
Ashtrays Battery
Battery
In the windshield stowage compart- Charging............................................. 195
ment..................................................... 80 Charging the starter battery................ 195
ASR (acceleration
(acceleration skid control)
control)................. 140 Disconnecting the auxiliary battery
in the engine compartment................. 199
Assistance
Assist ance graphic
graphic (on-board
(on-board computcomputer) er)... 167 Disconnecting the starter battery........ 197
Assistance
Assist ance Systems
Systems Jump-starting (vehicle)........................ 195
see Driving safety system Key....................................................... 48
ASSYSTT PLUS
ASSYS PLUS Notes (vehicle).................................... 194
Battery disconnection periods............. 178 Removing or installing the starter
Displaying the service due date........... 178 battery................................................ 198
Function/notes................................... 178 Starter battery.................................... 197
Regular maintenance work.................. 178 Batter
Batt eryy main switch
Special service requirements.............. 178 Notes................................................. 117
ATA
ATA (Anti-
(Anti-The
The Alar
Alarm m system)
system) Switching power supply on/o ............ 118
Activating/deactivating the interior Belt
motion sensor....................................... 64 see Seat belt
Function............................................... 63 Belt war
warning
ning
Interior motion sensor function............. 64 see Seat belt
Stopping the alarm................................ 63
Switching the tow-away alarm on/o .... 64 Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Tow-away alarm function....................... 64 Activating/deactivating....................... 154
Function............................................. 153
Att
ttac
achments
hments............................................... 21 Rear Cross Tra c Alert....................... 155
ATTENTION ASSIST System limitations............................... 153
Activating/deactivating....................... 153 Bottle
Bo ttle holder...............................................
holder 79
Function............................................. 152
System limitations............................... 152 Brake
Br ake
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........... 139
Aut
uthor
horized
ized work
workshop
shop Activating/deactivating the HOLD
see Quali ed specialist workshop function.............................................. 150
Aut
utomatic
omatic distance
distance control
control Active Brake Assist............................. 142
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC BAS (Brake Assist System).................. 140
Aut
utomatic
omatic driving
driving lights...............................
lights 83 Braking with the parking brake............ 110
Downhill gradient................................ 110
Aut
utomatic
omatic measures
measures a er an accident.........
accident 39
Driving instructions............................. 110
Aut
utomatic
omatic transmission
transmission Driving notes...................................... 107
DIRECT SELECT lever.......................... 118 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Engaging drive position....................... 120 bution)................................................ 142
Engaging neutral................................. 119 Heavy and light loads.......................... 110
Engaging reverse gear......................... 119 HOLD function.................................... 150
Kickdown............................................ 121 Limited braking e ect (salt-treated
Restricting the shi range................... 120 roads)................................................. 110
Selecting park position....................... 119 New brake discs and brakepads.......... 110
Transmission position display.............. 118 Wet roadway....................................... 110
Transmission positions........................ 118
Brak
Br akee Assist
Assist System
System
Auxiliar
uxiliaryy heating see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Function............................................. 102
Brak
Br akee Assistance
Assistance
Axle load...................................................
load 237 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brak
Br akee uid
B
Notes................................................. 245
Backk support
Bac Brak
Br akee for
force
ce distr
distribution
ibution
see Lumbar support (4-way) EBD (electronic brake force distri-
BAS (Brak
(Brakee Assist
Assist System)
System)........................ 140 bution)................................................ 142
286 Index
Brak
Br akes
es Overview............................................ 175
Breaking-in notes................................ 107 Carpett (care)
Carpe (care)............................................ 189
New/replaced brake discs and
brakepads........................................... 107 Carrier
Carr ier systems
systems (notes)
(notes)............................. 176
Post-collision brake............................... 39 Changee bulbs
Chang
Breakdo
Br eakdown
wn Additional turn signal light (all-wheel
Assistance overview.............................. 18 drive vehicles)....................................... 90
Changing a wheel................................ 226 Changing a bulb
Roadside Assistance............................. 23 see Changing bulbs
Tow starting........................................ 204 Changing a wheel
Towing away....................................... 200 Lowering the vehicle........................... 230
Transporting the vehicle...................... 202 Preparing............................................ 226
Breakdo
Br eakdown
wn Raising the vehicle.............................. 227
see Flat tire Removing a wheel............................... 229
Breaking-in
Br eaking-in notes
notes...................................... 107 Changing address
address....................................... 23
Bulbs Changing bulbs
Reversing light...................................... 92 High beam............................................ 89
Buttons
Butt ons Indicator (front)..................................... 89
Steering wheel.................................... 165 Interior lamps (rear compartment)......... 93
License plate lamp................................ 92
C Light bulb types halogen headlamps...... 89
Low beam............................................. 89
Car wash
wash Notes.................................................... 88
see Care Tail lamp bulb types (Cargo Van and
Car wash
wash (care)
(care)......................................... 186 Passenger Van)..................................... 90
Care Tail lamp bulb types (chassis)................ 92
Car wash............................................ 186 Turn signal light (rear) (chassis)............. 92
Carpet................................................ 189 Changing lamps
lamps
Display............................................... 189 see Changing bulbs
Exterior lighting................................... 188 Changing owner
owner.......................................... 23
Headliner............................................ 189
Matte nish........................................ 187 Charact
Char acter
eris
istics
tics of the
the tire..........................
tire 221
Paint................................................... 187 Charging
Char ging
Plastic trim......................................... 189 Battery............................................... 195
Power washer..................................... 187 Child safety
safety lock
lock (doors)
(doors).............................. 45
Real wood/trim elements................... 189 Child seat
Rear view camera/360° Camera........ 188 Attaching (notes).................................. 41
Seat belt............................................. 189 Basic instructions................................. 39
Seat cover.......................................... 189 Front-passenger seat (notes)................. 44
Sensors.............................................. 188 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing)............. 42
Tailpipes............................................. 188 Notes on risks and dangers................... 40
Trailer hitch......................................... 188 Rearward-facing child restraint sys-
Washing by hand................................. 187 tem (notes)........................................... 44
Wheels/rims....................................... 188 Securing on the front passenger seat.... 44
Windows............................................. 188 Securing on the rear seat...................... 44
Wiper blades....................................... 188 Top Tether............................................. 43
Cargo
Car go compar
compartment
tment lighting Children
Childr en
Motion detector.................................... 88 Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............. 40
Cargo
Car go compar
compartment
tment ventilation
ventilation Basic instructions................................. 39
Deactivating....................................... 104 Special seat belt retractor..................... 42
Setting................................................ 104 Cigare
Cigarettttee lighter
lighter.......................................... 80
Cargo
Car go tie-down
tie-down points
Information......................................... 252
Index 287
Cleaning Copyrights
Copyr ights
see Care Trademarks........................................... 32
Cleaning wat water
er drain
drain valv
valvee of the
the air Corner
Cor nering
ing light............................................
light 84
intak
int akee box.................................................
box 185 Crosswind
Cr osswind Assist
Climatee control
Climat control Function/notes................................... 141
Activating/deactivating......................... 98 Cruise
Cr uise control
control
Adjusting rear-compartment heating..... 98 Activating........................................... 145
Air distribution settings......................... 99 Buttons............................................... 145
Automatic control................................. 99 Calling up a speed.............................. 145
automatically controlling (rear Deactivating....................................... 145
passenger compartment)...................... 99 Function............................................. 144
Auxiliary heating................................. 102 Requirements..................................... 145
Cargo compartment ventilation........... 104 Selecting............................................ 145
Clearing fogged up windows................ 100 Setting the speed................................ 145
Control panel for 3-zone automatic Storing a speed................................... 145
climate control...................................... 98 System limitations............................... 144
Hot-water auxiliary heater................... 103
Refrigerant.......................................... 247 Cup holders
Setting the air distribution................... 100 Overview of center console................... 79
Switching air-recirculation mode Customer
Cust omer Assistance
Assistance Center
Center (CAC)
(CAC)............. 27
on/o ................................................ 100 Customer
Cust omer Relations
Relations Department
Depar tment.................. 27
Switching the A/C function on/o ........ 99
Switching the rear window defroster D
on/o ................................................ 101
Switching the reset function on/o Dashboard
(control panel).................................... 100 see Cockpit (overview)
Switching the windshield heater Dashboardd lighting
Dashboar
on/o ................................................ 100 see Instrument lighting
Ventilating the vehicle (convenience Dataa acquisition
Dat acquisition (vehicle)
(vehicle)............................ 28
opening)............................................... 62 Dataa prot
Dat protection
ection rights
rights
Ventilation nozzles at front.................. 101 Data storage......................................... 31
Ventilation nozzles in the roof.............. 101
Ventilation nozzles, rear passenger Dataa stor
Dat storage
age
compartment...................................... 102 Data protection rights........................... 31
Cockpit
Coc kpit (over
(overvie
view)
w)........................................ 6 Dealership
Dealer ship
see Quali ed specialist workshop
Combination switch
see High beam Declaration
Declar ation of confor
conformity
mity
see High-beam asher Radio operating permit for head unit..... 25
see Indicator Radio operating permit for wireless
central locking...................................... 24
Comput
Com puterer Radio operating permit of transmit-
see On-board computer ter key.................................................. 25
Convenience
Conv enience closing...................................
closing 62 Radio operating permits for the roof
Convenience
Conv enience opening..................................
opening 62 antenna................................................ 24
Conver
Conv ersions
sions................................................ 21 Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves................. 25
Coolant
Filling capacities................................. 246 DEF
Additive...................................... 129, 242
Coolant (engine) Displaying the ll level......................... 130
Checking level.................................... 183 Filling capacity.................................... 243
Notes................................................. 246 Purity.......................................... 129, 242
Copyr
Cop yright
ight Re lling.............................................. 131
License................................................. 32 De nitions (tir
(tires
es and loading)....................
loading) 222
288 Index
Diagnostics connection...............................
Diagnostics connection 25 ? Check Coolant Level See
Diesel Operator's Manual.............................. 266
Low outside temperatures................... 240 4 Check Engine Oil At Next
Notes................................................. 240
Refueling............................................ 264
Diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt lter
er
Automatic regeneration....................... 116 4 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1
Canceling regeneration....................... 116 Liter)................................................... 264
Displaying load................................... 117 ! Check Fuel Filter........................ 263
Notes................................................. 116
b Check Le Low Beam (exam-
Starting regeneration.......................... 116
ple)..................................................... 273
Digital
Digit al speedometer
speedometer.................................. 168
h Check Tires............................... 268
Dimming the the inside rear rearvie
vieww mirror
mirror............. 96
? Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle
DIRECT SELECT lever lever
Engaging drive position....................... 120 Turn Engine O ................................... 265
Engaging neutral................................. 119 _ Currently Unavailable Camera
Engaging park position automatically... 119 Dirty................................................... 261
Engaging reverse gear......................... 119
Function............................................. 118 ! Currently Unavailable See
Selecting park position....................... 119 Operator's Manual.............................. 259
Transmission positions........................ 118 ÷ Currently Unavailable See
Direction
Dir ection indicator
indicator Operator's Manual.............................. 259
see Indicator Â Don't Forget Your Key................ 269
Displayy (care)
Displa (care)............................................ 189 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Displayy (on-board
Displa (on-board comput
computer) er)..................... 166 Measured........................................... 263
Displayy message
Displa 4 Engine Oil Level Low Stop
Calling up (on-board computer)........... 254
Notes................................................. 254 Vehicle Turn Engine O ....................... 264
Displayy messages
Displa messages 4 Engine Oil Pressure Stop
? ................................................ 263 Switch O Engine............................... 263
¯ - - - mph.................................... 260 4 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level........ 264
# 12 V Battery See Operator's 6 Front Le Malfunction
Manual............................................... 265 Service Required (example)................. 255
¯ Additive System Fault Emer- æ Fuel Level Low........................... 263
gency Op.: XXX mph See Operator's ! Incline Too Steep See Opera-
Manual............................................... 267 tor's Manual....................................... 256
¯ Additive System Fault See & Inoperative Battery Low............. 271
Operator's Manual.............................. 267 & Inoperative Refuel Vehicle.......... 271
¯ Additive System Fault Starts ! Inoperative See Operator's
until Emerg. Op.: XXX See Opera- Manual............................................... 259
tor's Manual....................................... 267 ÷ Inoperative See Operator's
Û ATTENTION ASSIST Inopera- Manual............................................... 258
tive..................................................... 262 T Inoperative See Operator's
Û ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Manual............................................... 258
Break!................................................. 263 & Inoperative See Operator’s
b Auto Lamp Function Inopera- Manual............................................... 270
tive..................................................... 274 Â Key Not Detected (red dis-
J Check Brake Fluid Level............. 257 play message)..................................... 269
Index 289
Â Key Not Detected (white dis- h Tire Press. Sen. Missing............. 268
play message)..................................... 269 x Veh. Tracking Activated See
6 Le Side Curtain Airbag Mal- Op. Manual or mobile app................... 273
function Service Required (example)... 255 d Vehicle Operational Switch
b Malfunction See Operator’s the Ignition O Before Exiting.............. 272
Manual............................................... 274 h Warning Tire Malfunction........... 268
ð Maximum Speed Exceeded........ 263 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur-
Â Obtain a New Key...................... 270 rently Limited See Operator's Man-
¯ O ............................................. 260 ual...................................................... 257
ë O ............................................. 261 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi-
! Parking Brake Inoperative.......... 256 ted See Operator's Manual.................. 257
! Parking Brake See Operator's Active Distance Assist Currently
Manual............................................... 256 Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 260
Â Place the Key in the Marked Active Distance Assist Inoperative....... 260
Space See Operator's Manual............. 269 Active Distance Assist Now Available.. 261
h Please Correct Tire Pressure...... 269 Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera
å Re ll Additive Emergency Op.: View Restricted See Operator's
XXX mph See Operator's Manual......... 267 Manual............................................... 262
å Re ll Additive See Operator's Active Lane Keeping Assist Cur-
Manual............................................... 266 rently Unavailable See Operator's
å Re ll Additive Starts until Manual............................................... 262
Emerg. Op.: XXX See Operator's Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera-
Manual............................................... 267 tive..................................................... 262
¥ Re ll Washer Fluid..................... 270 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera
¸ Replace Air Filter....................... 263 View Restricted See Operator's
Â Replace Key Battery................... 270 Manual............................................... 273
# See Operator's Manual.............. 265 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently
6 SRS Malfunction Service Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 274
Required............................................. 255 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera-
Ð Steering Malfunction tive..................................................... 274
Increased Physical E ort See Oper- Air Conditioning Malfunction See
ator's Manual...................................... 271 Operator's Manual.............................. 271
Ð Steering Malfunction Stop Apply Brake to Shi from 'P'............... 272
Immediately See Operator's Manual.... 271 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction............... 272
g Step Not Extended See Oper- Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavail-
able See Operator's Manual................ 262
ator's Manual or Step Not Extended
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative............... 261
Malfunction........................................ 273
Blind Spot Assist Trailer Not Moni-
# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine
tored.................................................. 261
Running.............................................. 265
Check Brake Pads See Operator's
# Stop Vehicle See Operator's
Manual............................................... 257
Manual............................................... 265
Cruise Control Inoperative.................. 260
b Switch O Lights....................... 274
b Switch On Headlamps................ 273
290 Index
Currently Unavailable Radar Sen- Driving char

Driving charact
acter
eris
istics
tics (unusual)................
(unusual) 208
sors Dirty............................................ 261 Driving
Dr iving instr
instructions
uctions
Driver's Door Open & Transmission Brakes................................................ 110
Breaking-in notes................................ 107
Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away... 272 Downhill gradient................................ 110
N Permanently Active Risk of Roll- Driving in winter.................................. 112
ing Away............................................. 272 Foreign trip (information).................... 110
Only Shi to 'P' when Vehicle is Limited braking e ect (salt-treated
roads)................................................. 110
Stationary........................................... 272 New brake discs and brakepads.......... 110
Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Parking brake...................................... 110
Manual............................................... 257 Subjecting brakes to a load................. 110
Regeneration Not Possible.................. 266 Wet roadway....................................... 110
Reversing Not Possible Service Driving
Dr iving light
see Automatic driving lights
Required............................................. 272
Driving
Dr iving notes
notes
Service Required Do Not Shi Drinking and driving............................ 107
Gears Visit Dealer............................... 272 General driving tips............................. 107
Shi to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine......... 271 Transport by rail.................................. 110
SOS NOT READY................................. 258 Driving
Dr iving safety
safety system
system
Tire Press. Monitor Currently ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........... 139
ASR (acceleration skid control)........... 140
Unavailable......................................... 268 BAS (Brake Assist System).................. 140
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative........ 269 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative bution)................................................ 142
No Wheel Sensors.............................. 268 ESP® Crosswind Assist....................... 141
ESP® trailer stabilization..................... 141
To Engage Transmiss. Position R Overview............................................ 139
First Depress the Brake....................... 271 Radar sensors..................................... 139
Transmission Malfunction Stop............ 272 Responsibility...................................... 138
Display rang
Display rangee (trip
(trip menu)..........................
menu) 168 Driving
Dr iving safety
safety system
system
see Active Brake Assist
Displayy total
Displa total distance
distance (trip
(trip menu)..............
menu) 168
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Distance
Dist ance control
control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Driving
Dr iving system
system
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Distance
Dist ance recor
recorder
der see Active Lane Keeping Assist
see Trip distance see ATTENTION ASSIST
DISTR
DIS TRONIC
ONIC see Blind Spot Assist
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Cruise control
Door see Driving safety system
Locking (emergency key)....................... 51 see HOLD function
Unlocking (emergency key)................... 51 see Lane Keeping Assist
Door control
control panel......................................
panel 16 Driving
Dr iving tips
Driving abroad (symmetrical low
DOT,, Tir
DOT Tiree Identi cation Number (TIN)........
(TIN) 220 beam)................................................... 83
Downhill
Do wnhill driving
driving Driving o -road................................... 112
see DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Driving on ooded roads..................... 112
Drinking
Dr inking and driving
driving.................................. 107 Driving on wet roads........................... 112
Hydroplaning...................................... 112
Driv
Dr ivee Away
Away Assist......................................
Assist 154
Drowsiness
Drow siness detection
detection
Driv
Dr iver's
er's seat
see ATTENTION ASSIST
see Seats
Driving
Dr iving and drinking
drinking.................................. 107
Index 291
DSR (Downhill
(Downhill Speed Regulation)
Regulation) Overview............................................ 192
Activating/deactivating....................... 146 Transferred data................................. 193
Notes................................................. 145 Emergency
Emerg ency engine start start............................ 204
E Emergency
Emerg ency key
Locking the door................................... 51
E10
E10........................................................... 240 Unlocking the door............................... 51
EBD (electronic
(electronic brak brakee for
force
ce distr
distribution)
ibution)... 142 Emergency
Emerg ency operation
operation mode
ECO
EC O display Starting the vehicle............................. 106
Function............................................. 115 Emergency
Emerg ency Tensioning
Tensioning DevicesDevices
Resetting............................................ 169 Activation............................................. 34
Electric
Electr ic parking
parking brake
brake Engaging
Eng aging driv
drivee position (automatic
(automatic
Applying automatically........................ 136 transmission)
tr ansmission)............................................ 120
Applying or releasing manually............ 137
Emergency braking............................. 137 Engaging
Eng aging neutral
neutral (automatic
(automatic transmis-
transmis-
Notes................................................. 136 sion)......................................................... 119
sion)
Releasing automatically....................... 137 Engaging
Eng aging rever
reversese gear
gear............................... 119
Electric
Electr ic sliding door Engaging/diseng
Eng aging/disengaging aging LOWLOW RANGE
RANGE.......... 123
Function............................................... 53 Engine
Opening with button.............................. 53 Engine number.................................... 237
Opening with the door handle............... 55 Parking (start/stop button)................. 134
Opening/closing with the key................ 54 Problems............................................ 129
Programming the key............................ 54 Starting (in emergency operation
Resetting.............................................. 56 mode)................................................. 106
Unlocking manually............................... 55 Starting (start/stop button)................ 106
Electrical
Electr ical closing assist Starting assistance............................. 195
Notes.................................................... 53 Engine electronics
electronics (notes)
(notes)......................... 236
Electrical
Electr ical consumption
consumption Engine number..........................................
number 237
Key....................................................... 48 Engine oil
Electrical
Electr ical fuses Additive.............................................. 243
see Fuses Checking the oil level (on-board
Electrical
Electr ical step
step computer)........................................... 180
Emergency release................................ 60 Checking the oil level with a dipstick... 181
Extending/retracting............................. 59 Filling capacity.................................... 244
Function............................................... 59 Topping up.......................................... 181
Obstacle............................................... 59 Engine output
Preventing extending............................. 59 Notes on changes................................. 26
Electronic
Electr onic Stability
Stability Progr
Program am ENR (electronic
(electronic level
level control)
control)
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Function............................................. 123
Electronics
Electr onics................................................ 236 Lowering the vehicle........................... 124
Manually in ating air bellows............... 127
Emergency
Emerg ency Problems............................................ 127
Assistance overview.............................. 18 Raising the vehicle.............................. 124
First-aid kit (so sided)....................... 192
Safety vest.......................................... 192 Envir
En vironment
onmental al prot
protection
ection
Warning lamp...................................... 192 Notes.................................................... 20
Emergency
Emerg ency braking
braking ESC (Electronic
(Electronic Stability
Stability Control)
Control)
Electric parking brake......................... 137 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Manual parking brake.......................... 136 ESP®
Emergency
Emerg ency call system
system Crosswind Assist................................. 141
Automatic emergency call................... 193 Trailer stabilization.............................. 141
Information......................................... 192
Manual emergency call....................... 193
292 Index
ESP® (Electr
(Electronic
onic Stability
Stability Progr
Program)
am) Problems............................................ 129
Activating/deactivating....................... 141 Quality (diesel).................................... 240
Function/notes................................... 140 Quality (gasoline)................................ 240
Exhaustt emission monitor
Exhaus monitoring ing..................... 109 Refueling............................................ 127
Sulfur content..................................... 240
Exter
Exterior
ior lighting Tank capacity...................................... 242
Care................................................... 188
Fuel consumption
consumption (on-board
(on-board computcomputer) er)..... 168
Exter
Exterior
ior lighting
see Lights Fuses
Before replacing.................................. 204
F Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell............................................... 205
Fatigue detection
detection Fuse box in the seat base of the
see ATTENTION ASSIST driver's seat........................................ 204
Firs
irst-aid
t-aid kit (so sided)
sided)............................. 192 Notes................................................. 204
Flat tire
Changing a wheel................................ 226 G
Notes................................................. 193 Gasoline
Gasoline................................................... 240
Floor cover
covering
ing General
Gener al operating
operating permit
permit number (EC)......
(EC) 237
Installing/removing (starter battery).... 197 Genuine parts
par ts............................................. 20
Floor mat....................................................
mat 81 Getting
Ge tting into
into and out of the the vehicle
vehicle............... 51
For
oreign
eign trip
trip Grab
Gr ab handles
Instructions........................................ 110 Using.................................................... 51
symmetrical low beam.......................... 83
Gross
Gr oss axle weight
weight rating
rating............................ 237
Free
Fr ee so ware
ware.............................................. 32
Freq
Fr equencies
uencies H
Mobile phone...................................... 236 Handbrakee (electrical)
Handbrak (electrical)
Two-way radio..................................... 236 see Electric parking brake
Front
Fr ont airbag (driv
(driver
er,, co-driv
co-driver)er)..................... 37 Handbrak
Handbr akee (manual)
Front
Fr ont door see Manual parking brake
Opening (from inside)............................ 49 Handling control
control system
system
Unlocking (from inside)......................... 49 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Front
Fr ont passenger
passenger bench
bench seat Hazardd war
Hazar warning
ning light system
system
Folding the seat cushion forwards/ Switching on/o ................................... 84
backwards............................................ 72
Hazardous
Hazar dous substances
substances
Front
Fr ont seats Information........................................... 23
8-way adjustment options..................... 69
Adjusting (electrically)........................... 69 Head res
restrtraint
aint
Adjusting (manually)........................ 66, 68 Adjusting mechanically......................... 76
Memory function.................................. 69 Head unit
Turning................................................. 71 Radio operating permit.......................... 25
With Seat Comfort Package.................. 68 Headliner (care)
(care)........................................ 189
Without Seat Comfort Package.............. 66
Heating system
system (control
(control panel)....................
panel) 97
Fuel
Additives............................................. 240 High beam
Diesel................................................. 240 Activating/deactivating......................... 84
Draining the lter................................ 185 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 85
E10.................................................... 240 Changing bulbs..................................... 89
Flexible fuel vehicles........................... 240 High-beam asher asher....................................... 84
Fuel reserve........................................ 242 Hill star
startt assist..........................................
assist 149
Gasoline............................................. 240
Low outside temperatures................... 240 HOLD function
Notes................................................. 150
Index 293
Switching on/o ................................. 150 J

Hot-w
Hot-wat
ater
er auxiliary
auxiliar y heater
heater Jack
Function............................................. 103 Hydraulic............................................ 206
Problems............................................ 104 Removing the hydraulic jack from
Switching on/o with on-board the stowage compartment.................. 206
computer............................................ 103 Storage location of hydraulic jack........ 206
switching on/o with the button......... 103
Jump-st
Jum p-star
artt connection...............................
connection 195
Hydroplaning
Hydr oplaning............................................ 112
K
I
Key
Identi cation plate Battery................................................. 48
Engine................................................ 237 Electrical consumption.......................... 48
Refrigerant.......................................... 247 Functions.............................................. 47
Vehicle............................................... 237 Key ring attachment.............................. 48
Ignition key Mechanical key..................................... 48
see Key Overview............................................... 47
Immobilizer................................................. 63
Immobilizer Problem................................................ 49
Radio connection.................................. 47
Indicator
Indicat or Unlocking setting.................................. 48
Activating/deactivating......................... 84
Changing bulbs (front)........................... 89 L
Changing bulbs (rear) (Cargo Van
and Passenger Van).............................. 91 Labeling (tires)
(tires)
Changing bulbs (rear) (chassis).............. 92 see Tire labeling
Inside rear
rearvie
vieww mirror
mirror display Lane detection
detection (automatic)
(automatic)
Functions............................................ 151 see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Installations
Inst allations................................................ 21 Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
Function............................................. 155
Instr
Ins trument
ument display
System limitations............................... 155
Adjusting the lighting.......................... 166
Trailer operation.................................. 155
Function/notes................................... 164
Overview......................................... 8, 164 Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Instr
Ins trument
ument Display
see Lane Keeping Assist
see Warning/indicator lamp
LATCH-type
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child child seat anchor
anchor
Instr
Ins trument
ument lighting....................................
lighting 166
Installing............................................... 42
Intellig
Int elligent
ent light system
system
Level
Level control
control
Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 85
see ENR (electronic level control)
Cornering light...................................... 84
License plate
plate lamp
lamp (changing
(changing bulbs)............
bulbs) 92
Inter
Int erior
ior lamps
lamps (rear
(rear compar
compartment)tment)
(replacing
(r eplacing the
the light bulbs)............................
bulbs) 93 Light switch
switch (over
(overvie
view)
w)................................ 83
Inter
Int erior
ior lighting Lighting
Box bodies............................................ 86 Adjusting the instrument lighting......... 166
Bus equipment...................................... 87 Lighting
Cargo compartment.............................. 88 see Lights
Reading lamp above the passenger Lights
seat...................................................... 88 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 85
Rear compartment................................ 88 Automatic driving lights......................... 83
Setting.................................................. 86 Combination switch.............................. 84
Inter
Int erior
ior motion
motion sensor Cornering light...................................... 84
Function............................................... 64 Driving abroad (symmetrical low
Switching on/o ................................... 64 beam)................................................... 83
Hazard warning light............................. 84
294 Index
High beam............................................ 84 Maximum grossgross vehicle

vehicle weight
weight.................. 237
High-beam asher................................. 84 Maximum load
Indicator............................................... 84 Determining........................................ 217
Light switch.......................................... 83 Sample calculation.............................. 218
Low beam............................................. 83
Parking light.......................................... 83 Maximum tire tire load....................................
load 220
Rear fog lamp....................................... 83 Maximum tire tire pressure
pressure............................. 221
Responsibility with lighting systems....... 83 Mechanical
Mec hanical key
Limited
Limit ed Warr
Warranty
anty (vehicle)
(vehicle)........................... 28 Removing/inserting.............................. 48
Limiting speed..........................................
speed 109 Medical aids...............................................
aids 27
Load Memoryy function (seat)...............................
Memor (seat) 71
Determining the maximum.................. 217 Menu (on-board
(on-board comput
computer) er)
Sample calculation.............................. 218 Assistance graphic.............................. 167
Load distr
distribution
ibution....................................... 174 Overview............................................ 165
Load securing
securing Service............................................... 167
Cargo tie-down points......................... 175 Settings.............................................. 169
Installing and removing tie-down Trip..................................................... 168
eyes.................................................... 175 Mercedes
Mer cedes me calls
Notes................................................. 174 Information......................................... 170
Load-bearing
Load-bear ing capacity (tires)
(tires)..................... 221 Transferred data................................. 170
Loading Mercedes
Mer cedes me connect
De nitions.......................................... 222 Accident and Breakdown Manage-
ment................................................... 171
Loading guidelines....................................
guidelines 173 Information......................................... 171
Loading infor
information
mation table
table.......................... 216 Making a call via the overhead con-
Low
Low beam trol panel............................................ 170
Activating/deactivating......................... 83 Transferred data................................. 172
Changing bulbs..................................... 89 Messagee (multifunction display)
Messag display)
Setting for abroad (symmetrical)........... 83 see Display message
LOW
LO W range
range................................................ 122 Messagee memory......................................
Messag memory 254
Lubr
ubricant
icant additives
additives Mirrors
Mirr ors
see Additive Adjusting the inside rearview mirror...... 96
Lumbar support
suppor t (4-way)
(4-way).............................. 71 Mirrors
Mirr ors
see Outside mirrors
M Mobile phone
M+S tires
tires.................................................. 209 Frequencies........................................ 236
Maintenance
Maint enance Transmission output (maximum).......... 236
Vehicle................................................. 23 Mobile phone
Maintenance
Maint enance see Mobile phone
see ASSYST PLUS Model series
series
Malfunction see Vehicle identi cation plate
Restraint system................................... 33 Mounting a load........................................
load 173
Malfunction message Multi Purpose
Purpose Vehicle
Vehicle (MPV).......................
(MPV) 27
see Display message Multifunction display
display (on-board
(on-board com-
Manual parking
parking brake
brake puter)
puter)........................................................ 166
Applying/releasing............................. 135 Multifunction steer
steeringing wheel
Emergency braking............................. 136 Button overview.................................. 165
Folding up/down................................ 135
Multifunction steer
steeringing wheel
Manuallyy in ating air bellows
Manuall bellows (ENR)...........
(ENR) 127 see Steering wheel
Mattee nish (cleaning instr
Matt instructions)
uctions)............ 187
Index 295
N Fuel (diesel)........................................ 240

Fuel (gasoline).................................... 240
Nozzles Notes................................................. 239
see Air vents Windshield washer uid............... 246, 247
O Operating
Oper ating Instr
Instructions
uctions (vehicle
(vehicle equip-
equip-
ment).......................................................... 22
ment)
Occupant safety
safety
see Airbag Operating
Oper ating safety
safety
see Automatic measures a er an accident Changes in the engine power output..... 26
see Child seat Declaration of conformity (wireless
see Pets in the vehicle vehicle components)............................. 25
see Post-collision brake Information........................................... 23
see Restraint system Operating
Oper ating system
system
see Seat belt On-board computer............................. 165
Odometer
Odomet er Outside mirrors
mirrors
see Display total distance (trip menu) folding in/out....................................... 95
Oil Setting.................................................. 95
see Engine oil Setting options..................................... 16
On-boardd comput
On-boar computer er Over
Overhead
head control
control panel
Adjusting stationary heater/ventila- Adjusting the interior lighting................. 86
tion..................................................... 103 Overview............................................... 11
Assistance graphic menu.................... 167
Diesel particulate lter load display..... 117 P
Displaying the service due date........... 178 Paint (cleaning instr
instructions)
uctions)...................... 187
Menus overview.................................. 165 Paint code................................................
code 237
Multifunction display........................... 166
Operating........................................... 165 Par
arkk position
Service menu...................................... 167 Engaging............................................. 119
Settings menu..................................... 169 Engaging automatically....................... 119
Trip menu........................................... 168 Par
arking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTR TRONIC
ONIC
On-boardd diagnostic
On-boar diagnostic interf
interface
ace Drive Away Assist................................ 154
see Diagnostics connection Par
arking
king brak
brakee (electrical)
(electrical)
On-boardd electronics
On-boar electronics see Electric parking brake
Engine electronics.............................. 236 Par
arking
king brak
brakee (manual)
Notes................................................. 236 see Manual parking brake
Two-way radios................................... 236 Par
arking
king for
for an ext
extended
ended period
period.................. 138
Onboardd Logic Unit
Onboar Unit Par
arking
king light................................................
light 83
Online services..................................... 30 Par
artition
tition sliding door
Vehicle data storage............................. 30 From the cargo compartment................ 58
Open-source
Open-sour ce so wareware................................. 32 From the driver's compartment............. 58
Opening rear
rear-end
-end doors
doors with
with door Per
ermissible
missible gross
gross mass.............................
mass 237
retainer
ret ainer Per
ermissible
missible towing
towing methods
methods...................... 200
Opening................................................ 57
Pets
Pe ts in the
the vehicle
vehicle....................................... 46
Opening thethe cup holder in the the rear
rear
passenger
passeng er compar
compartmenttment............................. 79 Placing a load on the the wheel arch arch............... 176
Opening/closing the the hood........................
hood 178 Plastic
Plas tic trim
trim (care)
(care)...................................... 189
Operating
Oper ating uids Pos
ost-collision
t-collision brake
brake..................................... 39
Additives (fuel).................................... 240 Power
Pow er supply
Brake uid.......................................... 245 Battery main switch............................ 118
Coolant (engine)................................. 246 Switching on (start/stop button)......... 105
DEF.................................................... 242 Power
Pow er washer
washer (care)
(care).................................. 187
Engine oil............................................ 243
296 Index
Q Remo
emovingving the
the vehicle
vehicle tooltool kit.....................
kit 206
QR code (rescue
(rescue card)
card)................................ 28 Replacing a wheel
Installing a new wheel......................... 229
Quali ed specialis
specialistt work
workshop
shop...................... 26
Replacing light bulbs
R Indicators (rear) (Cargo Van and
Passenger Van)..................................... 91
Radar sensors...........................................
sensors 139 Reversing lights (Cargo Van and
Radio connection Passenger Van)..................................... 91
Key....................................................... 47 Repor
eportingting safety
safety defects
defects............................. 27
Radio operating
operating permit
permit Rescue card................................................
card 28
Head unit.............................................. 25
Roof antenna........................................ 24 Res
estr
traint
aint system
system
Transmitter key..................................... 25 Basic instructions for children............... 39
Wireless central locking........................ 24 Function in an accident......................... 34
Functionality......................................... 33
Real wood
wood (care)
(care)....................................... 189 Malfunction.......................................... 33
Rear Protection limited.................................. 33
Motion detector.................................... 88 Protection provided............................... 33
Rear bench
bench seat Self-test................................................ 33
see Seats Warning lamps...................................... 33
Rear Cross
Cross TrTraa c Alert
Alert............................. 155 Res
estr
tricting
icting the
the shi range ange......................... 120
Rear fog
fog lamp..............................................
lamp 83 Rever
Rev ersing
sing light
Changing bulbs..................................... 92
Rear view
view camera
Care................................................... 188 Rever
Rev ersing
sing lights
Functions............................................ 151 Replacing light bulbs (Cargo Van
With rear-view mirror display............... 151 and Passenger Van).............................. 91
Rear windo
window w wiper Rims (care)
(care)............................................... 188
Replacing.............................................. 95 Roadside Assistance
Assistance (breakdo
(breakdown) wn)............... 23
Switching on/o ................................... 94 Roll away
away protection
protection
Rear
ear-com
-comparpartment
tment heating..........................
heating 98 see HOLD function
Rear
ear-end
-end doors Roof antenna
antenna
Opening and closing (from inside)......... 58 Radio operating permit.......................... 24
Opening and closing (from outside)....... 56 Roof luggag
luggagee rac
rackk (notes)
(notes).......................... 176
Rear
ear-vie
-view
w mirror
mirror display Roof rack
rack.................................................. 253
Displaying/hiding................................ 151
Reducing agent
agent S
see DEF Safety systems
Safety systems
Refr
efrig
iger
erant
ant (air conditioning) see Driving safety system
Notes................................................. 247 Safety
Safety vest
vest................................................ 192
Refuel Seat belt
Displaying the DEF level...................... 130 Adjusting the height.............................. 36
Re lling DEF....................................... 131 Care................................................... 189
Refueling Fastening.............................................. 36
Refueling the vehicle........................... 127 Protection impaired............................... 35
Reg
egener
eneration
ation Protection provided............................... 34
Canceling........................................... 116 Releasing.............................................. 37
Notes................................................. 116 Warning lamps...................................... 37
Starting.............................................. 116 Seat cover
cover (care)
(care)....................................... 189
Regis
egistrtration
ation Seats
Vehicle................................................. 26 4-way lumbar support........................... 71
Index 297
8-way adjustment options..................... 69 Problem................................................ 62

Adjusting the head restraints Resetting.............................................. 62
mechanically......................................... 76 Size designation (tires)
(tires).............................. 221
Adjusting the seat backrests (rear
bench seat)........................................... 76 Sliding door
Adjusting the seat cushion (twin co- B-pillar door sill (button)........................ 53
driver's seat)......................................... 72 Center console (button)........................ 53
correct driver's seat position................. 66 Child safety lock................................... 45
Folding the folding seat up/down.......... 72 Opening and closing (from the inside)... 52
front (adjust electrically)....................... 69 Opening and closing (from the out-
Front (adjusting manually, with Seat side)..................................................... 52
Comfort Package)................................. 68 Snow
Sno w chains
chains............................................. 209
Front (adjusting mechanically, with- Socke
Sockett (12 V)
out Seat Comfort Package)................... 66 Front center console............................. 80
Front (adjusting mechanically)............... 68
Socke
Sockett (115 V)
Installing and removing rear bench
Lower control panel.............................. 81
seat...................................................... 73
Memory function.................................. 69 Sparee wheel
Spar
Operating the memory function............. 71 Installing/removing............................. 232
Setting options..................................... 16 Notes................................................. 231
Turning (front seat)................................ 71 Special seat belt retr retract
actoror........................... 42
With Seat Comfort Package.................. 68 Specialistt work
Specialis workshop
shop
Without Seat Comfort Package.............. 66 see Quali ed specialist workshop
Securing
Secur ing luggage
luggage...................................... 173 Speed limitation,
limitation, winter
winter tires
tires
Selector
Select or lever
lever Setting................................................ 145
see DIRECT SELECT lever Speed rating
rating (tires)
(tires)................................... 221
Sensorss (care)
Sensor (care).......................................... 188 Speedometer
Speedomet er (digital)
(digital)................................ 168
Service
Ser vice Standb
St andbyy mode
see ASSYST PLUS Activating/deactivating....................... 138
Service
Ser vice (on-board
(on-board comput
computer) er)..................... 167 Star
St art/st
t/stopop button
button
Service
Ser vice center
center Parking the vehicle.............................. 134
see Quali ed specialist workshop Starting the vehicle............................. 106
Service
Ser vice interv
interval
al display Switching on the power supply or
see ASSYST PLUS the ignition......................................... 105
Service
Ser vice products
products Star
St arting
ting
Refrigerant (air conditioning)............... 247 see Vehicle
Setting
Se tting the
the speed Star
St arting
ting assistance
assistance
see Cruise control see Jump-start connection
Settings
Se ttings (on-board
(on-board comput
computer) er).................... 169 Star
St arting-o
ting-o aid
see Hill start assist
Short-dist
Shor t-distance
ance trips
trips.................................. 109
Stationar
St ationaryy heater
heater
Side airbag..................................................
airbag 37
Problems............................................ 104
Side window
Stationar
St ationaryy heating/ventilation
heating/ventilation
Closing using the key............................ 62
Adjusting (on-board computer)............ 103
Convenience closing............................. 62
Convenience opening............................ 62 Stationar
St ationaryy heating/ventilation
heating/ventilation
Opening with the key............................. 62 see Auxiliary heating
see Hot-water auxiliary heater
Side windows
Closing................................................. 60 Steer
Steering
ing wheel
Closing (all)........................................... 60 Adjusting.............................................. 78
Opening................................................ 60 Buttons............................................... 165
Opening (all)......................................... 60 Stopping
Stopping thethe alarm
alarm (ATA)
(ATA)............................. 63
298 Index
Stowag
agee areas
areas Traction grade..................................... 219
see Stowage space Tread wear grade................................ 219
Stowag
Stow agee compar
compartments
tments Tir
iree load (maximum)..................................
(maximum) 220
see Stowage space Tir
iree pressure
pressure
Stowag
Stow agee space Checking (tire pressure monitoring
Armrest................................................ 78 system)............................................... 215
Center console..................................... 78 Maximum............................................ 221
Door..................................................... 78 Notes................................................. 210
Glove box.............................................. 78 Restarting the tire pressure monitor.... 216
Sulfur content
content........................................... 240 Tire pressure monitoring system
(function)............................................ 214
Summer tires
tires............................................ 208 Tire pressure table...................... 211, 214
Switching
Switc hing air-r
air-recir
ecirculation
culation mode on/o .... 100 Tir
iree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor
Switching
Switc hing on ignition (star(start/st
t/stopop button)
button)... 105 Checking the tire pressure.................. 215
Switching
Switc hing seat heating on/o ..................... 77 Checking the tire temperature............. 215
Function............................................. 214
Switching
Switc hing the
the A/C function on/o .............. 99
Restarting........................................... 216
Switching
Switc hing the
the rear
rear window
window defrost
defroster er Technical data..................................... 216
on/o ...................................................... 101
Tir
iree pressur
pressuree table
table............................ 211, 214
Switching
Switc hing the
the rese
resett function on/o
Tir
iree quality
quality grades
grades..................................... 219
(control
(contr ol panel)..........................................
panel) 100
Tir
iree tem
temper
perature
ature
Switching
Switc hing the
the windshield heaterheater on/o ..... 100
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system)............................................... 215
T
Tire pressure monitoring system
Tailpipes (care)
(care).......................................... 188 (function)............................................ 214
Tank capacity Tir
iree tread
tread.................................................. 208
Fuel.................................................... 242 Tir
ire-c
e-chang
hangee tool
tool kit...................................
kit 226
Reserve (fuel)...................................... 242
Tir
ires
es
Tank content
content Characteristics................................... 221
DEF.................................................... 243 Checking............................................ 208
Tec
echnical
hnical data Checking the tire pressure (tire
Information......................................... 236 pressure monitoring system)............... 215
Notes (trailer hitch)............................. 248 De nitions.......................................... 222
Tire pressure monitor.......................... 216 Direction of rotation............................ 226
Vehicle identi cation plate.................. 237 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN).. 220
Tem
emperperatur
aturee grade
grade.................................... 219 Flat tire............................................... 193
Tie-do
ie-down wn eyes
eyes........................................... 175 Installing............................................. 229
Load-bearing capacity......................... 221
Tir
iree and Loading Infor Information
mation placard
placard......... 216 M+S tires............................................ 209
Tir
iree Identi cation Number (TIN).................
(TIN) 220 Maximum tire load.............................. 220
Tir
iree infor
information
mation table
table................................ 216 Maximum tire pressure....................... 221
Noise.................................................. 208
Tir
iree labeling Notes on installing.............................. 223
Characteristics................................... 221 Overview of tire labeling...................... 219
DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN).. 220 Removing............................................ 229
Load-bearing capacity......................... 221 Replacing.................................... 223, 226
Maximum tire load.............................. 220 Restarting the tire pressure monitor.... 216
Maximum tire pressure....................... 221 Selecting............................................ 223
Overview............................................ 219 Size designation.................................. 221
Size designation.................................. 221 Snow chains....................................... 209
Speed rating....................................... 221 Speed rating....................................... 221
Temperature grade.............................. 219 Storing................................................ 226
Tire quality grades............................... 219
Index 299
Summer tires...................................... 208 Permissible trailer loads and trailer

Temperature grade.............................. 219 drawbar noseweights.......................... 162
Tire and Loading Information placard.. 216 Power supply...................................... 163
Tire pressure (notes)........................... 210 Socket................................................ 160
Tire pressure monitoring system Trailer loads........................................ 248
(function)............................................ 214 Trailer stabilization
stabilization.................................... 141
Tire pressure table...................... 211, 214
Tire quality grades............................... 219 Transmission
Tr ansmission position display....................
display 118
Traction grade..................................... 219 Transmission
Tr ansmission ratio
ratio
Tread wear grade................................ 219 LOW range.......................................... 122
Unusual driving characteristics............ 208 Transmission
Tr ansmission ratio
ratio
Wheel size categories......................... 225 see Engaging/disengaging LOW RANGE
Tool Transmitt
Tr ansmitter er key
see Removing the vehicle tool kit Radio operating permit.......................... 25
see Vehicle tool kit
Transpor
Tr ansportt byby rail
rail........................................ 110
see Vehicle tool kit stowage compartment
Transpor
Tr ansporting
ting (vehicle
(vehicle breakdo
breakdown) wn).............. 202
Top Tether
Tether................................................... 43
Tread
Tr ead wear
wear grade
grade...................................... 219
Topping up the the windshield washer washer sys-sys-
tem
em........................................................... 184 Trim
Tr im element (care)
(care)................................... 189
Touc
ouchh Control
Control Trip
Tr ip
On-board computer............................. 165 Display total distance.......................... 168
Menu (on-board computer)................. 168
Tow
To w star
starting
ting.............................................. 204
Trip
Tr ip comput
computer er
Tow-awa
Tow -awayy alarm
Resetting............................................ 169
Function............................................... 64
Showing.............................................. 168
Switching on/o ................................... 64
Trip
Tr ip distance
distance
Towing
To wing away
Resetting............................................ 169
Raised front or rear axle...................... 202
Showing.............................................. 168
Towing
To wing eye
Trip
Tr ip odometer
odometer
Installing/removing............................. 203
see Trip distance
Storage location.................................. 203
Tur
urnn signal light
Towing
To wing eye
eye (stor
(storagagee location)
Additional turn signal light (all-wheel
see Vehicle tool kit
drive vehicles)....................................... 90
Towing
To wing methods
methods........................................ 200
Twin co-driv
co-driver's
er's seat...................................
seat 72
Traction
Tr action grade
grade........................................... 219
Two-wa
Tw o-wayy radio
radio telephone
telephone
Trailer
Tr ailer hitch see Mobile phone
Care................................................... 188
Two-wa
Tw o-wayy radios
radios
General notes..................................... 248
Frequencies........................................ 236
Information......................................... 161
Installation notes................................ 236
Information about trailer operation...... 158
Transmission output (maximum).......... 236
Permissible trailer loads and trailer
drawbar noseweights.......................... 162
U
Power supply...................................... 163
Socket................................................ 160 Unloc
nlocking
king setting
setting........................................ 48
Trailer
Tr ailer loads..............................................
loads 248 Unloc
nlocking/loc
king/locking
king
Trailer
Tr ailer operation
operation Switching automatic locking feature
Active Lane Keeping Assist.................. 156 on/o .................................................. 50
Coupling/Decoupling the trailer.......... 160 Unlocking and opening front doors
Gross axle weight rating...................... 237 from inside........................................... 49
Information......................................... 161 USB socke
sockett in the
the rear
rear passenger
passenger com-
Lane Keeping Assist............................ 155 partment
par tment..................................................... 81
Notes................................................. 158 Using kickdo
kickdown
wn......................................... 121
300 Index
V Vehicle level
level
Lowering............................................. 124
Vehicle Raising................................................ 124
Correct use........................................... 27
Data acquisition.................................... 28 Vehicle maintenance
maintenance
Diagnostics connection......................... 25 see ASSYST PLUS
Equipment............................................ 22 Vehicle operation
operation
Limited Warranty................................... 28 Outside the USA or Canada................... 22
Locking (automatic).............................. 50 Vehicle tool
tool kit..................................
kit 203, 205
Locking/unlocking (emergency key)...... 51
Lowering............................................. 230 Vehicle tool
tool kit stow
stowag agee compar
compartment tment....... 205
Maintenance......................................... 23 VIN
Medical aids......................................... 27 Identi cation plate.............................. 237
Notifying problems................................ 27 Reading out........................................ 237
Parking (start/stop button)................. 134 Seat................................................... 237
Parking for an extended period............ 138 Windshield.......................................... 237
QR code rescue card............................ 28
Quali ed specialist workshop................ 26 W
Raising................................................ 227 War
arning
ning and indicator
indicator lamps
lamps
Registration.......................................... 26 Overview............................................ 274
Starting (in emergency operation
mode)................................................. 106 War
arning
ning lamp............................................
lamp 192
Starting (start/stop button)................ 106 War
arning
ning system
system
Switching on power supply (start/ see ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
stop button)........................................ 105 War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator or lamp
Unlocking (from inside)......................... 50 ! ABS warning lamp...................... 280
Ventilating (convenience opening)......... 62
! and............ 275, 276, 277, 278, 279
Vehicle components
components which which receive
receive
and/or transmit
transmit radio
radio waves
waves J Brake system warning lamp
Declaration of conformity...................... 25 (yellow)............................................... 277
Vehicle data J Brake warning lamp (red)
Vehicle height..................................... 247 (Canada)............................................. 278
Vehicle length..................................... 247 $ Brake warning lamp (red)
Vehicle width...................................... 247
Wheelbase.......................................... 247 (USA).......................................... 278, 279
Vehicle data
data memory ? Coolant warning lamp................ 282
Service providers.................................. 30 · Distance warning lamp............... 281
Vehicle data
data stor
storage
age ! Electric parking brake applied
Electronic control units......................... 28 red indicator lamp (Canada) does
Event data recorders............................. 31 not light up......................................... 275
Onboard Logic Unit............................... 30
F Electric parking brake applied
Vehicle dimensions...................................
dimensions 247
red indicator lamp (USA) does not
Vehicle identi cation number
see VIN light up............................................... 275
Vehicle identi cation plate ! Electric parking brake mal-
EC general operating permit number... 237 functioning yellow indicator lamp
Gross axle weight rating...................... 237 lights up...................................... 275, 276
Maximum permissible gross vehicle # Electrical malfunction warning
weight................................................ 237
Paint code.......................................... 237 lamp................................................... 282
VIN..................................................... 237 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp... 283
Vehicle key å ESP® OFF warning lamp............. 280
see Key
Index 301
÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes........ 280 Checking the tire pressure (tire
pressure monitoring system)............... 215
÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up...... 279 De nitions.......................................... 222
6 Fuel reserve warning lamp......... 282 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN).. 220
Ð Power steering system warn- Flat tire............................................... 193
ing lamp............................................. 281 Installing............................................. 229
Load-bearing capacity......................... 221
! Red electric parking brake Maximum tire load.............................. 220
applied indicator lamp (Canada) as Maximum tire pressure....................... 221
hes..................................................... 276 Noise.................................................. 208
Notes on installing.............................. 223
! Red electric parking brake Overview of tire labeling...................... 219
applied indicator lamp (Canada) Removing............................................ 229
lights up...................................... 276, 277 Replacing.................................... 223, 226
F Red electric parking brake Restarting the tire pressure monitor.... 216
Selecting............................................ 223
applied indicator lamp (USA) ashes... 276 Size designation.................................. 221
F Red electric parking brake Snow chains....................................... 209
applied indicator lamp (USA) lights Speed rating....................................... 221
up............................................... 276, 277 Storing................................................ 226
Temperature grade.............................. 219
! Red parking brake applied Tire and Loading Information placard.. 216
indicator lamp (Canada) lights up........ 277 Tire pressure (notes)........................... 210
F Red parking brake applied Tire pressure monitoring system
(function)............................................ 214
indicator lamp (USA) lights up............. 277 Tire pressure table...................... 211, 214
6 Restraint system warning lamp... 279 Tire quality grades............................... 219
7 Seat belt warning lamp ashes... 281 Traction grade..................................... 219
7 Seat belt warning lamp lights Tread wear grade................................ 219
Unusual driving characteristics............ 208
up....................................................... 281 Wheel size categories......................... 225
! The electric parking brake Windo
indoww curtain
curtain airbag.................................
airbag 37
malfunctioning yellow indicator Windo
indoww li er
lamp does not light up......................... 277 see Side windows
h Tire pressure monitoring sys- Windows
tem warning lamp ashes.................... 283 see Side windows
h Tire pressure monitoring sys- Window
indowss (care)
(care)......................................... 188
tem warning lamp lights up................. 283 Windshield
Replacing the wiper blades.................... 94
Warr
arranty
anty..................................................... 28 Replacing the wiper blades (WET
Warr
arranty
anty ter
terms
ms and conditions....................
conditions 22 WIPER SYSTEM).................................... 94
Washer uid Windshield
see Windshield washer uid see Windshield
Washing by
by hand (care)
(care)............................. 187 Windshield washer
washer uid
Wheel rotation
rotation.......................................... 225 Information......................................... 247
Wheel wrench
wrench........................................... 226 Windshield wipers
Wheels Replacing the wiper blades.................... 94
Care................................................... 188 Replacing the wiper blades (WET
Changing............................................ 225 WIPER SYSTEM).................................... 94
Characteristics of the tire.................... 221 Switching on/o ................................... 93
Checking............................................ 208 Wint
inter
er driving
driving (snow
(snow chains)
chains)...................... 209
302 Index
Wint
inter
er tires
tires
Setting a permanent speed limitation.. 145
Wiper blades
Care................................................... 188
Replacing (rear window)........................ 95
Replacing (WET WIPER SYSTEM)............ 94
Replacing (windshield)........................... 94
Wir
ireless
eless central
central locking
locking
Radio operating permit.......................... 24
Work
orkshop
shop
see Quali ed specialist workshop

MY22_MB_OM_NoMMS_w

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MY22_MB_OM_NoMMS_w

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MY22_MB_OM_NoMMS_w

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Your Operator's Manual

Vehicle document walle

© Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla-

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co- Vehicle dealers

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce

Therefore, the description may di er from your

Always keep these documents in the vehicle. If you

Electrical step ............................................ 59

Indexx ....................................................... 284

Wheels and tires tires ...................................... 208

In these Operating Instructions, you will nd the

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or

1 Combination switch H Opens and closes the electric → 53

Sets the working speed (ADR) → 158 S Seat heating → 77

Instrument display (color dis- D # Electrical malfunction → 282

Instrument display (black and e (white) Lane Keeping → 155

N J Brakes (yellow) → 275

Version 1 of the overhead control panel

Version 2 of the overhead control panel

Version 3 of the overhead control panel

Version 4 of the overhead control panel

Overhead control panel for vehicles with bus equipment

Door control panel of vehicles with electrically adjustable seat

Door control panel of vehicles without electrically adjustable seat

5 Hazard warning lights → 84

A Spare wheel (example) → 231

Otherwise, the values of the vehicle's diagnostic Service

One Mercedes-Benz Drive

# If there is damage, consult a quali ed Radio equipment

Supplier number: 16833352

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects

# If the charge level is low, charge the bat-

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an

The connection and use of another device on the

Correct use of the

Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Limited

Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt

Only use seat belts which have been approved for

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of Limitations

# Never modify a child restraint system. Observee when stopping

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat Installing a LATC

and/or the front seat so that the seat does Securing

1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the cen-

# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver Child safety

# Never leave children unattended in the An animal may:

Example: sliding door child safety lock

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due

1 Position of the key holder when the detection

% If you do not open the vehicle within approx-

Do not keep the SmartKey together with electronic Remo

Batteries contain pollutants. It is

# # Use the emergency key to unlock and lock the

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due

# Never leave children unattended in the

Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically # To unlock: